Home

IDEC ONC Series OpenNet Controller User`s Manual

1. Wiring Duct Mounting Direction Mount the OpenNet Controller modules horizontally on a vertical plane as shown above Keep a sufficient spacing around the OpenNet Controller modules to ensure proper ventilation When the ambient temperature is 40 C or below the Open Net Controller modules can also be mounted upright on a horizontal plane as shown at left below EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE ED ED Innnnpnun Allowable Mounting Direction Incorrect Incorrect at 40 or below Mounting Mounting Direction Direction 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Input Wiring Terminal name NC means No Connection Do not connect input or any other wiring to NC terminals e Separate the input wiring from the output line power line and motor line 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING e Use UL1015AWG22 or UL1007AWG18 wires for input wiring DC Source Input 2 wire Sensor AC Input L ILILI ILIL IL T TL IL IL IL TL IT TL IL IET
2. DO D1 D2 930 lt awe D10 930 DO D1 D2 lt D3 TT E eue D11 Data The data movement differs depending on the selected double word operand When a data register timer or counter is selected as a double word operand the upper word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The lower word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand On the contrary when a link register is selected as a double word operand the lower word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The upper word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand Double word Destination Operand Data Register j Data Move to Data Registers Sm Lupe 5419 D 11 1234h Upper Word DO 123456 78h 22136 5678h Double word Destination Operand Link Register Lower Word D1 Data Move to Link Registers Double word MOV D S1 REP P 305419896 2100 Source Data 22136 305419896 5678h 12345678h 4660 1234h 92 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Lower Word L100 Upper Word L101 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the Move Instructions Repeat Source Operand When the S1 source is
3. dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Output Module Digital output modules are available in 16 point relay output modules 16 and 32 point transistor sink output modules and 16 point transistor protect source output modules Five different connector terminal styles are available Output Module Type Numbers Module 16 point 16 point Transistor 16 point Transistor 32 point Transistor Relay Output Sink Output Protect Source Output Sink Output Screw Terminal FC3AR161 FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 FC3AR162 Nylon Connector FC3A T16K3 FC3AT32K4 Fujitsu Connector FC3A T32K5 Parts Description 6 Expansion Connector SS 5l aM EE PNE lol 8 RE Ta SI pi N E 3 ER INE E p r E 10 0 EJ 0 re E rr E rr Q IS 1 Module ID 1 EO S i rr 2 Status LED This figure illustrates a screw terminal type output module 1 Module ID 2 Status LED 3 Terminal Block Cover 4 Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label 6 Expansion Connector Indicates the output module ID Ry OUT Relay output 16 points 3 Terminal Block Cover 4
4. s s 25 e AC Adapter RS485 abl nu H zem ap D sub 9 pin Computer Link Cable 6 FC2A KC6C 2m 6 56 ft long Computer Link 1 N Communication RS232C RS485 Converter aa Istunit 2 01 E E EE D sub 9 pin ES Female Connector RS232C Cable BE HD9Z C52 1 5 4 92 ft long BB 2nd Unit Twist pair Shielded Cable B 32nd Unit 85485 B ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Data Link System One OpenNet Controller at the master station can communicate with 31 slave stations through the RS485 line to exchange data and perform distributed control effectively The RS485 terminals are connected with each other using a 2 core twisted pair cable For details about the data link communication see page 21 1 Slave Station 2 HG Series Operator Interface Master Station Slave Station 1 EE ss n EE EE e ome EE B pa b c TEES 8 F 8 HE 8 Communication Selector DIP Switch Basic
5. Ol les Communication Selector DIP Switch Ez 28 af Set DIP switch 2 to ON to select user com e Eme 5 munication mode for RS232C port 1 o ele Ze o 8 E ae Ae User Communication Cable 1C Barcode Reader e FC2AKP1C 2 5 To RS232C Port 1 2 4m 7 87 ft long To RS232C Port ill EE Attach a proper connector to the open end of the cable referring to the cable connector pinouts shown below Mini DIN Connector Pinouts D sub 25 pin Connector Pinouts Description Pin Description Shield FG Frame Ground RTS Request to Send Black TXD1 Transmit Data DTR Data Terminal Ready Yellow RXD1 Receive Data TXD Transmit Data Blue GND Ground RXD Receive Data Green DSR Data Set Ready Brown SG Signal Ground Gray SG Signal Ground Red NC No Connection White Caution Do not connect any wiring to the NC no connection pins otherwise the OpenNet Controller and the barcode reader may not work correctly and may be damaged Description of Operation A barcode reader is used to scan barcodes of 8 numerical digits The scanned data is sent to the OpenNet Controller through the RS232C port 1 and stored to data registers The upper 8 digits of the data are stored to data register D20 and the lower 8 digits are stored to data register D21
6. Data Type Double Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD D SIR 52 DIR REP D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 t D20 D21 D30 D31 D12 D13 D22 D23 032 033 014 015 D24 D25 D34 D35 Note Special internal relay M8003 carry borrow is turned on when a carry or borrow occurs in the last repeat operation When a user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operation for other instructions is continued For the advanced instruction which has caused a user program execution error results are not set to any destination 11 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the DIV Instruction Since the DIV division instruction uses two destination operands the quotient and remainder are stored as described below Source operands S1 and S2 and destination operand D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 quotient and D 1 remainder When repeat is design
7. Source Operand Destination Operand Data Register Timer Counter Data Register Timer Counter Upper Word D10 DI 13340 Upper Word D20 Lower Word D11 22130 Double word Data Goran Lower Word D21 305419896 Link Register 12345678h Link Register Lower Word L100 22738 22136 Lower Word L200 Upper Word L101 ERU trm Upper Word L201 Discontinuity of Operand Areas Each operand area is discrete and does not continue for example from input to output or from output to internal relay In addition special internal relays M8000 through M8237 are in a separate area from internal relays MO through M2557 Special data registers D8000 through D8999 are in a separate area from data registers DO through D7999 Slave link regis ters L100 through L727 are in a separate area from master link registers L1000 through L1317 The internal relay ends at M2557 Since the MOV move instruction MOVW Sl 1 REP i 8125 M2550 DO reads 16 internal relays the last internal relay exceeds the valid range When this program is downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU mod ule a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit DIVW Sl S2 Dl REP This program results in a user program syntax error The desti 10 D100 D200 D7999 nation of the DIV division instruction requires two data regis ters D7999 and D8000 Since D8000 is a special d
8. 103 102 10 10 Upper Digit Lower Digit 16 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS DGRD Digital Read W H When input is on data designated by operands I and Q is set to a data register or link register designated by destination DGRD Q D1 BCD4 KKK KK KKK K K operand D1 First output number This instruction can be used to change preset values for timer First input number and counter instructions using digital switches The data that Quantity of digits can be read using this instruction is 0 through 65535 5 dig 1 to 5 decimal its or FFFFh 1 to 4 hex Note The DGRD instruction can be used on DC input and tran BCD or BIN sistor output modules only Valid Operands Operand Function QM R C D L Constant Repeat First input number to read X Q First output number for digit selection D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 The DGRD instruction can read 65535 5 digits at the maximum When the read value exceeds 65535 with the quantity of digits set to 5 a user program execution error will result turning on specia
9. f 60600600006 o0 HO OOOO OOOOOHo 11291 g B S J SS nunnnnunnuxa INTERBUS pooooooo8s Node N N lt 31 Total Cable Length 400m x 32 12 8 km 7 95 miles maximum i5 hil ecco 8 THO OOOO OO000 o o Remote 1 Slave Stations IDEC s SX5S Communication 1 Terminals for INTERBUS Other vendor s INTERBUS slave modules remote bus sta tions are also applicable 64 input and 64 output points per slave station at the maximum For wiring INTERBUS cable see page 24 15 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Specifications The total I O points per node is 128 points maximum A node is allocated 4 link registers each for inputs 16 x 4 points and outputs 16 x 4 points Maximum Points per Node 128 points Maximum Quantity of Nodes 32 nodes The maximum quantity of nodes includes bus stations without I Os
10. M8003 Data Type Double Word SFTL D S1 bits 1 D10 1 Bits to shift 1 Before shift 010 011 2 863 311 530 Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and D11 is shifted to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the LSB MSB 10 11 LSB 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 oj 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 o 1 0 1 o 1 o 3 o 1 0 0 M8003 Shift to the left After shift D10 D11 1 431 655 764 CY MSB 10 11 LSB 1 1 1 1 0 10 1 1 0 1 1 0 10 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 M8003 13 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL idee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS SFTR Shift Right SFIR Rum WE ee REE When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand S1 is shifted to the right by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status shifted
11. 6 RS232C Port 1 Communication Selector DIP Switch 5 Memory Card Eject Button 9 Expansion Connector 4 Memory Card Connector 25 Opening the Covers Functions of each part are described on the following pages dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 1 Status LED POWER Turns on when power is supplied to the CPU RUN Turns on when the CPU is running ERROR Turns on or flashes when an error occurs HSC OUT Turns on when the high speed counter comparison output is on 2 Communication Enable Button Enables the communication mode selected with the communication selector DIP switch When the communication selec tor DIP switch setting is changed while the CPU is powered up press this button to enable the new communication mode for the RS485 and RS232C ports 3 Communication Selector DIP Switch Selects the communication mode for the RS485 and RS232C ports and also selects the device number for the CPU in the computer link or data link communication network DIP Switch No Function Setting 1 RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode OFF Maintenance mode 2 RS232C port 1 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 commun
12. H NI oui BY GW NM m e CN2 Terminal No Name m WO CO MI GD U1 NM m e Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable For wiring precautions see page 3 6 CN1 Terminal No Name m Om eA mn e CN2 Terminal No Name m 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 m e dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T32K4 32 point Transistor Sink Output Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connector H18 SHF AA J S T Mfg SHF 001T 0 8BS J S T Mfg CN1 CN2 CNL Terminal No Name Terminal No Name n A 18 E 17 E tH 16 2n LB 15 e 14 70 E ms 13 R Bo 12 wo Mz 11 CN2 vo o m nononoananonononounno S o N A UI HD SI ojo N Ww Ae UO om S Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally
13. Slave Station 2 HG2A Series ceca rg dew Operator Interface Shielded twisted pair cable 200 meters 656 feet maximum Core wire diameter 0 9 mm 0 035 minimum Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch The communication selector DIP switch is used to select the communication protocol for the RS485 and RS232C ports and also to select the device number for the CPU module used in a data link or computer link communication system When using the OpenNet Controllers in a data link system set communication selector DIP switches 1 and 4 through 8 Selecting Data Link Communication Mode To select the data link communication mode set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON at master and slave stations RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode Selecting Master and Slave Station Numbers Set communication selector DIP switches 4 through 8 to assign master station 0 and slave station numbers 1 through 31 The slave station numbers do not have to be consecutive DIP Switch No OFF Maintenance mode Master Slave Station Number 1 2 4 rem ESTE 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
14. MSB D20 LSB CY Before rotation 020 213 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 gt 0 M8003 MSB D20 LSB CY After first rotation D20 26 0 0 P m Y LA M8003 5 D20 LSB After second rotation 020 232771 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word p Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D20 and H SOTU 525 i D21 is rotated to the right by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the LSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the MSB Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation D20 D21 851 981 MSB 020 021 LSB 0 101010 1010 1010 1010 0 0 1121011110 1010 10 10 0 1010 1010 1010 1111011 10 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation D20 D21 425 990 MSB D20 D21 LSB oJojojo o o o o o o o o oj1 1 o 1 o ojo o o o o o o o o o 1 1 0 1 M8003 13 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email
15. Symbol Name Function Words AND And Series connection of NO contact 2 AND LOD And Load Series connection of circuit blocks 1 ANDN And Not Series connection of NC contact 2 BPP Bit Pop result of bit logical operation which was saved 1 5 Bit Push Saves the result of bit logical operation temporarily 1 BRD Bit Read a result of bit logical operation which was saved tem 1 Counter Comparison Equal to comparison of counter current value 3 gt Counter Comparison gt Greater than or equal to comparison of counter current value 3 CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter Dual pulse reversible counter 0 to 65535 3 CNT Adding Counter Adding counter 0 to 65535 3 CUD Up Down Selection Reversible Up down selection reversible counter 0 to 65535 3 Counter DC Data Register Comparison Equal to comparison of data register value 3 DC2 Data Register Comparison 2 Greater than or equal to comparison of data register value 3 END End Ends a program 1 JEND Jump End Ends a jump instruction 1 JMP Jump Jumps a designated program area 1 LOD Load Stores intermediate results and reads contact status 2 LODN Load Not Stores intermediate results and reads inverted contact status 2 MCR Master Control Reset Ends a master control 1 MCS Master Control Set Starts a master control 1 OR Or Parallel connection of NO contacts 2 OR LOD Or Load Parallel connection of circuit blocks 1 ORN Or Not Parallel connection
16. When any error occurs during the OpenNet Controller operation the error codes and messages can be read out using WindLDR on a computer Monitoring WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor The monitor mode is enabled 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt PLC Status The PLC Status dialog box appears The general error code stored in special data register D8005 is displayed in the error code box OpenNet PLC Status x Run Stop Status Running Scan Time msec Scan Time Clear Details Button Error Status j Clear Details gt gt Calendar TIM CNT Change Status 4 0001 02 05 21 Tue Thng 130516 Unchanged PLC Type System Program Version Device Number Reset COMx 1 3 FC3A CP2K 200 255 System Program Version Reset PLE Protect Status Change gt gt Unprotected OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Error Code Box D8005 general error code value in hexadecimal Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 Under the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box press the Details button The Error Status screen appears OpenNet PLC Error Status General Error Codes Link Communication Error Clearing Error Codes from WindLDR
17. Decima 17 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com RS232C Line Control Signals While the OpenNet Controller is in the user communication mode special data registers can be used to enable or disable DSR and RTS control signal options for the RS232C port 1 and port 2 Special Data Registers for RS232C Line Control Signals 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS To use the control signals on the RS232C port 1 or port 2 in the user communication mode enter 0 to D8200 RS232C port 1 communication mode selection or to D8300 RS232C port 2 communication mode selection respectively Special data registers D8204 through D8207 and D8304 through D8307 are allocated for RS232C line control signals RS232C Port DR No Data Register Function DR Value Updated R W D8204 Control signal status Every scan R Bart D8205 DSR input control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8206 DTR output control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8207 RTS output control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8304 Control signal status Every scan R Bart D8305 DSR input control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8306 DTR output control signal option When sending receiving data R W D8307 RTS output control signal option When sendin
18. T sss 00000000 B IWeRBUS nunmuununuris 6660060606006 6000000000716 555 NERUS 8 000000000 0 SX5S SBN16S 16 inputs Node 1 SX5S SBT16K 16 outputs Nodes are numbered 0 1 2 and so forth starting with the node nearest to the remote I O master module In this example the 16 point input module is allocated node 0 and the 16 point output module is allocated node 1 Consequently I O data of each slave station is stored in link registers shown below Node Input Operand Output Operand Node 0 L1000 L1003 L1004 L1007 Node 1 L101011013 L101411017 Node 2 11020 41023 1102441027 Node 3 L1030 L1033 L1034 L1037 MOWW S1 L1000 D1 90 D1 11014 8125 51 10 MOV W M8125 REP REP L1000 Input data of the 16 point input module at node 0 L1014 Output data of the 16 point output module at node
19. GOO0000000000000000000 Mini DIN Connector Pinouts Shield N aooollooooocooooooooooo Description Communication Selector DIP Switch Set DIP switch 3 to ON to select user com munication mode for RS232C port 2 To RS232C Port Printer SIN 27 To RS232C Port 2 User Communication Cable 1C FC2AKP1C 2 4m 7 87 ft long Cable Connection and Pinouts NC No Connection NC No Connection Transmit Data NC No Connection Data Set Ready SG Signal Ground SG Signal Ground NC No Connection E Attach a proper connector to the open end of the cable referring to the cable connector pinouts shown below D sub 9 pin Connector Pinouts Pin Description mm No Connection No Connection Receive Data No Connection Ground No Connection No Connection Busy Signal WO CO OT A WU No Connection The name of BUSY terminal differs depending on printers such as DTR The function of this terminal is to send a signal to remote equipment whether the printer is ready to print data or not Since the operation of this signal may differ depend ing on printers confirm the operation before connecting the cable UN Caution Do not connect any wiring to the NC no connection pins otherwise
20. 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTLC instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types s ea When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTLC Data Type Word MOWW Si Dl 8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 40966 D10 REP When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 40966 to data register D10 ROTLC W S1 bits 10 D10 1 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The s
21. IDEC SX5L Communication 1 Terminal LoNWoRks Interface Module FC3A SX5LS1 Other LonWorks Compliant Devices dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWoRks Interface Module Parts Description Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 2 FG Terminal 3 Service Request Button 4 Network Interface Connector 5 Status LED Module Name Type No 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 FG Terminal 3 Service Request Button 4 Network Interface Connector LoNWoRks Interface Module FC3A SX5LS1 FC3A SXSLSI indicates the LONWORKS interface module ID Frame ground terminal Pushbutton used for network management For connecting the LONWORKS communication cable Indicates operating status Indicator Status Description OFF Module power OFF POW POWER Green ON Module power ON RUN Green ON Normal operation ERR OFF Normal operation COM_ERROR Red ON Communication error OFF Normal operation 1 O ERROR Red ON Access error to the CPU through I bus ON Application program not configured SER SERVICE Yellow Flash Network management not configured OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFA
22. 2 Source 2 Offset for 51 X X A X X X X X 1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X 2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as 52 or D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S2 or D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 or D2 the timer counter current value is read out Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 S2 and the last destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execu tion error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED Unlike the IMOV and IMOVN instructions offset operands S2 and D2 must always be designated Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long X Ll When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points are used When a word operand such as timer counter D data register or L link register is designated as the S2 or D2 1 point is used Example IBMVN IBMVN W S1 52 D1 D2 10 M20 010 910 C5 M20 D10 NOT gt 010 C5 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 and destinatio
23. a Comparison OFF output WKCMP OFF For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or S3 the timer counter current value is read out S1 Day of week comparison data 0 through 127 Specify the days of week to turn on WKCMP ON or to turn off WKCMP OFF the output or internal relay desig nated by D1 Bit Position bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 ON OFF Value 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 Designate the total of the ON OFF values as operand S1 to turn on or off the output or internal relay Example To turn on the output on Mondays through Fridays designate 62 as S1 because 2 4 8 16 32 62 52 Hour minute comparison data Specify the hours and minutes to turn on WKCMP ON or to turn off WKCMP OFF the output or internal relay designated by D1 See the table on the next page dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Hour Minute 00 through 23 00 through 59 Example To turn on the output or internal relay at 8 30 a m using the WKCMP ON instruction designate 830 as S2 To turn off the output or internal relay at 5 05 p m using the WKCMP OFF instruction designate 1705 as S2 53 Week table output
24. DOs sepsu DSH DeviceNet Master Station __Devicenet__ STATUS MODULE NET r3 r3 ADDRESS ERROR I EEEE OOnda amp ooo ooo oop Gals V NoAver A 100 ooo000000 idec IDEC OpenNet Controller CPU Module DeviceNet Slave Module FC3A SX5DS1 I O Module Rockwell Automation SLC Processor with 1747 SDN DeviceNet Scanner DeviceNet Network o0000000000000000000000000 Pow SX5D 9000000 0 mw f sa on DeviceNet ooo00000000000000000000000 ooooooooo0o00o0000000000000 Ooo00oc000000000000000 onoonooonn000000000000 Pow Sx5D OQG0000 0 O 100 DeviceNet ooooo00000000000000 oooo000000000000000 o 0000000000 IDEC SX5D Communication 1 Termina Other DeviceNet Compliant
25. 24 11 Calculation of the INTERBUS Cycle 24 12 Start and Stop of Remote I O Communication 24 12 Function Area Setting for Remote I O Master Station 24 13 Precautions for Wiring INTERBUS Cable 24 15 INTERBUS Error Codes lt 2 uo REG eae ona Awe RAED NEU ee 24 16 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Slave Module Features 0 ee ee 25 1 About 25 1 DeviceNet Network System Setup 252 DeviceNet Slave Module Parts Description 25 3 DeviceNet Slave Module Specifications 254 Wiring DeviceNet Slave Module 25 5 DIP Switeh Settings adn oerte ie siete eee s rele doe rre etnies 25 6 Link Registers for DeviceNet Network Communication 25 7 Function Area Setting for DeviceNet Slave 5 25 8 Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR 25 9 Starting Operation eter a dede dec Re e reb CI E rente 25 9 Transmission TMC a sche ii 28 8 dosh se cg ete theca deer qoe tuae ee BOR ede ultr ts qe 2540 DeviceNet Network
26. Module Name Type No 5 Expansion Connector 6 Rotary Switch D A indicates the analog output module ID 2 channel Analog Output Module LY Vv Turns on when power is on Screw terminal block SSSASSSSSSSSS Ssss 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC34 DA1221 2 9 1 Module ID re rr rr rr rr CE n i 2 Power LED rr rr rr E a rr EA INT 3 Cable Terminal 4 Terminal Label Indicates terminal numbers on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules Selects the output mode from five different signal ranges Rotary Switch Output Signal Range Resolution Output when Position Output value of LSB Stopped 0 0 to 10V DC 2 5 mV OV 1 10V DC 5 mV 10V 2 0 to5VDC 1 25 mV OV 3 5V DC 2 5 mV 5V 4 4 to 20 mA DC 4 pA 4 mA V Voltage Output C O Current Output 1 0 COM OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Output Module Specifications Type No Quantity of Output Channels FC3A DA1221 2 channels Terminal Arrangement See page 2 33 Maximum Error at 25 C 0 6 of full scale Output Error Temperature Coefficient 0 013 C typical Maximum Error over Full Temperature Range
27. YES Le Did you check the format of incoming data Is an end delimiter specified in the RXD instruction NO Did you check the end delimiter of incoming data Is the receive timeout value set correctly using WindLDR NO Did you make sure of source 1 operand of the RXD instruction Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Make sure that the receive format of the RXD instruction matches that of the incoming data Make sure that the end delimiter in the RXD instruction matches that of the incoming data Make sure that the receive timeout value is larger than character inter vals of the incoming data Make sure that the receive data designated as the source 1 oper and 15 correct 27 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 13 27 20 The catch input function cannot receive short pulses Is the input filter time selection set correctly Are the input ON OFF voltage levels correct Make sure of correct input filter selection setting See page 5 6 Make sure of correct input voltage ON voltage 15V DC minimum OFF voltage 5V DC maximum Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL
28. TXD2 2 RXD1 Receive 1 RR I e n RXD2 Receive2 een User Communication Error ASCII Character Code Table RS232C Line Control Signals lle Sample Program User Communication TXD Sample Program User Communication HAPTER 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS e s d AAR da d aca a ACA A e ans LJ ECAL Label Gall 25 s ert Mae Label Return DJNZ Decrement Jump CHAPTER 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS XYESX XY Formatb Set usus eae Cant hte sees ha RAUS P3 Va GVXTY ConVert X to Y a pa b Rec Oa x Rare ERR OR bus CVYXTX Convert Y tO X ia Vade no EH a DER AVRG Average uen doe ro baa Aem RR Od aaa C HAPTER 20 PID INSTRUCTION PID PID CONEO i eee SEG RRR e e E CRESCE ee a Application EXaMple 2 Rede PROC I a aA C HAPTER 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link Specifications Data Link System Data Register Allocation for Transmit Receive
29. DC Sink Input ees 1 2 3 gr 24 L PNP 4 20 Bes 5 iB 6 a _ 8 28 9 HB H 2 wire Sensor C C2 C0 C0 C2 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 amp O O O Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com L IL TL TL IL TL TL IL HL IL ILI TETPTE TE IL TUT aunt wn C C0 C0 C0 C5 C2 C2 C2 C0 C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C5 C OGO OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 BONES ooo C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C E 35 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Output Wiring N Caution Terminal name NC means No Connection Do not connect output or any other wiring to NC terminals If relays or transistors in the OpenNet Controller output modules should fail outputs may remain on or off For output signals which may cause heavy accidents provide a monitor circuit outside the OpenNet Controller Connect a fuse to the output module selecting a fuse appropriate for the load e Use UL1015AWG22 or UL1007AWGI8 wires for output wiring Output Output When driving loads which generate noise such Ter
30. 000Ch When a data register is designated to repeat the received data is divided and converted in the same way as specified and the converted data is stored to consecutive data registers as many as the repeat cycles Example Received data of 6 bytes is divided into 2 digit blocks converted in ASCII to Binary and stored to data registers starting at D20 1 Repeat cycles 2 I 2 1437 4 31h 32h 33h 34h p OY 2 digits 2 digits Ist block 2nd block ASCII to Binary conversion Repeat 1 D20 10012h Repeat 2 D21 0034h 2 Repeat cycles 3 1 2 3 4 5 e 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 2 digits 2 digits 2 digits Ist block 2nd block 3rd block ASCII to Binary conversion D20 0012h Repeat 1 TT gt D21 0034h ETE D22 0056h dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 15 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Designating Constant as Start Delimiter A start delimiter can be programmed at the first byte in the receive format of a RXDI RXD2 instruction the OpenNet Con troller will recognize the beginning of valid communication although a RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter can also be executed When a constant value is designated at th
31. One end of the user communication cable is not provided with a connec tor and it can be terminated with a proper connector to plug in to communicate with the RS232C port See the figure on page 17 2 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS User Communication System Setup Communication Selector DIP Switch Set DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communi cation mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Attach a proper connector to the R5232C Equipment open end referring to the cable To RS232C Port 2 connector pinouts shown below 4 User Communication Cable 1C To RS232C Port To RS232C Port 1 FC2AKP1C 2 4m 7 87 ft long Cable Connector Pinouts Description Request to Send Twisted Data Terminal Ready Yellow Transmit Data Blue Receive Data Green Signal Direction Data Set Ready Brown Signal Ground Gray Signal Ground 6 Red f Twisted No Connection Shield Setting RS232C Port Communication M ode Selection Special Data Registers D8200 and D8300 When using the user communication mode for the RS232C port 1 set 0 to special data register D8200 When using the user com
32. Behind error 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time 1 scan time Timeout Output Error The output RAM status is set to the actual output when the END instruction is processed So an error occurs depending on the timing when the timeout output turns on in a scan cycle The timeout output error shown below does not include output delay caused by the hardware Program Processing Timeout output error is equal to Tte behind error and can Timeout Output RAM be between 0 and one scan time 0 Tte lt 1 scan time ON Actual Output or Tte Time from the timer instruction execution to the END 16 processing 1 scan time Maximum and Minimum of Errors Error Timer Input Error Timer Counting Timeout Qutput Total Error Error Error Advance error 0 Note 0 0 Note 0 Minimum Behind error Tet 0 Tte 0 Maxi Advance error 0 Note Increment 0 Note Increment Tet Tte aximum Behind error 1 scan time Tet 1 scan time Tte 2 scan times Tet Tte Notes Advance error does not occur at the timer input and timeout output Tet Tte 1 scan time Increment is 1 sec TML 100 msec TIM 10 msec TMH or 1 msec TMS The maximum advance error is Increment 1 scan time The maximum behind error is 3 scan times The timer input error and timeout output error do not include the input response time behind error and output response time behind error Power Failure Memory Protection Timer
33. to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the LSB Data Type Word bits to shift 2 1 CY MSB 51 LSB Before shift lt 10 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 lt 0 M8003 Shift to the left MSB 51 LSB After shift 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to shift 1 Before shift 5 51 LSB 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 lt 0 M8003 Shift to the left After shift CY es LSB 1 0 0 1 1 TTRT T HRGTGENWGN o o ijijpjpi o i n i o o 1 i o o M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit shift X X X X bits Quantity of bits to shift 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to shift can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the SFTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types TTA o y When a bit operand such as Q out
34. 13 1113041133 11134411137 Node 29 1129041293 11294411297 Node 14 L114011143 L114411147 Node 30 1130041303 11304 11307 15 1115041153 1115441157 Node 31 1131041313 11314411317 About INTERBUS INTERBUS is a network originally developed for controlling sensors and actuators by Phoenix Contact Germany and the specifications were opened in 1987 Today many major automobile manufacturers in the world use the INTERBUS network The INTERBUS system is a data ring with a central master slave access method It has the structure of a spatially dis tributed shift register Every module forms with its registers a part of this shift register ring through which the data is shifted serially from the host controller board The use of the ring topology in this way offers the possibility of sending and receiving data simultaneously full duplex and leads to better diagnostic possibilities when compared to a bus structure To simplify system installation the ring is implemented within one cable line go and return line within one cable The system therefor appears as a bus system with branching lines tree structure For detailed information about INTERBUS read documents published by the INTERBUS CLUB or access the INTER BUS CLUB home page at www interbusclub com 24 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM
35. Note The value stored in the data register designated by S143 operation mode is checked only when the start input for the PID instruction is turned on Values in all other control registers are refreshed in every scan 202 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 5 5 20 PID INSTRUCTION 1 0 Process Variable after conversion When the linear conversion is enabled 5 1 4 set to 1 the data register designated by 1 0 stores the linear conversion result of the process variable S4 The process variable S1 0 takes a value between the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 and the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 is set to 0 the data register designated by S1 0 stores the same value as the process variable S4 1 1 Output Manipulated Variable While the PID action is in progress the data register designated by 1 1 holds 0 through 100 read from the manipulated variable 32768 through 32767 stored in the data register designated by D1 omitting values less than 0 and greater than 100 The percent value in S1 1 determines the ON duration of the control output S246 in proportion to the control period 814 13 While manual mode is enabled with the auto manual mode control relay S241 set to on S1 1 stores 0 through 100 read from the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18
36. 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 52 0034h Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ASCII to Hex ATOH W 51 52 KKK K k When input is on the ASCII data designated by S1 as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 is converted into 16 bit binary data and stored to the destination designated by operand D1 H DI S1 S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 gt DI Valid values for source data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 ASCII data to convert XX S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X X 14 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h to 39h and 41h to 46h Make sure that the values for each source desig nated by S1 and the quantity of
37. S1 D1 REP DO Dl LCAL S1 5 MOWW S1 D1 D20 D21 Separate the ladder line for each LCAL instruction 10 status may be changed by the subroutine upon return dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Example LCAL and LRET The following example demonstrates a program to call three different portions of program depending on the input When the subroutine is complete program execution returns to the instruction following the LCAL instruction When input 10 is on program execution jumps to label 0 When input I1 is on program execution jumps to label 1 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 2 M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 0 output QO oscillates in 1 sec increments Program execution returns to rung 1 input I1 M8122 is the 100 msec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 1 output Q1 oscillates in 100 msec increments Program execution returns to rung 1 input I2 M8123 is the 10 msec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 2 output Q2 oscillates in 10 msec increments Program execution returns to rung 1 END OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 PROGRAM BRANCHI
38. WKTBL designates Dec 31 to Jan 3 and May 3 to May 5 as special days S6 504 57 505 WKTBL S1 M8125 1231 WKCMP S1 92 53 D1 ON 65 1018 1 00 52 101 53 102 54 55 103 503 51 65 specifies Saturday and Sunday S3 1 adds special days WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 10 18 on every Saturday Sunday and special days The WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 23 03 on the same days D1 90 WKCMP OFF 51 65 S2 53 2303 1 With Skip Days the Week Table 53 2 On the special days programmed in the WKTBL the designated output is not turned on or off while the designated output is turned on and off every week as designated by operand S1 of WKCMP In normal execution when the current day and time coincide with the preset day S1 and time S2 the designated output is turned on or off Execution on the special days has precedence over execution on normal days This example is demonstrates operation aborted on special days The output is turned on from 8 45 a m to 10 32 p m on every Monday through Friday but is not turned on December 31 through January 3 and May 3 through May 5 WKTBL designates Dec 31 to Jan 3 and May 3 to May 5 as special days 51 62 specifies Monday to Friday S3 2 skips special days WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 8 45 on every Monday through Friday except on special days The WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 22 32 on the same day
39. at END Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 14 The calendar clock does not operate correctly 15 the ERROR LED on See Troubleshooting Diagram 3 The ERROR LED is on Read the error data using WindLDR see page 27 1 Is Calendar clock error displayed 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Clear the error code see page 27 2 The clock data is broken Set the calendar clock using WindLDR see page 15 7 Monitor the PLC status using WindLDR Is the calendar clock operating normally YES Call IDEC for assistance END OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2721 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 15 27 22 Remote 1 communication is impossible and the FAIL LED is on Is only the FAIL LED lit on the remote 1 master module YES Are the RDY RU and FAIL LEDs lit on the remote 1 master module NO Are more than 32 remote 1 slave stations connected YES Does the unction Area Setting atch the quantity of connected slave stations Are all remote 1 0 slave stations powered up Are network cables are connected correctly
40. dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Function Area Setting for DeviceNet Slave Station The quantity of transmit receive data for DeviceNet network communication is specified using the Function Area Setting in WindLDR The OpenNet Controller CPU module recognizes all functional modules such as DeviceNet slave LON WORKS interface and analog I O modules automatically at power up and exchanges data with the DeviceNet master sta tion through the link registers allocated to each slave station node Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU module after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Open Bus tab Configure Communication Master Module Check Box Check this box only when the remote 1 master module is used Slave Station Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes When using DeviceNet slave module or LONWORKS interface module specify the data bytes to communi cate through each slave or interface module OpenNet Function rea Setting Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bus Others Quantity of Nodes Connected 1 J Slave Sta
41. 11 End Plate A pair of end plates are supplied with the CPU module Remove the end plate from the CPU module before connecting digital I O and functional modules then attach the end plates on both sides of the assembly For removing the end plates see page 3 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS General Specifications Normal Operating Conditions Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C operating ambient temperature Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C Relative Humidity Level RH1 30 to 95 non condensing Pollution Degree 2 IEC 60664 1 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Altitude Operation 0 to 2 000m 0 to 6 565 feet Transport 0 to 3 000m 0 to 9 840 feet Vibration Resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m sec 1G 10 sweep cycles per axis on each of three mutually perpendicular axes total 80 minutes each IEC1131 Shock Resistance 147 m sec 15G 11 msec duration 3 shocks per axis on three mutually perpen dicular axes IEC1131 Weight approx Power Supply Rated Power Voltage FC3A CP2K CP2S w memory card connector 2909 FC3A CP2KM CP2SM w memory card connector 300g 24V DC Allowable Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC including ripple Dielectric Strength Between powe
42. 25 11 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL V Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com TABLE OF CONTENTS HAPTER 26 C HAPTER 27 APPENDIX vi NDEX LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LonWorks Interface Module Features 26 1 Dundee 264 LonWorks Network Components 262 LonWorks Network System Setup 263 LonWorks Interface Module Parts Description 264 LonWorks Interface Module Specifications 265 Wiring LonWorks Interface Module 26 6 Terminator s 3 ie ER ek xa Rd eo nears E 26 7 Link Registers for LonWorks Network Communication 26 8 Transmission TIME aisi oe Ae OR ety et eee e Eo 26 9 Function Area Setting for LonWorks Node 26 10 Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR 26 11 Starting Operation de reve Gee yy yard a POR E Ye edu deed 26 12 Network Management 26 12 Precautions for Modifying Application Program 26 13 LonWorks Interface Module Internal Structure 26 14 Data Exchange between LonWorks Interface Module and C
43. Add Error Info 0C70hex to 0C73 Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D70hex to 0D73hex LB FAIL Data transmission was aborted In an INTERBUS device whose SUPI is run in the microprocessor Meaning mode the microprocessor failed to initialize the SUPI The controller board tried to switch the bus into the ACTIVE state faster than the microprocessor of Cause the INTERBUS device could initialize the SPUI The INTERBUS device is defective Delay the call of the Activate_Configuration 0711hex service until the microprocessor has initial Remedy ized the SUPI Replace the INTERBUS device Add_Error_Info 0C74hex to 0C77 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D74hex to 0D77hex LB FAIL Data transmission was interrupted Cause An invalid mode has been set on the INTERBUS protocol chip of an INTERBUS device Remedy Set a valid operating mode or replace the device Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2425 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE I O 0C80hex to 0C83 Meaning SYSTEM hex RB FAIL or OD80hex to 0D83hex LB FAIL Multiple errors at the outgoing bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Defect of the bus cable connected to this bus interface of the following INTERBUS device or of a c
44. Cause The connector has not been plugged in The bridge for connector identification RBST or LBST is defective Add Error Info 0C5Chex to OC5F Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD5Chex to OD5Fhex LB FAIL Data transmission is interrupted at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause The connector has not been plugged in The bridge for connector identification RBST or LBST is defective Add Error Info 0C68hex to 0C6B Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD68hex to OD6Bhex LB FAIL The SUPI 3 of the specified INTERBUS device detected an 1 timeout Add Error Info 0C6Chex to OC6F Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0OD6Chex to OD6Fhex LB FAIL The specified INTERBUS device carried out a reset Cause The specified INTERBUS device is insufficiently supplied with power or is defective Check this INTERBUS device Check the supply voltage of this INTERBUS device whether it conforms to the rated value and whether the permissible AC voltage portion is exceeded Refer to the relevant data sheet for the val Remedy ues Check the BK module s power supply unit for an overload condition Refer to the relevant data sheets for the maximum permissible output current of the BK module and for the typical current consumption of the connected local bus devices
45. Data Type Double Word DIV D S1 S2 1 REP 1 D10 D20 D30 10 011 100000 D20 D21 70000 030 031 1 032 033 30000 Quotient Remainder Note Destination uses four word operands in the division operation of double word data type so do not use data register D7997 through D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit operand such as internal relay for destination 64 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2481 or a larger number as destination operand D1 Data Type Long DIV L S1 S2 Dl REP 1 D10 D20 D30 10 011 100000 D20 D21 70000 030 031 1 032 033 30000 Quotient Remainder Note Destination uses four word operands in the division operation of long data type so do not use data register D7997 through D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit operand such as internal relay for destination 64 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2481 ora larger number as destination operand D1 114 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation i
46. OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Cuapter 10 Carter 11 HAPTER 12 C HAPTER 13 HAPTER 14 Cuapter 15 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS CMP Compare Equal CMP lt gt Compare CMP lt Compare Less Than CMP gt Compare Greater Than CMP lt Compare Less Than or Equal To CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal To ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS ADD Addition SUB MUL Multiplication DIV Division RR IR ING Increment 3o RR Isi xu ERR ES DEC Decrement i seas Ske ow ed umi ROOT ROOE xo REX e aaa ARES SUM Sum Six PE RP CEGue 3 Rp ubi BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS ANDW AND Word ORW OR Word XORW Exclusive OR Word NEG BIT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Shift Eeft eC OR SETRA Shift Right s rto eet ne an ROTL Rotate Left Rotate Right ROTLC Rotate Left wit
47. Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable For wiring precautions see page 3 6 CN1 CN2 Load D 18 18 t D 17 17 t D 16 16 t D 15 15 t D 14 14 t D 13 13 t D 12 12 t D 11 11 L 10 10 t D 9 9 t D 8 8 t D 7 7 t D 6 6 t D 5 5 D 4 4 Fuse D 2 3 2 2 t 1 1 2 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T32K5 32 point Transistor Sink Output Module Fujitsu Connector Type Terminal No Name Terminal No Name Applicable Connector FCN 367J040 AU Fujitsu WWABNNNNNNNNEP ee RONSSSUSRROSSSUSGEGH SS ooo Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally Terminal numbers are the front view of the male connector on the output module For wiring precautions see page 3 6 B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 A18 B17 A17 B16 A16 B15 15 B14 A14 B13 A13 B12 A12 11 11 10 10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 A4
48. Use a power supply of the rated value Use of a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard Use wires of a proper size to meet voltage and current requirements Tighten terminal screws to a proper tightening torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the power line outside the OpenNet Controller This is required when equipment con taining the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the output circuit This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Use an EU approved circuit breaker This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the OpenNet Controller or when operating the OpenNet Controller to force outputs on or off Incorrect operation on the OpenNet Controller may cause machine damage or accidents f relays or transistors in the OpenNet Controller output modules should fail outputs may remain on or off For output sig nals which may cause heavy accidents provide a monitor circuit outside the OpenNet Controller Do not connect to the ground directly from the OpenNet Controller Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing OpenNet Controller using an 4 or larger screw This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe Do not disassemble repair or modify the OpenNet Controller modules
49. BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D20 D21 D22 D23 D20 D21 D22 D20 D21 D20 ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 53 0035h Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS ATOB ASCII to BCD ATOB W 51 52 KKK k k When input is on the ASCII data designated by S1 as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 is converted into BCD and con verted into 16 bit binary data The result is stored to the destination designated by operand D1 H DI S1 S1 1 S1 2 S1 3 S1 4 DI Valid values for source data to convert are 30h through 39h The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 ASCII data to convert X X S2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X x 1 5 D1 Destination 1 Destination to s
50. DTR Data Terminal Ready Receive Data TXD Transmit Data Request to Send RXD Receive Data DSR Data Set Ready SG SG Signal Ground 1a MX SG Signal Ground Signal Ground n Dod Ner i Data Carrier Detect NC No Connection 3 E M DTR Data Terminal Ready N Caution Do not connect the NC no connection pin to any line otherwise the OpenNet Controller and modem may be damaged Modem cables for Apple Macintosh computers cannot be used for the OpenNet Controller OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 234 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Applicable Modems Any Hayes compatible modem can be used Modems with a communications rate of 9600 bps or more between modems are recommended Use modems of the same make and model at both ends of the communication line Internal Relays for Modem Mode When the modem mode is enabled internal relays M8050 through M8107 are allocated to special functions M8050 M8056 RS232C port 1 and M8080 M8086 RS232C port 2 are used to send an AT command or disconnect the tele phone line M8060 M8066 and M8070 M8076 RS232C port 1 and M8090 M8096 and M8100 M8106 RS232C port 2 turn on to indicate the results of the command M8057 M8067 and M8077 RS232C port 1 and M8087 M8097 and M8107 RS232C port 2 are used to indicate the status of the RS232C port comp
51. 10 10 When input I5 is on the 4 digit value from BCD digital switches is read to data register D10 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS CDISP Character Display When input is on data designated by source operand 51 is cer set to outputs designated by operand D1 LAT DAT L KK KKK One CDISP instruction can send data to 16 character display Data phase units at the maximum Low or High The CDISP instruction can be used up to 8 times in a user Latch phase program Low or High Note The CDISP instruction can be used on transistor output modules only Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 51 Source 1 Data to display X X X X 1 16 D1 Destination 1 First output number to display data X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Note The CDISP instruction can be used up to 8 times in a user program When transferring a user program containing more than 8 CDISP instructions to the CPU a user program syntax error occurs turning on the ERROR LED The user program can not be executed S1 Data to Display Operand
52. 15 if dat amp BCTL 16 pGA unsigned char GA FCDR RX E pGA nv i8 pGA unsigned char GA_BCTL 19 pGA amp BCTL REQ 20 break 21 22 23w F OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Acknowledge input network variable update Preparation for data write Preparation for data write complete Write input NV data to data register C000h End data write 26 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Reading Transmit Data from Data Registers in the LonWorks Interface Module The following diagram is a typical example of reading transmit data from the data registers in the LONWORKS interface module Preparation for data read Is preparation for data read complete YES Read data End data read Application Program Example for Data Read The following program is an example to substitute transmit data of data register COO8h for an 8 bit output network vari able nv 08 When you modify or create an application program make sure that the application program includes the fol lowing codes in italics 1 Output Network Variables 2 network output unsigned char nv 08 3 define 4 define GA BCTL OxCO1A Dis define GA FCDR TX 0 008 6 define BCTL_NWR_REQ 0 04 7 define HIGH 1 8 Define IO 4 RUN 9
53. 32h 3 33h 1 Constant Character Data Type Selection x Constant x Character 123 Constant Hexadecimal dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 Constant Hexadecimal rss E Type Hexadecimal Constant Character y OK 313233 Designating Data Register as 51 When a data register is designated as source operand S1 conversion type and transmit digits must also be designated The data stored in the designated data register is converted and a designated quantity of digits of the resultant data is transmit ted Conversion types are available in Binary to ASCII BCD to ASCIL and no conversion When repeat is designated data of data registers as many as the repeat cycles are transmitted starting with the designated data register Repeat cycles can be up to 99 Conversion Type The transmit data is converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example D10 stores 000Ch 12 1 Binary to ASCII conversion ASCII data o 0 0 C Binary to ASCII conversion When transmitting 4 digits 2 BCD to conversion ASCII data o j o 2 Decimal value 200212 BCD to ASCII conversion When transm
54. D20 0 M10 turned on D11 20 021 20 gt M11 turned on D12 30 4 0D22 100 M12 turned off Data Type Double Word CMP gt D SIR S2R DIR REP 51 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 10 020 D30 M50 3 D20 D21 030 031 M50 D22 D23 gt 032 033 M51 D24 D25 034 035 M52 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 10 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To 51252253 gt D1 on ICMP gt 51 S2 53 D1 When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data designated 51 S2 and S3 are compared When the condition is met desti nation operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constan Repeat 51 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 52 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 3 Source 3 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Comparison output For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated
55. Data Communication between Remote I Master and Slave Stations IDEC s SX5S communication I O terminals for INTERBUS can be used as slave stations in the remote I O communica tion system When the SX5S is used with the remote I O master module the input and output data at the slave station are allocated to link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module as described below SX5S Communication 1 Terminals for INTERBUS Type No ID Code Station Type Data Length SX5S SBN16S SX5S SBN16K 02h Remote Bus Station with Digital Inputs 1 word 16 inputs SX5S SBRO08 01h Remote Bus Station with Digital Outputs 1 word 8 outputs SX5S SBT16K SX5S SBT16P 01h Remote Bus Station with Digital Outputs 1 word 16 outputs SX5S SBM 16K SX5S SBM 16P 03h Remote Bus Station with Digital 1 Os 1 byte 8 in 8 out The following examples assume that the 5 X5S is connected at node 0 Communication of 1 word Input Data SX5S SBN16S or SX5S SBN16K Bit 15 Byte 1 Byte 0 Master Station Link Register L1000 acria 721010191000 01001 256 Input No 7 15 Communication of 1 word Output Data SX5S SBR08 Bit 15 Byte 1 Byte 0 Master Station Link Register L1004 6 6 0200 512 Input Low byte has no effect on the Slave Station Output SX5S 8 point output slave station Communication of 1 word Output Data SX5S SBT16K or SX5S SB
56. Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bus Others HSC Operation Mode Rotary Encoder rl Enable HSC Reset Input Enable HSC Gate Input Enable Comparison Output Current Value Automatic Reset rT Enable Key Matrix Input First Input No Inputs First Output No Outputs First IR for Storing Information r Protect User Program Protect Mode Protect Code Code Confirm 3 Click the Enable High speed Counter check box HSC Operation Mode Two operation modes are available Select a required operation mode in the pull down list box Rotary Encoder Counts input pulses from a rotary encoder Dual pulse Reversible Counter Counts input pulses from a dual pulse reversible counter Enable HSC Reset Input Click the check box to enable the high speed counter reset input then a field appears to the right Enter an input or internal relay number to designate a reset input When the high speed counter reset input is turned on the current value in D8045 is reset to the value stored in D8046 high speed counter reset value and the high speed counter counts subsequent input pulses starting at the reset value Enable HSC Gate Input Click the check box to enable the high speed counter gate input Enter an input or internal relay number to designate a gate input When a gate input is designated counting is enabled while the gate input is on and is disabled while the gate input is off
57. Input Number Comm Param Click the check box to the left of Enable Communication Format Selection for the Port 1 or Port 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C Leave the Input Number box blank 3 Click the Comm Param button The Communication Parameter dialog box appears Communication Parameters Baud Rate 1 EK Data Bits 7 Parity Even Default Stop Bits 1 Terminator Code CR 2 Help Ls Receive Timeout 500 ms When 2550 ms is selected in the Receive Timeout box the receive timeout function is disabled 4 Select communication parameters to the same values for the device to communicate with The terminator code selected in this dialog box has no effect in the user communication mode Instead end delimiter codes are used for the user communication The terminator code is used for the maintenance communication dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS TXD1 Transmit 1 S1 DI When input is on data designated by S1 is converted into a specified HF ME Cn format and transmitted through the RS232C port 1 to a remote terminal with an RS232C port TXD2 Transmit 2 1 S1 1 52 When input is on data designated by S1 is converted into a specified H aise acide format and transmitted through the RS232C
58. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 8 In the Receive instruction dialog box type M20 in the destination D1 box and type D200 in the destination D2 box When finished click OK BCC AA2 01 03 Port Port 1 Programming of instruction is complete and the receive data will be stored as follows D20 5678h 222136 D21 90ABh 237035 1724 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Receive Type 51 Di 02 ttoo20 0200 TAD SKIP 48 D0020 A4 02 gt RXD 20 00200 Hn Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com User Communication Error When a user communication error occurs a user communication error code is stored in the data register designated as a transmit status in the TXD instruction or as a receive status in the RXD instruction When multiple errors occur the final error code overwrites all preceding errors and is stored in the status data register 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS The status data register also contains transmit receive status code To extract a user communication error code from the status data register divide the value by 16 The remainder is the user communication error code See pages 17 9 and 17 21 To correct the error correct the user program by referring to the error causes des
59. Special Data Registers for Data Link Communication Error Data Link Communication between Master and Slave Stations Special Internal Relays for Data Link Communication Programming Refresh Modes estende ree s c uoc i oai TRE Operating Procedure for Data Link Data Link with Other Equipment Separate Refresh Mode C HAPTER 22 COMPUTER LINK COMMUNICATION Computer Link System Setup 1 N Computer Link System Monitoring PEC Status iue euge erede Re RR iv OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com C HAPTER 23 C HAPTER 24 C HAPTER 25 TABLE OF CONTENTS MODEM MODE System ved d ate ones ES 23 1 Applicable Modems 23 2 Internal Relays for Modem Mode 23 2 Data Registers for Modem Mode 23 3 Origihate MOd6G ded ROR edebat ee ke ed e RE RS 234 Disconnect ModE auk Y ARA de IER RR ee NEN 23 6 AT General Command Mode 23 6 Answer Mode os tet Peden id Baa EXE E RAE YR 23 7 Modem Mode Status Data Register 2 ee 23 8 Initialization String Co
60. The reset input must be turned off before counting may begin When power is off the counter s cur rent value is held and can also be designated as clear type counters using Function Area Settings see page 5 3 Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR with out transferring the entire program to the CPU see page 7 12 When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective imme diately Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CDP Dual Pulse Reversible Counter The dual pulse reversible counter CDP has up and down pulse inputs so that three inputs are required The circuit for a dual pulse reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input up pulse input down pulse input the CDP instruction and a counter number CO through C255 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Preset Input Program List Rung 1 Instruction When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be programmed immediately above and below the CDP instruction To program other instructions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above or below the CDP instruction in
61. YES Call IDEC for assistance Make sure of correct wiring Turn on the input to the RXD instruction See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 12 Correct the program to make sure that inputs to more than 5 RXD instructions do not go on simultaneously Data is not received correctly in the user communication mode Are communication parameters set correctly using WindLDR NO Is the data register designated as receive status used repeatedly NO Is a start delimiter NO 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Set the communication parameters to match those of the remote termi nal using WindLDR see page 17 3 Correct the program to replace the repeated data register with a differ ent data register specified in the RXD instruction YES Are inputs to more than 5 RXD instructions on simultaneously NO Did you check the start delimiter of incoming data NO Is one input used to start multiple RXD instructions Use one input to start one RXD instruction without a start delim iter Make sure that the start delimiter in the RXD instruction matches that of the incoming data
62. ooo Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally Terminal numbers are the front view of the male connector on the input module For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Terminal No Name Terminal No Name uum Z an 1 B20 A20 B19 A19 B18 18 B17 17 4 B16 16 B15 15 es B14 14 4 B13 A13 B12 A12 B11 11 10 10 B9 A9 B8 A8 B7 A7 B6 A6 B5 A5 B4 M B3 ID B2 A2 B1 Al 2 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL dec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N08A11 8 point AC Input Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Terminal No Name zBL C05 C0 C C0 C2 C2 C2 C C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 CD Wiring Schematic COM terminals are not connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the input module For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Terminal No Name
63. roubleshooting Diagram 6 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Communication between WindLDR on a computer and the OpenNet Controller is not possible Is the computer link cable connected correctly Connect the cable completely Is the POWER LED on See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on communication selector DIP switch set to maintenance Call IDEC for assistance When only program download is not possible Only program download is not possible Set the communication selector DIP switch to maintenance mode See page 4 1 Is Protect User Program enabled Disable the user program protection For details see page 5 18 Call IDEC for assistance dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 13 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 7 Cannot stop or reset operation Note To monitor M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Monitor Enter M8000 in the Direct Monitor Dialog Monitor the start control special internal relay M8000 using WindLDR on a computer Is stop or reset input designated in the WindLDR Function Area Settings NO Is the designated stop or reset input on Turn o
64. 030 031 12 13 D22D23 030 031 14 015 D24D25 030 031 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD W SIR S2 DIR REP D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 D30 35 D11 15 D20 25 p31 40 D12 20 D20 25 032 45 Data Type Double Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD D S1R S2 DIR REP 1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 t D20 D21 D30 D31 D12 D13 D20 D21 032 033 D14 D15 D20 D21 D34 D35 Repeat All Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD W SIR 52 DIR REP 1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 gt D30 35 D11 15 D21 35 031 50 D12 20 D22 45 D32 65
65. 60 61 void init external io void 525 init gate array 63 64 void init_gate_array void 65 int st n 66 unsigned char pGA 67 unsigned char dat 68 69 io check timer DTm 5sec 70 while TRUE T post events T2 pGA unsigned char GA BCTL pGA BCTL NWR REQ dat pGA H5 if dat amp BCTL NWR REQ 76 pGA unsigned char GA FCDR Vs for 0 MAX FCDR DATA LEN 78 pGAt 0x00 80 PGA unsigned char CSR ERR 81 csr error data 0 82 pGA csr error data 83 pGA unsigned char GA FVER 84 pGA FC3ASX5L VERSION 85 pGA unsigned char GA EMID 86 pGA EMID CODE 87 pGA unsigned char GA BCTL 88 pGA BCTL_NENABLE 89 dat pGA 90 if dat amp BCTL_NENABLE 91 pGA amp BCTL NWR REQ 92 break 93 jelse 94 pGA amp BCTL NWR REQ 95x 96 97 The following program turns on the I O LED when initialization fails within 5 seconds and can be modified by the user 98 if timer_expires io_check_timer 99 io out PO IO LED LOW I O LED goes on when timeout 100 break 101 102 103 Note is an exclusive OR of every bit Brief description of functions used for the initialization program init internal io function This function initializes the Neuron Chip internal IO pins init external io function This functi
66. A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long COLI y 5 When bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTR Data Type Word REP S1 1 13 D20 ROTR W 51 bits D20 2 Bits to rotate 22 Before rotation D20 13 After first rotation D20 2 16387 After second rotation D20 2 53248 Data Type Double Word ROTR D S1 bits 11 D20 1 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 13 to data register D20 Each time input I1 is turned on 16 bit data of d
67. Call IDEC for assistance Monitor special data registers D8178 D8179 D8182 and D8183 to view the remote Make sure that the quantity of connected remote 1 slave stations is 32 or less Deselect Configure Communication Mas ter Module on the Open Bus page in the Function Area Settings in WindLDR or change the Quantity of Nodes Connected to match the actual quantity of the nodes then download the user program to the OpenNet Controller Power up all remote I O slave stations Make sure that all cables are connected correctly using INTERBUS cables End Initialize the remote 1 0 network by turning on special internal relay M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize or power down and up the OpenNet Controller CPU module 1 system status error code and error location See page 24 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 16 Remote 1 communication has stopped Bus NG The RDY RUN LED flashes and the FAIL LED is on 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Note When a bus NG occurs the output oper ation of the remote I O slave station depends on the slave station module When the SX5S communication 1 terminal is used for the slave station all outputs are turned off Special internal relay M8036 INTERBUS mas ter bus NG is
68. D8080 D8081 D8082 D8083 D8084 D8085 D8086 D8087 D8088 D8089 Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7 Node 8 Node 9 Description Logical Device No 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Remarks Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment
69. Destination Operand Data Register Before execution After execution SOTU DTDV W S1 D1 ia D10 D20 n D10 3039h r 020 ggg Upper byte 21 Joh Lower byte Destination Operand Link Register Before execution After execution Fu Tow sem iiid Dio L1316 12345 57 1317 30h Upper byte dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS DTCB Data Combine 8 SI S121 gt D1 DTCB iae TEA S1 1 iae me OOK When input is on the lower byte data is read out from 2 consecutive sources starting with operand designated by S1 and combined to make 16 bit data When a data register is selected as source operand the lower byte data from the first source operand is moved to the upper byte of the destination designated by operand D1 and the lower byte data from the next source operand is moved to the lower byte of the destination When a link register is selected as source operand the lower byte data from the first source operand is moved to the lower byte of the destination designated by operand D1 and the lower byte data from the next source operand is moved to the upper byte of the destination Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to combine XX D1 Destination 1 Destinatio
70. Instruction I3 14 Rung2 gt C31 i Ladder Diagram 4 Program List Reset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Prgm Adrs Instruction Prgm Adrs Instruction OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Output Q0 is on when counter C2 current value is 5 Output Q1 is turned on when counter C2 current value reaches 3 and remains on until counter C2 is reset Timing Chart 1 2 500 501502 Pulse Input I2 an ON OFF Output 00 is on when counter C30 current value is 500 Output 00 Timing Chart 1 2 350 351352 Pulse Input 14 bu ON OFF Output Q1 Output Q1 is turned on when counter C31 current value reaches 350 and remains on until counter C31 is reset Timing Chart 100101 150151152 Pulse Input 16 2C20 100 Output Q2 Output Q3 n Output Q3 is on when counter C20 current value is between 100 and 149 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS TC and TC2 Timer Comparison The TCz instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for timer current values This instruction will constantly com pare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the timer value equals the given value the desired out put will be initiated The TC2 instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for timer current values This instruction will constantly compare
71. OFF I O inactive 10 Green ON I O active I O status t Flash Minor fault ON Critical fault dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 253 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Slave Module Specifications General Specifications Communication Interface Power Voltage Range 11 to 25V DC Current Draw Approx 25 mA Isolation Between control circuit and communication terminal Photocoupler isolated Insulation Resistance Between communication terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Dielectric Strength Between communication terminal and FG 1000V AC 1 minute 10 mA maximum Vibration Resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m sec 1G 10 sweep cycles each in 3 axes total 80 minutes IEC1131 Shock Resistance 147 m sec 15G 11 msec 3 shocks each in 3 axes IEC1131 Altitude Operation 0 to 2000m Transportation 0 to 3000m Operating Temperature 0 to 55 C no freezing Operating Humidity 30 to 90 RH no condensation Storage Temperature 25 to 75 C Storage Humidity 30 to 90 RH no condensation Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Mounting Snap on mounting on 35 mm DIN rail Communication Specifications Weight approx 180g Data Rate and Transmission Distance Data Rate M
72. Receive Data D8429 Communication Error D7580 D7581 Transmit Data D7590 D7591 Receive Data D8430 Communication Error D7600 D7601 Transmit Data D7610 D7611 Receive Data KA AAAA Slave Stations D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Slave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Slave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Slave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Slave Stati D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Slave Station 30 D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data Example 2 Transmit Data 10 Words and Receive Data 10 Words Master Station D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data D7010 D7019 Receive Data D8401 Communication Error D7020 D7029 Transmit Data D7030 D7039 Receive Data D8402 Communication Error D7040 D7049 Transmit Data D7050 D7059 Receive Data D8403 Communication Error D7060 D7069 Transmit Data D7070 D7079
73. SX5S SBM16K 8 point source input 24V DC 8 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 4A com SX5S SBM16P Bedae 16 point source input 24V DC SX5D SBN16S npu p 16 point sink input 24V DC SX5D SBN16K Relay Output 8 point relay output 240V AC 24V DC 5A SX5D SBR08 16 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 6A common SX5D SBT16K Transistor Output 16 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 6A com SX5D SBT16P 8 point source input 24V DC DC Input 8 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 4A common situe ETOR Transistor Output g point source input 24V DC 8 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 4A com SODSPNTSh 16 point source input 24 DC SX5L SBN16S npu P 16 point sink input 24V DC SX5L SBN16K Relay Output 8 point relay output 240V AC 24V DC 5 SX5L SBR08 16 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 6A common SX5L SBT16K Transistor Output 16 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 6A com SX5L SBT16P 8 point source input 24V DC DC Input 8 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 4A common Transistor Output poi i p 8 point source input 24V DC SX5L SBM16P 8 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 4A com OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
74. rea Setting Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bus Others Quantity of Nodes Connected the remote I master Quantity of Nodes Connected 1 When using the remote mas module is used ter module specify the quantity Slave Station Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes of nodes from 1 through 32 Slave Station gt Module Transmit Receive Paps tity Perce 1 Transmit Receive Bytes 0 to 8 Data Quantity Bytes 2 default 8 bytes y pis DE pd i This value determines the data dul x D quantity 0 through 8 bytes 64 3 AVE OCA Er SRECI IS 6 bits to communicate with the data bytes to communicate network through each interface or For the example on the next slave module page select 8 transmit bytes and 4 receive bytes for Module 1 3 Select transmit and receive data bytes for module position through 7 where the LONWoRKS interface module is mounted 4 Click the OK button and download the user program to the OpenNet Controller 26 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR The OpenNet interface module such as LONWORKS interface or DeviceNet slave module exchanges data between the open network and the link registers in the C
75. 0 to 65535 16 bits 24V DC 15 6 kQ Counting Range Input Voltage Input Impedance High speed Counter Output Specifications Comparison Output 1 point terminal 5 on the CPU module Output Device Transistor sink or Source output depending on the CPU module type 24V DC 15 500 mA maximum Output Power Voltage Output Current Comparison Output Delay 20 usec maximum Special Internal Relays for High speed Counter No Description ON OFF Operation M8010 Comparison Output Reset Turns off comparison output Continuous R W M8130 Up Down Status Counting up Counting down Continuous Read M8131 Comparison ON Status Comparison ON ON 1 scan Read M8132 Current Value Zeroclear Phase Z input ON ON for 1 scan Read M8133 Current Value Overflow Overflow occurred ON 1 scan Read M8134 Current Value Underflow Underflow occurred ON for 1 scan Read M8135 Comparison Output Status Comparison output ON Comparison output OFF Continuous Read Note Special internal relays M8131 through M8134 go on for only one scan Special Data Registers for High speed Counter No Description Updated Read Write D8045 High speed Counter Current Value Every scan Read only D8046 High speed Counter Reset Value R W D8047 High speed Counter Preset Value R W In the first counting cycle the value stored in D8047 at the s
76. 1 and COM as shown in the mid dle above For wiring schematic and precautions see page 3 8 Notes e Before mounting the analog input module first set the rotary switch to meet the required analog input range After setting the rotary switch power up the CPU and other modules e The COM V 1 terminal of each channel is independent from each other Connect the V and COM terminals of unused channels together Connecting these terminals together will reduce the AD conversion time in the analog input module by approximately 1096 for every unused slot 2330 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Analog Output Module D A Converter The 12 bit analog output module converts digital data of 0 through 4000 to 2 channels of analog signals The analog output module is a functional module and the digital data for conversion must be stored to a link register depending on the analog channel and the mounting slot number of the analog output module in the system setup The output mode can be selected using the rotary switch to meet five different analog signal ranges 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V 5V or 4 to 20 mA Analog Output Module Type Number Parts Description Module ID Power LED Cable Terminal Terminal Label Expansion Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rotary Switch Type ot Protection
77. 1234h 22136 5678h 39321 9999h 39321 9999h Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BTOH BCD to Hex S1 gt DI BTOH n mm S1 D1 n mm When input is on BCD data designated by 51 is converted into 16 or 32 bit binary data and stored to the destination designated by operand D1 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 BCD for the word data type and through 9999 9999 BCD for the double word data type Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 BCD data to convert X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 BCD for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 BCD for the double word data type Make sure that each digit of the source designated by S1 is 0 through 9 If the source data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will resu
78. 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM IL Data transmission is interrupted at a BK module Cause The connector for the outgoing remote bus branch has not been plugged in The bridge LBST in the connector for the outgoing remote bus branch is defective INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device Add_Error_Info OBF2hex BUS FA IL Data transmission is interrupted at a BK module Meaning Cause The connector for the outgoing remote bus branch has not been plugged in The bridge RBST in the connector for the outgoing remote bus branch is defective INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device Add_Error_Info OBF3hex BUS FA IL The data transmission is interrupted at a BK module local bus devices or within an IB ST compact Meaning station Local bus The connector for the outgoing local bus has not been plugged in Cause The bridge RBST or LBST in the connector for the outgoing local bus is defective ST compact station The ST cable has not been plugged in The RBST connection led via the next module of the IB ST compact station is interrupted INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device Add_Error_Info 0BF4hex BUS FA IL Transmission error CRC error in the data forward path at the incoming bus interface IN of the spec Meaning ified INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check t
79. 50 0032h 51 0033h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h ASCII 49 0031h D20 D20 D20 D20 Binary 4660 1234h Binary 291 0123h Binary 18 0012h Binary 1 0001h Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS BTOA BCD to ASCII BTOA W 51 92 KKK k k When input is on the 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is converted into BCD and converted into ASCII data The data is read from the lowest digit as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 The result is stored to the destination starting with the operand designated by D1 H DI SI 5 D1 D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 D1 4 The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X X 2 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X X 1 5 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results XX For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 S2 the timer counter current value is read out The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 Mak
80. 9 1 0 through 127 S2 Hour data 0 through 23 minute data 0 through 59 3 0 through 2 10 WKTBL has S1 through Sn out of range 11 DGRD data exceeds 65535 with BCD5 digits selected 12 CVXTY CVYTX is executed without matching XYFS 13 CVXTY CVYTX has S2 exceeding the value specified in XYFS 14 Label in MP LCAL DJ NZ is not found 15 TXD is executed while the RS232C port 1 or 2 is not set to user communication mode 274 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagrams When one of the following problems is encountered see the trouble shooting diagrams on the following pages Problem cane The POWER LED does not go on Diagram 1 The RUN LED does not go on Diagram 2 The ERROR LED is on Diagram 3 Input module does not operate normally Diagram 4 Output module does not operate normally Diagram 5 Communication between WindLDR on a computer and the OpenNet Controller is not possible Diagram 6 Cannot stop or reset operation Diagram 7 Data link communication is impossible Diagram 8 Data is not transmitted at all in the user communication mode Diagram 9 Data is not transmitted correctly in the user communication mode Diagram 10 Data is not received at all in the user communication mode Diagram 11 Data is not received correctly in the user communica
81. Consequently a continued overloaded status causes the output to turn on and off repeatedly and even tually leads to deterioration of the output module When the cause of the short circuit is removed the output module restores normal operation However once an overload or short circuit occurs the condition tends to continue for a long period of time When the transistor protect source output module is used use of a protection program is recommended to turn off all outputs within 60 seconds as described below Sample Program 1 Turning All Outputs Off when using one transistor protect source output module M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOV stores 0 to data register D8030 M D8030 Special data register D8030 stores protect transistor output error data when an overload or short circuit occurs in the first protect output modules When an overload occurs D8030 stores 1 When the D8030 data is 1 M8002 all outputs off special inter nal relay is turned on to turn off all outputs Sample Program 2 Turning All Outputs Off when using seven transistor protect source output modules MOVW Sl DIR REP 8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 0 D8030 7 stores 0 to seven data registers D8030 through D8036 ORW W S1 S2R DIR REP Special data registers D8030 through D8036 store protect tran 0 D8030 M10 7 dte sistor output error data when an overload or short circuit occurs TML T10
82. D8153 INTERBUS Node 25 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8154 INTERBUS Node 26 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8155 INTERBUS Node 26 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8156 INTERBUS Node 26 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8157 INTERBUS Node 26 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8158 INTERBUS Node 27 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8159 INTERBUS Node 27 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8160 INTERBUS Node 27 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8161 INTERBUS Node 27 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8162 INTERBUS Node 28 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8163 INTERBUS Node 28 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8164 INTERBUS Node 28 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8165 INTERBUS Node 28 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8166 INTERBUS Node 29 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8167 INTERBUS Node 29 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8168 INTERBUS Node 29 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8169 INTERBUS Node 29 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8170 INTERBUS Node 30 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8171 INTERBUS Node 30 Length Code When initialized 24 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL De
83. Disassembling Modules Caution Remove the OpenNet Controller modules from the DIN rail before disassembling the modules Attempt to disassemble modules on a DIN rail may cause damage to the modules 1 If the modules are mounted on a DIN rail first remove the modules from the DIN rail as described below on this page 2 Press the blue unlatch button on top of the module to disengage the latches With the button held depressed pull the modules apart as shown 3 To remove the end plate push in the square button at the top and bottom of end plate from the front and pull the end X plate from the module row as shown Attach the end plate to the CPU module if required S 4111111111114111 72222222228 HE 35333358 858025 EFFE 000000000090000 Mounting on DIN Rail Caution Install the OpenNet Controller modules according to instructions described in this user s manual Improper installation will result in falling failure or malfunction of the OpenNet Controller Mount the OpenNet Controller modules on a 35 mm wide DIN rail Applicable DIN rail IDEC s BAA1000 1000mm 39 4 long 1 Fasten the DIN rail to a panel using screws firmly 2 Pull out the clamp from each OpenNet Controller module and put the groo
84. Dispose of the battery in the OpenNet Controller modules when the battery is dead in accordance with pertaining regula tions When storing or disposing of the battery use a proper container prepared for this purpose This is required when equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is destined for Europe When disposing of the OpenNet Controller do so as an industrial waste dee OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER s MANUAL PREFACE 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com About This Manual This user s manual primarily describes entire functions of the OpenNet Controller CPU modules digital I O modules ana log I O modules Also included are powerful communications of the OpenNet Controller CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION General information about the OpenNet Controller features brief description on special functions and various system setup configurations for communication CHAPTER 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Specifications of CPU digital and analog I O expansion power supply remote I O master OpenNet interface modules CHAPTER 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Methods and precautions for installing and wiring OpenNet Controller modules CHAPTER 4 OPERATION BASICS General information about setting up the basic OpenNet Controller system for programming starting and stopping Open Net Controller operation and simple operating procedures from creating a user program using WindLDR on a PC to moni
85. Mfg CN1 CN2 CNL Terminal No Name Terminal No Name a N 18 18 a 17 17 a iG 16 16 20 a 15 15 14 14 70 a no 13 13 i 12 12 Mz 11 11 CN2 o 10 10 z 5B 9 9 mg 8 8 8 7 7 al B 6 6 3 58 5 5 n 36 F3 370 4 4 a 3 3 2 2 1 1 Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable For wiring precautions see page 3 5 CN1 CN2 L 18 18 7 17 17 16 16 D lt 15 15 14 14 13 13 lt 12 12 11 11 10 10 4 9 9 4 8 8 7 7 4 pl 6 6 4 ba e 5 5 S Il 4 4 4 3 3 po 2 2 tt l 1 1 T T Sink Source Input Input Wiring Wiring dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N32B5 32 point DC Input Module Fujitsu Connector Type Applicable Connector FCN 367J040 AU Fujitsu Terminal No Name Terminal No NOURWNHO V U U UU RO IO RONSASNSRROSSSUSGEGN SS
86. OBE8hex BUS FAIL Meaning A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off When checking the current config uration the diagnostic algorithm detected errors but could not locate the precise error location This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error rate can be very high Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE9hex BUS FAIL Meaning A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off When checking the current config uration the diagnostic algorithm detected errors but could not locate the precise error location This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error rate can be very high Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint c
87. OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Slave Station Number DIP Switch No 7 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 4 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 21 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL idee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Register Allocation for Transmit Receive Data The master station has 20 data registers assigned for data communication with each slave station Each slave station has 20 data registers assigned for data communication with the master station When data is set in data registers at the master sta tion assigned for data link communication the data is sent to the corresponding data registers at a slave station When data is set in data registers at a slave station assigned for dat
88. Quotient Remainder Repeat Two Source Operands Data Type Word When S1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 and D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 DIV W 1R 2R D1 REP Hs SOTU E uu m a 0 D20 030 031 D11 D21 030 D31 D12 T D22 030 D31 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When S1 and 52 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 D1 1 and D1 2 D1 3 51 Repeat 23 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 H ee ein eee tong te D10 D11 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D32 D33 0124013 D22 D23 030 031 032 033 014015 D24 D25 D30 D31 D32 D33 Quotient Remainder dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 1 m m sos D11 020 031 034 012 020 gt 032 D35 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 P dM UN M m D10 D11 D
89. Read Only Functional Module 1 10100 10107 1011010117 1012010127 Functional Module 2 10200 10207 1021010217 1022010227 Functional Module 3 1030040307 1031010317 1032010327 Functional Module 4 1040040407 1041010417 1042010427 Functional Module 5 1050040507 1051010517 1052010527 Functional Module 6 1060040607 1061010617 1062010627 Functional Module 7 1070010707 1071010717 1072010727 Each functional module has eight channels of data areas One channel consists of one link register which can process word data or 16 bits Functional module data is addressed for bit operands in the following formula L0100 01 Bit No 0 through 15 Link Register No 100 through 727 1000 through 1317 Example 1 Load link register L300 bit 10 012 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Example 2 Set link register L304 bit 8 E ton OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS 6 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes programming of the basic instructions available operands and sample programs Basic Instruction List
90. S MANUAL 4 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS 4 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Introduction The OpenNet Controller features special functions such as stop reset inputs run stop selection at memory backup error keep designation for internal relays shift registers counters and data registers These functions are programmed using the Function Area Settings menu Also included in the Function Area Settings are module ID selection and run stop operation upon disparity input filter catch input high speed counter key matrix input and user program read write protection This chapter describes these special functions Constant scan and memory card features are also described in this chapter Although included in the Function Area Settings the data link communication function is detailed on pages 21 1 through 21 12 Caution Since all Function Area Settings relate to the user program the user program must be down loaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Stop Input and Reset Input As described on page 4 2 the OpenNet Controller can be started and stopped using a stop input or reset input which can be designated from the Function Area Settings menu When the designated stop or reset input is turned on the
91. While auto tuning AT is in progress S1 1 stores 0 through 100 read from the AT output manipulated variable S1 22 142 Operating Status The data register designated by S142 stores the operating or error status of the PID instruction Status codes 1X through 6X contain the time elapsed after starting auto tuning or PID action X changes from 0 through 9 in 10 minute increments to represent 0 through 90 minutes The time code remains 9 after 90 minutes has elapsed When the operation mode S1 3 is set to 1 AT PID the time code is reset to O at the transition from AT to PID Status codes 100 and above indicate an error stopping the auto tuning or PID action When these errors occur a user pro gram execution error will result turning on the ERR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error To continue operation enter correct parameters and turn on the start input for the PID instruction Status Code Description Operation 1X AT in progress Xr noriai 2X AT completed 5X PID action in progress 6X PID set point 53 is reached Status code changes from 5X to 6X once the PID set point is PID action is normal reached 100 The operation mode S1 3 is set to a value over 2 101 The linear conversion S1 4 is set to a value over 1 102 When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 to 1 the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 and the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 are set to the same
92. and click OK Next in the Variable Data Register dialog box type D20 in the DR No box and click ASCII to BIN to select ASCII to binary conversion Enter 4 in the Digits box 4 digits and 2 in the REP box 2 repeat cycles When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Type v OK Constant Character C Constant Hexadecimal igi C Skip Variable Data Register x DR No Conversion Type AS Ni ASCII to BCD C None 6 Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click BCC and click OK Next in the BCC dialog box enter 1 in the Cal culation Start Position box click ADD for the Calculation Type click BIN to ASCII for the Conversion Type and click 2 for the Digits When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Type v OK Constant Character C Constant Hexadecimal Cancel C Variable DR seen BCC Lx Calculation Start Position Calculation Type i ADD Conversion Type Digits BIN to ASCII None 7 Once again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click Constant Hexadecimal and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 03 to program the end delimiter ETX 03h When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Type Constant Character Variable DR C Skip Constant x Hexadecimal DER dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 23
93. and the current value is incremented up to the preset value Reversible counters CDP and CUD start counting at the preset value and the current value is incremented or decremented from the preset value When any counter is designated as a source operand of an advanced instruction the current value is read as source data Using Timer or Counter as Destination Operand As described above when a timer or counter is designated as a destination operand of an advanced instruction the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value of the timer or counter Timer and counter preset values can be 0 through 65535 When a timer or counter preset value is designated using a data register the timer or counter cannot be designated as a des tination of an advanced instruction When executing such an advanced instruction a user program execution error will result If a timer or counter is designated as a destination of an advanced instruction and if the timer or counter is not pro grammed then a user program execution error will also result For details of user program execution error see page 27 6 Note When a user program execution error occurs the result is not set to the destination dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Data Types for Advanced Instructions When using move data comparison binary arithmetic Bo
94. dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 8 point AC Input Module Specifications Type No Rated Input Voltage FC3A N08A11 100 to 120V AC Input Voltage Range 85 to 132V AC Rated Input Current 8 3 mA point 100V AC 60 Hz Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement chart on page 2 15 Input Impedance 12 60 Hz Turn ON Time 100V AC 20 msec maximum Turn OFF Time 100V AC 20 msec maximum Between input terminals Not isolated Isolation Internal circuit Photocoupler isolated External Load for 1 Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination M ethod Static Effect of Improper Input Connection If any input exceeding the rated value is applied permanent damage may be caused Cable Length 3m 9 84 ft in compliance with electromagnetic immunity Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Internal Current Draw All inputs ON 30 mA 24V DC All inputs OFF 20 mA 24V DC Weight approx Input Operating Range 220g The input operating range of the Type 1 EN61131 input module is shown below ON Area Input Voltage V AC Transition Area OFF Area Input Internal Circuit 1 6 6583
95. in the first to seventh protect output modules respectively When an overload occurs D8030 through D8036 store 1 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay ORW turns on M10 through M16 when D8030 through D8036 store 1 respectively When any of M10 through M16 turns on 1 sec timer TML starts to timedown When the preset value of 2 seconds is reached M8002 is turned on to turn off all outputs M8002 is the all outputs off special internal relay 220 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 32 point Transistor Sink Output Module Specifications Type No Terminal Arrangement FC3A T32K4 FC3A T32K5 See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 26 and 2 27 Rated Load Voltage 24V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 20 4 to 27 6V DC Rated Load Current 0 1A per output point Maximum Load Current 0 115A per output point at 27 6V DC Voltage Drop ON Voltage 1V maximum voltage between COM and output terminals when output is on Inrush Current 3A maximum Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum Clamping Voltage 39V 41V Inductive Load L R 20 msec 27 6V DC 1 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA maximum 24V DC power voltage at the V terminal Isolation Between output terminal and internal circuit Photocoupler isolated Between output t
96. info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Special Data Registers for INTERBUS Master Information Six data registers are assigned to store the system error and status information Allocation No Description Remarks INTERBUS Master System Error Information Occurred process 0 Normal 1 INTERBUS master DPRAM is Not Ready DPRAM fault etc 2 INTERBUS master is Not Ready master unit fault etc 3 No response from INTERBUS master timeout error D8178 4 System error unexpected reply from INTERBUS master Initialization process or recovering process 5 Entry count error dis parity of quantity of nodes between actual from Bus NG system setup and Function Area Settings value 6 Data size error bus station of invalid size is connected 7 ID code error bus station of invalid type is connected 8 Maximum node quantity over more than 32 nodes are connected INTERBUS Master Status Transition Number 0 Power ON 1 DPRAM and master ready ready for receiving service command 2 Reading and identification of configuration complete D8179 3 I O logical addressing complete 4 Set the bus active 5 Set the bus to run I O data updated ie 6 Bus NG occurred 08180 xxxxp INTERBUS Master Acknowledge Code 0 normal completion Stores execution result of remote I O master command request or error code is stored pis N additional error information of DB180 D8182 h INTERBUS Master E
97. not met D1 is turned off CMP Compare Less Than amp S1 lt S2 DI H Im oe a be When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met 1 is turned off CMP Compare Greater Than amp When input is on 16 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When 51 data is greater than S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met 1 is turned off H CMP gt S1 R S2 R DI R REP S1 gt S2 D1 on CMP lt Compare Less Than or Equal To amp S1 lt 52 DI on H Sa 22 REP When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is less than or equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal amp S1 gt S2 DI on H en a na When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When S1 data is greater than or equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met D1 is turned off dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 10 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
98. see page 21 7 Is M8006 on at the master station Turn off M8006 using WindLDR M 8006 Data link communication prohibit flag M 8007 Data link communication initialize flag Is the communication cable connected to data link termi nals correctly Make sure of correct wiring see page 21 2 Check error codes for the troubled stations See page 21 4 Is the error code 0 at all stations For the master station click the Reset COMx button see page 21 11 or turn on M8007 during operation using WindLDR Reset the error codes at all stations using WindLDR Y Turn power off at the master station and turn power on after a few seconds Are error codes YES Cleared to 0 at all stations Call IDEC for assistance END OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info 2clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 9 Data is not transmitted at all in the user communication mode Is the comm selector DIP switch set to user communi cation NO YES Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Did you press the du NO communication enable button
99. the smallest address is executed and the corresponding completion output is turned on Example 1 When a RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter is executed Incoming Data When D100 is designated as the first data register Tuae Tease M 30h 31h G2h G3h ME Jepen D101 h 1st character D100 4n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format 2 When RXDI RXD2 instructions with start delimiters STX 02h and ENQ 05h are executed Incoming Data STX 1 2 3 02h 31h 32h 33h ENQ A B C 05h 41h 42h 43h Instruction 1 eee STX 02h prol n D1004n x h gt When D100 is designated as the first data register Compare D200 Instruction 2 05 x D201 x h When D200 is designated as the first data register D2004n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format Start delimiters are not stored to data registers 17 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Designating Constant as End Delimiter An end delimiter can be programmed at
100. 0 0 10 10 10 0 0 0101111111101 Shift to the right M8003 MSB Y D10 LSB CY After first shift D20 7 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 M8003 MSB Y D10 LSB After second shift D20 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and P n SS D11 is shifted to the right by 2 bits as designated by operand bits The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the MSBs Bits to shift 22 Before shift 010 011 1 900 573 MSB 10 011 15 0 gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 Shift to the right M8003 After shift D10 D11 475 143 MSB 010 011 15 0101010 1010 0 0 0 0010 0 1111111101110 1011010 00 0 0 0 0 0 1111 0 M8003 134 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL idee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTL Rotate Left ROTL HRS When input is 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand 51 is ES Rd E oc rotated to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last b
101. 1 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay tion to 16 outputs at the slave station of node 1 Example 2 Loading Bit Operand in Remote 1 System One point of input or output can be loaded or outputted in the remote I O system This example demonstrates a program to load an input status at the slave station of node 0 and to send the status to output Q3 at the master station fire Q3 24 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL MOV instruction stores data of 16 inputs at the slave station of node 0 to 16 outputs QO through Q17 at the master station MOV instruction stores data of 16 inputs IO through I17 at the master sta When the input at the slave station of node 0 is turned on output Q3 at the master station 1s turned on Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Precautions for Wiring INTERBUS Cable For wiring the remote I O master and slave modules use the INTERBUS cable made of the remote bus cable with D sub 9 position male and female connectors The remote bus cable is available from Phoenix Contact When ordering the remote bus cable from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and cable length in meters Remote Bus Cable Type No Phoenix Type Order No Specification Used for IBS RBC METER T 28 06 28 6 Standard 3 x2 x 0 22 mm Fixed routing IBS RBC 27 23 12 3 Highly flexible 3 x2 x 0 25 mm Flexible
102. 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Valid Operands Operand Function QM C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Data to compare X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Comparison output X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 S2 the timer counter current value is read out Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments When an output or internal relay is designated as the destination only 1 point is used regardless of the selected data type When repeat is designated for the destination outputs or internal re
103. 11 Input Current mA COM O if 5 art Input O i 2 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Input Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A N16B1 16 point DC Input Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Terminal No Name NounRUwnHo RUPES C C0 C50 C0 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C2 CD ooo Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the input module For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Terminal No Name Sink Input Wiring Source Input Wiring 4 Terminal No Name PAAT L t if T 7 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwt
104. 110 11 111 D21 110 12 112 L gt D22 110 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV D Sl DIR REP il E D10 D20 3 D10 110 m p20 _110 11 111 D21 111 D12 112 D22 110 gt 013 113 023 111 14 114 024 110 D15 115 D25 111 Repeat Source and Destination Operands When both S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are moved to the same quantity of operands starting with the operand designated by D1 Note The BMOV block move instruction has the same effect as the MOV instruction with both the source and destination designated to repeat Data Type Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 3 MOVW SIR DIR REP Hs bio p10 110 020 110 D11 111 D21 111 12 112 p22 112 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Double Word MOWD SIR DIR REP Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 3 16 D10 D20 3 D10 110 20 110 11 111 021 111 D12 112 22 11
105. 1115011153 11154 11157 Node 16 1116011163 1116411167 Node 17 1117011173 11174 11177 Node 18 1118011183 1118411187 Node 19 1119011193 1119411197 20 1120011203 1120411207 Node 21 1121011213 11214 11217 22 1122011223 11224 11227 Node 23 1123011233 11234 11237 24 11240 11243 11244 11247 Node 25 L1250 L1253 L1254 L1257 Node 26 L1260 L1263 L1264 L1267 Node 27 L1270 L1273 L1274 L1277 Node 28 L1280 L1283 L128411287 Node 29 L1290 L1293 1129411297 Node 30 L1300 L1303 1130411307 6 4 Node 31 131041313 1131411317 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1072010727 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Master Station Allocation Number 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Slave Station Number Transmit Data Receive Data Data Link to Slave Station from Slave Station Communication Error Slave Station 1 D7000 D7009 D7010 D7019 D8 400 Slave Station 2 D7020 D7029 D7030 D7039 D8401 Slave Station 3 D7040 D7049 D7050 D7059 D8402 Slave Station 4 D7060 D7069 D7070 D7079 D8 403 Slave Station 5 D7080 D7089 D7090 D7099 D8404 Slave Station 6 D7100 D7109 D7110 D7119 D8405 Slave Station 7
106. 13 5 ROTLC 13 9 ROTR 13 7 ROTRC 13 11 RXD1 17 13 RXD2 17 13 SFTL 13 1 SFTR 13 3 structure 8 3 SUB 11 1 SUM 11 11 TXD1 17 4 TXD2 17 4 WKCMP OFF 15 1 WKCMP ON 15 1 WKTBL 15 2 XCHG 9 13 XORW 12 1 XYFS 19 1 all outputs OFF M8002 6 9 allocation numbers 6 1 analog input module 2 28 terminal arrangement 2 30 input output wiring 3 8 output module 2 31 terminal arrangement 2 33 AND and ANDN instructions 7 4 AND LOD instruction 7 5 AND word 12 1 ANDW 12 1 answer mode 23 2 23 7 application program 26 2 examples 26 18 modifying 26 13 ASCII character code table 17 26 toBCD 14 11 tohex 14 7 assembling modules 3 2 AT 20 9 OpenNet Controller User s Manual INDEX command execution 23 2 result code 23 3 string 23 3 general command mode 23 2 23 6 ATOB 14 11 ATOH 14 7 ATZ 23 2 23 5 23 7 auto tuning 20 9 average 19 6 AVRG 19 6 basic instructions 7 1 system 1 6 BCC block check character 17 8 17 18 BCD left shift 13 13 to ASCII 14 9 tohex 14 3 BCDLS 13 13 bidirectional shift register 7 23 binary arithmetic instructions 11 1 bit designation of link register 6 19 shift rotate instructions 13 1 stack register 7 7 block move 9 8 BMOV 9 8 Boolean computation instructions 12 1 BPS BRD and BPP instructions 7 6 breakdown of END processing time A 2 BTOA 14 9 BTOH 14 3 bus fail 24 16 segment no 24 6 bus topology 26 7 busy control 17 28 signal 17 31 cable 17 2 17 31 23 1
107. 17 10 protect output overload error 27 5 protection circuit for relay output 2 17 type 2 28 2 31 user program 5 18 pulse input 7 20 reading error data 27 1 transmit data 26 22 receive completion output 17 13 17 20 data 25 9 26 11 26 16 byte count 17 21 writing 26 21 digits 17 14 format 17 13 17 14 instruction cancel flag M8022 M8023 17 21 status 17 13 17 21 code 17 21 timeout 17 17 receive 1 17 13 receive 2 17 13 refresh modes 21 8 register bit stack register 7 7 operation register 7 7 registers 26 15 remote bus cable 24 15 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL I O master module 2 36 4 connector 2 3 system 24 1 removing from DIN rail 3 3 repeat cycles 8 3 17 7 17 15 designation 8 3 operation ADD SUB and MUL instructions 11 5 ANDW ORW and XORW instructions 12 3 data comparison instructions 10 3 DIV instruction 11 7 move instructions 9 3 reset input 4 3 5 1 7 20 system status 2 6 resetting modem 23 5 23 7 restart system status 2 6 retry cycles 23 3 interval 23 3 reverse control action 20 10 shift register 7 22 ROOT 11 10 rotate left 13 5 left with carry 13 9 right 13 7 right with carry 13 11 ROTL 13 5 ROTLC 13 9 ROTR 13 7 ROTRC 13 11 RS232C line control signals 17 27 port communication mode selection 23 3 communication protocol 23 6 connecting equipment 17 1 port 1 2 2 port2 2 2 RTS output control signal option D8207 D8307 17 29 RUN mode control signal statuses 17 27 run sto
108. 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 4 Input module does not operate normally Is the input LED on Are input allocation numbers correct Is the wiring correct Correct the program Correct the wiring o YES Is the power voltage for the input module correct Are wiring and operation of external devices correct Correct the external device wiring z pe Y END jt Y Call IDEC for assistance ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 5 27 12 Output module does not operate normally Is the output LED on YES NO y Check the output allocation numbers Are output allocation numbers correct Monitor the output using WindLDR Does the monitored output turn on and off Call IDEC for assistance Make sure of correct output wiring Correct the program The output circuit in the output module is damaged Replace the output module OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL END Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com T
109. 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Operand Allocation Numbers for Functional Modules Functional Module Functional Module 1 Allocation Numbers Data Area 10100410107 Status Area Read Only 1011010117 Reserved Area 10120 10127 Access Prohibited Functional Module 2 1020010207 1021010217 10220 10227 Functional Module 3 L0300 L0307 10310 10317 10320 10327 Functional Module 4 1040040407 10410 10417 10420 10427 Functional Module 5 10500 10507 10510 10517 10520 10527 Functional Module 6 L0600 L0607 10610 10617 10620 10627 Operand Allocation Numbers for Master Module Functional Module 7 Node Node 0 L0700 L0707 10710 10717 Allocation Numbers Input Data L1000 L1003 Output Data L1004 L1007 Node 1 L1010 L1013 1101411017 2 11020 11023 1102411027 Node 3 L1030 L1033 1103411037 4 1104011043 1104411047 Node 5 1105011053 1105411057 Node 6 L1060L1063 1106411067 7 1107011073 1107411077 Node 8 1108041083 1108411087 Node 9 1109011093 1109411097 Node 10 1110041103 1110411107 Node 11 1111011113 11114 11117 Node 12 1112011123 1112411127 Node 13 1113011133 1113411137 Node 14 1114011143 11144 11147 Node 15
110. 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 2 Calculation start position 2 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th c BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 17 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS BCC Calculation Formula BCC calculation formula can be selected from XOR exclusive OR or ADD addition operation Example Incoming data consists of 41h 42h 43h 44h and 45h 1 BCC Calculation Formula XOR 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 41h 2 BCC Calculation Formula ADD 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 14Fh 4Fh Only the last 1 or 2 digits are used as BCC Conversion Type The BCC calculation result can be converted or not according to the designated conversion type as described below Example BCC calculation result is 004 1h 1 Binary to ASCII conversion 0041h Binary to ASCII conversion ey 2 digits 2 No conversion NUL A 20515 No conversion NL 2 digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from 1 or 2 Example 1 BCC digits 2 2 BCC digits 1 Lower digit dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17
111. 5 E U T c E g E Overload Signal O Output Output Protect Device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Special Data Registers D8030 through D8036 Protect Transistor Output Error Caution A prolonged overload or short circuit may damage the output circuit elements of the transistor protect source output module Include a protection program in the user program to protect the output module from damage caused by overheating A maximum of seven transistor protect source output modules can be mounted with one CPU module The protect output modules are numbered from one through seven in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module When an over load or short circuit occurs special data registers D8030 through D8036 store 1 to indicate the output module where the overload occurred D8030 through D8036 correspond to the first through seventh protect transistor modules respectively When an overload or short circuit occurs the transistor protect source output module detects the overload and shuts down the output immediately to protect the external load and output circuit elements from permanent damage Since the over load detection is based on the heating of the output element the output circuit is turned on again when the output elements have cooled down
112. 6 500 50 C 4000 Digital Output from Analog Input Module Temperature Control by Auto Tuning and PID Action Process Variable after Conversion S1 0 A High Alarm Value 51 14 2500 250 C Set Point 53 2000 200 C AT Set Point 51 21 1500 150 C gt Time up PID Action lt lt Auto Tuning dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Ladder Program The ladder diagram shown below describes an example of using the PID instruction The user program must be modified according to the application and simulation must be performed before actual operation MOVW S1 DIR REP 10 0 DO 27 MOWW Sl 01 1 D3 MOWW Sl Dl D4 MOV I S1 1 5000 D5 MOV I S1 Dl 500 D6 MOV W S1 1 REP 0 D10 MOV W S1 1 REP 70 D11 MOV W S1 1 REP 50 D12 MOV W S1 1 REP 10 D13 MOV W S1 1 REP 2500 014 MOV W S1 150 01 019 MOV W S1 1 REP 30 20 MOV W S1 1 REP 1500 D21 MOVW S1 1 REP 100 D22 MOVW S1 D1 2000 D100 1 S 5S2 53 l0 DO 0 0100 S4 D1 L100 D102 Q M4 Q1 Continued on the next page 20 16 When input 10 is turned on 0 is stored to 27 data registers DO through D26 designated as control registers D3 operation mode 1 AT PID D4 line
113. 6 Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 2 Status LED 3 Terminal Block Cover 4 Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label Indicates the input module ID DC IN AC IN 24V DC sink source input 16 or 32 points 100V AC input 8 points Turns on when input is on The terminal block cover flips open to the right When using long ferrules for wiring the terminal block cover may be removed Five different terminal connector styles are available for wiring Indicates terminal numbers 1 through 20 on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point DC Input Module Specifications Type No FC3A N16B1 FC3A N16B3 Rated Input Voltage 24V DC sink source input signal Input Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC Rated Input Current 7 mA point 24V DC Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 11 and 2 12 Input Impedance 3 4 KQ Turn ON Time 24V DC 20 usec filter preset Turn OFF Time 24V DC 120 usec filter preset Input Filter 0 msec 0 5 msec 1 msec 2 msec 4 msec 8 msec 16 msec 32 msec Isolation Between input terminals Not isolated Internal circuit Photocoupler isolated External Lo
114. 600 p36 200 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS 9 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data can be compared using data comparison instructions such as equal to unequal to less than greater than less than or equal to and greater than or equal to When the comparison result is true an output or internal relay is turned on The repeat operation can also be used to compare more than one set of data Three values can also be compared using the ICMP gt instruction Since the data comparison instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required CMP Compare Equal To amp S1 S2 DI on H EMRAN a ae PR When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When 51 data is equal to 52 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition 1s not met 1 is turned off CMP Compare Unequal To amp 51 S2 DI on H ME on DUR peg When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are compared When 51 data is not equal to S2 data destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is
115. 7000 gt D12 To process borrowing so that the number of times a borrow occurs is subtracted from D13 When a borrow occurs D13 is decremented by one 51 D12 52 7000 D1 D12 REP SUB W M8003 Examples MUL Data Type Word MUL W Sl S2 Dl REP D10j 50 D20 60 30 031 3000 11 D10 D20 030 When input I1 is on data of D10 is multiplied by data of D20 and the result is set to D30 and D31 e Data Type Integer MUL S1 2 DI REP 210 50 x 20 60 p30 p31 _ 3000 11 D10 D20 030 Data Type Double Word MULD Sl S2 1 REP 11 D10 D20 D30 10 011 100000 x 20 021 5000 gt 030 031 500000000 Note When the result exceeds 4 294 967 295 a user program execution error will result turning on the ERROR LED special internal relay M8004 user program execution error The result is not set to the destination operand Data Type Long MUL L S1 S2 Dl REP 11 D10 D20 D30 D10 D11 100000 x 20 021 5000 030 031 500000000 Note When the result is below 2 147 483 648 or over 2 147 483 647 a user program execution error will result turning on the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error The result is not set to the destination operand dee OPENNET CONTROLLE
116. Area Settings gt Run Stop gt Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error See page 5 2 M8001 1 Clock Reset While M8001 is on M8121 1 sec clock is turned off M8002 All Outputs OFF When M8002 is turned on all outputs QO through Q597 go off until M8002 is turned off Self maintained circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored when M8002 is turned off M8003 Carry Cy and Borrow Bw When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or subtraction instruction M8003 turns on M8003 is also used for the bit shift and rotate instructions See pages 11 2 and 13 1 M8004 User Program Execution Error When an error occurs while executing a user program M8004 turns on The cause of the user program execution error can be checked using Online gt Monitor gt PLC Status gt Error Status gt Details See page 27 6 M8005 Data Link Communication Error When an error occurs during communication in the data link system M8005 turns on The M8005 status is maintained when the error is cleared and remains on until M8005 is reset using WindLDR or until the CPU is turned off The cause of the data link communication error can be checked using Online gt Monitor gt PLC Status gt Error Status gt Details See page 21 4 M8006 Data Link Communication Prohibit Flag Master Station When M8006 at the master station is turned on in the data link system data link communication is stopped The M8006 status is maintained when th
117. BCC calculation result is 004 1h 1 Binary to ASCII conversion ASCII data 0041h Binary to ASCII conversion 34h 31h 2 digits 2 No conversion ASCII data NUL A 00218 No conversion ee SENT 2 digits BCC Digits Bytes The quantity of digits bytes of the BCC code can be selected from 1 or 2 Example ASCII data 1 BCC digits 2 2 34h 31h 2 BCC digits 1 inl 1 Lower digit Transmit Completion Output Designate an output QO through Q597 or an internal relay MO through M2557 as an operand for the transmit completion output Special internal relays cannot be used When the start input for a TXD instruction is turned on preparation for transmission is initiated followed by data trans mission When a sequence of all transmission operation is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Transmit Status Designate a data register DO through 07998 as an operand to store the transmit status information including a transmis sion status code and a user communication error code Transmit Status Code Transmit Status Code Status Description From turning on the start input for a TXD instruction until the transmit 16 preparing transmission data is stored in the internal transmit buffer From enabling data transmission by an END processing until all data 32 Transmitting data apenas transmission is c
118. Conversion Type Display Digits Repeat Timer Binary to ASCII 1to4 Counter BCD to ASCIl 1to5 1 to 16 Data Register No conversion 1 to2 Constant No conversion 1 D1 First Output Number to Display Data Connect the data signals starting with operand designated by D1 through the last destination operand followed by latch signals The quantity of required output points is 8 plus the quantity of digits to display When displaying 4 digits with out put QO designated as the first output number 12 consecutive output points must be reserved starting with QO through Q13 LAT Latch Phase Select the latch phase for the digit select signal L Low latch H High latch DAT Data Phase Select the phase for the data signal L Negative logic H Positive logic Display Processing Time Displaying character data requires the following time after the input to the CDISP instruction is turned on Keep the input to the CDISP instruction for the period of time shown below to process the display data Scan Time Display Processing Time 5 msec or more 3 scan times x Quantity of digits When the scan time is less than 5 msec the data cannot be displayed correctly When the scan time is too short to ensure normal display set a value of 6 or more in msec to special data register D8022 constant scan time preset value See page 5 20 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr
119. D7120 D7129 D7130 D7139 D8406 Slave Station 8 D7140 D7149 D7150 D7159 D8407 Slave Station 9 D7160 D7169 D7170 D7179 D8408 Slave Station 10 D7180 D7189 D7190 D7199 D8409 Slave Station 11 D7200 D7209 D7210 D7219 D8410 Slave Station 12 D7220 D7229 D7230 D7239 D8411 Slave Station 13 D7240 D7249 D7250 D7259 D8412 Slave Station 14 D7260 D7269 D7270 D7279 D8413 Slave Station 15 D7280 D7289 D7290 D7299 D8414 Slave Station 16 D7300 D7309 D7310 D7319 D8415 Slave Station 17 D7320 D7329 D7330 D7339 D8416 Slave Station 18 D7340 D7349 D7350 D7359 D8417 Slave Station 19 D7360 D7369 D7370 D7379 D8418 Slave Station 20 D7380 D7389 D7390 D7399 D8419 Slave Station 21 D7400 D7409 D7410 D7419 D8420 Slave Station 22 D7420 D7429 D7430 D7439 D8421 Slave Station 23 D7440 D7449 D7450 D7459 D8422 Slave Station 24 D7460 D7469 D7470 D7479 D8423 Slave Station 25 D7480 D7489 D7490 D7499 D8424 Slave Station 26 D7500 D7509 D7510 D7519 D8425 Slave Station 27 D7520 D7529 D7530 D7539 D8 426 Slave Station 28 D7540 D7549 D7550 D7559 D8427 Slave Station 29 D7560 D7569 D7570 D7579 D8428 Slave Station 30 D7580 D7589 D7590 D7599 D8429 Slave Station 31 D7600 D7609 D7610 D7619 D8430 Note When any slave stations are not connected master station data registers which are assigned to the vacant slave sta tions can be used as ordinary data registers Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Slave Station Allocation Number Data Slave Station Data Transmit Data to Ma
120. D8309 When the command is completed successfully the completion IR is turned on and the command is not executed for the remaining cycles Failure The command is transmitted repeatedly but failed in all trials as many as the retry cycles specified in data register D8209 or D8309 Status Internal Relays for RS232C Port 1 and Port 2 Port 1 Port 2 Status Description M8057 M8087 AT Command ON AT command is in execution start IR is on Execution OFF AT command is not in execution completion or failure IR is on Note Operational ON Command mode 8067 State OFF On line mode Line ON Telephone line connected MOTs UO TO Connection OFF Telephone line disconnected Note While M8057 M8087 AT command execution is on the OpenNet Controller cannot send and receive communica tion 232 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Data Registers for Modem Mode When the modem mode is enabled data registers D8200 through D8399 are allocated to special functions At the first scan in the modem mode D8209 D8309 and D8210 D8310 store the default values then D8245 D8269 and D8345 D8369 store an initialization string depending on the value in D8201 D8301 respectively 23 MODEM MODE Port 1 Port 2 Stored Data Description Communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 is selected 0 other than 1 User communication mode RS2
121. DO D99 D1 DEC W 5 A DEC decrements DO data to 1048 DJNZ 21 a DJNZ jumps to label 255 until D1 value reduces to 0 Ist cycle D1 50 Destination D99 50 D149 1049 D149 1049 2nd cycle D1 49 Destination D99 49 2 D148 1048 D148 1048 3rdcycle D1 48 Destination D99 48 D147 1047 gt D147 1047 4th cycle Dl 47 Destination D99 47 D146 1046 D146 1046 149th cycle D1 2 Destination D99 2 D101 1001 D101 1001 150th cycle Dl 1 Destination D99 1 D100 1000 D100 1000 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER s MANUAL 18 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS 186 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The coordinate conversion instructions convert one data point to another value using a linear x2 Y2 relationship between values of X and Y X1 Y1 X0 YO X XYFS XY Format Set H XYFS S1 X0 Em Yn When input is on the format for XY conversion is se
122. Description CPU Stopped Power OFF M8125 In operation Output Cleared Cleared M8126 M8127 Reserved M8130 High speed Counter Up Down Status Maintained Cleared M8131 High speed Counter Comparison ON Status ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8132 High speed Counter Current Value Zero clear ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8133 High speed Counter Current Value Overflow ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8134 High speed Counter Current Value Underflow ON for 1 scan Maintained Cleared M8135 High speed Counter Comparison Output Status Maintained Cleared M8136 M8137 Reserved M8140 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 1 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8141 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 2 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8142 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 3 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8143 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 4 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8144 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 5 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8145 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 6 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8146 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 7 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8147 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 8 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8150 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 9 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8151 Data Link Separate Refresh Sla
123. Destination CPU module FC3A CP2KM and CP2SM Software for Writing Card WindLDR Quantity of Stored Programs One user program stored on one memory card When a memory card is inserted user program on the memory card is executed Program Execution Priority Downloading User Program from WindLDR to Miniature Card For the procedures to download a user program from WindLDR on a computer to a miniature card see page 4 6 When a miniature card is inserted in the CPU module the user program is downloaded to the miniature card dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Constant Scan Time The scan time may vary whether basic and advanced instructions are executed or not depending on input conditions to these instructions The scan time can be made constant by entering a required scan time preset value into special data reg ister D8022 reserved for constant scan time When performing accurate repetitive control make the scan time constant using this function The constant scan time preset value can be between 1 and 1 000 msec The scan time error is 1 msec of the preset value normally When the data link or other communication functions are used the scan time error may be increased to several milliseconds When the actual scan time is longer than the scan time preset value the scan time cannot be reduce
124. Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High byte stores 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Allocation No D8134 D8135 D8136 D8137 D8138 D8139 D8140 D8141 D8142 D8143 D8144 D8145 D8146 D8147 D8148 D8149 D8150 D8151 D8152 D8153 D8154 D8155 D8156 D8157 D8158 D8159 D8160 D8161 D8162 D8163 D8164 D8165 D8166 D8167 D8168 D8169 D8170 D8171 D8172 D8173 D8174 D8175 D8176 D8177 Node 21 Node 22 Node 23 Node 24 Node 25 Node 26 Node 27 Node 28 Node 29 Node 30 Node 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax Description Logical Device No 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Remarks Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 De
125. DeviceNet Slave Module POW MNS 10 ON or ON or ON or OFF OFF OFF Cause Incorrect setting or communication error Action Make sure that the settings for the master are correct Set the transmit receive bytes in the Function Area Settings correctly Make sure that the link register numbers are correct See DeviceNet Master Module fails to recognize the slave module and Communication error occurs described above OpenNet Controller link registers cannot send out data to the network correctly Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Module 25 12 Cause Incorrect setting or communication error OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Action Make sure that the settings for the master are correct See DeviceNet Master Module fails to recognize the slave module and Communication error occurs described above Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Introduction This chapter describes LONWORKS interface module FC3A SX5LS1 used with the OpenNet Controller to interface with the LONWORKS network and provides details on the LONWORKS system setup and the LONWORKS interface module specifications The OpenNet Controller can be linked to LONWORKS networks For communication through the LONWORKS network the LONWORKS interface module is available Mounting the LONWORKS interface module beside the OpenNet Cont
126. Devices OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Slave Module Parts Description Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 DIP Switch 4 Color Label 3 Network Interface Connector Module Name DeviceNet Slave Module Type No FC3ASX5DS1 1 Module ID FC3A SX5DS1 indicates the DeviceNet slave module ID 2 DIP Switch 10 pole DIP switch for setting node address MAC ID data rate output hold load off and physical port number 3 Network Interface Connector For connecting the DeviceNet communication cable 4 Color Label A five color label is located beside the connector on the DeviceNet slave module Connect each of the five different color wires of the DeviceNet communication cable to the terminal of a matching color Label and Wire Insulation Color Name Black V Blue CAN_L Bare Wire Drain White CAN_H Red V 5 Status LED Indicates operating status Indicator Status Description POW OFF Module power OFF power Green ON Module power ON OFF Power OFF or Dup MAC ID test not completed Flash Normal operation communication not established MNS Green module network status ON Normal operation communication established Red Flash Minor fault temporary network error ON Critical fault
127. I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as S2 or D1 16 points integer data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as S2 or D1 1 point integer data type is used Data Conversion Error The data conversion error is 0 5 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example Linear Conversion The following example demonstrates setting up two coordinate points to define the linear relationship between X and Y The two points are YO 0 0 and Y 1 8000 4000 Once these are set there is an X to Y conversion as well as a Y to X conversion YO X1 Y1 0 8000 4000 S1 S2 D1 0 D10 D20 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay At startup XYFS specifies two points When input IO is on CVXTY converts the value in D10 and stores the result in D20 When input I1 is on CVYTX converts the value in D11 and stores the result in D21 Y The graph shows the linear relationship that is defined by the two points e2 D11 2500 2 If the value in data register D10 is 2000 the value D20 1000 assigned to D20 is 1000 For Y to X conversion the following equation is used 0 X 2Y Em 000 SUUS ES If the value in data register D11 is 2500 the
128. INSTRUCTIONS Conditions for Interval Comparison with ON OFF Times on Different Days When WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions are programmed to turn on and off the output on different days the five conditions shown below are needed to enable the interval comparison Otherwise the instructions work as ordinary clock data comparison instructions 1 WKCMP ON is followed by WKCMP OFF immediately which has the same input contact 2 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have the same values for the day of week comparison data S1 constant When S1 is set to 0 the instructions work without designation of day of week Set 51 to 0 or a value to designate consecutive days such as 6 for Monday and Tuesday 56 for Wednesday through Friday or 65 for Saturday and Sunday Do not set S1 to a value to designate a single day such as 32 for Friday only or 127 to designate all days 3 Hour minute comparison data S2 constant has a relationship ON time gt OFF time 4 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have 0 set for the week table output control S3 to disable use of the week table 5 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have the same comparison output operand D1 Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on different days 1 The output is turned on at 11 00 a m on Monday through Friday and is turned off at 2 00 a m on the following day 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 Sun S
129. INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing interface OUT2 of Cause the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the length code entered in the configuration frame Remedy Replace the INTERBUS device which is connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the speci fied INTERBUS device or adapt in the configuration frame the entry to the length code Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position OCDOhex to OCD3hex RB FAIL or ODDOhex to ODD3hex LB FAIL After the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device was opened further devices in addition to a BK module were included in a data ring The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device carried out a voltage reset or is defective Check this INTERBUS device Check the supply voltage of this INTERBUS device whether it conforms to the rated value and whether the permissible AC voltage portion is exceeded Refer to the relevant data sheet for the val Remedy ues Check the BK module s power supply unit for an overload condition Refer to the relevant data sheets for the maximum permissible output current of the BK module and for the typical current consumption of the connected local bus devices Meaning Cause Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position 0CD4hex to 0CD7hex RB FAIL or ODD4hex to ODD7hex LB FAIL Meaning Error in the 8 wire local bus conn
130. Input to start receiving barcode data M101 Receive completion output for barcode data M8120 Initialize pulse special internal relay D20 Store barcode data upper 4 digits D21 Store barcode data lower 4 digits D100 Receive status data register for barcode data D101 Receive data byte count data register Ladder Diagram When the OpenNet Controller starts operation the RXD1 instruction is executed to wait for incoming data When data receive is complete the data is stored to data registers D20 and D21 The receive completion signal is used to execute the RXDI instruction to wait for another incoming data M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay used to set M100 51 DI 5 At the rising edge of M100 RXDI is executed to be ready for receiving 10 101 pioo a Even after M100 is reset RXD1 still waits for incoming data When data receive is complete M101 is turned on then M100 is set to execute RXDI to receive the next incoming data RXD1 Data STX D20 B4 2 ETX 02h Data Register 03h End Delimiter D20 ASCII to BCD Conversion 4 digits Repeat 2 Start Delimiter 17 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The program branching instructions reduce execution time by making it possible to bypass portions of the program when ever certain conditions
131. It is also possible to maintain the statuses of shift register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required See page 5 3 SFR N shifting flag special internal relay M8012 is turned on when the CPU is powered down while data shifting is in progress See page 6 10 7 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Forward Shift Register SFR continued Ladder Diagram Reset Rung 1 10 11 12 Rung 2 0 Q0 R1 Q1 R2 Q2 R3 Q3 Ladder Diagram Reset Rung 1 11 Pulse 12 I3 Rung 2 RO 00 R1 Q1 Setting and Resetting Shift Register 10 RO R 11 R3 Program List Instruction Prgm Adrs Timing Chart ON Reset Input 10 off 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS gt 1 lt One scan more is required Pulse Input 11 ON OFF 80 00 ON OFF R2 Q2 R3 Q3 ore Data Input 12 R1 Q1 Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFR instruction In this example the status of bit R3 is read to output Q3 Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instruction Bits dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL e Any shift register bit can be turned on using the SET instruction Any shift register bit can be turned off using the RST instruction The SET or RST instruction is actuated b
132. LonWorks Network Troubleshooting This section describes the procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the LONWORKS interface module Probable Causes for Network Errors A network cable is disconnected or shorted e Strong external noise e The power voltage to the module has dropped below the minimum operating voltage at least momentarily Use of a faulty communication line cable other than twisted pair cables or transmission beyond the rated distance mproper terminator Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POW LED on the LONWORKS interface module does not go on Is the POWER LED on the CPU module on Are modules installed correctly YES Supply power to the power supply terminals on the CPU module Is the POWER LED on the CPU module on See Troubleshooting in the OpenNet Controller user s manual EM333 YES Is the POW LED on the interface module on Install the modules correctly NO Is the POW LED on the Y Call IDEC for assistance interface module on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2625 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Troubleshooting Diagram 2 The RUN LED on the LonWorks interface module does not go on Is the POW LED on the interface m
133. M0130 M0137 M0170 M0177 M0210 M0217 M0250 M0257 M0290 M0297 M0330 M0337 M0370 M0377 M0410 M0417 M0450 M0457 M0490 M0497 M0530 M0537 M0570 M0577 M0610 M0617 M0650 M0657 M0690 M0697 M0730 M0737 M0770 M0777 M0810 M0817 M0850 M0857 M0890 M0897 M0930 M0937 M0020 M0027 M0060 M0067 M0100 M0107 M0140 M0147 M0180 M0187 M0220 M0227 M0260 M0267 M0300 M0307 M0340 M0347 M0380 M0387 M0420 M0427 M0460 M0467 M0500 M0507 M0540 M0547 M0580 M0587 M0620 M0627 M0660 M0667 M0700 M0707 M0740 M0747 M0780 M0787 M0820 M0827 M0860 M0867 M0900 M0907 M0940 M0947 M0030 M0037 M0070 M0077 M0110 M0117 M0150 M0157 M0190 M0197 M0230 M0237 M0270 M0277 M0310 M0317 M0350 M0357 M0390 M0397 M0430 M0437 M0470 M0477 M0510 M0517 M0550 M0557 M0590 M0597 M0630 M0637 M0670 M0677 M0710 M0717 M0750 M0757 M0790 M0797 M0830 M0837 M0870 M0877 M0910 M0917 M0950 M0957 2048 M0960 M0967 62 M0970 M0977 M0980 M0987 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL M0990 M0997 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Internal Relay M1000 M1007 M1040 M1047 M1080 M1087 1120 1127 1160 1167 1200 1207 1240 1247 1280 1287 1320 1327 1360 1367 M1400 M1407 M1440 M1447 1480 1487 1520 1527 1560 1567 M1600 M1607 1640 1647 1680 1687 1720 1727 1760 1767 1800 1807 1840 1847 1880 1887 1920 1927 19
134. M3 screw Tightening torque 0 6 to 1 0 N m Ground Grounding resistance 1000 maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Weight approx 200g Remote 1 Master Module Function Specifications Network Protocol INTERBUS Transmission Speed 500 kbps Transmission Distance Between remote I O master and remote bus station 400m maximum Between remote bus stations 400m maximum Remote bus total length 12 8 km maximum Quantity of Nodes 32 remote slave stations maximum 1 Points per Node 128 points maximum 64 inputs and 64 outputs Branch Levels 16 maximum INTERBUS device levels 0 through 15 Remote 1 Connector D sub 9 pin female connector on the remote I O master module Network Cable INTERBUS cable V 24 Interface Connector D sub 9 pin male connector on the remote O master module V 24 Interface Cable Serial straight cable Electrostatic Discharge Severity Level ESD3 network interface See page 24 11 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 237 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS DeviceNet Slave Module The OpenNet Controller can be linked to DeviceNet networks For communication through the DeviceNet network the DeviceNet slave module is available For details about the DeviceNet slave module and DeviceNet communication system see pa
135. M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag When M8021 is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented one See page 15 8 M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 1 When M8022 is turned on all RXD1 instructions ready for receiving user communication through RS232C port are dis abled M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 2 When M8023 is turned on all RXD2 instructions ready for receiving user communication through RS232C port 2 are dis abled M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize When M8030 is turned on the INTERBUS master is initialized See page 24 11 M8036 INTERBUS Master Bus NG When the INTERBUS master detects a BUS NG M8036 is turned on See page 24 11 M8037 INTERBUS Master Peripheral Fault When the INTERBUS master detects a peripheral fault M8037 is turned on See page 24 11 M8040 INTERBUS Master Error When a critical error is found in the INTERBUS master hardware software M8040 or M8041 is turned on depending on error contents and the master module is initialized See page 24 11 M8041 INTERBUS Master Error When a critical error is found in the INTERBUS master hardware software M8040 or M8041 is turned on depending on error con
136. M8133 Current Value Underflow M8134 Comparison Output Status M8135 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 1 1 one scan i one scan Pie _ The D8047 value at this point becomes the preset value for the next counting cycle L i 1 one scan J scan gt lt gt OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com High speed Counter Wiring Diagram 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Sink Type High speed Counter Comparison Output FC3A CP2K and FC3A CP2KM Wiring for loads insusceptible to noises COM CW Wiring for loads susceptible to noises CCW CW Reset to zero CCW HSC OUT 24V DC Reset to zero HSC OUT OV 24V DC l OV Source Type High speed Counter Comparison Output FC3A CP2S and FC3A CP2SM Wiring for loads insusceptible to noises COM CW Wiring for loads susceptible to noises CCW CW Reset to zero CCW HSC OUT 24V DC Reset to zero HSC OUT OV 24V DC OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL OV Phone 800 894 04
137. Memory Card Card Type Miniature memory card Accessible Memory Capacity 2MB 5V type Download Destination CPU module FC3A CP2KM and CP2SM Software for Writing Card WindLDR Quantity of Stored Programs One user program stored on one memory card Program Execution Priority High speed Counter Maximum Counting Frequency 10 kHz When a memory card is inserted user program on the memory card is executed Counting Range 0 to 65535 16 bits Operation M ode Rotary encoder mode Dual pulse reversible counter mode Comparison Output 2 6 OPENNET CONTROLLE Transistor sink or source output 1 point 500mA Output delay 20 usec UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Input Module Digital input modules are available in 16 and 32 point DC input modules and 8 point AC input modules Four different connector terminal styles are available Input Module Type Numbers 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Module Name 16 point DC Input 32 point DC Input 8 point AC Input Screw Terminal FC3AN16B1 FC3A N08A11 FC3AN16B3 Nylon Connector FC3AN32B4 Fujitsu Connector FC3AN32B5 Parts Description 6 Expansion Connector This figure illustrates a screw terminal type input module 1 Module ID 2 Status LED 3 Terminal Block Cover 4 Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label
138. Normal Input Catch Input Falling Edge IN CTH3 Normal Input el Catch Input Rising Edge IN CTH4 Normal Input IN CTH5 Normal Input zl IN CTH8 Normal Input hd IN CTHZ7 Normal Input Select the module number from 1 through 15 to designate catch input or input filter function Module number 1 is the input module mounted next to the CPU module Module number 2 is the second from the CPU module and so on Input filter time is selected in groups of eight inputs For example input numbers of module number 1 are divided into four groups IN FLTO 10 through I7 only IN FLTO has effect on catch inputs IN FLTI IN FLT2 and IN FLT3 have no effect on catch inputs Select an input filter value from 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 msec for IN FLTO of each DC input module Default 4 msec Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection Select catch input of rising or falling edge or normal input for the first eight inputs of each DC input module Default Normal Input OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse ON Actual Input off Input Relay 10 to 17 5 _ lt _ END Processed Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse ON Actual Input opr Input Relay IO to 17 OFF END Processed Note 1 When two or
139. Output Reset Cleared Cleared M8011 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Maintained Cleared M8012 SFR N Shifting Flag Maintained Maintained M8013 Reserved M8014 Write Communication Command Execution at Receive Completion Maintained Maintained M8015 M8017 Reserved M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag Maintained Cleared M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag Maintained Cleared M8022 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 1 Cleared Cleared M8023 User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag RS232C Port 2 Cleared Cleared M8024 M8027 Reserved M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize Maintained Cleared M8031 M8035 Reserved M8036 INTERBUS Master Bus NG read only Maintained Cleared M8037 INTERBUS Master Peripheral Fault read only Maintained Cleared M8040 INTERBUS Master Error read only Cleared Cleared M8041 INTERBUS Master Error read only Cleared Cleared M8042 M 8047 Reserved M8050 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8051 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8052 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Start Maintained Maintained M8053 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Start Maintained Maintained M8054 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Start Maintained Maintained M8055 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Start
140. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Troubleshooting Diagram 4 The I O LED on the LonWorks interface module goes on Is the CPU module operating normally See Troubleshooting on page 27 1 Set the quantity of transmit receive data using WindLDR correctly See page 26 10 Is the transmit receive data quantity set correctly YES YES Is the I O LED on the interface module on Y Call IDEC for assistance END Troubleshooting Diagram 5 The SER LED on the LonWorks interface module goes on The SER LED goes on when the Neuron Chip fails to recognize an application program no application program exists or an on chip failure occurs The LoNWonks interface module is shipped with an application program installed in the memory so a problem in the LonWorks interface module is suspected Call IDEC for assistance Troubleshooting Diagram 6 26 28 The SER LED on the LonWorks interface module flashes at a frequency of 1 2 Hz The SER LED flashes when the network management is not configured Configure install the network management information See page 26 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info 2clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Introductio
141. Program 0 to 4000 Digital Output Reading at Overload 4000 Input Mode Selection Using a rotary switch see page 2 28 Type of Input Differential input Common M ode Characteristics Common mode reject ratio CMRR 50 dB Common Mode Voltage 16V DC Total Input System Transfer Time 3 msec per channel 1 scan time maximum Conversion Time 3 msec per channel Conversion M ethod YA type ADC Maximum Temporary Deviation during Electrical Noise Tests and Test Conditions 396 maximum of full scale at 500V impulse test Conversion Type Successive approximation type Operating M ode Self scan Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated fiat sibl Accuracy p Monotonicity Yes Crosstalk 2 LSB maximum Non lineality 0 1 of full scale maximum Repeatability after Stabilization Time 0 5 of full scale maximum more than 30 minutes after powerup Sample Duration Time 0 1 msec Sample Repetition Time 0 5 msec Input Filter 0 2 msec Dielectric Strength 500V AC between input channel and power supply under normal operat ing conditions Cable Shielded cable is recommended for improved noise immunity Effect of Improper Input Connection Permanent damage may be caused Terminal Block Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Internal Current Draw 120 mA 24V DC Weight approx OPENNET CONTROLLER US
142. Receive Data D8429 Communication Error D7580 D7589 Transmit Data D7590 D7599 Receive Data D8430 Communication Error D7600 D7609 Transmit Data D7610 D7619 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Receive Data AA Slave Stations D8400 Communication Error Slave Station 31 D7000 D7009 Transmit Data ave Stati D7010 D7019 Receive Data D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data ave Stati D7010 D7019 Receive Data D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data ave Stati D7010 D7019 Receive Data D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data ave Stati D7010 D7019 Receive Data D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data Slave Station 30 D7010 D7019 Receive Data D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7009 Transmit Data Slave Station 31 D7010 D7019 Receive Data OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 215 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Special Internal Relays for Data Link Communication Special internal relays M8005 through M8007 and M8140 through M8177 are assigned for the data link communication M8005 Data Link Communication Error When an error occurs during communication in the data link system M80
143. Reset Yes HSC Reset Value D8046 300 HSC Preset Value D8047 2 999 Timer Preset Value 0 5 sec needed for punching programmed in TIM instruction 5 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Idec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Programming WindLDR 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Rotary Encoder d Enable High speed Counter HSC Operation Mode Enable HSC Reset Input Enable HSC Gate Input penNet Function Area Setting x Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Others Timing Chart Comparison Output Status M8135 gg Current Value Preset Value D8047 2999 Reset Value D8046 300 r When the high speed counter current value reaches 3000 the comparison output is turned on and the current value is reset to 300 ON M 0 5 sec for punching Comparison output status M8135 turns on in one scan time after the comparison output is turned on A maximum of one scan time of delay exists before M8135 is turned on Comparison Output Reset _ TIM T10 M8135 gt M8010 When M8135 turns on the 100 msec timer TIM instruction starts to time down When the preset value of 0 5 second is reached M8010 is turned on to reset the comparison output OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
144. S MANUAL 17 29 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS D8207 D8307 1 While the OpenNet Controller is transmitting data RTS is turned on While the OpenNet Controller is not transmitting data RTS remains off Use this option for communication with a remote terminal in the half duplex mode since RTS goes on or off according to the data transmission from the OpenNet Controller Data transmission Transmitting ON RTS signal Ore D8207 D8307 2 While the OpenNet Controller is running RTS remains on whether the OpenNet Controller is trans mitting or receiving data While the OpenNet Controller is stopped RTS remains off Use this option to indicate the OpenNet Controller operating status OpenNet Controller Stopped Stopped ON RTS signal D8207 D8307 2 3 Whether the OpenNet Controller is running or stopped RTS remains off OpenNet Controller Stopped Stopped ON RTS signal Gre D8207 D8307 4 or more Same as D8207 8307 0 17 30 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Sample Program User Communication TXD This example demonstrates a program to send data to a printer using the user communication TXD2 transmit instruction System Setup goog Hsc our
145. Shifting Note Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS SOTU 8 and SOTD 8 Single Output Up and Down The SOTU instruction looks for the transition of a given input from off to on The SOTD instruction looks for the transi tion of a given input from on to off When this transition occurs the desired output will turn on for the length of one scan The SOTU or SOTD instruction converts an input signal to a one shot pulse signal The SOTU or SOTD instruction is followed by one address A total of 4096 SOTU and SOTD instructions can be used in a user program If operation is started while the given input is already on the SOTU output will not turn on The transition from off to on is what triggers the SOTU instruction When a relay of the OpenNet Controller relay output module is defined as the SOTU or SOTD output it may not operate if the scan time is not compatible with relay requirements Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction Timing Chart ON OFF Output 00 A Input 10 ON Output 01 gg Note T equals one scan time one shot pulse There is a special case when the SOTU and SOTD instructions are used between the MCS and MCR instructions which are detailed on page 7 25 If in
146. Slave Station 26 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8172 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 27 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8173 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 28 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8174 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 29 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8175 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 30 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8176 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 31 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8177 Data Link All Slave Station Communication Completion Relay Operating Cleared 6 8 M8180 M 8237 Reserved OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M8000 Start Control M8000 indicates the operating status of the OpenNet Controller The OpenNet Controller stops operation when M8000 is turned off while the CPU is running M8000 can be turned on or off using the WindLDR Online menu When a stop or reset input is designated M8000 must remain on to control the CPU operation using the stop or reset input For the start and stop operation see page 4 2 M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down When the data to be maintained during power failure is bro ken after the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration the CPU restarts operation or not as selected in Function
147. System Slave Station 31 The OpenNet Controller CPU module be mounted with seven modules including digital I O and functional modules such as analog I O DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules to set up a stand alone system When using seven digital I O modules the I O points can be 224 points at the maximum 7 CPU Module Expansion System es I O and functional The FC3A EA1 expansion power supply module is used to mount more than seven I O and functional modules When a maximum of 15 I O modules are mounted the number of I O points is expanded from 224 to 480 maximum Whether an expansion power supply module is used or not seven functional modules such as analog I O DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules can be mounted at the maximum in either the normal or expansion slots Se th uz a H a H E E 7 modules I O and functional A 8 modules I O and functi CPU Module Expansion Power Supply Module ional A maximum of 7 functional
148. Turned on and off by control output M6 90 High alarm light Turned on and off by high alarm output M4 Ql Note The output manipulated variable during auto tuning is a constant value In this example the AT output manipulated variable is set to the maximum value of 100 100 so the control output S2 6 remains on during auto tuning 20 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION System Setup Relay Output Module Analog Input Module CPU Module FC3AR161 FC3A AD1261 22 Im C POWER ORUN C ERROR Dsc OUT Transducer 50 to 500 C Ou 0000 OO CO CD EET o 4 4 c m gt OQ O0OOQOQOQOQOQOQOQOOOOOO0OO0 e C 0O0QOQOOOOQOOcQO AN E 2 VW bole Thermocouple Output Q1 High Alarm Light L Heater Output Q0 Heater Power Switch Digital Output from Analog Input Module vs Process Variable after Conversion Process Variable after conversion S1 0 Linear Conversion Maximum Value S1 5 5000 500 C High Alarm Value S1 14 2500 250 C Set Point S3 2000 200 C AT Set Point S1 21 1500 150 C 0 Linear Conversion Minimum Value S1
149. USER S MANUAL 7 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS DC and DC2 Data Register Comparison The DC instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for data register values This instruction will constantly com pare data register values to the value that has been programmed in When the data register value equals the given value the desired output will be initiated The DC2 instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for data register values This instruction will constantly compare data register values to the value that has been programmed in When the data register value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When data register comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a data register comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the DC or DC2 instruction a data register number DO through 07999 followed by the preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D7999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram DC Program List Data register to compare with Prem Adis Q Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram DC gt Program List Ds 5 LO Prom Ads pis The D
150. USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Comparing BCC Codes The OpenNet Controller compares the BCC calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data to check for any error in the incoming communication due to external noises or other causes If a disparity is found in the compari son an error code is stored in the data register designated as receive status in the RXD instruction For user communica tion error code see page 17 25 Example 1 BCC is calculated for the first byte through the sixth byte using the XOR format converted in binary to ASCII and compared with the BCC code appended to the seventh and eighth bytes of the incoming data Incoming Data nn tt on an BCC Calculation Range BCC Calculation Result Comparison result is true to indicate 31h 32h 6 33h 6 34h 35h 36h 07h A Binary to ASCII Conversion ro 30h 37h Example 2 BCC is calculated for the first byte through the sixth byte using the ADD format converted in binary to ASCII and compared with the BCC code appended to the seventh and eighth bytes of the incoming data Incoming Data nent etn an BCC Calculation Range Comparison result is false BCC Calculation Result 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36 135 status data register Binary to ASCII Conversion 43 5 33h 35h Receive Completion Output Designate an output QO through Q597 or internal relay MO through M2557 as an
151. When a gate input is not designated counting is always enabled Enable Comparison Output Click the check box to enable the high speed counter comparison output With this box checked the high speed current value is compared with the preset value The comparison output at terminal 5 comparison output is turned on when the current value exceeds the preset value The comparison output is turned off by turning on special internal relay M8010 comparison output reset Current Value Automatic Reset Click the check box to enable the high speed counter current value automatic reset When the comparison output is turned on with this box checked the current value in D8045 is reset to the value stored in D8046 high speed counter reset value automatically The high speed counter counts subsequent input pulses starting at the reset value Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS High speed Counter Timing Chart Current Value rN UC 0 65535 65534 Preset Value Phase Z Input Terminal 4 Comparison Output Terminal 5 Comparison Output Reset M8010 Up Down Status M8130 Comparison ON Status M8131 Current Value Zero clear M8132 Current Value Overflow
152. WindLDR menu bar select Online gt PLC Status 3 Under the Protect Status in the PLC Status dialog box press the Change but Protect Code ton The Change Protect dialog box appears 4 Enter the protect code and click either button under Disable Enable Protect Disable Protect Disables the user program protection temporarily When the CPU is powered up again the protection stored in the user program takes effect again Enable Protect After disabling enables the user program protection again ghep without turning power up and down the CPU 5 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Memory Card A user program can be stored on a miniature memory card from a computer running WindLDR and downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU module without using a computer This feature is available on FC3A CP2KM and FC3A CP2SM only Using a memory card the user program in the CPU module can be replaced where WindLDR or a computer cannot be used Depending whether a memory card is installed in the OpenNet Controller CPU module or not a user program stored on the memory card or in the CPU is executed respectively Memory Card User Program Installed in the CPU The user program stored on the memory card is executed Not installed in the CPU The user program stored in the flash ROM in the CPU modul
153. Write Protection The user program in the CPU module can be protected against reading and or writing by including a password in the user program This function is effective for security of user programs Week Programmer Function Week programmer instructions can be programmed to compare the preset date and time with the internal realtime calen dar clock When the preset values are reached designated outputs can be turned on and off as programmed for the week RUN STOP Selection at Startup when Keep Data is Broken When data to be kept such as keep designated counter values are broken while the CPU is powered down the user can select whether the CPU starts to run or not to prevent undesirable operation at the next startup Module ID Registration Another protection method to run or stop operation is the module ID registration When disparity is found between the module ID registration and actual modules in the system setup the CPU can be made to start to run or not User Memory Download from Memory Card A user program can be transferred using WindLDR from a computer to a miniature memory card The handy miniature card can be inserted into the CPU module to download the user program User programs can be replaced without the need for connecting to a computer This feature is available on CPU modules FC3A CP2KM and FC3A CP2SM Constant Scan Time The scan time may vary whether basic and advanced instructions are executed or not d
154. and the SFR instruction followed by the first bit and the number of bits Ladder Diagram First Bit Program List Reset Prgm Adrs Instruction Rung 1 First Bit RO to R255 of Bits of Bits 1 to 256 Rung 2 H m 9 I3 Structural Diagram Shift Direction Caution When using Wind LDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be gt programmed immediately above and below the SFR instruction To program other instructions start a new Reset rung If an instruction is entered above or below the SFR instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly eT Tea 11 First Bit of Bits 4 Reset Input The reset input will cause the value of each bit of the shift register to return to zero Initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 may be used to initialize the shift register at start up Pulse Input The pulse input triggers the data to shift The shift is in the forward direction for a forward shift register and in reverse for a reverse shift register A data shift will occur upon the leading edge of a pulse that is when the pulse turns on If the pulse has been on and stays on no data shift will occur Data Input The data input is the information which is shifted into the first bit when a forward data shift occurs or into the last bit when a reverse data shift occurs Note When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared
155. as shown below D8182 0 1 Peripheral fault D8183 0100h Logical device number 1 0 Error Codes for User Errors USER FAIL OBB1hex PF The specified INTERBUS device indicated a peripheral fault Meaning Remedy Check the specified INTERBUS device Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBDFhex LOOK F Meaning OR FAIL The controller board has stopped data transmission and is searching for the error location and cause Cause A bus error occurred Remedy Wait until the search for the error has been completed The controller board will inform you of the result Add_Error_Info Error Codes for General Bus Errors BUS FAIL OBElhex BUS FA IL A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off However no error was detected Meaning when checking the current configuration This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devi
156. be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long COLI y 5 When bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 135 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTL Data Type Word MOWW Si Dl 8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 40966 D10 REP When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 40966 to data register D10 ROTL W S1 bits D10 1 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 1 CY MSB D10 LSB Before rotation D10 40966 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 M8003 CY MSB D10 LSB After first rot
157. but response to disturbance will become slow While the PID action is in progress the proportional gain value can be changed by the user 148 Integral Time When only the proportional action is used a certain amount of difference offset between the set point S3 and the pro cess variable S1 0 remains after the control target has reached a stable state An integral action is needed to reduce the offset to zero The integral time is a parameter to determine the amount of integral action When auto tuning is used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 1 AT PID or 2 AT an integral time is determined automatically and does not have to be specified by the user When auto tuning is not used by setting the operation mode S143 to 0 PID set a required value of 1 through 65535 to specify an integral time of 0 1 sec through 6553 5 sec to the data register designated by 51 8 When S1 8 is set to 0 the integral action is disabled When the integral time is too short the integral action becomes too large resulting in hunching of a long period In con trast when the integral time is too long it takes a long time before the process variable S 1 0 reaches the set point S3 While the PID action is in progress the integral time value can be changed by the user S149 Derivative Time The derivative action is a function to adjust the process variable S1 0 to the set point S3 by increasing the manipulated variable D1 when the set
158. by one The borrow M8003 is not set by this operation In the double word data type valid values are 0 to 4 294 967 295 If the designated operand is currently 0 the value will become 4 294 967 295 after it is decremented by one The borrow M8003 is not set by this operation Example INC H SOTU INC W 010 100 1 gt 010 101 n When input IO is turned on the data of D10 is incremented by one If the SOTU is not programmed the data of D10 is incremented in each scan Example DEC H SOTU HH DEC W Dn D20 1 020 When input is turned on the data of D20 is decremented by one If the SOTU is not programmed the data of D20 is decremented in each scan dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS ROOT Root ga ROOT R S1 D1 JS1 gt D1 TOP UE When input is on the square root of operand designated by S1 is extracted and is stored to the destination designated by D1 Valid values are 0 to 65535 The square root is calculated to two decimals omitting the figures below the second place of decimals Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Binary data XX X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results XX Fo
159. catch input function is used to receive short pulses from sensor outputs regardless of the scan time Input pulses shorter than one scan time can be received First eight inputs of every DC input module can be designated to catch a rising or falling edge of short input pulses The Function Area Settings is used to designate first eight inputs of every DC input module as a catch input or normal input Input signals to normal input terminals are read when the END instruction is executed at the end of a scan Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Catch Input Specifications Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width 40 usec when the input filter is set to 0 msec 150 usec when the input filter is set to 0 msec Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Filter Catch tab OpenNet Function Area Setting Module Number Selection Module 1 to 15 Module 01 Input Filter Time Selection Groups of 8 inputs 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 32 msec Default 4 msec Module Number Selection Input Filter Time Selection Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection IN_CTHI Normal Input default IN_CTH2
160. designated by source operands S1 through S5 are moved to 5 data registers starting with D20 designated by destination operand D1 30 p24 30 NSET D 51 52 53 DI m D50 0 B 9 12 34 56 D50 LC p51 12 S1 12 32 bit Three 32 bit constants 12 34 and 56 D50 through D55 S2 34 32 bit ears When input is turned on 3 constants designated by source oper s3 56 32 bit b53 34 ands S1 through S3 are moved to 6 data registers starting with D50 m 054 0 designated by destination operand D1 L 055 56 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS NRS Data Repeat Set 8 SI gt DL D2 DN 1 NRS 51 D1 RRR RK KK k K k When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by S1 is set to N blocks of destinations starting with operand designated by D1 N blocks of 16 32 bit data Source data for repeat set D1 First167 20180 N Data Repeat Set D1 1 or D1 2 Second 16 4 32 bit data Third 16 32 bit data gt Ee S1 164 32 bit data B D14 of 0144 1 1 or D1 2N 2 Nth 167 32 bit data Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat N W N blocks Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X X 1 Source 1 Operand number to move X X X X X X X
161. designated with repeat operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are moved to the destination As a result only the last of the source operands is moved to the destination Data Type Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 0 MOVW SIR 1 REP Taio Faaa E Tr p1o 110 D20 112 D11 111 D21 12 112 022 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 3 Destination Repeat 0 MOVD SIR 1 REP H p10 _110 p20 _114 011 111 021 115 D12 112 D22 D13 113 D23 014 114 024 015 115 025 Repeat Destination Operand When the D1 destination is designated to repeat the source operand designated by S1 is moved to all destination oper ands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the destination designated by D1 Note The NRS N data repeat set instruction has the same effect as the MOV instruction with only the destination desig nated to repeat Data Type Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOV W S1 D1 R REP Hs D10 D20 3 010 110 020
162. digits designated by S2 are within the valid range If the 51 or S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the ATOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples ATOH Quantity of Digits 4 sotu LY ATOH W s1 S2 DI Heen pio 011 D12 D13 Quantity of Digits 3 SOTU HY ATOH W 51 52 D1 H somu D10 3 D20 D10 D11 D12 e Quantity of Digits 2 SOTU HH ATOH W S1 52 D1 E somu D10 2 D20 D10 D11 e Quantity of Digits 1 ATOH W S1 S2 D1 3 D10 1 020 D10 148 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 49 0031h
163. equal to 250 C M10 is turned on 4000 x 250 1300 769 23 When M10 is on while monitor input I1 is on QO heater power switch is forced off and Q1 high alarm light is forced on CMP gt W S1 L100 52 769 D1 M10 Notes for Using the PID Instruction e Since the PID instruction requires continuous operation keep on the start input for the PID instruction The high alarm output S2 4 and the low alarm output S2 5 work while the start input for the PID instruction is on These alarm outputs however do not work when a PID instruction execution error occurs S1 2 stores 100 through 107 due to data error in control data registers S1 0 through 814 26 or while the start input for the PID instruction is off Pro vide a program to monitor the process variable S4 separately e When a PID execution error occurs S142 stores 100 through 107 or when auto tuning is completed the manipulated variable D1 stores 0 and the control output S2 6 turns off Do not use the PID instruction in program branching instructions LABEL LJMP LCAL LRET JMP JEND MCS and MCR The PID instruction may not operate correctly in these instructions The PID instruction using the difference between the set point 53 and process variable S4 as input calculates the manipulated variable D1 according to the PID parameters such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S1 8 and derivative time 5 1 9 When th
164. inputs 8 bits nv i8 3 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 4 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 5 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 6 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 7 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i16 BIT16 DAT 16 point inputs 8 bits x 2 nv i24 BIT24 DAT 24 point inputs 8 bits x 3 nv i32 BIT32 DAT 32 point inputs 8 bits x 4 nv i40 BIT40_DAT 40 point inputs 8 bits x 5 nv_i48 BIT48_DAT 48 point inputs 8 bits x 6 nv i56 BIT56 DAT 56 point inputs 8 bits x 7 nv i64 BIT64 DAT 64 point inputs 8 bits x 8 Output Network Variables Output Network Variable Data Type and Structure Used For nv o8 0 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 1 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 2 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv 08 3 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 4 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 5 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 6 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv o8 7 unsigned char 8 point outputs 8 bits nv 016 BIT16 DAT 16 point outputs 8 bits x 2 nv 024 BIT24 DAT 24 point outputs 8 bits x 3 nv 032 BIT32 DAT 32 point outputs 8 bits x 4 nv 040 BIT40_DAT 40 point outputs 8 bits 5 nv_048 BIT48_DAT 48 point outputs 8 bits x 6 nv_056 BIT56 DAT 56 point outputs 8 bits x 7 nv 064 BIT64 DAT 64 point outputs 8 bits x 8 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 23 Phone 800 894 0412 F
165. is 50A total AC power source cannot be used Internal current draw of the expansion power supply module is 30 mA Power Voltage 24VDC _ 4 Inrush Current 50A Same power source for CPU Connector 1 NC Seen cet Sad 2 NC iri 3 24V DC red 4 OV blue Dasseni 5 FG green Ground The length of the attached cable is 1 meter 3 28 feet When a longer cable is needed use the attached contacts to connect the cable to the attached connector OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Remote 1 Master Module The remote I O master module is used to configure a remote I O network to increase I O points at remote stations The OpenNet Controller uses the INTERBUS network for communication with a maximum of 32 remote I O slave stations For the remote I O slave stations IDEC s SX5S communication I O terminals are used When using 32 SX5S modules with 16 input or output points a total of 512 I O points can be distributed to 32 remote slave stations at the maximum For details about the remote I O system see page 24 1 Remote 1 Master Module Type Number and Weight Parts Description 1 Module ID 2 FG Terminal 3 Connector 1 4 Connector 2 5 Status LED Module Name Remote 1 Master Module Type No FC3A SX5SM1 Weight appr
166. keep types and D100 through D7999 are clear types 54 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Module ID Selection and Run Stop Operation upon Disparity The CPU module can be mounted with a maximum of seven I O modules and functional modules without using an expan sion power supply module When using an expansion power supply module a maximum of 15 modules can be mounted with one CPU module The Module ID function is used to register the type of module installed in each slot If the information in the memory about the module ID for each slot is found different from the actual module installed at startup the CPU can be stopped to run in order to prevent accidents Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Module ID tab Run Stop Keep Module ID Fiter Catch Data Link Module Type Not Set Not Set Digital 170 Functional Module Module ID Operation Selection v Continue operation whether any discrepancy is found 3 Click Module 01 through Module 15 in the Module Selection list box to select a slot number to m
167. least M17 M10 M7 MO significant bit M17 is the MSB most significant bit dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Word MOWW s1 Di 80902 10 810 D2 When input 10 is on constant 810 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data register D2 designated by destination operand D1 Data move operation for the integer data type is the same as for the word data type Data Type Double Word STs Dl REPL ee 10 810 D2 When input 10 is on constant 810 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data registers D2 and D3 designated by destination operand D1 Data move operation for the long data type is the same as for the double word data type Data Type Word D10 gt D2 H MOV W e 57 REP When input I1 is on the data in data register D10 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data register D2 designated by destination operand D1 Data Type Double Word D10 D11 gt D2 D3 H 5 jn nee When input I1 is on the data in data registers D10 and D11 designated by source operand 51 is moved to data registers D2 and D3 desig nated by destination operand D1 Double word Data Move in Data Registers and Link Registers DO D1 D2 810 810 DO D1 D2 0 lt 0 D3 810 lt 810
168. linear conversion is enabled S144 set to 1 the valid range is 232768 to 32767 that is a value after linear conversion Use a data register to designate a nega tive value for a set point when the linear conversion is used For details see page 20 12 Source operand S4 process variable is designated using a data register or link register When reading input data from an analog input module designate a proper link register number depending on the slot position of the analog input module and the channel number connected to the analog input For details see page 20 12 Destination operand D1 manipulated variable stores 32768 through 32767 that is a calculation result of PID action For details see page 20 13 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Source Operand S1 Control Register Store appropriate values to data registers starting with the operand designated by S1 before executing the PID instruction as required and make sure that the values are within the valid range Operands S1 0 through S1 2 are for read only and operands 1 23 through 1426 are reserved for the system program Operand Function Description R W When 144 linear conversion 1 enable linear conversion 5140 Process variable Stores the process variable after conversio
169. lt SFR and SFRN Forward and Reverse Shift Register SOTU and SOTD Single Output Up and MCS and MCR Master Control Set and Reset HAPTER 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Advanced Instruction Structure of an Advanced 5 Input Condition for Advanced Instructions Source and Destination Operands Using Timer or Counter as Source Operand Using Timer or Counter as Destination Data Types for Advanced Instructions Discontinuity of Operand No Operation C HAPTER 9 M OVE INSTRUCTIONS MOV MONG EEG AR EXON e ES dena aub SEES MOWN Move Not IMOV Indirect Move IMOVN Indirect Move Block NSET N Data Set sisse y o ea NRS Data Repeat Set IBMV Indirect Bit IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not XCHG Exchange xd nua exe Rer aa heeded
170. moved to D21 D8013 D21 SOTU TXD S1 D1 D2 TXD2 is executed to send 73 byte data through the MO 2 73 M1 DO RS232C port 2 to the printer SP SP SP SP P R N T SP T 20h 20h 2Dh 2Dh 2Dh 20h 50h 52h 49h 4Eh 54h 20h 54h SP CR LF CR LF SP SP SP 45h 53h 54h 20h 2Dh 2Dh 2Dh ODh 0 ODh 0 20h 20h 20h D20 hour data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 2 dig D20 Conversion BCDASCII Digits 2 REP 01 its are sent H SP 01 D21 minute data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 2 D21 Conversion BCD ASCII Digits 2 REP 01 M CR LF CR LF 8 i 4Dh ODh OAh ODh OAh SP SP SP C 20h 20h 20h 43h Akh 54h 32h 2Eh 2Eh 2Eh D31 Conversion ene pig s 4 REP 01 CR LF SP SP SP 3 ODh 0Ah 20h 20h 20h 44h 30h 33h 30h 2Eh 2Eh 2Eh D31 counter C2 data is converted from BCD to ASCH and 4 digits are sent D30 Conversion BCD ASCII Digits 4 REP 01 D30 data is converted from BCD to ASCII and 4 digits are CR LF CR LF sent ODh 0Ah ODh 0Ah END 17 32 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Sample Program User Communication RXD This example demonstrates a program to receive data from a barcode reader with a RS232C port using the user communi cation RXD1 receive instruction System Setup
171. network and provides details on the DeviceNet system setup and the DeviceNet slave module specifications The OpenNet Controller can be linked to DeviceNet networks For communication through the DeviceNet network the DeviceNet slave module is available Mounting the DeviceNet slave module beside the OpenNet Controller CPU module makes a slave station used as an I O terminal in a DeviceNet network The slave station can transfer I O data to and from the master station just as an ordinary I O module in a distributed network DeviceNet Slave Module Features Since the DeviceNet slave module conforms to the DeviceNet specifications the OpenNet Controller can be linked to DeviceNet networks consisting of DeviceNet compliant products manufactured by many different vendors such as I O ter minals sensors drives operator interfaces and barcode readers The transmit receive data quantity can be selected from 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits in 1 byte increments One DeviceNet slave module enables the OpenNet Controller CPU module to transmit 64 bits and receive 64 bits at the maximum to and from the DeviceNet master station About DeviceNet DeviceNet was originally developed by Allen Bradley as a network for sensors actuators and other discrete devices and later the specifications were opened Now major automotive manufacturers and various industries employ DeviceNet networks DeviceNet Features The network configuration is based on the bus syste
172. not necessary to program the END instruc tion after the last programmed instruction The END instruction already exists at every unused address When an address is used for programming the END instruction is removed A scan is the execution of all instructions from address zero to the END instruction The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time The scan time varies with respect to program length which corresponds to the address where the END instruction is found During the scan time program instructions are processed sequentially This is why the output instruction closest to the END instruction has priority over a previous instruction for the same output No output is initiated until all logic within a scan is processed Output occurs simultaneously and this is the first part of the END instruction execution The second part of the END instruction execution is to monitor all inputs also done simultaneously Then program instructions are ready to be pro cessed sequentially once again Ladder Diagram Program List Prom Adr 10 7 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL dec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes general rules of using advanced instructions terms data types and formats used for advanced Advanced Instruction List instructions Group NOP Move Data Comparison B
173. not use these variable names otherwise verification of the application program will be difficult Precautions for writing and reading registers Make a program to write and read data to and from registers in the LONWORKS interface module as shown in the sample programs on pages 26 21 and 26 22 While data write or read is in progress do not execute any other command Precautions for downloading an application program to the flash memory through the network A special tool is required to download an application program Before starting download stop the OpenNet Controller CPU operation While downloading is in progress make sure the power voltage is within the rated operating voltage range Precautions for flash memory used for the application program Do not store variables to the flash memory To hold variables and other data while power is off use the RAM backup func tion of the CPU module The flash memory can be rewritten a maximum of 10 000 times Precautions for system setup Set the retry cycles of the message service to a value of 1 or more dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LONWoRKS Interface Module Internal Structure The LONWORKS interface module block diagram is illustrated in the figure below EEUU LED Service EEUU Button RUN ERR LED LED 10 0 IO 1 Transceiver Neuron
174. of inputting the process variable may cause equipment damage or accidents ID PID Control When input is on auto tuning and or PID action is exe H m ot lt a cuted according to the value 0 through 2 stored in a data register operand assigned for operation mode KK KKK ORK KKK OK KKKK KKKKK KKKKK A maximum of 42 PID instructions can be used in a user program Valid Operands Operand Function Q M R D L Constant 1 Source 1 Control register D0 D7973 S2 Source 2 Control relay Q0 Q590 MOM2550 3 Source 3 Set point 0 0 07999 0 4000 Process variable S4 Source 4 0 07999 11004705 D1 Destination 1 Manipulated variable D0 D7999 Source operand S1 control register uses 27 data registers starting with the operand designated by S1 Data registers DO through D7973 can be designated by S1 For details see the following pages Source operand S2 control relay uses 8 points of outputs or internal relays starting with the operand designated by S2 Outputs QO through Q590 or internal relays MO through M2550 can be designated by S2 For details see page 20 10 Source operand S3 set point When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 the valid range of the set point S3 is 0 through 4000 which can be designated using a data register or constant When the
175. off to enable integral start coefficient When the PID action is executed according to the PID parameters determined by auto tuning proper control is ensured with a moderate overshoot and no offset It is also possible to set a required value of 1 through 100 to start the integral action at 1 through 100 to the data regis ter designated by 1 10 When S1 10 stores or a value larger than 100 except for 200 the integral start coefficient is set to 100 When 200 is set to 1 10 the integral action is enabled only while the process variable S4 is within the proportional band When the process variable runs off the proportional band due to disturbance or changing of the set point the integral action is disabled so that adjustment of the output manipulated variable S1 1 is improved with little overshoot and undershoot To enable the integral start coefficient turn off the integral start coefficient disable control relay S2 3 When S2 3 is turned on the integral start coefficient is disabled and the integral term takes effect at the start of the PID action When the integral term is enabled at the start of the PID action a large overshoot is caused The overshoot can be sup pressed by delaying the execution of the integral action in coordination with the proportional term The PID instruction is designed to achieve proper control with a small or moderate overshoot when the integral start coefficient is set to 100 Overshoot is most su
176. on when the CPU module fails to receive an acknowledge reply during communication through the LON WORKS network with the acknowledge ACKD service enabled When this bit goes on the ERR LED also goes on The transaction timeout is enabled only when the ACKD service is selected b11 transmission error This bit goes on when a CRC error is detected while receiving incoming data from the LONWORKS network When this bit goes on the ERR LED also goes on 1 O Counts Status Area L 13 L 13 b15 b12 transmit bytes b11 b8 receive bytes b7 b0 unused This link register stores the transmit and receive byte counts selected in the Function Area Setting Open Bus in WindLDR 26 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Link Registers and Network Variables Network variables are allocated to data areas of the link registers as shown below Tow co em wise eta s mei xem 06 mei mem atc Example Network variables nv_i8 0 and nv_i8 1 are allocated to link register data areas L100 00 through L100 15 as listed below nv i8 1 nv i8 0 L100 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b4 b3 EPIS Be dS Transmission Time The transmission time depends on the network configuration application program and user p
177. operand for the receive completion output When the start input for a RXD instruction is turned on preparation for receiving data is initiated followed by data con version and storage When a sequence of all data receive operation is complete the designated output or internal relay is turned on Conditions for Completion of Receiving Data After starting to receive data the RXD instruction can be completed in three ways When an end delimiter is received except when a BCC exists immediately after the end delimiter When receive timeout occurs When a specified byte count of data has been received Data receiving is completed when one of the above three conditions is met To abort a RXD instruction use the user com munication receive instruction cancel flag M8022 or M8023 See page 17 21 17 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Receive Status Designate a data register DO through 07998 as an operand to store the receive status information including a receive sta tus code and a user communication error code Receive Status Code Receive Status Code Status Description From turning on the start input for a RXD instruction to read the 16 Preparing data receive receive format until the RXD instruction is enabled by an END pro cessing From enabling the RXD instruction by an END proces
178. other than the first byte in the receive format of a RXD instruction the OpenNet Controller will recognize the end of valid communication although RXD instructions without an end delimiter can also be executed When a constant value is designated at other than the first byte of source operand S1 the one or multiple byte data serves as an end delimiter to end the processing of the received data The valid end delimiter value depends on the data bits selected in Configure gt Function Area Settings gt Comm Port gt Port 1 or 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C gt Communication Parameters dialog box See page 17 3 When 8 data bits are selected end delimiters can be 00h through FFh When 7 data bits are selected as default end delimiters can be 00h through 7Fh Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal notation into the source data If a character in incoming data matches the end delimiter the RXD instruction ends receiving data at this point and starts subsequent receive processing as specified Even if a character matches the end delimiter at a position earlier than expected the RXD instruction ends receiving data there If a BCC code is included in the receive format of a RXD instruction an end delimiter can be positioned immediately before or after the BCC code If a data register or skip is designated between the BCC and end delimiter correct receiving is not ensured When a RXD instruction without an end delimiter is
179. out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the MSB Data Type Word bits to shift 1 MSB 51 LSB Before shift 0 gt 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Shift to the right M8003 MSB 51 LSB After shift 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to shift 1 Before shift MSB 51 LSB 0 gt 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Shift to the right M8003 After shift MSB 51 LSB o i oJo 1 i o i po i i i1 o o 1 1 o i1 o o 1 1 o 1 o 1 1 1 o o 1 1 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit shift X X X X bits Quantity of bits to shift 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to shift can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Sin
180. point S3 is changed or when the difference between the process variable S1 0 and the set point S3 is increased due to disturbance The derivative time is a parameter to determine the amount of derivative action When auto tuning is used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 1 AT PID or 2 AT a derivative time is determined automatically and does not have to be specified by the user When auto tuning is not used by setting the operation mode S1 3 to 0 PID set a required value of 1 through 65535 to specify a derivative time of 0 1 sec through 6553 5 sec to the data register designated by 1 9 When 81 49 is set to 0 the derivative action is disabled dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 205 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION When the derivative time is set to a large value the derivative action becomes large When the derivative action is too large hunching of a short period is caused While the PID action is in progress the derivative time value can be changed by the user 51 10 Integral Start Coefficient The integral start coefficient is a parameter to determine the point in percent of the proportional term where to start the integral action Normally the data register designated by 51 10 integral start coefficient stores 0 to select an integral start coefficient of 100 and the integral start coefficient disable control relay S2 3 is turned
181. port 2 to a remote terminal with an RS232C port Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constan Repeat S1 Source 1 Transmit data X X D1 Destination 1 Transmit completion output X D2 Destination 2 Transmit status register X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Transmit data designated by operand S1 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When transmission is complete an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The transmit status data register DO through D7998 stores the status of transmission and error code The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data The same data registers should not be used as transmit status registers for TXD1 TXD2 instructions and receive status registers for RXD1 RXD2 instructions Precautions for Programming TXD Instruction The OpenNet Controller has five formatting areas each for executing TXD1 and TXD2 instructions so five TXD1 and five TXD2 instructions can be processed at the same time If inputs to more than five TXD1 or TXD2 instructions are turned on at the same time an error code is set to the transmit status data register designated by operand D2 in the exce
182. possible Run the power supply wiring as far away as possible from motor lines Grounding CPU Module To prevent electrical shocks or malfunctioning due to noise connect the FG terminal to the ground using a wire of UL1015 AWG22 or UL1007 AWGIS grounding resistance 10090 maximum Do not connect the grounding wire in common with the grounding wire of motor equipment 2 0 0 CO CO CB 24VDC Grounding Remote 1 Master and LonWorks Interface Modules Connect the FG terminal to the ground using a wire of UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 grounding resistance 1000 maximum and a ring shape wire terminal Tighten the M3 FG terminal screw to a torque of 0 6 to 1 0 N m Do not con nect the grounding wire in common with the grounding wire of motor equipment Note For power supply wiring to the expansion power supply module see page 2 35 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Terminal Connection e Make sure that the operating conditions and environments are within the specification values Be sure to connect the grounding wire to a proper ground otherwise electrical shocks may be caused Do not touch live terminals otherwise electrical shocks may be caused Do not touch terminals immediately after power is turned off ot
183. program Do not access this area 6 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL idee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Example Slot No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Func tional Module Analog Input Func tional Module Analog Output Func tional Module OpenNet Interface OpenNet Controller CPU Module Output Output Module Module 16 pt Output Input Module 32 pt Input 32 pt Output The system setup shown above will have operand numbers allocated to each module as follows Slot No Module Operand Numbers 1 Functional Module 1 L100 through L127 2 Output Module 1 QO through Q7 Q10 through Q17 Q20 through Q27 Q30 through Q37 3 Functional Module 2 L200 through L227 4 Output Module 2 Q40 through Q47 Q50 through Q57 5 Functional Module 3 L300 through L327 6 Input Module 1 10 through 17 110 through 117 120 through 127 130 through 137 In the system setup shown above the analog input module in slot 5 uses link register L300 for channel 0 data and L304 for channel 4 data Bit Designation of Link Register The following table illustrates how to read and write link register bits primarily used for basic instructions and some advanced instructions as bit operands Link Register Mapping for Functional Modules Allocation Numbers Functional Module Reserved Area Access Prohibited Status Area Data Area
184. program does not have to include internal relay M8003 to process carrying If a carry goes on unexpectedly an output can be programmed to be set as a warning indicator If a carry goes on the number of times a carry occurs can be added to be used as one word data in a specified register Examples ADD Data Type Word This example demonstrates the use of a carry signal from special internal relay M8003 to set an alarm signal S1 S2 1 D2 500 D2 ADD W D2 500 D2 When a carry occurs output QO is set as a warning indicator Acknowledge Pushbutt When the acknowledge pushbutton input is pressed the warning indicator is reset 11 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Data Type Integer ADD S1 52 Dl D10 D20 030 pio 4 211 15 Data Type Double Word ADD D S1 52 Dl REP 10 D10 020 030 10 011 1957400 20 21 4112600 gt 1 6070000 Data Long ADD L S1 52 Dl REP 10 D10 020 030 10 011 216283 020 021 964355 030 031 748072 Example SUB Data Type Word The following example demonstrates the use of special internal relay M8003 to process a borrow D12
185. slave station number using the up and down buttons on the left Select the quantity of data registers used for transmit and receive data per slave station The data words can be selected from 0 through 10 words dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Refresh Modes In the data link communication the master station sends data to a slave station and receives data from the slave station one after another After receiving data from slave stations the master station stores the data into data registers allocated to each slave station The process of updating data into data registers is called refresh The master station refreshes the received data in two ways separate refresh or simultaneous refresh mode Differences of these two refresh modes are listed below Mode Separate Refresh Mode Simultaneous Refresh Mode Since the master station refreshes received Since the master station uses an interrupt pro Master Station data at the END processing of the user pro cessing to refresh received data while executing Scan Time gram the scan time in the master station is the user program the scan time in the master affected Station is not affected All data of fixed data lengths are transmitted Transm Frame as selected in the Function Area Settings Only data that has been changed is transmitted Data received from all sl
186. stations When using 32 SX5S modules with 16 input or output points a total of 512 I O points can be distributed to 32 remote s lave stations at the maximum The remote I O network uses the INTER BUS protocol for communication The total cable length can be 12 8 km 7 95 miles maximum One remote I O master module can be mounted with the OpenNet Controller CPU module In addition a maximum of seven functional modules including OpenNet interface modules and analog I O modules can be mounted with one Open Net Controller CPU module LonWorks DeviceNet LLL d na oo oo mae 2 Mi w E E Be ew ig 5 o B EERROR g nun ig na ig na 59 O Hsc our see iB iB na B so a ua Sol a D D 88 688 z 8 q oo eel Wee 3 a oo ee 8 20 ee a Bo oo bo Belg o gje RE
187. the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link with Other Equipment Separate Refresh M ode The data link communication system can include IDEC s HG2A operator interfaces MICRO MICRO C micro programma ble controllers and FA 3S programmable controllers using serial interface modules Data Link with HG2A Operator Interface OpenNet Controller Settings HG2A Settings HG2A Settings Transmit data 2 words x 6 Receive data 2 words x 6 Baud rate 19200 bps First slave station number 1 First slave station number 7 6 slave stations 6 slave stations HG2A 1 HG2A 2 Data Link with MICRO MICRO C OpenNet Controller Settings MICRO Settings MICRO C Settings Transmit data 2 words Receive data 2 words Function selector switch 1 Function selector switch 2 Baud rate 19200 bps Master Station Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 uH MICRO MICRO3C Data Link with FA 3S High performance CPU using Serial Interface Module PF3S SIF4 OpenNet Controller Settings PF3S SIF4 Settings PF3S SIF4 Settings Transmit data 6 words Receive data 6 words Baud rate 19200 or 38400 bps Data link slave station mode Data link sla
188. the output manipulated variable limit is disabled S242 set to off while the PID action is in progress the data regis ter designated by 51 1 holds 0 through 100 of the manipulated variable D1 omitting values less than 0 and greater than 100 The percent value in S1 1 determines the ON duration of the control output S246 in proportion to the control period S1 13 When the output manipulated variable limit is enabled S242 set to on the manipulated variable D1 is stored to the out put manipulated variable S1 1 according to the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 and the output manipu lated variable lower limit S1 17 as summarized in the table below While manual mode is enabled with the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 set to on S1 1 stores 0 through 100 of the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 and D1 stores an indefinite value While auto tuning is in progress 51 1 stores 0 through 100 of the AT output manipulated variable 814 22 and D1 stores an indefinite value Examples of Output Manipulated Variable Values Output M anipulated Output M anipulated Output M anipulated Manipulated Variable Output M anipulated Variable Limit Enable Variable Upper Limit Variable Lower Limit p D1 Variable S242 51 16 51 17 S141 gt 100 100 OFF disabled 1 to 99 1 to 99 0 0 250 50 50 25 26 to 49 26 to 49 lt 25 25 ON enabled gt 100 50 10050 1 to 99 1 to 9
189. the quantity of the input or output points whichever is larger of the slave station When using the SX5S as a slave the length code can be 8 bits 1 byte or 16 bits 2 bytes 151413121110 9 8 7 6 54 32 1 0 Always 0 Value 8107 816 Unit _ 0 0 reserved 0 1 Nibbles 1 0 Bytes 1 1 Bits ID Code 1514131211109 8 7 6 54 32 1 0 Always 0 I O Type Quantity of PCP Words peripherals communication protocol Station Type ID Code Examples ID Code Low Byte Type 01h Digital output remote bus station example SX5S SBT16K 02h Digital input remote bus station example SX5S SBN16S 03h Digital 1 remote bus station example SX5S SBM16K 31h Analog output remote bus station 32h Analog input remote bus station Device Level 1514131211109 817 6 54 32 1 0 Always 0 INTERBUS Device Level 0 through 15 244 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Special Data Register Numbers for Remote 1 Node Information Allocation No D8050 D8051 D8052 D8053 D8054 D8055 D8056 D8057 D8058 D8059 D8060 D8061 D8062 D8063 D8064 D8065 D8066 D8067 D8068 D8069 D8070 D8071 D8072 D8073 D8074 D8075 D8076 D8077 D8078 D8079
190. the same rung the program is not compiled correctly Timing Chart Preset Input 10 m Up Pulse 11 gg ON Down Pulse 12 OFF Counter C1 Value 500 501502 501500499 0 1 500500 ON OFF Counter C1 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL The same counter number cannot be programmed more than once The preset input must be turned on ini tially so that the current value returns to the preset value The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin When the up pulse and down pulses are on simultaneously no pulse is counted The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 e After the current value reaches 0 counting down it changes to 65535 on the next count down After the current value reaches 65535 counting up it changes to 0 on the next count up When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be desig nated as clear type counters using the Function Area Settings see page 5 3 Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without transferring the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor then select Online Point Write To change counter preset value specify the counter number with a capital C and a new preset value To change a counter current value specify the counter num ber with a small c and a new current value while the counter reset inp
191. the user program Since the LCAL instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required LRET Label Return This instruction is placed at the end of a subroutine called by the LCAL instruction When the sub LRET routine is completed normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction The LRET must be placed at the end of the subroutine starting with a LABEL instruction When the LRET is programmed at other places a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat Correct Structure for Calling Subroutine When a LCAL instruction is executed the remaining program instructions on the same rung may not be executed upon return if input conditions are changed by the subroutine After the LRET instruction of a subroutine program execution begins with the instruction following the LCAL instruction depending on current input condition When instructions following a LCAL instruction must be executed after the subroutine is called make sure the subroutine does not change input conditions unfavorably In addition include subsequent instructions in a new line separated from the LCAL instruction Correct Incorrect MOWW S1 D1 REP DO D1 LCAL S1 0 ho MOVW S1 1 D20 D21
192. time 5 1 8 derivative time S149 and control direction S240 PID action is not executed S144 Linear Conversion 0 Disable linear conversion Linear conversion is not executed When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 the analog input data 0 through 4000 from the analog I O module is stored to the process variable S4 and the same value is stored to the process variable S140 without conversion Enable linear conversion The linear conversion function is useful for scaling the process variable to the actual measured value in engineering units When the linear conversion is enabled S 1 4 set to 1 the analog input data 0 through 4000 from the analog I O mod ule is linear converted and the result is stored to the process variable S1 0 When using the linear conversion set proper values to the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 and linear conversion minimum value S1 6 to specify the linear conversion output range When using the linear conversion function in a temperature control application temperature values can be used to designate the set point 53 high alarm value S1 14 low alarm value S1 15 and AT set point S1 21 and also to read the process variable S1 0 Linear Conversion Result Linear Conversion Maximum Value S1 5 Set point S3 AT set point S1 21 and process variable S1 0 must be within this range Linear Conversion Minimum Value S1 6 g Analog Input Dat
193. turned on Is the shield of the INTERBUS cable terminated correctly NO Terminate the shield of the INTERBUS cable correctly see page 24 15 Are FG terminals connected to the ground correctly Connect the FG terminal on the master and slave modules to a proper ground Is any cable connector unplugged Plug in the cable connector correctly Is any network cable broken Repair or replace the cable Are all remote 1 slave stations powered up Power all remote I O slave stations Call IDEC for assistance End Initialize the remote 1 network by turning on special internal relay M8030 INTERBUS master initialize or power down and up the OpenNet Controller CPU module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 17 The PF peripheral fault LED on the remote 1 master module is on Monitor special data register D8183 INTERBUS master error location using WindLDR to locate the remote 1 node number hexadecimal where an error occurred Remove the cause of the error referring to the manual for the node END 27 24 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL A module error occurred at a r
194. value 103 The output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 is set to a value smaller than the out put manipulated variable lower limit 51 17 When the linear conversion is enabled 5144 set to 1 the AT set point 61 21 15 setto a PID action or AT is 104 value larger than the linear conversion maximum value 51 5 or smaller than the linear con stopped because of version minimum value 51 6 incorrect parameter 105 When the linear conversion is disabled S144 set to 0 the AT set point 51421 is settoa Settings value larger than 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 the set point S3 is set to a value 106 larger than the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 or smaller than the linear conver sion minimum value S146 When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 the set point 53 is set to a value larger than 4000 107 The current control action 52 0 differs from that determined at the start of AT To restart AT set correct parameters referring to the probable causes listed below The manipulated variable D1 or the control output 52 6 is not outputted to the control target correctly The process variable is not stored to the operand designated by S4 The AT output manipulated variable 51 22 is not set to a large value so that the process variable 54 can change sufficiently A large disturbance occurred AT failed to complete normally because the
195. with the JEND jump end instruction At the end of a program the JMP instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the JEND instruction These instructions are used to proceed through the portion of the program between the JMP and the JEND without pro cessing This is similar to the MCS MCR instructions except that the portion of the program between the MCS and MCR instruction i5 executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is on the JMP is valid and the program is not executed When the operation result immediately before the JMP instruction is off the JMP is invalid and the program is executed When the input condition to the JMP instruction is on and the JMP is executed other instructions between the JMP and JEND are executed as follows Instruction Status SOTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT and OUTN All are held in current status SET and RST All are held in current status Current values are held TML TIM TMH and TM S Timeout statuses are held Current values are held CNT CDP and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off Countout statuses are held Shift register bit statuses are held SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off The output from the last bit is held Input conditions cannot be set for the JEND instruction More than one JMP instruction can be used with one JEND instruction
196. www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Cables and Accessories APPENDIX Name Function Type No For mounting on both ends of OpenNet Controller module assembly End Plates a pair of end plates are supplied with the CPU module FCIZWI Modem Cable 1C Used to connect a modem to the OpenNet Controller RS232C port FC2AKM1C 3m 9 84 ft long with D sub 25 pin male connector to connect to modem Computer Link Cable 4C Used to connect an IBM PC to the OpenNet Controller RS232C p port 1 1 computer link with D sub 9 pin female connector to con FC2A KC4C 3m 9 84 ft long nect to computer Computer Link Cable 6C Used to connect an IBM PC to the OpenNet Controller RS485 ter p minals 1 1 computer link with D sub 9 pin female connector to FC2A KC6C 2m 6 56 ft long connect to computer User Communication Cable 1 Used to connect RS232C equipment to the OpenNet Controller RS232C port without a connector to connect to RS232C equip FC2AKP1C 2 4m 7 87 ft long ment PLC Connection Cable RS232C cable used to connect IDEC HG1B 2A 2C operator inter 197 193 3m 9 84 ft long face to the OpenNet Controller RS232C port INTERBUS Cable Used for wiring the remote 1 master and slave modules See page 24 15 Used for interface between an IBM PC and the OpenNet Controller RS232C RS485 Converter CPU modules in the computer link 1 N communication system or FC2AMD1 through modems RS232C Cable 4 wi
197. 0 25 5 26 6 OpenNet Controller User s Manual iii INDEX filter input 5 6 flash memory 26 14 forward shift register 7 20 free topology 26 7 function area setting DeviceNet slave station 25 8 LonWorks node 26 10 remote I O master station 24 13 communication 2 6 specifications 2 5 functional module operands 6 18 general error codes 27 3 specifications 2 4 header file 26 19 hex to ASCII 14 5 BCD 14 1 hexadecimal storage decimal values 8 4 high speed counter 2 6 5 9 comparison output reset M8010 6 9 timing chart 5 12 wiring diagram 5 13 housekeeping A 2 HTOA 14 5 HTOB 14 1 VO bus error 27 5 initialize error 27 5 counts 25 7 26 17 delay time A 2 error 25 7 pins 26 13 26 15 service A 2 wiring diagram 16 4 IBMV 9 11 IBMVN 9 12 ICMP gt 10 4 ID code 24 6 IMOV 9 6 IMOVN 9 7 INC 11 9 increment 11 9 indirect bit move 9 11 bit move not 9 12 move 9 6 move not 9 7 initialization 26 18 codes 26 18 error 25 7 string 23 2 23 3 23 4 23 7 commands 23 9 initialization string 23 2 initialize pulse M8120 6 10 in operation output M8125 6 11 input condition for advanced instructions 8 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL filter 5 6 module 2 7 terminal arrangement 2 11 modules A 3 network variables 26 23 wiring 3 5 installation and wiring 3 1 in control panel 3 4 instructions binary arithmetic 11 1 bit shift rotate 13 1 Boolean computation 12 1 coordinate conversion 19 1 data com
198. 0 Ladder Diagram Program List Pram Adis 00 01 2 LODN 90 3 OUT Ql Ladder Diagram Program List Pram Ads TO Q2 4 LOD TO 5 OUTN Q2 Ladder Diagram Program List y Cl 010 6 LODN C1 7 OUT Q10 SET and RST Reset E The SET and RST reset instructions are used to set on or reset off outputs internal relays shift register bits and link reg ister bits The same output can be set and reset many times within a program SET and RST instructions operate in every scan while the input is on Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart E 1 RST Valid Operands instruction 1 M T 7 5 L SET 0 597 0 2557 0 255 100 0 717 15 RST 8000 8117 1000 0 1317 15 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS AND 3H and ANDN And Not xd The AND instruction is used for programming a NO contact in series The ANDN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in series The AND or ANDN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON 00 ON Ql off When both inputs 10 and 11 are on output QO is on When either input IO or I1 is off output QO is off When input 10 is on and input I1 is off output Q1 is on When either input IO is off or input I1 is on output Q1 is off Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 Val
199. 0 12 Q0 10 12 I3 I3 Q0 Timing Chart 10 pe When input 10 is on and either input 12 or I3 is on output QO is on 12 When input 10 is off or both inputs 12 and 13 are off output 00 is off ijj ON OFF ON 00 OR LOD Load The OR LOD instruction is used to connect in parallel two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction The OR LOD instruction is the equivalent of a node on a ladder diagram When using WindLDR the user need not program the OR LOD instruction The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into OR LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 11 00 12 I3 Timing Chart 10 n When both inputs 10 and I1 are on or both B inputs 12 and I3 are on output QO is on 11 de When either input 10 or 1 is off and either input I2 or I3 is off output QO is off p ON OFF ON I3 ON 00 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 75 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS BPS Bit Push BRD Bit Read and BPP Bit Pop The BPS bit push instruction is used to save the result of bit logical operation temporarily The BRD bit read instruction is used to read the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily The BPP bit pop instruction is used to restore the result of bit logical operation which was saved temporarily When using WindLD
200. 0 through M67 M50 is the LSB least significant M67 M50 bit and M67 is the MSB most significant bit MOVN W SI Dis REP S ONDT DA T 810 D2 When input I1 is on decimal constant 810 designated by source operand S1 is converted into 16 bit binary data and the ON OFF statuses of the 16 bits are inverted and moved to data register D2 designated by destina tion operand D1 MSB 51 LSB Before inversion 810 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 DO MSB D1 LSB M After inversion 64725 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 D2 164725 810 D30 NOT D20 MOVN W S1 Dl REP 020 164605 When input I2 is on the data in data register 12 030 D20 PEN INT D30 designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to data register D20 designated by D1 0 930 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IMOV Indirect Move T S1 S2 gt DI D2 H IMOVI D m Jee P p When input is on the values contained in operands des ignated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 16 or 32 bit data so determined is moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in operands designated by D1 and D2 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constan Re
201. 00 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M8012 SFR N Shifting Flag When power failure occurs while data shift is in progress in a shift register M8012 is turned on If M8012 is on when the CPU is powered up again the data in keep designated shift registers may be broken and cannot be used to continue correct data shifting To prevent continuation of incorrect data shifting at startup include M8012 in the user program to prevent program execution If a shift register is not designated as a keep type the shift register data is cleared when power is restored M8014 Write Communication Command Execution at Receive Completion When M8014 is off while maintenance protocol communication is in progress incoming write commands are executed at the END processing of a user program and the data is written into the CPU When M8014 is on write commands are exe cuted immediately when the receive completion flag of a user communication RXD instruction is turned on without wait ing for the END processing M8014 is valid for all communication ports RS232C port 1 and port 2 and RS485 When an IDEC s HG series operator interface is linked to the OpenNet Controller use the OpenNet Controller with M8014 set on M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag When M8020 is turned on data in data registers D8015 through D8021 calendar clock preset data are set to the internal clock of the CPU See page 15 7
202. 00 uF 250V note the polarity Terminator Node Node Node Node OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Node Terminator Node Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Link Registers for LonWorks Network Communication LONWORKS network communication data is stored to link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module and the data is communicated through the LONWORKS interface module Since seven functional modules including a LONWORKS interface module can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module link registers are allocated depending on the position where the LONWORKS interface module is mounted Link Register Allocation Numbers posu Area Function Description R W L 00 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 01 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 02 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 03 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 04 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 05 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 06 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 07 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L
203. 00810 100 1 5 16 1 5 8 BK 3200043 AI TWIN 2 x 1 5 8 BK 32 00 82 3 100 2 5 14 Al 2 5 8 BU 32 00 52 2 100 For 1 wire Connection jd1 For 2 wire connection Ferrule SU dl Ferrule eae 0 25 8 YE 4 5mm AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Al 0 5 8 WH AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 7 0 mm A 8 0 mm Al 0 75 8 GY AITWIN 2X 1 6 BD a E Al 1 8 RD 6 0 mm B 8 0 mm AITWIN 2 1 5 8 80mm Al 1 5 8 BK lt I 2 5 8 BU Crimping Tool and Screwdriver Order No Tool Name Phoenix Type Pcs Pkt Crimping Tool CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 1 Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x 2 5 1205040 10 26 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Terminator Terminators must be connected to the LONWORKS network When setting up a network connect one or two terminators depending on the topology The terminator consists of one resistor and two capacitors as illustrated below Bus Topology Terminator Configuration ela R c2 Network Connect terminators to the both ends of the bus topology network R 1050 1 1 8W C1 and C2 100 uF 250V note the polarity Terminator Free Topology Node 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Node Node Connect a terminator to any position on the free topology network R 52 39 1 1 8W C1 and C2 1
204. 05 turns on The M8005 status is maintained when the error is cleared and remains on until M8005 is reset using WindLDR or until the CPU is turned off The cause of the data link communication error can be checked using Online Monitor followed by Online PLC Status Error Status Details See page 21 4 M8006 Data Link Communication Prohibit Flag Master Station When M8006 at the master station is turned on in the data link system data link communication is stopped When M8006 is turned off data link communication resumes The M8006 status is maintained when the CPU is turned off and remains on until M8006 is reset using WindLDR When M8006 is on at the master station M8007 is turned on at slave stations in the data link system M8007 Data Link Communication Initialize Flag Master Station Data Link Communication Stop Flag Slave Station M8007 has a different function at the master or slave station of the data link communication system Master station Data link communication initialize flag When M8007 at the master station is turned on during operation the link configuration is checked to initialize the data link system When a slave station is powered up after the master station turn M8007 on to initialize the data link system After a data link system setup is changed M8007 must also be turned on to ensure correct communication Slave station Data link communication stop flag When a slave station does not receive communica
205. 1 of full scale Digital Resolution 4000 increments Data Type in Application Program 0 to 4000 Total Output System Transfer Time 3 msec 1 scan time maximum Settling Time after Maximum Range Change 3 msec Overshoot 0 Maximum Temporary Deviation during Electrical Noise Tests and Test Conditions 3 maximum of full scale at 500V impulse test Output Voltage Drop 1 maximum of full scale Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy Impossible Maximum Capacitive Load Not applicable Maximum Inductive Load Not applicable Monotonicity Yes Crosstalk 2 LSB maximum Non lineality 0 1 of full scale maximum Repeatability after Stabilization Time 0 5 of full scale maximum more than 30 minutes after powerup Output Ripple 1 LSB maximum Output Response at Power Up and Down Output returns to the lower limit value within 1 msec Output Mode Selection and Output Value of LSB Using a rotary switch see page 2 31 Load Impedance in Signal Range 2 minimum 2500 3000 maximum Voltage output Current output Maximum Allowed Output Voltage Voltage output Current output 12V DC between output terminals 12V DC between output terminals Dielectric Strength 500V AC between output channel and power supply under normal operating conditions Cable Shielded cable is recommended for improve
206. 1034040347 1038040387 1042040427 1046040467 1050040507 1054040547 1058040587 1031040317 1035040357 1039040397 1043040437 1047040477 1051040517 1055040557 1059040597 480 total when using an expansion power supply module Output Q Q0000 Q0007 Q0040 Q0047 Q0080 Q0087 Q0120 Q0127 Q0160 Q0167 Q0200 Q0207 Q0240 Q0247 Q0010 Q0017 Q0050 Q0057 Q0090 Q0097 00130 00137 00170 00177 00210 00217 00250 00257 00020 00027 00060 00067 00100 00107 00140 00147 00180 00187 00220 00227 00260 00267 00030 00037 00070 00077 00110 00117 00150 00157 00190 00197 00230 00237 00270 00277 00280 00287 00320 00327 00360 00367 00400 00407 00440 00447 00480 00487 00520 00527 00560 00567 00290 00297 00330 00337 00370 00377 00410 00417 00450 00457 00490 00497 00530 00537 00570 00577 00300 00307 00340 00347 00380 00387 00420 00427 00460 00467 00500 00507 00540 00547 00580 00587 00310 00317 00350 00357 00390 00397 00430 00437 00470 00477 00510 00517 00550 00557 00590 00597 480 total when using an expansion power supply module Internal Relay M M0000 M0007 M0040 M0047 M0080 M0087 M0120 M0127 M0160 M0167 M0200 M0207 M0240 M0247 M0280 M0287 M0320 M0327 M0360 M0367 M0400 M0407 M0440 M0447 M0480 M0487 M0520 M0527 M0560 M0567 M0600 M0607 M0640 M0647 M0680 M0687 M0720 M0727 M0760 M0767 M0800 M0807 M0840 M0847 M0880 M0887 M0920 M0927 M0010 M0017 M0050 M0057 M0090 M0097
207. 12 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Example Counting High speed Input Pulses from Rotary Encoder This example demonstrates a program to punch holes in a paper tape at regular intervals Description of Operation A rotary encoder is linked to the tape feed roller directly and Rolled Tape the output pulses from the rotary encoder are counted by the high speed counter in the OpenNet Controller CPU module When the high speed counter current value reaches 3 000 the comparison output is turned on When the comparison output is turned on the current value is reset to 300 automatically to continue another cycle of counting The comparison output remains on for 0 5 second to punch holes in the tape and is Rotary Encoder turned off until the preset value is reached again Feed Roller Tape Punch Wiring Diagram 424V gt V Control Input GND GND Power Supply Tape Punch V 24V Phase A Output A Phase B Output B Phase Z Output Z HSC OUT 24V DC OpenNet Controller CPU Module Rotary Encoder FC3A CP2K Sink Output Type Note This example does not use the Phase Z signal Program Parameters Enable High speed Counter Yes HSC Operation Mode Rotary Encoder Enable HSC Reset Input No Enable HSC Gate Input No Enable Comparison Output Yes Current Value Automatic
208. 12 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS High Speed Counter This section describes the high speed counter function to count many pulse inputs within one scan Using the built in 16 bit high speed counter the OpenNet Controller counts up to 65535 high speed pulses from a rotary encoder or proximity switch without regard to the scan time compares the current value with a preset value and turns on the output when the current value exceeds the preset value This function can be used for simple motor control or to measure lengths of objects The high speed counter can be used in the rotary encoder mode or dual pulse reversible counter mode which can be selected using the Function Area Settings in WindLDR The CPU module has screw terminals 1 through 5 dedicated to the high speed counter The high speed counter counts up or down input pulses to terminals 2 phase A or CW and 3 phase B or CCW and turns on the comparison output at ter minal 5 comparison output when the current value exceeds the preset value The comparison output does not go on when the preset value is reached but goes on when another input pulse enters after reaching the preset value Use of the compar ison output is selected using the Function Area Settings When the input to terminal 4 phase Z or reset to zero input is turned on the current value is reset to zero Three special data registers and seven special internal
209. 12 Status area Error data Stores various error codes Read L 13 Status area I O counts Stores the byte counts of transmit receive data Read L 24 ID area Software version Stores the user application software version Read L 25 ID area Expansion module ID Stores the user program module ID Read Note A number 1 through 7 comes in place of depending on the position where the functional module is mounted such as OpenNet interface module or analog 1 module Consequently operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 Error Data Status Area L 12 L 12 b14 unused b10 b0 unused When an error occurs the I O or ERR LED on the LONWORKS interface module goes on according to the error and a cor responding bit in the link register goes on The status LED goes off when the cause of the error is removed The error data bit remains on until the CPU is powered up again or reset b15 initialization error This bit goes on when the CPU module fails to acknowledge the completion of initialization for communication with the LONWORKS interface module When this bit goes on the I O LED also goes on b13 I O error This bit goes on when an error occurs during communication with the LONWORKS interface module through the CPU bus When this bit goes on the I O LED also goes on b12 transaction timeout This bit goes
210. 123 is the 10 msec clock special internal relay 9 When jump occurs to label 2 output Q2 oscillates in 10 msec increments Using the Timer Instruction with Program Branching When the timer start input of the TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction is already on timedown begins immediately at the location jumped to starting with the timer current value When using a program branch it is important to make sure that timers are initialized when desired after the jump If it is necessary to initialize the timer instruction set to the preset value after the jump the timer s start input should be kept off for one or more scan cycles before initialization Otherwise the timer input on will not be recognized Using the SOTU SOTD Instructions with Program Branching Check that pulse inputs of counters and shift registers and input of single outputs SOTU and SOTD are maintained dur ing the jump if required Hold the input off for one or more scan cycles after the jump for the rising or falling edge transi tion to be recognized Although normally the SOTU instruction produces a pulse for one scan when used in a program branch the SOTU pulse will last only until the next time the Q1 Internal ON C same SOTU instruction is executed Memory OFF In the example on the left the program branch will Q1 Output be 01 LJ MP S1 loop as long as internal relay MO remains on How MO ever the SOTU produces a pulse output only during END END the f
211. 1415 Low Alarm Value The low alarm value is the lower limit of the process variable S140 to generate an alarm When the process variable is lower than or equal to the low alarm value while the start input for the PID instruction is on the low alarm output control relay S2 5 is turned on When the process variable is higher than the low alarm value the low alarm output control relay S2 5 is turned off When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required low alarm value of 0 through 4000 to the data register designated by 51 15 When S1 15 stores a value larger than 4000 the low alarm value is set to 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set a required low alarm value of 32768 through 32767 to the data register designated by 51 15 The low alarm value must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value S146 and must be smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value S145 If the low alarm value is set to a value smaller than the linear conversion minimum value S146 the linear conversion minimum value will become the low alarm value If the low alarm value is set to a value larger than the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 the linear conversion maximum value will become the low alarm value dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION 1416 Output Man
212. 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are ANDed bit by bit The result is set to desti nation operand D1 S1 S2 gt DI When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are ORed bit by bit The result is set to destina tion operand D1 S1 52 DI When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper ands S1 and S2 are exclusive ORed bit by bit The result is set to destination operand D1 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 12 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Valid Operands Operand Function QM C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for computation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Data for computation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Since the Boolean computation instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction sho
213. 17 118 18 20 21 22 23 24 25 126 27 128 28 30 31 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 ON ON ON ON ON OR ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Monitoring PLC Status The following example describes the procedures to monitor the operating status of the OpenNet Controller assigned with device number 12 in a 1 N communication computer link system 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Communication Settings The Communication Settings dialog box appears 2 Under PLC Network Setting click the 1 N button to select 1 N communication and enter 12 to the Device No field 3 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor The ladder diagram on the screen enters the monitor mode 4 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online PLC Status The OpenNet PLC Status dialog box appears OpenNet PLC Status x Communication Port Settings Run Stop Status Scan Time msec Baud Rate 9600 rl Stopped Scan Time B x PLC Type FRK gt TIM CNT Change Status Parity Even a System Program Version 200 arity Clear Bonfim
214. 2 D13 13 113 D14 114 rD24 114 D15 115 Lops 115 Repeat Bit Operands The MOV move instruction moves 16 bit data word or integer data type or 32 bit data double word or integer data type When a bit operand such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as the source or destination operand 16 or 32 bits starting with the one designated by S1 or D1 are the target data If a repeat operation is designated for a bit operand the target data increases in 16 or 32 bit increments depending on the selected data type Data Type Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOVW S1 DIR REP 110 D10 MO 3 010 110 M0 through M7 M10 through M17 D11 111 M20 through M27 M30 through M37 D12 112 M40 through M47 M50 through M57 Data Type Double Word Source Repeat 0 Destination Repeat 3 MOVD Sl DIR REP Hi D10 110 0 through M7 M10 through M17 D11 111 M20 through M27 M30 through M37 D12 112 r M40 through M47 M50 through M57 D13 113 L M60 through M67 M70 through M77 D14 114 M80 through M87 M90 through M97 D15 115 M100 through M107 M110 through M117 Overlapped Operands by Repeat If the repeat operation is designated for both the source and destination and if a portion of the source and destina
215. 2 AT Command Result Code When returning result code 23 3 D8330 D8344 Port 2 AT Command String When sending AT command 23 3 D8345 D8369 Port 2 Initialization String When sending init string 23 3 D8370 D8399 Port 2 Telephone Number When dialing 233 Special Data Registers for Data Link Master Slave Stations d Description Updated See Page 08400 Siave Station Communication Error at Slave Station Wren eroroccured 214 D8401 Slave Station 2 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8402 Slave Station 3 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8403 Slave Station 4 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8404 Slave Station 5 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8405 Slave Station 6 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8406 Slave Station 7 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8407 Slave Station 8 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8408 Slave Station 9 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8409 Slave Station 10 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8410 Slave Station 11 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8411 Slave Station 12 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8412 Slave Station 13 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8413 Slave S
216. 20 D21 gt D30 D31 D36 D37 012 013 D20 D21 032 033 D38 D39 D14 D15 D20 D21 D34 D35 D40 D41 Quotient Remainder Repeat All Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 P senj pwwr Su UR DIS WP C digo de 000 vox D3U 003 D11 B D21 D31 D34 D12 D22 D32 D35 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 6 operands starting with D1 D1 1 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 H a X m X D10 D11 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D36 D37 12 13 D22 D23 032 033 038 039 D14 D15 24 025 034 035 040 041 Quotient Remainder Note When a user program execution error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program exe cution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operation for other instructions is continued For the advanced instruction which has caused a user program execution error results are not set to any destination 11 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS INC Increment m 1 1 INCE LENA S D 1 gt S D Xokckokek When input is on one is added to the value in the op
217. 24 15 DeviceNet 25 4 cables and accessories A 5 calendar clock data write flag M8020 6 10 error 27 5 function processing A 2 setting using user program 15 7 WindLDR 15 7 carry Cy and borrow Bw M8003 6 9 carry or borrow signals 11 2 catch input 5 7 and CC2 instructions 7 14 CDISP 16 5 character codes for character display unit 16 7 display 16 5 unit 16 7 clearing error codes 27 2 clock OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL adjusting using a user program 15 8 data adjust flag M8021 6 10 CMP 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP lt gt 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CNT CDP and CUD instructions 7 11 comm port tab 17 3 21 7 communication enable button 2 2 fault 25 7 function 2 6 I O terminals SX5 4 SX5D 252 SXSL 26 3 parameters 17 32 17 33 setting WindLDR 17 3 selector DIP switch 2 2 settings 2 6 compare equalto 10 1 greater than 10 1 greater than or equal to 10 1 less than 10 1 less than or equal to 10 1 unequal to 10 1 computer link 1 1 communication 1 5 1 N communication 1 5 communication 22 1 system 1 5 connection status 25 7 connector pinout 17 2 17 31 23 1 24 15 constant scan time 5 20 contact protection circuit for relay output 2 17 control register 20 2 relay 20 10 control signal option DSR D8205 D8305 17 28 DTR D8206 D8306 17 29 RTS D8207 D8307 17 29 status D8204 D8304 17 27 statuses RUN mode 17 27 STOP mode 17 28 conversion linear 19 4 type 17 6 17 15 convert XtoY 19 2
218. 28 INTERBUS Node 19 ID Code When initialized 246 D8129 INTERBUS Node 19 Device Level When initialized 246 D8130 INTERBUS Node 20 Logical Device No When initialized 244 D8131 INTERBUS Node 20 Length Code When initialized 244 D8132 INTERBUS Node 20 ID Code When initialized 246 D8133 INTERBUS Node 20 Device Level When initialized 246 D8134 INTERBUS Node 21 Logical Device No When initialized 244 D8135 INTERBUS Node 21 Length Code When initialized 244 D8136 INTERBUS Node 21 ID Code When initialized 246 D8137 INTERBUS Node 21 Device Level When initialized 246 D8138 INTERBUS Node 22 Logical Device No When initialized 244 D8139 INTERBUS Node 22 Length Code When initialized 244 D8140 INTERBUS Node 22 ID Code When initialized 246 D8141 INTERBUS Node 22 Device Level When initialized 246 D8142 INTERBUS Node 23 Logical Device No When initialized 244 D8143 INTERBUS Node 23 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8144 INTERBUS Node 23 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8145 INTERBUS Node 23 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8146 INTERBUS Node 24 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8147 INTERBUS Node 24 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8148 INTERBUS Node 24 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8149 INTERBUS Node 24 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8150 INTERBUS Node 25 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8151 INTERBUS Node 25 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8152 INTERBUS Node 25 ID Code When initialized 24 6
219. 3 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE More changes can also be made by entering required values to data registers D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 Store two characters in one data register the first character at the upper byte and the second character at the lower byte in the data register AT and LF need not be stored in data registers Use the MACRO instruction on WindLDR to set the initialization string characters and ASCII value ODh for R at the end Program the MACRO to replace the default values in D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 stored in the first scan and execute the MACRO in a subsequent scan For essential commands which must be included in the initialization string see page 23 9 After the new values are stored do not change the values stored in D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection Turn on M8050 M8080 to send the new initialization string to the modem When the initialization string has been sent successfully internal relay M8060 M8090 is turned on If the initialization string fails internal relay M8070 M8 100 is turned on When the subsequent commands of ATZ and dialing are also com pleted successfully M8061 M8091 and M8062 M8092 will also be turned on The default initialization string or the modified initialization string stored in D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 is also used for the initialization in the answer mode ATZ Resetting the Modem in Originate Mode The defau
220. 32C Port 1 Modem mode D8200 D8300 Communication Enter 1 to D8200 D8300 to enable the modem mode after Mode Selection setting DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON When 1 is stored to D8200 D8300 the modem mode is initialized at the next END pro cessing Depending on the value stored in D8201 D8301 a modem initialization string is stored to D8245 D8269 or D8345 Modem 08369 When D8201 D8301 value is changed a correspond D8201 D8301 Initialization String ing initialization string is stored See page 234 Selection Valid values 0 to 5 10 to 15 20 to 25 When D8201 D8301 stores any value other than above the initialization string for value 0 is stored The D8203 D8303 value selects the protocol for the RS232C Ondine Mode port after telephone line is connected 7 09393 Protocol Selection 0 other than 1 Maintenance protocol 1 User protocol The D8209 D8309 value selects how many retries will be made until the operation initiated by a start internal relay D8209 D8309 e mis M8050 M8056 or M8080 M8086 is completed See Note ca 0 No retry 1 65535 Executes a specified number of retries The D8210 D8310 value specifies the interval to start a retry of dialing when a dialing fails with the retry cycles set to a value more than 1 Other start commands are repeated con tinuously as many as the retry cycles See Note D8210 D8310 Pup E Valid value 0 to 65535 seconds If a telephone line is not connected within the retry interval the OpenNet Con
221. 3648 BW 00000000 2147483647 7FFFFFFF 2147483647 7FFFFFFF 0 00000000 0 00000000 Long 1 FFFFFFFF 1 FFFFFFFF 2147483647 80000001 2147483647 80000001 2147483648 80000000 2147483648 80000000 2147483649 CY FFFFFFFF 2147483649 BW FFFFFFFF 4294967295 CY 80000001 4294967295 BW 80000001 84 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Double Word Operands in Data Registers and Link Registers When the double word data type is selected for the source or destination operand the data is loaded from or stored to two consecutive operands The order of the two operands depends on the operand type When a data register timer or counter is selected as a double word operand the upper word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The lower word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand On the contrary when a link register is selected as a double word operand the lower word data is loaded from or stored to the first operand selected The upper word data is loaded from or stored to the subsequent operand Example When data register D10 and link register L100 are designated as a double word source operand and data regis ter D20 and link register L200 are designated as a double word destination operand the data is loaded from or stored to two consecutive operands as illustrated below
222. 37 M1270 M1277 M1310 M1317 M1350 M1357 M1390 M1397 M1430 M1437 M1470 M1477 M1510 M1517 M1550 M1557 M1590 M1597 M1630 M1637 M1670 M1677 M1710 M1717 M1750 M1757 M1790 M1797 M1830 M1837 M1870 M1877 M1910 M1917 M1950 M1957 M1990 M1997 M2030 M2037 M2070 M2077 M2110 M2117 M2150 M2157 M2190 M2197 M2230 M2237 M2270 M2277 M2310 M2317 M2350 M2357 M2390 M2397 M2430 M2437 M2470 M2477 M2510 M2517 M2550 M2557 Total Points 2048 Special Internal Relay M M8120 M8237 for read only M8000 M8007 M8040 M8047 M8080 M8087 M8010 M8017 M8050 M8057 M8090 M8097 M8020 M8027 M8060 M8067 M8100 M8107 M8030 M8037 M8070 M8077 M8110 M8117 8120 8127 M8160 M8167 M8200 M8207 8130 8137 8170 8177 8210 8217 8140 8147 8180 8187 8220 8227 8150 8157 8190 8197 M8230 M8237 192 Shift Register R R0000 R0255 256 Timer T T0000 T0255 256 Counter C C0000 C0255 256 Data Register D D0000 D7999 8000 Special Data Register D D8000 D8999 1000 Link Register L 1010040127 L0200 0227 1030040327 1040040427 1050040527 10600 10627 1070040727 Slave 168 1100041317 For details about allocation numbers of link registers see page 6 4 For details about allocation numbers used for data link communication see page 6 5 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Master 256 6 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723
223. 4 Linear conversion Enable linear conversion D4 1 145 Linear conversion maximum value 500 C D5 5000 S146 Linear conversion minimum value 50 C D6 500 51 10 Integral start coefficient 100 D10 0 1411 Input filter coefficient 70 D11 70 1 12 Sampling period 500 msec D12 50 1413 Control period 1 sec D13 10 51 14 High alarm value 250 D14 2500 51 19 AT sampling period 1 5 sec D19 150 1420 AT control period 3 sec D20 30 1421 AT set point 150 C D21 1500 1422 AT output manipulated variable 100 Note D22 100 241 Auto manual mode Auto mode M1 OFF 242 E manipulated vara bie imit Disable output manipulated variable limits M2 OFF S243 Integral start coefficient disable Enable integral start coefficient 51 10 M3 OFF When temperature gt 250 52 High alarm output OFF When temperature lt 250 Remains on during auto tuning n and off rding to th ntrol peri SO Control output S p KH lien M6 during PID action 53 Set point 200 C D100 2000 Analog input module is mounted at the first slot 54 Proress variable among functional modules and the analog input 1100 is connected to channel 0 of the analog input module stores 0 through 4000 D1 Manipulated variable Stores PID calculation result 32768 to 32767 D102 PID start input Starts to execute the PID instruction 10 Monitor input to monitor the analog input module data 1 or high alarm Heater power switch
224. 4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON 13 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 45 ON OFF ON ON OFF ON 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 46 OFF ON ON ON OFF ON 15 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 47 ON ON ON ON OFF ON 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 48 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 49 ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON 18 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 50 OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 19 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 51 ON ON OFF OFF ON ON 20 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 52 OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 53 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON 22 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 54 OFF ON ON OFF ON ON 23 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 55 ON ON ON OFF ON ON 24 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 56 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON 25 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 57 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON 26 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 58 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON 27 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 59 ON ON OFF ON ON ON 28 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 60 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 29 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF 61 ON OFF ON ON ON ON 30 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 62 OFF ON ON ON ON ON 31 ON ON ON ON ON OFF 63 ON ON ON ON ON ON Data Rate Output Hold or Load Oft Physical Port Number Data Rate DRO DR1 Output Load H L Physical Port Number NO 125k baud OFF OFF LOAD OFF OFF 0 OFF 250k baud ON OFF HOLD ON 1 ON 500k baud OFF ON Selection Prohibited ON ON 25 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Link Registers for DeviceNet Network Communication DeviceNet network communication data is stored to link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module and the data
225. 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Special Functions The OpenNet Controller features various special functions packed in the small housing as described below For details about these functions see the following chapters Keep or Clear Designation of CPU Data Internal relays shift register bits counter current values and data register values can be designated to be kept or cleared when the CPU is powered down All of these data or a specified range of these operands can be designated as keep or clear types Catch Input Function The catch input function makes sure to receive short input pulses rising pulse of 40 usec or falling pulse of 150 usec min imum from sensors without regard to the scan time Input Filter Function The input filter can be adjusted for the pulse widths to accept or reject input signals This function is useful for eliminating input noises and chatter in limit switches High speed Counter Function The OpenNet Controller has a built in high speed counter to make it possible to count up to 65 535 FFFFh high speed pulses which cannot be counted by the normal user program processing The maximum count input frequency is 10 kHz This function can be used for simple positioning control and simple motor control Key Matrix Function A matrix configuration consisting of 16 inputs and 16 outputs enables to read a maximum of 256 input signals User Program Read
226. 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Key Matrix Input The key matrix input function can be programmed using the Function Area Settings in WindLDR to form a matrix with 1 to 16 input points and 1 to 16 output points to multiply input capability A key matrix with 8 inputs and 4 outputs would equal 32 inputs for example The maximum 16 inputs and 16 outputs would result in 256 input points The input information is stored in consecutive internal relays as many as the quantity of input points multiplied by the quantity of output points starting at the first internal relay number programmed in the Function Area Settings When using the key matrix input function DC input modules and transistor output modules must be used Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Others tab OpenNet Function Area Setting xi Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bus Others gt HSC Operation Mode Rotary Encoder EI Enable HS Reset Input Enable HSE Gate Input Enable Comparison Output Current Value Automatic Reset Enable Key Matrix Input First Input No 10000 Inputs First Output 00000 Outputs First IR for Storing Information 00 r Pro
227. 56h 2 v 31h 1 0D00h ODh All characters subsequent R are ignored When the AT general command has been completed successfully internal relay M8064 M8094 is turned on If the AT gen eral command fails internal relay M8074 M8104 is turned on The AT general command is determined successful when result code CRJ LF returned from the modem is received Answer M ode The answer mode is used to send an initialization string to the modem and to issue the ATZ command to reset the modem To execute a command turn on one of start internal relays M8055 M8056 RS232C port 1 or M8085 M8086 RS232C port 2 If two or more start internal relays are turned on simultaneously an error will result and error code 61 is stored in modem mode status data register D8211 D8311 see page 23 8 When a start internal relay is turned on a corresponding sequence of commands is executed once as described below M8055 M8085 Send initialization string and send the ATZ command M8056 M8086 Send the ATZ command Initialization String in Answer Mode When the modem mode is enabled as described on page 23 1 and the OpenNet Controller is started to run the default ini tialization string is stored to data registers D8245 D8269 RS232C port 1 or D8345 D8369 RS232C port 2 at the END processing of the first scan To send the initialization string from the da
228. 60 1967 M2000 M2007 M2040 M2047 M2080 M2087 2120 2127 2160 2167 2200 2207 2240 2247 2280 2287 2320 2327 2360 2367 M2400 M2407 M2440 M2447 M2480 M2487 2520 2527 Allocation Numbers 1010 1017 1050 1057 1090 1097 1130 1137 1170 1177 1210 1217 1250 1257 1290 1297 1330 1337 1370 1377 1410 1417 1450 1457 1490 1497 1530 1537 1570 1577 1610 1617 1650 1657 1690 1697 1730 1737 1770 1777 1810 1817 1850 1857 1890 1897 1930 1937 1970 1977 2010 2017 M2050 M2057 M2090 M2097 2130 2137 2170 2177 2210 2217 2250 2257 2290 2297 2330 2337 2370 2377 2410 2417 2450 2457 2490 2497 2530 2537 1020 1027 1060 1067 1100 1107 1140 1147 1180 1187 1220 1227 1260 1267 M1300 M1307 1340 1347 1380 1387 1420 1427 1460 1467 1500 1507 1540 1547 1580 1587 1620 1627 1660 1667 1700 1707 1740 1747 1780 1787 1820 1827 1860 1867 1900 1907 1940 1947 1980 1987 2020 2027 2060 2067 2100 2107 2140 2147 2180 2187 2220 2227 2260 2267 2300 2307 2340 2347 2380 2387 2420 2427 2460 2467 2500 2507 2540 2547 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M1030 M1037 M1070 M1077 M1110 M1117 M1150 M1157 M1190 M1197 M1230 M12
229. 7 0597 2000 8237 0255 0255 0255 1000 0 1317 15 OUT Output amp and OUTN Output Not xi The OUT instruction outputs the result of bit logical operation to the specified operand The OUTN instruction outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation to the specified operand Ladder Diagram Valid Operands Instruction OUT 100 0 717 15 Ea dae 2557 0 717 Multiple OUT and OUTN There is no limit to the number of OUT and OUTN instructions that can be programmed Ladder Diagram into one rung Programming multiple outputs of the same output number is not recommended How Ladder Diagram ever when doing so it is good practice to separate the outputs with the JMP JEND set of instructions or the MCS MCR set of instructions These instructions are detailed later in this chapter ON state 11 When the same output number is programmed more than once within one scan the out put nearest to the END instruction is given priority for outputting In the example on the right output QO is off OFF state 12 OFF state 7 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples LOD Load NOT and OUT Output Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart ON 0 oF 10 00 ON Il 1 01 00 ON Ql Ladder Diagram Program List Pram Ads M2 00 0 LOD M2 1 OUT 0
230. 7 D8022 Constant Scan Time Preset Value 520 D8023 Scan Time X Current Value Every scan 5 20 D8024 ScanTime Maximum Value At occurrence 5 20 D8025 ScanTime Minimum Value At occurrence 5 20 D8026 Communication Selector Switch Value 0 through 7 Power up D8027 Communication Device Number 0 through 31 Power up D8028 Internal System Program Version Power up D8029 External System Program Version Power up D8030 Protect Transistor Output Error 1st 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8031 Protect Transistor Output Error 2nd 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8032 Protect Transistor Output Error 3rd 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8033 Protect Transistor Output Error 4th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8034 Protect Transistor Output Error bth 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8035 Protect Transistor Output Error 6th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8036 Protect Transistor Output Error 7th 1 Error 0 No error When error occurred 220 D8037 D8039 Reserved D8040 Advanced Instruction Error Address 1 At advanced inst error D8041 Advanced Instruction Error Address 2 At advanced inst error D8042 Advanced Instruction Error Address 3 At advanced inst error D8043 Advanced Instruction Error Address 4 At advanced inst error D8044 Advanced Instruction Error Address 5 At advanced inst error OPENNET CONT
231. 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS CVXTY Convert X to Y When input is on the X value designated by operand S2 is converted HF CvxTY 51 32 a into corresponding Y value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction Operand S1 selects a format from a maximum of 30 XY conversion formats The conversion result is set to the oper k KKKKK KKK KK and designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number 0 to 29 S2 Source 2 X value X X X X X X X X 0 to 32767 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 29 which have been set using the XYFS instruction When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format number is not programmed a user program execution error will result turning on spe cial internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED S2 X value Enter a value for the X coordinate to convert within the
232. 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Originate Mode The originate mode is used to send an initialization string to the modem issue the ATZ command to reset the modem and dial the telephone number To execute a command turn on one of start internal relays M8050 M8052 RS232C port 1 or M8080 M8082 RS232C port 2 If two or more start internal relays turned on simultaneously an error will result and error code 61 is stored in modem mode status data register D8211 D8311 see page 23 8 When a start internal relay is turned on a corresponding sequence of commands is executed once as described below When the start command fails the same command is repeated as many as the retry cycles specified by D8209 D8309 M8050 M8080 Send an initialization string send the ATZ command and dial the telephone number M8051 M8081 Send the ATZ command and dial the telephone number M8052 M8082 Dial the telephone number Initialization String in Originate Mode When the modem mode is enabled as described on page 23 1 and the OpenNet Controller is started to run an initialization string is stored to data registers D8245 D8269 RS232C port 1 or D8345 D8369 RS232C port 2 at the END processing of the first scan depending on the value stored in data register D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection To send the initialization string from the OpenNet Controller to the modem turn M8050 M8080 on then the ATZ comma
233. 8084 INTERBUS Node 8 ID Code When initialized 246 D8085 INTERBUS Node 8 Device Level When initialized 246 D8086 INTERBUS Node 9 Logical Device No When initialized 244 D8087 INTERBUS Node 9 Length Code When initialized 244 D8088 INTERBUS Node 9 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8089 INTERBUS Node 9 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8090 INTERBUS Node 10 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8091 INTERBUS Node 10 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8092 INTERBUS Node 10 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8093 INTERBUS Node 10 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8094 INTERBUS Node 11 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8095 INTERBUS Node 11 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8096 INTERBUS Node 11 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8097 INTERBUS Node 11 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8098 INTERBUS Node 12 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8099 INTERBUS Node 12 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8100 INTERBUS Node 12 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8101 INTERBUS Node 12 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8102 INTERBUS Node 13 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8103 INTERBUS Node 13 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8104 INTERBUS Node 13 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8105 INTERBUS Node 13 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8106 INTERBUS Node 14 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8107 INTERBUS Node 14 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8108 INTERBUS Node 14 ID Code When initializ
234. 9 x 0 5 0 0 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Application Example This application example demonstrates a PID control for a heater to keep the temperature at 200 C In this example when the program is started the PID instruction first executes auto tuning according to the designated AT parameters such as AT sampling period AT control period AT set point and AT output manipulated variable and also the temperature data inputted to the analog input module The control output remains on to keep the heater on until the tem perature reaches the AT set point of 150 C Auto tuning determines PID parameters such as proportional gain integral time derivative time and control action When the temperature reaches 150 C PID action starts to control the temperature to 200 C using the derived PID param eters The heater is turned on and off according to the output manipulated variable calculated by the PID action When the heater temperature is higher than or equal to 250 C an alarm light is turned on by the high alarm output The analog input module data is also monitored to force off the heater power switch Operand Settings Operand Function Description sae Ete 51 3 Operation mode AT auto tuning PID action D3 1 S14
235. AAA ee A A AA AA I I I I OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 28 29 30 315 32 Main Program Fe A A AAA A ee ee A A AAA ee A A AAA when reset initialize Insert other commands here to execute within when reset if required Header File fc3asx5l h gt 0 hN rp 5 CQ FP RPE HSS 4 44 0 C C C CO CO CO CO CO PO PO PO PO DN CO OF RUN 4S C iS Q0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Header File fc3asx51l h BRR KK KK KK I I AA AAA I I I x Common Definition BRK KK KK KK koe A A A AK I I x define ED OFF define ON define OK define NG define HIGH define LOW Timer Value define DTm 5sec 1 C lt gt p 5000 4 BRK KK KKK AA AA I x Memory Mapped I O Definition BRR KKK KKK KK I I A A A AKA I I I I I He He x 0 000 BRK KK KKK I A A RAK I I I x Digital I O Register Address BRR KK KK KK KK I ke ke A A AAA I I I I I He He x IO_GA_BASE GA CSR ERR IO GA BASE IO GA BASE IO GA BASE IO GA BASE BRR KK KK KKK I A A AA I I I I I x I O Registe
236. ANCED INSTRUCTIONS Structure of an Advanced Instruction Opcode Source Operand Destination Operand The opcode is a symbol to identify the advanced instruction Repeat Cycles Data Type MOVW SIR DIR REP Specifies the word W integer double word D or 10 long L data type Source Operand Repeat The source operand specifies the 16 or 32 bit data to be Designation processed by the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions require two source operands Data Type Repeat Designation Specifies whether repeat is used for the operand or not Destination Operand The destination operand specifies the 16 or 32 bit data to store the result of the advanced instruction Some advanced instructions require two destination operands Repeat Cycles Specifies the quantity of repeat cycles 1 through 99 Input Condition for Advanced Instructions Almost all advanced instructions must be preceded by a contact except NOP no operation LABEL label and LRET label return instructions The input condition can be programmed using a bit operand such as input output internal relay shift register or link register bit Timer and counter can also be used as an input condition to turn on the contact when the timer times out or the counter counts out While the input condition is on the advanced instruction is executed in each scan To execute the advanced instruction m SOTU MONI E
237. After removing the cause of the error clear the error code using the following procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Monitor The monitor mode is enabled 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online PLC Status 3 Under the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box press the Clear button This procedure clears the error code from special data register D8005 general error code and the error code is cleared from the PLC Status dialog box OpenNet PLC Status mn l eiii Clear Button Error Code Cleared 27 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Idec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Data Registers for Error Information Three data registers are assigned to store information on errors D8005 General Error Code D8006 User Program Execution Error Code D8007 User Program Execution Error Address General Error Codes The general error code is stored in special data register D8005 general error code When monitoring the PLC status using WindLDR the error code is displayed in the error code box under the Error Status in the PLC Status dialog box using four hexadecimal digits 0 through F Each digit of the error code indicates a different set of conditions requiring attention After the error code is cleared as described on the preceding page the error code box is left blank For example the error code may read
238. B3 A3 B2 A2 B1 Al 4 o Fuse E Connect the two V terminals together and connect the two COM terminals together because the current capacity of one terminal is exceeded when many outputs are on simultaneously dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Input Module A D Converter The 12 bit analog input module converts 6 channels of analog signals to digital data of 0 through 4000 which can be pro cessed using advanced instructions such as the coordinate conversion instruction The analog input module is a functional module and the converted digital data is stored to a link register depending on the analog channel and the mounting slot number of the analog input module in the system setup The input mode can be selected using the rotary switch to meet five different analog signal ranges to 10 10V 0 to 5V 5V or 4 to 20 mA Analog Input Module Type Number Module Name 6 channel Analog Input Module Type No FC3A AD1261 Parts Description 5 Expansion Connector SSS TESS Sy To T 1 Module ID I EN ENS EJ 0 S o t EJ 10 3 f pr re J IHSI 2 Power LED R E
239. C and DC2 instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction and must be programmed at the beginning of a ladder line e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or ORed at a separate program address e Like the LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram 10 10 90 10 MO Program List Program List Prgm Adrs i Prgm Adrs 0 DC 1 2 AND 3 OUT To compare three values use the ICMP interval compare greater than or equal to See page 10 4 7 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples DC and DC2 Data Register Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction MOVW S1 1 REP D10 D2 DC D2 DC gt D2 O O Ui Timing Chart Input 11 a D10 Value D2 Value Output Q0 is on when data register D2 ON value is 5 OFF Output Q1 Bes Output 00 Output Q1 is turned on when data register D2 value is 3 or more Ladder Diagram 2 Timing Chart MOWW Sl Dl D30 Value 400500500210210 0 500700 D50 D30 i ON j i Output 00 o Output Q0 is on when data register D30 value is 500 L
240. CE MODULE LonWoRKS Interface Module Specifications Normal Operating Conditions Operating Ambient Temperature 0 to 55 C no freezing Storage Temperature 25 to 70 C no freezing Operating Humidity Level RH1 30 to 90 no condensation Pollution Degree 2 IEC 60664 Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases Altitude Operation 0 to 2000m Transportation 0 to 3000m Vibration Resistance 10 to 57 Hz amplitude 0 075 mm 57 to 150 Hz acceleration 9 8 m sec 1G 10 sweep cycles each in 3 axes total 80 minutes IEC1131 Shock Resistance 147 m sec 15G 11 msec 3 shocks each in 3 axes IEC1131 Power Supply supplied from the OpenNet Controller CPU module Dielectric Strength Between power terminal on CPU module and FG 500V AC 1 minute Insulation Resistance Between power terminal on CPU module and FG 10 500V DC megger Current Draw Grounding Ground Terminal Approx 30 mA M3 sems Grounding Resistance 1002 maximum Grounding Wire Weight Weight Communication Specifications Communication System UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Approx 180g LON system Transceiver FTT 10A Free Topology Twisted Pair Transceiver made by Echelon Transmission Rate 78 kbps Transmission Distance when using Level 4 AWG22 cables Free topology Bus topology Total 500m 400m maximum between nodes 1 150m when us
241. CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Polarity G e o 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com APPENDIX 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com INDEX 1 1 computer link 4 1 1 N computer link 22 1 100 msec clock M8122 6 11 10 msec clock M8123 6 11 1 sec clock M8121 6 10 reset M8001 6 9 A D converter 2 28 about INTERBUS 24 2 AC adapter 4 1 A 5 accessories A 5 ACKD 26 12 acknowledge code 24 10 service 26 12 ADD 11 1 adding counter CNT 7 11 addition 11 1 additional error information 24 10 address 24 4 adjusting clock using a user program 15 8 advanced instruction 8 1 ADD 11 1 ANDW 12 1 ATOB 14 11 ATOH 14 7 AVRG 19 6 BCDLS 13 13 BMOV 9 8 BTOA 14 9 BTOH 14 3 CDISP 16 5 CMP lt 10 1 CMP lt 10 1 CMP lt gt 10 1 CMP 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CMP gt 10 1 CVXTY 19 2 CVYTX 19 3 datatypes 8 4 DEC 11 9 DGRD 16 3 DISP 16 1 DIV 11 1 DJNZ 18 5 DTCB 14 14 DTDV 14 13 14 5 14 1 IBMV 9 11 IBMVN 9 12 ICMP gt 10 4 IMOV 9 6 IMOVN 9 7 INC 11 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com input condition 8 3 LABEL 18 1 LCAL 18 3 list 8 1 LJMP 18 1 LRET 18 3 MOV 9 1 MOVN 9 5 MUL 11 1 NEG 12 5 NOP 8 6 NRS 9 10 NSET 9 9 ORW 12 1 PID 20 1 ROOT 11 10 ROTL
242. Cable Terminal Connector 5 Terminal Label Tr OUT Transistor output 16 or 32 points Turns on when output is on The terminal block cover flips open to the right When using long ferrules for wiring the terminal block cover may be removed Indicates terminal numbers 1 through 20 on the terminal block Connects to CPU and other modules Six different connector terminal styles are available OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point Relay Output Module Specifications Type No Terminal Arrangement FC3A R161 FC3A R162 See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 22 and 223 Output Points and Common Lines 16 NO contacts in 4 common lines COM terminals not connected together M aximum Load Current 2A per point 8A per common line 7 per common line Minimum Switching Load 0 1 mA 0 1V DC reference value Initial Contact Resistance 30 MQ maximum Electrical Life 100 000 operations minimum rated load 1 800 operations hour Mechanical Life 20 000 000 operations minimum no load 18 000 operations hour Rated Load Voltage resistive inductive 240V AC 2A 30V DC 2 Dielectric Strength Between output terminal and FG 1 500V AC 1 minute Between output terminal and internal circuit 1 500V AC 1 minute Between output terminals COMs 1 500V AC 1
243. Chip 3150 ETT 10A Register g a a x I Failure CPU LoNWoRks Interface Module LONWORKS Network Memory Map The LONWORKS interface module memory map is illustrated in the figure below FFFFh FFFFh Neuron Chip 3150 6KB E800h Unused CFFFh C000h Register 4KB Reserved 2 5KB FLFFh F000h Unused EEPROM 0 5KB 7FFFh Application RAM 2KB Program 16KB E800h Neuron Chip Firmware 16KB 0000h Flash Memory The LONWORKS interface module contains a 32KB nonvolatile rewritable memory Of the 32KB memory area a 16KB area of 0000h through 3FFFh is allocated to the Neuron Chip firmware and the remaining 16KB area of 4000h through 7FFFh is allocated to the application program 26 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Neuron Chip 1 O Pins and Status LEDs Neuron Chip I O pins and status LEDs are assigned as listed below 1 O Pin No 1 0 Signal Name Description Controls the RUN LED green 0 Output RUN LED 0 ON 1 OFF Controls the ERR LED red 1 Output ERR LED 0 ON 1 OFF Controls the 1 LED red 2 Output O LED 0 ON 1 OFF 3 Input The 10 3 pin must be defied as an input when the application program is p modified by the user See page 26 19 Monitors
244. Corresponding JMP JEND instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding JMP JEND instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Prom Adis 10 11 Q0 Timing Chart N OFF Input I1 an Input IO Output 00 iu When input IO is on JMP is executed so that the subsequent output status is held When input IO is off JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS JMP Jump and J END Jump End continued Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 This jump circuit will give priority to I1 I3 and I5 in that order When input I1 is on the first JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of QO through Q2 are held When input is off the first JMP is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through I6 When is off and I3 is on the second JMP is executed so that subsequent output statuses of Q1 and Q2 are held When both I1 and I3 are off the first and second JMPs are not executed so that the following program is executed accord ing to the actual input statuses of I4 through I6 END The END instruction is always required at the end of a program however it is
245. D2h 1234 D11 162bEh 25678 Transmit data example BCC calculation range STX BCC BCC ETX 02h on aan i38 G4 en Bod Km n 41h 36h 03h Constant D11 BCC Constant hex hex 1 Start to program a TXD instruction Move the cursor where you want to insert the TXD instruction and type TXD You can also insert the TXD instruction by clicking the User Communication icon in the menu bar and clicking where you want to insert the TXD instruction in the program edit area The Transmit instruction dialog box appears Transmit x Type 51 01 D2 C RXD Port Port 1 f Pott 2 Insert Delete Edit 17 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 2 Check that TXD is selected in the Type box and click Port 1 in the Port box Then click Insert The Data Type Selection dialog box appears You will program source operand S1 using this dialog box 3 Click Constant Hexadecimal in the Type box and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 02 to program the start delimiter STX 02h When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Type C Constant Character y OK Variable DR Constant x Hexadecimal 4 Since the Transmit instruction dialog box reappears repeat the above procedure
246. E WAY When input is 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand 51 is ug E e rotated to the right by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Data Type Word bits to rotate 1 MSB LSB Before rotation 1 0 1 1101 A 11110 1110 Rotate to the Ja M8003 MSB 51 15 After rotation 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation MSB 51 LSB 1 1 1 0 1 1 10 0 11 1 0 011 1 111 1 000 1110 Rotate to the right _ gt M8003 After rotation MSB 51 LSB o 1 ojo 1 1 o i o i1 i i o o i i o i o o i i o i o i i ij o o i i 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2
247. E o only at the rising or falling edge of the input use the SOTU or SOTD instruction While the input condition is off the advanced instruction is not executed and operand statuses are held Source and Destination Operands The source and destination operands specify 16 or 32 bit data depending on the selected data type When a bit operand such as input output internal relay or shift register is designated as a source or destination operand 16 or 32 points start ing with the designated number are processed as source or destination data When a word operand such as timer or counter is designated as a source operand the current value is read as source data When a timer or counter is designated as a des tination operand the result of the advanced instruction is set to the preset value for the timer or counter When a data reg ister is designated as a source or destination operand the data is read from or written to the designated data register Using Timer or Counter as Source Operand Since all timer instructions TML 1 sec timer TIM 100 msec timer TMH 10 msec timer and TMS 1 msec timer subtract from the preset value the current value is decremented from the preset value and indicates the remaining time As described above when a timer is designated as a source operand of an advanced instruction the current value or the remaining time of the timer is read as source data Adding counters CNT start counting at 0
248. EM345 0 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read this user s manual to make sure of correct operation before starting installation wiring operation maintenance and inspection of the OpenNet Controller All OpenNet Controller modules are manufactured under IDEC s rigorous quality control system but users must add a backup or failsafe provision to the control system using the OpenNet Controller in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may be caused in case the OpenNet Controller should fail In this user s manual safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe personal injury or death Turn off the power to the OpenNet Controller before starting installation removal wiring maintenance and inspection of the OpenNet Controller Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard Special expertise is required to install wire program and operate the OpenNet Controller People without such expertise must not use the OpenNet Controller Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the OpenNet Controller If such a circuit is configured inside the OpenNet Controller failure of the OpenNet Controller may cause disorder of the control system
249. ER S MANUAL 2300 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Input Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A AD1261 6 channel Analog Input Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Terminal No Channel V voltage Channel 0 I current Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 C C2 C0 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C2 C2 Channel 5 Wiring Diagram Voltage Input Current Input Unused Channel Analog Analog Analog Input Input Input Module Module Module Analog AV Analog 3V y Connect V and COM Voltage m terminals of unused utput utput hannels together Device G COM Device Mg COM COM 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V 5V 4 to 20 mA Example When converting an analog voltage input 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V or 5 DC using channel 4 connect the signal to terminals 13 and 15 When the analog input module is the second functional module installed in the OpenNet Controller system the converted digital value is stored to link register L204 When connecting an analog current input 4 to 20 mA connect terminals I and together and connect the input across terminals
250. FACE MODULE Starting Operation The LONWORKS network requires installation of network configuration information into each node When setting up the LONWORKS network for the first time follow the procedures described below 1 Set up the OpenNet Controller CPU and LONWORKS interface modules connect the LONWORKS interface module to the LONWORKS network using LONWORKS cables and power up the CPU module 2 Connect a network management tool to the network and install network configuration information to the LONWORKS interface module See Network Management described below 3 Download the user program to the CPU module 4 Start the CPU module to run then the CPU module starts to communicate with other nodes on the LONWORKS net work as specified in the network configuration information and user program The delay until the communication starts after power up depends on the size of the user program and the system setup While the CPU is stopped data exchange between CPU and LONWORKS interface modules is halted but communica tion with the LONWORKS network continues Data exchange between the CPU and LONWORKS interface modules is asynchronous with the user program scanning in the CPU module Network Management When setting up a LONWORKS network system the user has to install network configuration information into each node Use a network management tool available from other manufacturers such as LonMaker for Windows Integration T
251. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Troubleshooting in Modem Communication When a start internal relay is turned on the data of D8211 D8311 modem mode status changes but the modem does not work Cause A wrong cable is used or wiring is incorrect Solution Use the modem cable 1C FC2A KMIC The DTR or ER indicator on the modem does not turn on Cause A wrong cable is used or wiring is incorrect Solution Use the modem cable 1C FC2A KMIC When a start internal relay is turned on the data of D8211 D8311 modem mode status does not change Cause 1 D8200 D8300 does not store 1 and the modem mode is not enabled Solution 1 Store 1 to D8200 or D8300 when using RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively Cause 2 Communication selector DIP switch setting is wrong and the modem mode is not enabled Solution 2 Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON when using RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively When an initialization string is sent a failure occurs but sending ATZ completes successfully Cause The initialization string is not valid for the modem Solution Refer to the user s manual for the modem and correct the initialization string When a dial command is sent a result code NO DIALTONE is returned and the telephone line is not connected Cause 1 The modular cable is not connected Solution 1 Connect the modular cable to the modem Cause 2 The modem is use
252. Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DIP Switch Settings DIP switches are inside the protective lid After setting the DIP switches replace the lid into position All DIP switches are set to off before shipping from factory Set the DIP switches to select the node address MAC ID media access control identifier data rate output hold load off and physical port number Do not set the DIP switches to the Selection Prohibited positions Node Address MAC ID Node Address NAO 1 2 NA4 NA5 Node Address NAO 1 2 NA4 NA5 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 32 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 33 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 34 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 35 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 36 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON 5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 37 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON 6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 38 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON 7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 39 ON ON ON OFF OFF ON 8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 40 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON 9 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 41 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 42 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 43 ON ON OFF ON OFF ON 12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 4
253. Hexadecimal v OK 7 In the Transmit instruction dialog box type M10 in the destination D1 box and type D100 in the destination D2 box When finished click OK Transmit x D1 D2 Tag Name m0010 D0100 Allocation Number M0010 D0100 03 Tag Name Comment Port Port 2 Insert Delete Edit Programming of the TXD1 instruction is complete and the transmit data is specified as follows BCC calculation range Constant D10 D11 BCC Constant hex hex 1742 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS RXD1 Receive 1 51 D1 D2 When input is on data received through the RS232C port 1 from a KOK KK remote terminal is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format designated by S1 RXD2 Receive 2 S1 D1 D2 When input is on data received through the RS232C port 2 from a FOR Ok kK OK remote terminal is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format designated by S1 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 51 Source 1 Receive format X X D1 Destination 1 Receive completion output X D2 Destination 2 Receive status X For the valid operand number r
254. INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data can be moved using the MOV move MOVN move not IMOV indirect move or IMOVN indirect move not instruction The moved data is 16 or 32 bit data and the repeat operation can also be used to increase the quantity of data moved In the MOV or MOVN instruction the source and destination operand are designated by S1 and D1 directly In the IMOV or IMOVN instruction the source and destination operand are determined by the offset values designated by S2 and D2 added to source operand S1 and destination operand D1 Since the move instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required MOV Move E SERRE cxx When input is on 16 or 32 bit data from operand designated by S1 is H MOV SI R DI R REP moved to operand designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Source operand can be both internal relays MO through M2557 and special internal relays M8000 through M8237 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T time
255. IO 4 input bit PI RUN 10 11 when TRUE 12 unsigned char pGA unsigned char dat 14 unsigned char tx_dat 15 while TRUE 16 if io in PI RUN HIGH I pGA unsigned char GA BCTL Preparation for data read 18 pGA BCTL NWR REQ Loy dat pGA 20 if dat amp BCTL_NWR_REQ Preparation for data read complete 21 pGA unsigned char GA FCDR TX 225 tx dat pGA Read data from register C008h zd pGA unsigned char GA BCTL 24 PGA amp BCTL NWR REQ End data read 254 nv o8 tx dat Substitute the value for output network variable nv 08 26 break 237 28 29 30 2622 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Defined Network Variables The application program installed in the LONWORKS interface module defines network variables for transmit and receive data listed below When you modify or create an application program do not use these variables otherwise verification of the application program will be difficult The network variables their data type and structure are listed in the following tables Input Network Variables Input Network Variable Data Type and Structure Used For nv i8 0 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 1 unsigned char 8 point inputs 8 bits nv i8 2 unsigned char 8 point
256. IRING ower Supply Use a power supply of the rated value Use of a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard The allowable power voltage range for the OpenNet Controller is 19 to 30V DC Do not use the OpenNet Controller on any other voltage e If the power voltage turns on or off very slowly between 5 and 15V DC the OpenNet Controller may run and stop repeatedly between these voltages If failure or disorder of the control system damage or accidents may be caused provide a measure for prevention using a voltage monitor ing circuit outside the OpenNet Controller Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the power line outside the OpenNet Controller This is required when exporting equipment containing OpenNet Controller to Europe Power Supply Voltage The allowable power voltage range for the OpenNet Controller is 19 to 30V DC Power failure detection voltage depends on the quantity of used input and output points Basically power failure is detected when the power voltage drops below 19V DC stopping operation to prevent malfunction A momentary power interruption for 10 msec or less is not recognized as a power failure at the rated voltage of 24V DC Inrush Current at Powerup When the OpenNet Controller is powered up an inrush current of 40A or less flows at the rated voltage of 24V DC Power Supply Wiring Use a stranded wire of UL1015 AWG22 or UL1007 AWGIS for power supply wiring Make the power supply wiring as short as
257. If an instruction is entered above or below the CUD instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly The counter output is on only when the current value is 0 After the current value reaches counting down it changes to 65535 on the next count down After the current value reaches 65535 counting up it changes to on the Timing Chart next count up Preset Input IO Bd When power is off the counter s current value is held and can also be desig Pulse Input 11 orc nated as clear type counters using the ON Function Area Settings see page 5 3 U D Selection Input I2 P OFF Counter preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without transferring the entire program to the CPU see page 7 12 Counter C2 Value 500501502501500499 0 1 500500 ON Counter C2 OFF When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately When the CPU is turned off counter current values are maintained unless designated as clear type counters When resetting the counter current values is required at start up include initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 in an OR circuit with the reset input The reset or preset input has priority over the pulse input One scan after the reset or preset input has changed from on to off the counter starts counting the pulse inputs as they change from off to on Rese
258. In the Data Type Selection dialog box click Variable DR and click OK Next in the Variable Data Register dialog box type D10 in the DR No box and click BCD to ASCII to select the BCD to ASCII conversion Enter 4 in the Digits box 4 digits and 2 in the REP box 2 repeat cycles When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Type v OK Constant Character C Constant Hexadecimal Variable Data Register x DR No Conversion Type 5 Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click BCC and click OK Next in the BCC dialog box enter 1 in the Cal culation Start Position box click ADD for the Calculate Type click BIN to ASCII for the Conversion Type and click 2 for the Digits When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Type Constant Character v OK Constant Hexadecimal Variable DR BCC Lx Calculation Start Position Calculation Type i XOR ADD Conversion Type Digits BIN to ASCII None dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 6 Once again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click Constant Hexadecimal and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 03 to program the end delimiter ETX 03h When finished click OK Data Type Selection xi Constant x
259. Ir0000 I0001 o0000 Continue programming for rungs 2 and 3 by repeating the similar procedures dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 45 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS A new rung is inserted by pressing the Enter key while the cursor is on the preceding rung A new rung can also be inserted by selecting Edit gt Append gt Rung When completed the ladder program looks like below NAR HAAA e ER Rung 01 1 roo0d 10001 Rung 02 21 I0000 I0001 Q0001 Rung 03 3 I0000 I0001 m0010 4 m0010 M8121 Q0002Z Now save the file with a new name 10 From the menu bar select File gt Save As and type TESTOI LDR the File Name field Change the Folder or Drive as necessary Click OK and the file is saved in the selected folder and drive Download Program You can download the user program from WindLDR running on a PC to the OpenNet Controller From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Download Program The Download Program Dialog shows then click the Download button The user program is downloaded to the OpenNet Controller penNet Download Dialog x Download To Transfer Mode PLO Binary loader C Ascii Download Download Button Program Size 01384 PLC Start NNHHKEXNNNM DU 1 1 1 1 1 L 1 1 1 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PLC Stop y Automatic stop before download Comm Sett
260. J 0 re En rr J a a 0 La FF 6 Rotary Switch 3 Cable Terminal 4 Terminal Label 1 Module ID A D indicates the analog input module ID 2 Power LED Turns on when power is on 3 Cable Terminal Screw terminal block 4 Terminal Label Indicates terminal numbers on the terminal block 5 Expansion Connector Connects to CPU and other modules otary Switc elects the input mode from five different signal ranges 6 Rotary Switch Sel he inp de from five diff ignal rang Rotary Switch Position Input Signal Range Resolution Input value of LSB 0 0 to 10V DC 2 5 mV 1 10V DC 5 mV 2 0 to 5V DC 1 25 mV 3 5V DC 2 5 mV 4 4 to 20 mA DC 4 pA lype ot Protection IM EE y Y ITI Voltage Input O Current Input O 2500 i 9 Differential lk oe UP BE 228 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Analog Input Module Specifications Type No Quantity of Input Channels 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A AD1261 6 channels Terminal Arrangement See page 2 30 Input Impedance within Signal Range Voltage input 1 MO minimum Current input 2500 M aximum Error at 25 0 6 of full scale Input Error Temperature Coefficient 50 013 C typical M aximum Error over Full Temperature Range 1 of full scale Digital Resolution 4000 increments Data Type in Application
261. LONWORKS communication system see page 26 1 LoNWoRks Interface Module Type Number and Weight Module Name LonWorks Interface Module Type No FC3A SX5LS1 Weight approx 180g arts Description 6 Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 FG Terminal 3 Service Request Button 4 Connector Module ID FC3A SXSLSI indicates the LONWORKS interface module ID FG Terminal Frame ground 1 2 3 Service Request Button Pushbutton used for network management 4 5 Connector Network interface connector for connecting an input communication cable Status LED Indicates operating status POWER PON Green ON Power is on RUN RIN Green ON Normal operation COM_ERROR ERR Red ON Communication error OFF Normal 0 1 ERROR Red ON Access error to the CPU through I bus SERVICE SER Yellow ON Application program not configured Yellow Flash Network management not configured 6 Expansion Connector Connects to CPU and other modules dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 39 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions All OpenNet Controller modules have the same profile for consistent mounting on a DIN rail CPU Module Pinunnnnun Digita
262. List Prgm Adrs i Prgm Adrs 0 TC 1 2 AND 3 OUT To compare three values use the ICMP interval compare greater than or equal to See page 10 4 7 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples TC and gt Timer Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction O Ui gt CJ NJ F2 Timing Chart Input IO Output Q0 is on when timer T2 current value is 50 Output Q1 is turned on when timer T2 starts to timedown and remains on until the current value reaches 30 T2 Current Value Output 00 Output Q1 Ladder Diagram 2 Program List Timing Chart ON Prgm Adrs Instruction Input Il off Timer T30 ON Current Value OFF ON Output 00 ore Output 00 is on when timer T30 current value is 500 Ladder Diagram 3 Program List Timing Chart ON Prgm Adrs Instruction Input 12 ger Timer T15 ON TC gt 15 Current Value OFF 350 Output Q1 he Output Q1 is turned on when timer T15 starts to time down and remains on until the current value reaches 350 Ladder Diagram 4 Program List Timing Chart Instruction Data Input I3 6e Timer T20 ON Current Value OFF ON OFF Output Q3 Output 02 Output is turned on while timer T20 current value is between 149 and 100 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER
263. M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 through SN the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 word or integer data type or D1 2N 2 double word or long data type is within the valid operand range If the derived destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED on the CPU module Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used Examples NSET NSET W 51 S2 53 54 S5 DI 1998 20 1998 0 1998 12 25 12 30 020 12 gt p21 12 25 p22 25 Five constants 1998 12 25 12 and 30 D20 through D24 LU 12 p23 12 When input IO is turned on 5 constants
264. Maintained Maintained M8056 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8057 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode AT Command Execution Maintained Cleared M8060 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8061 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8062 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Completion Maintained Cleared M8063 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Completion Maintained Cleared M8064 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Completion Maintained Cleared OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS i ird Description CPU Stopped Power OFF M8065 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8066 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8067 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Operational State Maintained Cleared M8070 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8071 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8072 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Failure Maintained Cleared M8073 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Lin
265. N of the spec meaning ified INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Error location Segment Position Add_Error_Info 0C20hex to 0C23 hex RB FAIL or 0D20hex to 0D23hex LB FAIL The Medium Attachment Unit MAU firmware component diagnosed an interruption of the data trans Meaning mission Gauge Interruption in the forward data path of the incoming bus interface IN of the specified INTERBUS device Remedy Check the cables male and female connectors on cables and devices for interruptions and repair them if required Error location Segment Position Add_Error_Info OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE I O 0C24hex to 0C27 SYSTEM hex RB FAIL or 0D24hex to 0D27hex LB FAIL Transmission error CRC error in the return data path at the incoming bus interface IN of the speci Meaning fied INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connect
266. NG INSTRUCTIONS DJNZ Decrement Jump Non zero amp When input is on the value stored in the data register or link register designated H DINE 31 32 by S1 is checked When the value is 0 no jump takes place When the value is not 0 the value is decremented by one If the result is not 0 jump to address with label 0 through 255 designated by S2 If the decrement results in 0 no jump takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction KOK KKK KOK KKK Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Decrement value XX 52 Source 2 Label number to jump to X X X X X X X X 0 255 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out Since the DJNZ instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Example DJNZ and LABEL The following example demonstrates a program to store consecutive values 1000 through 1049 to data registers D100 through D149 respectively MOV W S1 D1 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay 104 D M8120 At startup MOV instructions store initial data MOMI UM m l RER 1049 DO to store the value for the first cycle 50 DI to determine the jump cycles IMOV W S1 52 D1 D2 REP IMOV moves DO data 1049 to D149 in the first cycle
267. NNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Introduction This chapter describes the methods and precautions for installing and wiring OpenNet Controller modules Before starting installation and wiring be sure to read Safety Precautions in the beginning of this manual and under stand precautions described under Warning and Caution Turn power off to the OpenNet Controller before starting installation removal wiring mainte nance and inspection of the OpenNet Controller Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the OpenNet Controller If such a circuit is configured inside the OpenNet Controller failure of the OpenNet Controller may cause disorder of the control system damage or accidents Special expertise is required to install wire program and operate the OpenNet Controller People without such expertise must not use the OpenNet Controller Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the OpenNet Controller hous ing Put a cover on the OpenNet Controller modules during installation and wiring Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard damage or malfunction nstallation Location The OpenNet Controller must be installed correctly for optimum performance The environme
268. NSTRUCTIONS Control Signal Statuses in STOP Mode Communication DR Value DSR Input DTR Output RTS Output Mode D8205 D8305 D8206 D8306 D8207 D8307 No effect 0 default RxD disabled DEP ON No effect 1 TXD RXD disabled OFF OFF No effect User TXD RXD disabled OFF Communication No effect Mode TXD RXD disabled OFF Ser No effect 4 TXD RXD disabled oN No effect ormore RXD disabled OFF ON Maintenance While transmitting OFF Mode uL Norte Not transmitting DSR Input Control Signal Option D8205 D8305 Special data registers D8205 and D8305 are used to control data flow between the OpenNet Controller RS232C port 1 or port 2 and the remote terminal depending on the DSR data set ready signal sent from the remote terminal The DSR sig nal is an input to the OpenNet Controller to determine the status of the remote terminal The remote terminal informs the OpenNet Controllerusing DSR whether the remote terminal is ready for receiving data or is sending valid data The DSR control signal option can be used only for the user communication through the RS232C port 1 or port 2 D8205 D8305 0 system default DSR is not used for data flow control When DSR control is not needed set 0 to D8205 or D8305 D8205 D8305 2 1 When DSR is on the OpenNet Controller can transmit and receive data ON DSR signal D8205 D8305 2 When DSR is off the OpenNe
269. No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High byte stores 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Allocation No D8090 D8091 D8092 D8093 D8094 D8095 D8096 D8097 D8098 D8099 D8100 D8101 D8102 D8103 D8104 D8105 D8106 D8107 D8108 D8109 D8110 D8111 D8112 D8113 D8114 D8115 D8116 D8117 D8118 D8119 D8120 D8121 D8122 D8123 D8124 D8125 D8126 D8127 D8128 D8129 D8130 D8131 D8132 D8133 248 Node 10 Node 11 Node 12 Node 13 Node 14 Node 15 Node 16 Node 17 Node 18 Node 19 Node 20 Description Logical Device No Remarks Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment N
270. Node 2 3 0 Node 3 30 meee 4 0 Node 4 Other Vendor s 5 0 Node 5 Branch Unit 5 1 Node 6 6 0 Node 7 7 0 Node 8 6 0 Node 7 SX5S SBM 16K SX5S SBR08 8 in 8 out 8 outputs 7 0 Node 8 SX5S SBT16K Other Vendor s Other Vendor s 16 outputs Remote Bus Local Bus 244 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Data Mapping The data mapping for the remote I O network configuration on the preceding page is shown in the table below Node N Input Output ode No Logical Device No Input Operand Byte 1 Byte 0 Output Operand Byte 1 Byte 0 Link Register Link Register Node 0 L1000 7 0 15 8 L1004 1 0 L1001 Not used Not used L1005 Not used 16 in it fadus L1002 Not used Not used L1006 p L1003 Not used Not used L1007 L1010 L1014 Node 1 L1011 Depends on the module L1015 Depends on the module 2 0 L1012 specifications L1016 specifications L1013 L1017 L1020 L1024 Node 2 L1021 Depends on the module L1025 Depends on the module 2 1 L1022 specifications L1026 specifications L1023 L1027 L1030 L1034 Node 3 L1031 Depends on the module L1035 Depends on the module 3 0 L1032 specifications L1036 specifications L1033 L1037 Node 4 L1040 L1044 7 0 L1041 L1045 Not used dim L1042 Nopuseg L1046 Notused NO data p L1043 L1047 Not used L1050 L1054 Nod
271. Nw si Di 025 2345 gt 030 2345 10 5 025 D30 gt 031 2345 D25 030 through 034 032 2345 When input 10 is turned on data of data register 025 designated by source operand 51 is gt 033 2345 moved to 5 data registers starting with 030 designated by destination operand D1 034 2345 sotu H NRS D Nw 51 D1 _ p50 12 I1 3 D40 D50 D51 34 Double word data of D40 and D41 D50 through D55 D40 12 D52 12 When input I1 is turned on double word data of data registers D40 and DAl 34 D53 34 D41 designated by source operand S1 is moved to 6 data registers starting NS D54 12 with D50 designated by destination operand D1 55 34 9 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com IBMV Indirect Bit Move x E 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS When input is on the values contained operands designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 1 bit data so determined is moved to destination which is deter mined by the sum of values contained in operands designated S1 525 DI D2 H IBMV W S1 S2 D1 D2 by D1 and D2 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Base address
272. OCATION NUMBERS Operand Allocation Numbers Operand Allocation Numbers for Functional Modules Operand Allocation Numbers for Master Module Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Master Station Operand Allocation Numbers for Data Link Slave Station Special Internal Relay Allocation Numbers Special Data lt _ Digital I O Module Operands Functional Module Operands Bit Designation of Link Register C HAPTER 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Basic Instruction 5 LOD Load and LODN Load Not OUT Output and OUTN Output SET and BST Reset uev tC X REC IER ERE E MS AND and ANDN And OR and ORN OrNot llis rcs AND LOD Load ien READER e em ete RR RA e A RAS PTT NC nne OR LOD Load ucc eek Ek RPG RAR bg a BPS Bit Push BRD Bit Read and BPP TML TIM TMH and TMS Timer CNT CDP and CUD Counter and CC Counter Comparison TC and TC gt Timer Comparison DC and DC Data Register
273. ONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples ATOB Quantity of Digits 5 ATOB W S1 S2 D1 10 D10 5 D20 D10 011 012 D13 Quantity of Digits 4 ATOBW SI S2 DI I1 D10 4 D20 D10 D11 D12 D13 Quantity of Digits 3 ATOB W S1 S2 D1 12 D10 3 D20 D10 011 D12 e Quantity of Digits 2 ATOB W S1 S2 D1 13 D10 2 D20 D10 D11 e Quantity of Digits 1 ATOB W S1 S2 D1 14 D10 1 D20 D10 14 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h 53 0035h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h ASCII 49 0031h D20 D20 D20 D20 D20 BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 1234 04D2h BCD Binary 123 007Bh BCD Binary 12 0018h BCD Binary 1 0001h Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS DTDV Data Divide E When input is on 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is divided
274. OQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX0 Q3 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 23 ATEOQ0OV1 amp D2 amp C1 amp A0X0 amp H1 amp I0 amp B1 amp M5S022 amp W 24 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOXO amp K3Y AO N3S0 2 amp W 25 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX0 amp K3 AOV 350 22 amp WO Default Initialization String ATEOQ0V1 amp D2 amp C1VWVOX4NQ3J0VA0 amp MS N2S0 2 amp W CRLF When D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection stores 0 the default initialization string shown above is stored to data registers D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 AT and LF are appended at the beginning and end of the initialization string automatically by the system program and are not stored in data registers DR 8245 8246 8247 8248 8249 8250 8251 8252 8253 8254 8255 8256 8257 8258 8259 8260 8261 8262 8263 8264 DR 8345 8346 8347 8348 8349 8350 8351 8352 8353 8354 8355 8356 8357 8358 8359 8360 8361 8362 8363 8364 AT Eo 90 vi ep 2 amp vv o eM 5v so 72 amp w onoo v This initialization string is used for AIWA s modems Depending on your modem and telephone line the initialization string may have to be modified To select another initialization string from the table above set another value to data regis ter D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection 234 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 477
275. OTU Rising edges ON pulses are not detected SOTD Falling edges OFF pulses are not detected OUT All are turned off OUTN All are turned on SET and RST All are held in current status Current values are reset to zero TML TIM TMH and TM S Timeout statuses are turned off Current values are held CNT CDP and CUD Pulse inputs are turned off Countout statuses are turned off Shift register bit statuses are held SFR and SFRN Pulse inputs are turned off The output from the last bit is turned off Input conditions cannot be set for the MCR instruction More than one MCS instruction can be used with one MCR instruction Corresponding MCS MCR instructions cannot be nested within another pair of corresponding MCS MCR instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Pram Ads 10 11 Q0 Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF Input 10 Input I1 Output 00 DE When input IO is off MCS is executed so that the subsequent input is forced off When input IO is on MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS MCS and MCR Master Control Set and Reset continued Multiple Usage of MCS instructions Ladder Diagram Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This maste
276. OpenNet Controller stops operation For the system statuses in the stop and reset modes see page 4 3 Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Run Stop tab Stop Input Click the check box on the left and type a desired input number IO through 1597 in the input number field Reset Input Click the check box on the left and type a desired reset number IO through 1597 in the input number field Run Stop Keep Module ID Filter Catch Data Link c gt This example designates input 10 V Stop Input i0000 as a stop input and input 112 as 7 Reset Input 0012 a reset input Selection at Memory Backup Error Run Default C Stop Default No stop and reset inputs are designated dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error Start control special internal relay M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down After the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration the data designated to be maintained during power failure is broken The Run Stop Selection at Memory Backu
277. OpenNet Function Area Setting x Module ID Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bu Data Link Port RS485 Enable Communication Format Selection Input Number Comm Param pte 1 Communication Mode Setting RS232C _ Uncheck this box 3 Select the Data Link tab OpenNet Function Area Setting x Run Stop Keep Module ID Filter Catch Data Link gt Baud Rate Separate Refresh Default 19200 rl mI C Simultaneous Refresh Refresh Operation Baud Rate 19200 or 38400 bps Data Link Transmit Receive Data Quantity Words Slave Station Number gt Slave Station Transmit Receive lt Transmit Receive Data 1 through 31 1 0 gt o E Quantity Words 0 E Select the quantity of data E 0 X 0 v s E 4 ro E registers for transmit and receive data per slave station 0 through 10 words Enable Data Link Click the check box on the left to use the data link communication Refresh Operation Click the button for separate refresh default or simultaneous refresh See page 21 8 Baud Rate Select 19200 or 38400 bps When the data link system consists of only OpenNet Controllers and FA 3S serial interface module PF3S SIF4 select 38400 bps for faster communication When the data link system includes the MICRO or MICRO C select 19200 bps Data Link Transmit Receive Data Quantity Words Scroll the
278. PU Module 26 16 Application Program Examples 26 18 Defined Network Variables 26 23 LonWorks Network Troubleshooting 26 25 TROUBLESHOOTING ERROR ED PR eek teat ae RTI OR caa EA eg ed OC Nuns 27 1 Reading Error Data scc E RACE ex REPRE eu 27 1 Special Data Registers for Error Information 213 General Enor Codes xi aeu dp E Aene i eere d de e og ee ana 27 3 OpenNet Controller Operating Status Output and ERROR LED during Errors 274 Error Causes ACLIORnS sata Ais Pca ga Seed od Ba ed e ER eA aes 274 User Program Execution 21 6 Troubleshooting Diagrams 27 7 Execution Times for Instructions 1 Breakdown of END Processing Time A 2 V O Delay Time 2 hoste oe ee e ele ee RS A 2 Type Elst x3 usto ER n e wa be eto ae ORE ER ORS A 3 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL dec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Introduction This chapter describes general information for understanding the OpenNet Controller and system setups for using the OpenNet Controller in vari
279. PU Module C013h 8 bits Transmit Byte Count 8 Receive Byte Count 4 Register in the LoNWonks Interface Module 07 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO MSB LSB 1 0 Note Link register L 13 is for read only Do not write data into L 13 Example 5 Software Version in Register CO18h and Expansion Module ID in Register CO19h When a software version number is stored to register CO18h in the LONWORKS interface module or when an expansion module ID is stored to register CO19h in the LONWORKS interface module the data is transferred to a link register in the CPU module as illustrated below C018h or CO19h 8 bits Link Register L 24 or L 25 in the CPU Module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Application Program Examples This section describes application program examples for initializing the registers in the LONWORKS interface module writing receive data to data registers and reading transmit data from data registers Initialization Before starting LONWORKS communication through the network the data registers in the LONWORKS interface module have to be initialized The initialization sequence is illustrated in the chart below Power up Y when reset Initialization Is the register initial iz
280. PU module allocated to the OpenNet interface module depending on the slot where the OpenNet interface module is mounted To create a communication program for an OpenNet interface module first determine the slot number where the OpenNet interface module is mounted and make a program to write data to link registers allocated to transmit data and to read data from link registers allocated to receive data Example When a LonWorks interface module is mounted in the first slot of all functional modules e Transmit Data MOWW S1 DIR REP 10 65535 1104 4 e Receive Data MOVW 51 DIR REP 11 L100 DO 2 65535 L104 through L107 When input 10 is on constant 65535 FFFFh designated by source oper and S1 is moved to four link registers L104 through L107 designated by destination operand D1 All 64 bits 8 bytes in link registers L104 through L107 are turned on Since link registers L104 through L107 transmit data the data is transmitted to the network L100 L101 DO D1 When input is on 32 bit 4 byte data in two link registers L100 and L101 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data registers DO and D1 designated by destination operand D1 Since link registers L100 and L101 receive data communication data read to L100 and L101 is moved to data registers DO and D1 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTER
281. Press this button to eject the memory card from the CPU module 6 RS232C Port 1 Communication port used for the maintenance and user communication modes User communication instructions TXD1 and RXD1 send and receive data through this port 7 RS232C Port 2 Communication port used for the maintenance and user communication modes User communication instructions TXD2 and RXD2 send and receive data through this port 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 Terminal Block 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Function Terminal No Symbol Assignment 1 COM High speed counter COM 2 High speed counter phase Counter 3 B High speed counter phase B 4 Z High speed counter phase Z 5 HSC OUT High speed counter comparison output 6 RS485 A RS485 line A RS485 Port 7 RS485 B RS485 line B 8 RS485 G RS485 line SG 9 24V Power supply 24V DC Power Supply Terminals 10 ov Power supply 0V DC 11 T Frame ground 9 Expansion Connector For connecting a digital I O module or functional module 10 Remote I O Master Module Connector For connecting a remote I O master module compatible with INTERBUS This connector is located on the left side of the CPU module and usually covered with an end plate When connecting a remote I O master module remove the end plate from the CPU module and attach the remote I O master module
282. Programming Special Data Register Special DR Description D8200 BER RS232C port 1 user communication mode not modem mode Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch Since this example uses the RS232C port 1 turn on communication selector DIP switch 2 to select the user communica tion mode See page 17 2 Setting Communication Parameters Set the communication parameters to match those of the barcode reader See page 17 3 For details of the communication parameters of the barcode reader see the user s manual for the barcode reader An example is shown below Communication Parameters Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits 7 Parity check Even Stop bits 1 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Configuring Barcode Reader The values shown below are an example of configuring a barcode reader For actual settings see the user s manual for the barcode reader Synchronization mode Auto Read mode Single read or multiple read Communication parameter Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits Parity check Even Stop bit 1 Header 02h Terminator 03h Data echo back No BCR data output Yes Other communication settings Output timing Output priority 1 Character suppress No Data output filter No Main serial input No Sub Serial No Comparison preset mode Not used Allocation Numbers M100
283. Q6 12 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the ANDW ORW and XORW Instructions Source operands S1 and S2 and destination operand D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 When repeat is desig nated consecutive operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated operand are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ANDW AND word ORW OR word and XORW exclusive OR word instructions the following examples are described using the ANDW instruction Repeat One Source Operand Data Type Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 Iso ANDWW SIR S2 1 REP 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 D10 D20 030 3 D10 D20 d D30 D11 D20 gt 030 D12 D20 D30 Data Type Double Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW D SIR S2 1 REP D10 D20 D30 3 10 011 D20 D21 030 031 D12 D13 D20 D21 030 031 014 015 D20 D21 D30 D31 Repeat Destination Operand Only Data Type Word When only D1 destin
284. QUEST el nn el nn al o gt IC ms sg ao Ji joo D NIC LON aC 9 IS CU nn nn a Ic 3 et Als S 5 SC OIS B Iris uu uu uu B n HOIS oo oo oo o o a8 mS IS o D ena lo oo oo a idec elc N idec idec oo H Remote CPU Master Module Module OpenNet Interface Modules I O Modules 160000000000 z Bl SX5S nuunonnnuta Lo 5 55 nonoununss nunuununnunf g NERUS r c m n p p Remote Remote SX5S Communication 1 Terminals dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1 GENERAL INFORMATION User Communication System The OpenNet Controller CPU module has two RS232C ports and one RS485 port to control two RS232C devices and one RS485 device such as IDEC s HG series operator interface at the same time The figure below illustrates a system setup of remote I O and user communication In this example the I O statuses of a remote machine are transferre
285. R S MANUAL 5 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Internal Relay Keep Designation All Clear All internal relay statuses are cleared at startup default All Keep All internal relay statuses are maintained at startup Keep Range designated area of internal relays are maintained at startup Enter the start keep number in the left field and the end keep number in the right field The start keep number must be smaller than or equal to the end keep number Valid internal relay numbers are MO through M2557 Special internal relays cannot be desig nated OpenNet Function Area Setting Run Stop Keep Module ID Filter Catch Data Link 4 gt Internal Relay Keep Designation All Clear All Keep M0050 Mo100 Start Keep Number End Keep Number 2 Start Keep Number When a range of M50 M100 is designated as shown in the example above M50 through M100 are keep types MO through M49 and M101 through M2557 are clear types Shift Register Keep Designation Clear shift register bit statuses are cleared at startup default Keep shift register bit statuses are maintained at startup Keep Range A designated area of shift register bits are maintained at startup Enter the start keep number in the left field and the end keep number in the right fie
286. R the user need not program the BPS BRD and BPP instructions The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into BPS BRD and BPP when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List BPS Prgm Adrs Instruction BPP 13 Q3 CO O Ui UJ C Timing Chart ON 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Ql ON Q2 ON Q3 When both inputs 10 and I1 are on output Q1 is turned on When both inputs 10 and 12 are on output Q2 is turned on When both inputs 10 and 13 are on output Q3 is turned on 7 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ide Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Data Movement in Operation Register and Bit Stack Register When the BPS bit push instruction is used the program in the operation register is stored in the first bit stack register When the BPS instruction is used again the program in the first stack register is stored in the second bit stack register and the program in the operation register is stored in the first stack register Each time the BPS instruction is used the program is moved to the next bit stack register Program blocks can be stored in a maximum of eight bit stack registers When the BRD bit read instruction is used the program in the first bit stack register is read to the operation register All program blocks stored in bit stack registers ar
287. R USER S MANUAL 11 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples DIV Data Type Word DIV W S1 S2 Dl REP D10 50 D20 7 D30 7 D31 1 12 D10 D20 030 Quotient Remainder When input I2 is on data of D10 is divided by data of D20 The quotient is set to D30 and the remainder is set to D31 Note Destination uses two word operands in the division operation of word data type so do not use data register D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit oper and such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2521 or a larger number as destination operand D1 Data Type Integer DIV I S1 S2 Dl REP D10 50 p20 7 D30 7 D31 1 12 D10 D20 030 Quotient Remainder Note Destination uses two word operands in the division operation of integer data type so do not use data register D7999 as destination operand D1 otherwise a user program syntax error occurs and the ERROR LED is lit When using a bit operand such as internal relay for destination 32 internal relays are required so do not use internal relay M2521 ora larger number as destination operand D1
288. R oe A RG d e 2 7 OutputeMOodule atr ID a i bb DAR AAA GOL E Kcu 2 16 Analog Input Module A D Converter 2 28 Analog Output Module D A 2 31 Expansion Power Supply Module 2 34 Remote l O Master 2 36 DeviceNet Slave Module 2 38 LonWorks Interface Module 2 39 BifriensiOns A A LL eile Suo o ME ee det att a 2 40 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Installation EOGation i i oie dta mtb da Tue werk que eei 34 Assembling Modules em rra aiaiaaeo e Fetai ddaa rn 3 2 Disassembling Modules 3 3 Mounting n DIN Rail 251 uude s a Paw a doa wene eee ad asd dared idus 3 3 Removing from DIN a Mee de dad aude 3 3 Installation in Control 3 4 Mounting DIrecti n s 1 a tle dtd ea eed a pa nw le EE Roe ie kala a 34 Input WINING tw bd ia oe e Rod as aus We a Madd Roo tosta s 35 Output WINING iau dte uude dew a Y RS ha nor Torta don 346 Data linle Wiring i a errat acd treet Gerd wm Ex heed eae det tha do 3 7 Ana
289. REMOTE 1 SYSTEM 0C94hex to 0C97hex RB FAIL An INTERBUS device with the ID code of a local bus device was found at the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Add Error Info Error location Segment Position Meaning 0C98hex to 0C9Bhex RB FAIL or OD98hex to OD9Bhex LB FAIL The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTER Meaning BUS device has an invalid ID code Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OD9Chex to OD9Fhex LB FAIL The local bus connected directly to the controller board consists of more devices than have been Meaning entered in the active configuration Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OCCOhex to OCC3hex RB FAIL or ODCOhex to ODC3hex LB FAIL Meaning Multiple errors at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device INTERBUS cable connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 without any further INTERBUS device Alocal remote bus cable is defective that belongs to the local remote bus of the specified INTER Cause BUS device Defective INTERBUS device connected to the local remote bus of the specified INTERBUS device Failure of the supply voltage communication voltage UL for the module electronics made available by the BK module Failure of the supply voltage U for the BK module Remedy Check this local remote bus Add Erro
290. ROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Special Data Registers for High speed Counter Allocation 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Number Description Updated See Page D8045 High speed Counter Current Value Every scan 5 10 D8046 High speed Counter Reset Value 5 10 D8047 High speed Counter Preset Value 5 10 D8048 D8049 Reserved Special Data Registers for INTERBUS Description Updated See Page D8050 INTERBUS Node 0 Logical Device No When initialized 246 D8051 INTERBUS Node 0 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8052 INTERBUS Node 0 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8053 INTERBUS Node 0 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8054 INTERBUS Node 1 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8055 INTERBUS Node 1 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8056 INTERBUS Node 1 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8057 INTERBUS Node 1 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8058 INTERBUS Node 2 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8059 INTERBUS Node 2 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8060 INTERBUS Node 2 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8061 INTERBUS Node 2 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8062 INTERBUS Node 3 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8063 INTERBUS Node 3 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8064 INTERBUS Node 3 ID Cod
291. Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number E EE ARA 0 to29 52 Source 2 value X X X X X X X X 32768 to 32767 x gt x D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 29 which have been set using the XYFS instruction When an XYFS instruction with the corresponding format number is not programmed a user program execution error will result turning on spe cial internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED S2 Y value Enter a value for the Y coordinate to convert within the range specified in the XYFS instruction Although the integer value can be 32768 through 32767 any value out of the range specified in the XYFS results in a user program exe cution error turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED D1 Destination to store results The conversion results of the X value is stored to the destination The integer value of the conversion results can be 0 through 32767 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long a X When a bit operand such as
292. S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Programming Data Registers and Internal Relays To enable the modem mode and communicate through the telephone line the following settings are needed 1 Program to move to data register D8200 D8300 RS232C port communication mode selection to enable the modem mode at RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively Program to move a value 0 through 5 10 through 15 or 20 through 25 to data register D8201 D8301 modem initial ization string selection depending on your modem For applicable modems see page 23 4 If the predetermined initialization strings do not match your modem program a proper initialization string and enter the ASCII values to data registers starting with D8245 D8345 initialization string Make sure that the D8201 D8301 value is not changed after the new initialization string has been stored to data registers starting with D8245 D8345 To send out the new initialization string turn on internal relay M8050 M8080 initialization string start IR after the new values have been stored to the data registers Program to move 0 or 1 to data register D8203 D83093 on line mode protocol selection to select maintenance protocol or user protocol for the RS232C port after telephone line is connected Program the destination telephone number if dialing is required Enter the ASCII values of the telephon
293. STBA2 5 20 G5 08 B10PS VH x 2 Phoenix Contact J S T Mfg Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum 50 times minimum All outputs ON 60 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 20 mA 24V DC Turn ON time 500 usec maximum Turn OFF time 500 usec maximum Weight approx 220g 190g Internal Current Draw Output Delay Output Internal Circuit Internal Circuit x TL o S g S O COM COM terminals are connected together internally 2 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point Transistor Protect Source Output Module Specifications Type No Terminal Arrangement FC3A T16P1 See Terminal Arrangement chart on page 2 24 Rated Load Voltage 24V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC Rated Load Current 0 5A per output point Maximum Load Current 0 625A per output point at 30V DC 5A per common line at 30V DC Voltage Drop ON Voltage 1V maximum voltage between COM and output terminals when output is on Inrush Current 5A maximum Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum Clamping Voltage 39V 1V Maximum Lamp Load 10W Inductive Load L R 10 msec 30V DC 0 5 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA maximum 24V DC power voltage at the V terminal Isola
294. Since the HTOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples HTOB Data Type Word sotu HI HTOB W si bi H Hsen Data Type Double Word HTOB D S1 D1 p D10 020 142 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL D10 D10 D10 D10 011 10 011 10 011 0 0000h 1234 04D2h 9999 270Fh Binary 0 0000h 0 0000h 188 00BCh 24910 614Eh 1525 05F5h 57599 EOFFh D20 D20 D20 BCD 0 0000h 4660 1234h 39321 9999h BCD 0 0000h 0 0000h 4660
295. T16P Bit 15 Master Station Link Register L1004 nandana 0300h 768 Input No 7 Slave Station Output SX5S Communication of 1 byte Input Output Data SX5S SBM16K or SX5S SBM16P Bit 15 Master Station Link Register L1000 10 0400 1024 t Input No 7 Low byte is not used for Slave Station Input 5455 Bit 15 Byte 1 Byte 0 Master Station Link Register L1004 0500h 1280 Input No 7 Low byte is not used for Slave Station Output SX5S ROPE pala dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Logical Device Number and Node Number Node addresses logical device numbers are assigned to each slave station by the remote I O master module automatically according to the physical configuration of the remote I O network The following diagram illustrates an example of the OpenNet Controller remote I O network OpenNet Controller Master Station Logical Device Number 1 0 SX5S SBN16S 16 inputs Position low byte Bus Segment No high byte 2 1 Node 2 Logical Device Number Node Nuniber Other Vendor s Other Vendor s INTERBUS Address Number Remote Bus Local Bus e ss Sim 2 0 Node 1 2 1
296. The preset value can be 0 through 65535 and designated using a decimal constant or data register TML 1 sec Timer Ladder Diagram TML h TIM 100 msec Timer Ladder Diagram TIM TMH 10 msec Timer Ladder Diagram TMH TMS 1 msec Timer Ladder Diagram TMS 7 8 Program List Instruction Prgm Adrs Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction Program List Prgm Adrs Instruction Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Timing Chart 10 1 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Timing Chart OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com T T 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS imer Circuit The preset value 0 through 65535 can be designated using a data register DO through D7999 then the data of the data reg ister becomes the preset value Directly after the TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction can be programmed Ladder Diagram Program List m Prom Adr y D10 0 11 5 D10 Q0 e Timedown from the preset value is initiated when the operation result directly before the timer input is on e The timer output turns on when the current val
297. U Load dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 16 point Transistor Sink and Protect Source Output Modules Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 Terminal No Name Terminal No Name 4 m es 00000000000 PES WO CO N Oo eA WIN OOO0000000000000000000 00000 Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the output module For wiring precautions see page 3 6 FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16P1 4 Fuse 224 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL dec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A T16K3 16 point Transistor Sink Output Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connector VHR 10N J S T Mfg SVH 21T P1 1 J S T Mfg CN1 Terminal No Name mm
298. Unchanged Device Number 25 Stop Bits Hel Reset Port COMI xj Error Status Clear Details gt gt oo Reset PLC Network Settings 14 Calendar 1N Device No 012 ER papa Protect Status Change gt gt Unprotected Device No Close Help Enter 12 to select a device number to communicate with 22 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Introduction This chapter describes the modem mode designed for communication between the OpenNet Controller and another Open Net Controller or any data terminal equipment through telephone lines Using the modem mode the OpenNet Controller can initialize a modem dial a telephone number send an AT command enable the answer mode to wait for an incoming call and disconnect the telephone line All of these operations can be performed simply by turning on a start internal relay dedicated to each operation UN Caution The modem mode provides for a simple modem control function so that the OpenNet Controller can initialize a modem dial a destination telephone number or answer an incoming call The per formance of the modem communication using the modem mode depends on the modem functions and telephone line situations The modem mode does not prevent intrusion or malfunctions of other systems For pr
299. When displaying 4 digits with output QO designated as the first output number 8 consecutive output points must be reserved starting with QO through Q7 Display Processing Time Displaying numerical data requires the following time after the input to the DISP instruction is turned on Keep the input to the DISP instruction for the period of time shown below to process the display data Scan Time Display Processing Time 5 msec or more 3 scan times x Quantity of digits When the scan time is less than 5 msec the data cannot be displayed correctly When the scan time is too short to ensure normal display set a value of 6 or more in msec to special data register D8022 constant scan time preset value See page 5 20 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Example DISP The following example demonstrates a program to display the 4 digit current value of counter CNT 10 on 7 segment dis play units IDEC s DD3S F31N connected to the transistor sink output module DISP S1 Q LAT DAT When input IO is on the 4 digit current value of counter C10 is dis 10 BCD4 C10 Q0 L H played on 7 segment digital display units Output Wiring Diagram 16 Transistor Sink Output M odule FC3A T16K1 m o A 000000000 0
300. When using SX5 communication 1 terminals as remote slave sta Maximum Total 1 Points 4096 points tions with 16 inputs or 16 outputs a maximum of 512 I O points can Link Registers for Remote I System I O points at each node are allocated to predetermined link registers in the OpenNet Controller CPU module Only read InputData and write OutputData functions can be used for the OpenNet Controller remote I O communication Nodes and link registers are allocated as listed below be connected to the remote 1 network Node Input Operand Output Operand Node Input Operand Output Operand Node 0 L100011003 11004 11007 Node 16 1116041163 1116411167 Node 1 1101041013 11014411017 Node 17 1117041173 11174411177 Node 2 1102041023 11024411027 Node 18 1118041183 11184411187 Node 3 1103041033 11034 11037 Node 19 1119041193 11194411197 Node 4 1104041043 11044411047 Node 20 1120041203 1120411207 5 1105041053 11054411057 Node 21 1121041213 11214411217 6 1106041063 11064 11067 Node 22 11220411223 1122411227 Node 7 1107041073 11074 11077 Node 23 1123041233 1123411237 8 1108041083 11084 11087 Node 24 11240 41243 1124411247 9 1109041093 11094411097 Node 25 L125011253 L125411257 Node 10 L110011103 11104 11107 Node 26 11260 41263 1126411267 Node 11 1111041113 11114 11117 Node 27 1127041273 1127411277 Node 12 11120 41123 11124411127 Node 28 1128041283 1128411287
301. X X D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as N W or S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 word or integer data type or D1 2N 2 double word or long data type are within the valid operand range If the derived destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X For the N W 16 points bit operand or 1 point word operand is always used without regard to the data type When bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used Examples NRS sotu H NRSwW
302. XORed XOR D10 D12 D20 and the result is stored to D20 D10 1 D11 2 D12 3 D20 0 1h 0000 0000 0000 0001 2h 0000 0000 0000 0010 3h 0000 0000 0000 0011 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS 11 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Boolean computations use the AND OR and exclusive OR statements as carried out by the ANDW ORW and XORW instructions in the word or double word data type respectively The NEG negate instruction is used to change the plus or minus sign of integer or long data ANDW AND Word ORW OR Word 8 XORW Exclusive OR Word H H H ANDW S1 S2 D1 S1 S2 D1 XORW 51 52 1 S1 R KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK ORW 51 KK KKK KK KKK KK KKK S1 R OKKKKK KKK KK S2 R I e Ro Qi NL S2 R I e S2 R LA 10 NE m NE S1 S2 When input is on
303. YtoX 19 3 coordinate conversion instructions 19 1 counter adding up counter 7 11 and shift register in master control circuit 7 26 comparison instructions 7 14 dual pulse reversible counter 7 12 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com up down selection reversible 7 13 CPU module 2 1 specifications 2 5 modules A 3 crimping tool 3 10 25 5 26 6 CVXTY 19 2 CVYTX 19 3 cycle time 24 12 D A converter 2 31 data combine 14 14 communication between remote I O master and slave stations 24 3 comparison instructions 10 1 conversion instructions 14 1 divide 14 13 input 7 20 mapping 24 5 type 8 3 26 23 types for advanced instructions 8 4 data link communication 21 1 error 21 4 error code 21 4 error M8005 6 9 21 6 initialize flag M8007 6 9 21 6 prohibit flag M8006 6 9 21 6 stop flag M8007 6 9 21 6 connection error 27 4 master station processing A 2 mode 2 2 system 1 6 tab 21 7 wiring 3 7 with other equipment 21 12 data rate 25 4 25 6 data register allocation for transmit receive data 21 3 comparison instructions 7 18 data registers and link registers double word datamove 9 2 operands 8 5 for modem mode 23 3 DC and DC2 instructions 7 18 DEC 11 9 decimal values and hexadecimal storage 8 4 decrement 11 9 jump non zero 18 5 defined network variables 26 23 destination operand 8 3 dev
304. a 205g S145 Linear Conversion Maximum Value When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set the linear conversion maximum value to the data register desig nated by 51 5 Valid values are 232768 through 32767 and the linear conversion maximum value must be larger than the linear conversion minimum value S146 Select an appropriate value for the linear conversion maximum value to repre sent the maximum value of the input signal to the analog I O module When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 you don t have to set the linear conversion maximum value 5 1 5 S146 Linear Conversion Minimum Value When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set the linear conversion minimum value to the data register desig nated by S1 6 Valid values are 32768 through 32767 and the linear conversion minimum value must be smaller than the linear conversion maximum value 1 5 Select an appropriate value for the linear conversion minimum value to repre sent the minimum value of the input signal to the analog I O module When the linear conversion is disabled 5 1 4 set to 0 you don t have to set the linear conversion minimum value S1 6 204 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Example When the transducer connected to the analog input module has an input range of 50 C through 199 C set the fol
305. a link communication the data is sent to the corresponding data registers at the master station Master Station Slave Slave Station Data Register Transmit Receive Data Station Data Register Transmit Receive Data Number Number Slave 1 D7000 D7009 Transmit data to slave 1 Slave 17 D7320 D7329 Transmit data to slave 17 D7010 D7019 Receive data from slave 1 D7330 D7339 Receive data from slave 17 Slave 2 D7020 D7029 Transmit data to slave 2 Slave 18 D7340 D7349 Transmit data to slave 18 D7030 D7039 Receive data from slave 2 D7350 D7359 Receive data from slave 18 Slave 3 D7040 D7049 Transmit data to slave 3 Slave 19 D7360 D7369 Transmit data to slave 19 D7050 D7059 Receive data from slave 3 D7370 D7379 Receive data from slave 19 Slave 4 D7060 D7069 Transmit data to slave 4 Slave 20 D7380 D7389 Transmit data to slave 20 D7070 D7079 Receive data from slave 4 D7390 D7399 Receive data from slave 20 Slave 5 D7080 D7089 Transmit data to slave 5 Slave 21 D7400 D7409 Transmit data to slave 21 D7090 D7099 Receive data from slave 5 D7410 D7419 Receive data from slave 21 Slave 6 D7100 D7109 Transmit data to slave 6 Slave 22 D7420 D7429 Transmit data to slave 22 D7110 D7119 Receive data from slave 6 D7430 D7439 Receive data from slave 22 Slave 7 D7120 D7129 Transmit
306. a to slave 31 D7290 D7299 Receive data from slave 15 D7610 D7619 Receive data from slave 31 Slave 16 D7300 D7309 Transmit data to slave 16 D7310 D7319 Receive data from slave 16 If any slave stations are not connected master station data registers which are assigned to the vacant slave stations can be used as ordinary data registers Slave Station Data Data Register D7000 D7009 Transmit Receive Data Transmit data to master station tation Dat D7010 D7019 Receive data from master station Slave station data registers D7020 through D7619 can be used as ordinary data registers OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Special Data Registers for Data Link Communication Error In addition to data registers assigned for data communication the master station has 31 special data registers and each slave station has one special data register to store data link communication error codes If any communication error occurs in the data link system communication error codes are set to a corresponding data register for link communication error at the master station and to data register D8400 at the slave station For details of link communication error codes see below If a communication error occurs in the data link communication system the data is resent three times If the error still exists af
307. able breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBEAhex BUS FAIL Meaning The Control Device Function 0714hex service could not be executed Cause Fatal error Remedy Repeat the service if the controller board is in the RUN or ACTIVE state If diagnostics is active you must wait for the result Then the indicated bus error specifies the error location Add Error Info OBFOhex BUS FAIL Meaning The data transmission was temporarily interrupted As a result the controller board reset all outputs and stopped data transmission The display shows the INTERBUS device number The error can be found in the preceding bus segment of a local bus in the preceding bus segment of a ST compact station in the bus segments of a preceding remote bus branch e g installation remote bus or in the bus segment of the indicated INTERBUS device Cause Voltage reset of an INTERBUS device in the specified area Cable break in the specified bus segment The bridge RBST or LBST in the connector for the outgoing bus is defective for a device in the specified area Add Error Info 24 18 INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 0BF1hex BUS FA Meaning
308. ace error occurred 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Add Error Info Bus segment in which the error occurred Ir Position of the located error Bit7 20 No interface error occurred Error at the outgoing remote bus interface 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Add Error Info Bus segment in which the error occurred BitO 20 Error at outgoing remote bus interface Bit 16 0 Bit7 21 interface error occurred Error at the outgoing local bus interface 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Add Error Info Bus segment in which the error occurred BitO 21 Error atthe outgoing local bus interface Bit 16 0 Bit7 21 interface error occurred 24 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM 0C10hex to 0C13 Meaning hex RB FAIL or OD10hex to 0D13hex LB FAIL An INTERBUS device is missing A device entered in the connected bus configuration and not marked as switched off is missing in the connected bus configuration Cause The active configuration is the quantity of INTERBUS devices connected to the INTERBUS system whose data is within the summation frame The active configuration may differ from the connected bus configuration only when physically connected bus segments have been switched off Remedy C
309. actical applications confirm the communication function using the actual system setup and include safety provisions While communicating through modems the telephone line may be disconnected unexpectedly or receive data errors may occur Provisions against such errors must be included in the user program System Setup To connect modem to the RS232C port 1 or 2 on the OpenNet Controller use the modem cable 2 To enable the modem mode make the two settings described below 1 Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively See page 2 2 Both RS232C port 1 and 2 can be used for modem communication at the same time 2 Enter 1 to data register D8200 D8300 RS232C port communication mode selection to enable the modem mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively See page 23 3 Communication Selector DIP Switch Set DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communi cation mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively To RS232C Port Shield To RS232C Port 2 2000 Modem Cable 1 LF To RS232C Port 1 2 1 D sub 25 pin 3m 9 84 ft long Male Connector D sub 25 pin Connector Pinouts Pin Description Frame Ground RTS Request to Send Transmit Data
310. ad for I Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination M ethod Static Effect of Improper Input Connection Both sinking and sourcing input signals can be connected If any input exceeding the rated value is applied permanent damage may be caused Cable Length 3m 9 84 ft in compliance with electromagnetic immunity Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Nylon Connector B10PS VH x2 J S T Mfg Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum 50 times minimum 2 8 Internal Current Draw All inputs ON 40 mA 24V DC All inputs OFF 10 mA 24V DC Weight approx 210g 180g Input Operating Range The input operating range of the Type 1 EN61131 input module is shown below 9 2 9 7 Transition rans a Area Q 1 5 44 7 88 Input Current mA Input Internal Circuit 3 3 COM 5 dd Input OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL ide Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 32 point DC Input Module Specifications Type No Rated Input Voltage FC3A N32B4 FC3A N32B5 24V DC sink source input signal Input Voltage Range 20 4 to 27 6V DC Rated Input Current 4 9 mA point 24V DC Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement charts on page
311. adder Diagram 3 Timing Chart MOWW S1 DI D15 Value 200 355 521249 200 350 390 600 00 Output Q1 m Output Q1 is on when data register D15 value is 350 or more Ladder Diagram 4 Timing Chart MOVW 51 D1 D20 Value D100 D20 ON DC D20 LUE 1 150 Output Q2 onm Output Q2 is on while data register D20 value is between 149 and 100 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS SFR and SFRN Forward and Reverse Shift Register x The shift register consists of a total of 256 bits which are allocated to RO through R255 Any number of available bits can be selected to form a train of bits which store on or off status The on off data of constituent bits is shifted in the forward direction forward shift register or in the reverse direction reverse shift register when a pulse input is turned on Forward Shift Register SFR When SFR instructions are programmed two addresses are always required The SFR instruction is entered followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate operand numbers The shift register number corresponds to the first or head bit The number of bits is the second required address after the SFR instruction The SFR instruction requires three inputs The forward shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input data input
312. al internal relays for data link communication 21 6 for high speed counter 5 10 for INTERBUS master information 24 11 specifications CPU module 2 5 data link 21 1 DeviceNet slave module 25 4 function 2 5 general 2 4 LonWorks interface module 26 5 remote I O master module 2 37 remote I O system 24 2 user communication mode 17 1 start and result internal relays 23 2 control M8000 6 9 delimiter 17 16 start stop operation 4 2 INDEX remote I O communication 24 12 schematic 4 2 using power supply 4 3 using WindLDR 4 2 starting operation 25 9 26 12 station numbers 21 2 status code receive 17 21 transmit 17 9 data register modem mode 23 8 LED 2 2 transition number INTERBUS master 24 10 status LEDs 26 15 step response method 20 9 stop input 4 3 5 1 system status 2 6 STOP mode control signal statuses 17 28 structure 26 23 of an advanced instruction 8 3 SUB 11 1 subtraction 11 1 SUM 11 11 SX5 communication I O terminals A 4 SX5D communication I O terminals 25 2 SX5L communication I O terminals 26 3 SX5S communication I O terminals 24 3 system error information INTERBUS master 24 10 setup 1 3 data link 21 2 DeviceNet network 25 2 LonWorks network 26 3 modem mode 23 1 remote I O system 24 1 user communication 17 2 statuses 4 3 at stop reset and restart 2 6 table ASCII character code 17 26 display unit character codes 16 7 TC and TC2 instructions 7 16 telephone number 23 3 23 5 terminal bl
313. al relay M8000 is on If M8000 is off then the CPU does not start operation when the stop or reset input is turned off M8000 is not turned on or off when the stop and or reset input is turned on or off When a stop or reset input is turned on during program operation the CPU stops operation the RUN LED is turned off and all outputs are turned off The reset input has priority over the stop input System Statuses The system statuses during running stop reset and restart after stopping are listed below Internal Relays Shift Registers Mode Outputs Counters Data Registers Timer Link Register Current Value Note Keep Type Clear Type Run Operating Operating Operating Operating Operating Stop Stop input ON OFF Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Reset Reset input ON OFF OFF Reset to zero OFF Reset to zero Reset to zero Reset to zero Restart Unchanged Unchanged OFF Reset to zero Reset preset Unchanged Note Link registers used as outputs are turned off like outputs OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER s MANUAL 4 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS Simple Operation This section describes how to edit a simple program using WindLDR on a computer transfer the program from WindLDR on the PC to the OpenNet Controller run the program and monitor the operation on WindLDR Connect the OpenNet Controller to the comput
314. ange see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 Receive format designated by operand S1 can be a maximum of 200 bytes When data receive is complete an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on Destination 2 occupies two consecutive data registers starting with the operand designated by D2 The receive status data register DO through D7998 stores the status of data receive and error code The next data register stores the byte count of received data The same data registers should not be used as transmit status registers for TXD1 TXD2 instructions and receive status registers for RXD1 RXD2 instructions While RXD1 RXD2 instructions are ready for receiving data after a receive format is complete turning on the user com munication receive instruction cancel flag M8022 or M8023 cancels all RXD1 RXD2 instructions Precautions for Programming the RXD Instruction e The OpenNet Controller can execute a maximum of five RXD1 and five RXD2 instructions that have a start delimiter at the same time If a start delimiter is not programmed in RXDI RXD2 instructions the OpenNet Controller can execute only one RXD1 and one RXD2 instructions at a time If the start input for a RXDI RXD2 instruction is turned on while another RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter is executed a user communication error occurs e Since instructions are e
315. aning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD8Chex to OD8Fhex LB FAIL Only ID cycles but no data cycles can be run Cause nterrupted data register of the INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 The number of data registers of the specified INTERBUS that is connected to the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the length code Add Error Info 0C90hex to 0C93 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL The specified INTERBUS device could not activate the following bus segment The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause carried out a voltage reset or is defective Check this INTERBUS device Check the supply voltage of this INTERBUS device whether it conforms to the rated value and whether the permissible AC voltage portion is exceeded Refer to the relevant data sheet for the val Remedy ues Check the BK module s power supply unit for an overload condition Refer to the relevant data sheets for the maximum permissible output current of the BK module and for the typical current consumption of the connected local bus devices Add_Error_Info 24 26 Error location Segment Position OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24
316. annel 4 designate link register L304 as source operand S4 Link Register Allocation Numbers for Source Operand S4 M Analog Input Channel Analog Input Module Position 0 1 gt 3 1 5 Functional Module 1 L100 L101 L102 L103 L104 L105 Functional Module 2 L200 L201 L202 L203 L204 L205 Functional Module 3 L300 L301 L302 L303 L304 L305 Functional Module 4 L400 L401 L402 L403 L404 L405 Functional Module 5 L500 L501 L502 L503 L504 L505 Functional Module 6 L600 L601 L602 L603 L604 L605 Functional Module 7 L700 L701 L702 L703 L704 L705 When an analog input module is not used a data register can also be designated by source operand S4 process variable When designating a data register as S4 make sure that the S4 data takes a value between 0 and 4000 When S4 stores a value larger than 4000 the process variable is set to 4000 20 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Destination Operand D1 Manipulated Variable The data register designated by destination operand D1 stores the manipulated variable of 32768 through 32767 calcu lated by the PID action When the calculation result is less than 32768 D1 stores 532768 When the calculation result is greater than 32767 D1 stores 32767 While the calculation result is less than 32768 or greater than 32767 the PID action still continues When
317. ar conversion 1 enable linear conversion D5 linear conversion maximum value 5000 500 C D6 linear conversion minimum value 500 50 C D10 integral start coefficient 0 100 D11 input filter coefficient 70 70 D12 sampling period 50 500 msec D13 control period 10 1 sec D14 high alarm value 2500 250 C D19 AT sampling period 150 1 5 sec D20 AT control period 30 3 sec D21 AT set point 1500 150 C D22 AT output manipulated variable 100 100 D100 set point 2000 200 C When input 10 is turned on 3 internal relays M1 through M3 designated as control relays are turned off M1 auto manual mode Auto mode M2 output manipulated variable limit enable Disable M3 integral start coefficient disable Enable While input 10 is on the PID instruction is executed 0 026 control registers MO M7 control relays D100 set point L100 process variable D102 manipulated variable When internal relay M6 control output is turned on out put QO heater power switch is turned on When internal relay M4 high alarm output is turned on output Q1 high alarm light is turned on OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Ladder Program continued While monitor input I1 is on the temperature is monitored When the temperature is higher than or
318. are not satisfied The basic program branching instructions are LABEL and LJMP which are used to tag an address and jump to the address which has been tagged Programming tools include either or options between numerous portions of a program and the ability to call one of several subroutines which return execution to where the normal program left off LABEL Label 88 This is the label number from 0 to 255 used at the program address where the execution of pro et gram instructions begins for a program branch An END instruction may be used to separate a tagged portion of the program from the main pro gram In this way scan time is minimized by not executing the program branch unless input condi tions are satisfied Note The same label number cannot be used more than once When a user program including duplicate label numbers is downloaded to the CPU a user program syntax error will result turning on the ERROR LED Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat Label number Tag for LJ MP LCAL and DJNZ 0 255 LJMP Label Jump amp 8 UMP S1 When input is on jump to the address with label 0 through 255 designated by S1 H When input is off no jump takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruction The LJMP instruction is used as an either or choice between two portions of a pro gram Program execution does not return to the instruction following t
319. as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or S3 the timer counter current value is read out Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When an output or internal relay is designated as the destination only 1 point is used regardless of the selected data type Example ICM P gt ICMP gt W S1 S2 S3 D1 10 D10 D11 D12 M10 D10 gt D11 2 D12 gt MIO goes on When input 10 is turned on data of data registers D10 D11 and D12 designated by source operands S1 S2 and S3 are compared When the condition is met internal relay M10 designated by destination operand D1 is turned on When the condition is not met M10 is turned off 104 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The binary arithmetic instructions make it possible for the user to program computations using addition subtraction mul tiplication and division For addition and s
320. as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can be 1 through 15 for the word data type or 1 through 31 for the double word data type Since the ROTRC instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long L ee When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 BiT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples ROTRC Data Type Word REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay S1 D1 13 D20 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 13 to ROTRC W 51 bits data register D20 D20 1 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D20 is rotated to the right by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the LSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the MSB Bits to rotate 1
321. aster module parts description and specifications see page 2 36 Since I O data is stored in link registers and transferred automatically no communication program is required to send and receive I O data between the master and slave stations I O connection is just as easy as ordinary digital I O connection Remote 1 System Setup Remote 1 Master Station Remote 1 Master Module FC3A SX5SM1 INTERBUS Cable Cable Length 400m 1312 ft maximum o o o o o a o a o o o o o o o o o o o o D 0000000000000000000000 Bl D sub 9 pin Male Connector D sub 9 pin Female Connector lt Ha OOOO OS OOOOOFHo 555 nunnunununxraB TRES mpunuuuunmnr s Node 0 5 H Qui HIBS EIE 8 9o peeeoeoeo990
322. at M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay WKCMP S1 53 D1 S2 ON 126 1100 0 Q0 M8125 51 126 specifies Monday through Saturday WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 11 00 a m on Monday through Friday WKCMP OFF S1 126 53 0 D1 90 52 200 S1 Same constant value to designate consecutive days WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 2 00 a m on next day S2 Constant values ON time gt OFF time 53 Same constant value 0 D1 Same operand Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on different days 2 The output is turned on at 11 00 a m every day and is turned off at 2 00 a m on the following day 2 00 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 2 0 11 00 Sat M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay S1 0 specifies all days WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 11 00 a m everyday WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 2 00 a m on the next day WKCMP S1 S2 53 ON 0 1100 0 1 90 D1 90 8125 51 0 52 200 53 0 WKCMP OFF S1 Same constant value to designate consecutive days 2 Constant values ON time gt OFF time 3 Same constant value 0 D1 Same operand dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on different da
323. at 0 gt 0 51 S2 1 REP 10 D20 D30 M50 3 D20 D21 D30 D31 D22 D23 D30 D31 D24 D25 D30 D31 Repeat Two Source Operands When S1 source and 52 source are designated to repeat source operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operands designated by S1 and S2 are compared with each other The comparison results are ANDed and set to the destination operand designated by D1 Data Type Word 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 CMP gt W SIR 52 1 REP 10 D10 D20 M10 3 D10 10 D20 0 73 pii 20 D21 20 AND M10 D12 30 o22 100 Data Type Double Word CMP gt D 51 S2R Dl REP 51 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 10 020 030 M50 3 020 021 030 031 022 023 gt 032 033 40 e uso D24 D25 lt 034 035 Repeat Source and Destination Operands When S1 52 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat source operands as many as the repeat cycles start ing with the operands designated by S1 and S2 are compared with each other The comparison results are set to destina tion operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by D1 Data Type Word 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 CMP gt W 51 S2R DIR REP 10 D10 D20 M10 3 010 10 4
324. ata Register 8 000 points Counter 256 points adding dual pulse reversible up down selection reversible Timer 256 points 1 sec 100 msec 10 msec 1 msec First 8 channels of each input module can be designated as catch inputs Catch Input Minimum turn on pulse width 40 usec maximum Minimum turn off pulse width 150 usec maximum Calendar Clock Accuracy 30 sec month at 25 typical Backup duration Approx 30 days 25 typical Self diagnostic Function Keep data sum check WDT check user program RAM sum check user program ROM sum check user program write check power failure check timer counter preset value sum check calendar clock error check user program syntax check data link connection check I O bus check 1 bus initialization check user program execution check Start Stop M ethod Turning power on and off Start stop command in WindLDR Turning start control special internal relay M8000 on and off Turning designated stop or reset input off and on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS System Statuses at Stop Reset and Restart Internal Relays Shift Registers eiad Counters Data Registers Imer IOS Treg later Mode Outputs _ Current Value Note Keep Type Clear Type Run Operating Operating Operating Opera
325. ata register and does not continue from the data register area a user pro gram syntax error is caused Advanced instructions execute operation only on the available operands in the valid area If invalid operands are desig nated a user program syntax error occurs when transferring the user program to the OpenNet Controller CPU module The MOV move instruction sets data of data register DO to 16 outputs MOVW S1 DIR REP Eos M8125 DO 0580 2 Q580 through Q597 in the first repeat cycle The destination of the sec ond cycle is the next 16 outputs Q600 through Q617 which are invalid resulting in a user program syntax error For details about repeat operations of each advanced instruction see the following chapters dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 8 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS NOP No Operation amp No operation is executed by the NOP instruction The NOP instruction may serve as a place holder Another use would be to add a delay to the CPU scan time in order to simulate communication with a machine or application for debugging pur poses The NOP instruction does not require an input and operand Details of all other advanced instructions are described in following chapters 86 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE
326. ata register D20 is rotated to the right by 2 bits as designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 MSB D20 LSB 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 MI D20 LSB CY 011100 0 0 0 000 01111 0 M8003 ma D20 LSB 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 M8003 Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D20 and D21 is rotated to the right by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation D20 D21 851 981 MSB D20 D21 LSB _ gt 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 zi Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation D20 D21 2 147 909 638 MSB 020 021 LSB 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 13 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTLC Rotate Left with Carry ROTLCU bit When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data desi
327. ata register stores the byte count of received data Receive Format Receive format designated by source operand S1 specifies data registers to store received data data digits for storing data data conversion type and repeat cycles A start delimiter and an end delimiter can be included in the receive format to discriminate valid incoming communication When some characters in the received data are not needed skip can be used to ignore a specified number of characters BCC code can also be appended to the receive format to verify the received data One RXD instruction can receive 200 bytes of data at the maximum S1 Source 1 Receive Calculation Digits Conversion Type Repeat Calculation Start Bytes Position 1 4 A ASCII to Binary Data Register D0 D7999 1 5 B ASCII to BCD 1 99 1 2 No conversion Start Delimiter OOh FFh 7Fh No conversion End Delimiter OOh FFh 7Fh No conversion A Binary to ASCII X XOR BEC B i No eS E A ADD Skip 1 99 Designating Data Register as S1 When a data register is designated as source operand S1 receive digits and conversion type must also be designated The received data is divided into a block of specified receive digits converted in a specified conversion type and stored to the designated data register Conversion types are available in ASCII to B
328. ated consecutive operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the desig nated operand are used Repeat One Source Operand Data Type Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 and 1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 DIV W 1 2 D1 REP E SOTU WU rat 010 D20 D30 031 D11 E D20 030 031 012 D20 gt D30 D31 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operands D1 D1 1 and 1 2 1 3 S1 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 H m EM Aa D10 D11 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D32 D33 012 013 20 021 030 031 032 033 14 15 20 021 030 031 032 033 Quotient Remainder Repeat Destination Operand Only Data Type Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 6 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 Fi SOM ENS any DOO BO DIU D30 D33 D10 D20 D31 D34 D10 D20 032 D35 Quotient Remainder Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 6 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 20 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 E SOU a s D10 D11 D20 D21 gt D30 D31 D36 D37 D10 D11 20 021 032 033 D38 D39 D10 D11 20 021 034 035 D40 D41
329. ated to be maintained during power failure is broken because of memory backup failure Note that the keep data of internal relays and shift registers are cleared Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer If this error occurs when power is shut down for a short period of time after the battery 1s charged as specified the battery is defective and the CPU module has to be replaced 0080h User Program Syntax Error This error indicates that the user program has a syntax error Correct the user program and download the corrected user program to the OpenNet Controller The error code is cleared when a correct user program is transferred User program syntax errors include the following causes e Invalid opcode for basic instruction Invalid operand for basic instruction Invalid TIM CNT CC TC DC SFR N preset value or data e Invalid opcode for advanced instruction Invalid data for advanced instruction nvalid operand for advanced instruction Invalid repeated usage of advanced instructions such as DISP or DGRD User program capacity over error 0100h User Program Writing Error This error indicates a failure of writing into the OpenNet Controller CPU module ROM when downloading a user pro gram The error code is cleared when writing into the ROM is completed successfully If this error occurs frequently the OpenNet Controller CPU module has to be replaced When a memory card is installed in the CPU module writing into
330. ation D10 16397 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 MSB D10 LSB After second rotation D10 32794 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 11011 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and E SOTU PIED a 3 D11 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation D10 D11 2 684 788 742 MSB 10 011 LSB r 11 o 1i o o ojo o o o o oj o 1 1 o 1 o 1 o o o oo 0 o o o o 1 1 0 4 M8003 Rotate to the left After rotation D10 D11 1 074 610 189 CY MSB 10 011 15 1 o 1 ojoj o o o o o o 0 0 1 o i po i o o o o o o o 0 1 1 0 1 M8003 13 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Rotate Right ROTR
331. ation is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 WPCY D o 010 D20 TE D31 D10 D20 D32 Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D S1 S2 D1 R REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 2 D20 D21 030 031 D10 D11 D20 D21 032 033 D10 D11 D20 D21 D34 D35 Repeat Two Source Operands Data Type Word When S1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 sov ANDWW SIR S2R DI REP 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 1 0 D10 D20 030 3 D10 D20 RUE D30 D11 D21 D30 D12 D22 030 Data Type Double Word When 1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ANDW D 51 S2R 1 D10 020 030 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 030 031 D12 D13 D22 D23 030 031 D14 D15 D24 D25 D30 D31 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 123 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat di
332. ation complete SEED ee OI Start to execute a user program Initialization is not complete The following program is an example of an application program in Neuron C to initialize the LONWORKS interface mod ule consisting of initialization codes and a header file When you modify or create an application program make sure that the application program includes the following codes in italics Initialization Codes FS 26 18 PRAGMA pragma scheduler_reset 1 kk A RR AK A A AAA A A AA AA I I Network Variable Fe ee kk A AA AA ee A A AAA ee A A AA A I I I x Define network variables T ko ko kk ee A A AA AA I I koe Write the software version number to C018h OK OK OK kk kk KCKCKCkCkC kk kk ko AA AA ee A AAA AA I f define FC3ASX5L VERSION 0x10 ee kk ke A AAA koe Write the expansion module ID to C019h OK OK OK ko koe KICK CK Kok ke kk kk ee kk A AAA ee A AAA AAI I I I f define EMID CODE 0x50 kk ko kk A AA Kok kk ko kk AA AAI I I ee include file Fe ee ee A A A AAA ee ee A A AAA ee A A AA AA x include access h include msg addr h include lt control h gt include lt status h gt include lt snvt_lev h gt include fc3asx51 h Refer to the header file shown below V ECKE A RR RAK ee A A
333. ause device on any subsequent local bus Check this part of the system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info 0C84hex to 0C87 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD84hex to 0D87hex LB FAIL Multiple timeout of the outgoing bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Defect of the bus cable connected to this bus interface of the following INTERBUS device or of a OE device on any subsequent local bus Check this part of the system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info 0C88hex to 0C8B Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D88hex to OD8Bhex LB FAIL An unexpected device was found at the outgoing bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device Cause INTERBUS device connected without an entry in the active configuration INTERBUS cable connected without any further INTERBUS devices Add Error Info 0C8Chex to 0 8 Me
334. automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 Error Data Status Area L 12 L 12 b15 b14 unused b12 b9 unused b8 67 0 unused When an error occurs the MNS or IO LED on the DeviceNet slave module goes on or flashes depending on the error and a corresponding bit in the link register goes on The status LED goes off when the cause of the error is removed The error data bit remains on until the CPU is powered up again or reset b15 initialization error This bit goes on when the CPU module fails to acknowledge the completion of initialization for communication with the DeviceNet slave module b13 I O error This bit goes on when an error occurs during communication through the CPU bus b8 communication fault This bit goes on when a communication fault is detected 1 O Counts Status Area L 13 L 13 b15 b12 transmit bytes b11 b8 receive bytes b7 b0 unused This link register stores the transmit and receive byte counts selected in the Function Area Setting Open Bus in WindLDR Connection Status Status Area L 14 This link register stores the data of the allocation choice byte Software Version Reserved Area L 24 L 24 b15 b12 major revision 611 08 minor revision b7 b0 unused This link register stores the system software version number Example Version 1 3 1 major revision 3 minor revision
335. ave stations is refreshed at the END processing after complet ing communication with all slave stations Master Station Data received from one slave station is Refresh Timing refreshed at each END processing Applicable Master OpenNet Controller MICRO MICRO C OpenNet Controller Station ens SIRE OpenNet Controller MICRO MICRO C OpenNet Controller MICRO MICRO C When the data link system contains the OpenNet Controller and MICRO MICRO C set the baud rate to 19200 bps and transmit receive data quantity to 2 words in the Function Area Settings for the OpenNet Controller to communicate with MICRO MICRO C stations When the MICRO MICRO C is used as a slave station in the simultaneous refresh mode the transmit frame from the mas ter station will be of a fixed data length The OpenNet Controller master station in the simultaneous refresh mode automat ically checks if slave stations connected in the data link system are MICRO MICRO C or not Separate Refresh Mode Communication Sequence The master station can communicate with only one slave station in one scan time When a slave station receives a commu nication from the master station the slave station returns data stored in data registers assigned for data link communica tion When the maximum 31 slave stations are connected the master station requires 31 scans to communicate with all slave stations Both master and slave stations refresh communication data in t
336. ax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Structure Name BIT16_DAT Structure typedef struct unsigned char dat 2 16 DAT Used For 16 point outputs 8 bits x 2 BIT24 DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 3 24 DAT 24 point outputs 8 bits x 3 BIT32 DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 4 JBIT32 DAT 32 point outputs 8 bits x 4 BIT40_DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 5 40 DAT 40 point outputs 8 bits x 5 BIT48_DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 6 48 DAT 48 point outputs 8 bits x 6 BIT56 DAT typedef struct unsigned char dat 7 JBIT56 DAT 56 point outputs 8 bits x 7 BIT64 DAT Example When the transmit and receive bytes are set to 3 using WindLDR on the Open Bus page selected from Configure Func tion Area Settings only 24 point type declared network variables nv i124 and 024 and the network variables shown in the table below can be used Then link registers listed below can be used for transmission and receiving pas oz or To o Te v T6 T2 TS T9 L 00 Leo 26 24 typedef struct unsigned char dat 8 JBIT64 DAT 64 point outputs 8 bits x 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE
337. ax Cable Distance Max Cable Distance Max Drop Line Max Total Drop for 100 Thick Cable for 100 Thin Cable Length Line Length 500k baud 100m 100m 6m 39m 250k baud 250m 100m 6m 78m 125k baud 500m 100m 6m 156m Maximum Number of Stations in the Network Communication Data Length Network Interface Connector 64 stations including a master Transmit 0 to 8 bytes selectable in 1 byte increments Receive 0 to 8 bytes selectable in 1 byte increments In the module MSTB2 5 5 GF 5 08AU made by Phoenix Contact To the cable FRONT MSTB2 5 5 STF 5 08AU made by Phoenix Contact Communication Cable Special DeviceNet Cable Terminator 254 Maker Rockwell Automation For details about cables con sult Rockwell Automation Thick Cable Type No Thin Cable Type No 1485 1 50 1485 1 150 Terminators must be connected to both ends of the DeviceNet network When setting up a network either connect commercially available terminators at both ends of the network or connect the following resistor to the branch taps at both ends of the network Metal film resistor 1210 1 1 AW OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Wiring DeviceNet Slave Module Precautions for Wiring Do not run the network cable in parallel with or near power lines and keep the network cable away from n
338. cation Parameters Set the communication parameters to match those of the printer See page 17 3 For details of the communication parame ters of the printer see the user s manual for the printer An example is shown below Communication Parameters Baud rate 9600 bps Data bits 8 Parity check None Stop bits 1 Note 1 In the user communication mode communication is based on the end delimiter code specified in the TXD or RXD instruction Note 2 The receive timeout value is used for the RXD instruction in the user communication mode Since this example uses only the TXD instruction the receive timeout value has no effect Ladder Diagram The second data stored in special data register D8014 is compared with 0 using the CMP compare equal to instruction Each time the condition is met the TXD2 instruction is executed to send the C2 and D30 data to the printer A counting circuit for counter C2 is omitted from this sample program MOV W Sl Dl REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 3 D8309 3 D8305 to enable the DSR option for busy control CMP W S1 52 Dl REP M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay M8125 D8014 0 MO CMP W compares the D8014 second data with 0 MOWW S1 D1 o n C2 D31 When the 08014 data equals 0 second MO is turned on MOWW S1 Counter C2 current value is moved to D31 pa0i2 090 D8012 hour data is moved to D20 MOV W S1 D1 i D8013 minute data is
339. ce the SFTR instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types word integer D double word L long eg y CENE When bit operand such as output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples SFTR Data Type Word REP M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay S1 D1 29 D10 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 29 to data register D10 S1 bits D10 2 W Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is shifted to the right by 2 bits as designated by operand bits The last bit status shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the MSB Bits to shift 2 MSB D10 LSB Before shift D20 229 0 0 010
340. ces Add Error Info OBE2hex BUS FA IL The controller board detected changes in the configuration which do not permit to continue the data Meaning traffic over the bus Cause The maximum permissible number of INTERBUS words was exceeded The maximum number of INTERBUS devices was exceeded Add Error Info 24 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OBE4hex BUS FAIL Meaning A serious error occurred when acquiring the bus configuration via the Create_Configuration 0710hex service This error caused the bus system to be switched off The error location could not be detected This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error rate can be very high Cause The error occurs due to installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE6hex BUS FA IL A serious error occurred causing the bus system to be switched off However no error was detected Meaning when checking th
341. city 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16K words 8K steps Quantity of Slots 7 slots maximum without using expansion power supply module 15 slots maximum when using expansion power supply module Maximum Digital 1 Points 224 points without using expansion power supply module 480 points when using expansion power supply module 56 points when using 7 modules of 8 point I O e 112 points when using 7 modules of 16 point I O e 224 points when using 7 modules of 32 point I O 480 points when using 15 modules of 32 point 1 User Program M emory Flash ROM RAM memory card Backup Duration Approx 30 days typical at 25 C after backup battery fully charged Backup Data Internal relay shift register counter data register RAM Battery Lithium secondary battery Backup Charging Speed Approx 2 hours from 0 to 90 of full charge Battery Life Approx 10 years using in cycles of 9 hour charging 15 hour discharging Replaceability Impossible Control System Stored program system not in compliance with EN61131 3 Instruction Words 37 basic instructions 65 advanced instructions Processing Time Basic advanced instruction See page 1 END processing See page 2 Clock calendar processing One cycle in 100 msec see page 2 Data link master station processing See pages page 21 1 and page 21 10 Internal Relay 2 048 points D
342. clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS ROTRC Rotate Right with Carry ROTRCE bit When input is on the 16 or 32 bit data designated by S1 and a carry special Rx GET TER x he seu us internal relay M8003 rotated to the right by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out of the source operand is set to a carry M8003 and the carry status is set to the MSB of the source operand Data Word bits to rotate 1 MSB LSB CY Before rotation 1 0 0 11 E 110 01110 gt Rotate to the right M8003 MSB LSB After rotation 1 i o o 1i i o D 1 1 1 0 011 1 0 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation MSB 51 LSB _ 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 gt 0 Rotate to the right M8003 After rotation ee LSB 0 0 1 1 TSRIDEEHIITREDBIEEI 0101111 11101110 1111100 1 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated
343. com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Example CDISP The following example demonstrates a program to display STOP on character display units when input IO is off When input IO of on RUN flashes on the display units n 10 10 7 10 M8121 CDISP S1 M8125 4 S1 DO 2 02 gt Output Wiring Diagram 16 Transistor Sink Output M odule FC3A T16K1 MOV W 1 21332 DO MOVW S1 1 REP M8121 Q0 Q1 21077 DO 00070000 When input 10 is off decimal values for ASCII character codes are moved to data registers DO and D1 21332 5354h ST 20256 4F20h OP M8121 is the 1 sec clock pulse special internal relay When input 10 and M8121 are on decimal values for ASCII character codes are moved to data registers DO and D1 21077 5255h RU 20000 4E20h N space 8224 2020h M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay S1 specifies data register DO no conversion 2 digits 2 repeats The CDISP sends out data from DO upper byte DO lower byte D1 upper byte and D1 lower byte in this order 166 4 24V DC _ Power Su
344. control 0 through 2 0 Disable the week table When the current day and time reach the presets for S1 and S2 the designated output or internal relay is turned on WKCMP ON or turned off WKCMP OFF Set 0 for 53 when the WKTBL is not used the WKTBL instruction is ignored even if it is programmed 1 Additional days in the week table When the current time reaches the hour minute comparison data set for S2 on the special day programmed in the WKTBL the designated output or internal relay is turned on WKCMP ON or turned off WKCMP OFF 2 Skip days in the week table On the special day programmed in the WKTBL the designated output or internal relay is not turned on or off even when the current day and time reach the presets for S1 and 52 Note When 1 or 2 is set for S3 program special days in the week table using the WKTBL instruction If the WKTBL instruction is not programmed when 1 or 2 is set for S3 in the WKCMP ON or WKCMP OFF instruction a user pro gram execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Make sure that the values set for S1 S2 and S3 are within the valid ranges If any data is over the valid value a user pro gram execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED WKTBL Week Table S1 S2 S3 SN 5 Week Table H WKTBL S1 S2 53 ve SN FORK When input is on N blocks of special month day data
345. cribed below User Communication Error Code User Communication Error Cause Transmit Receive Completion Output Error Code Start inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions are Transmit completion outputs ofthe first 2 1 instructions from the top of the ladder diagram on simultaneously are turned on 2 Transmission destination busy timeout Goes on after busy timeout Among the first 5 RXD instructions from the top 3 Start inputs to more than 5 RXD instructions with of the ladder diagram receive completion out a start delimiter are on simultaneously puts of RXD instructions go on if the start delim iter matches the first byte of the received data While a RADENS truction without a start delimiter The receive completion output of the RXD instruc 4 is executed another RXD instruction with or with tion at a smaller address goes on out a start delimiter is executed 5 Reserved 6 Reserved No effect on the receive completion output 7 The first byte of received data does not match If incoming data with a matching start delimiter the specified start delimiter is received subsequently the receive completion output goes on When ASCII to binary or ASCII to BCD conversion is Specified in the receive format any code other 8 than 0 to 9 and A to F is received These codes IDES CS uon ouipubgoe s n are regarded as 0 during conversion BCC calculated from th
346. ctional module installed in the OpenNet Controller system To gener ate a 4V analog output voltage from channel 1 using the 0 to 5V output range set the rotary switch to 2 and store a digital value of 3200 to link register L601 which is assigned to channel 1 of the sixth functional module Because 5V x 3200 4000 4V digital value 3200 is converted to an analog value of 4V and outputted to terminals 15 and 16 of the analog output module For wiring schematic and precautions see page 3 8 Notes e Before mounting the analog output module first set the rotary switch to meet the required analog output range After set ting the rotary switch power up the CPU and other modules The COM GND terminals of each channel are connected together internally dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Expansion Power Supply Module The FC3A EA1 expansion power supply module is used to mount more than seven I O and functional modules When a maximum of 15 I O modules are mounted the number of I O points is expanded from 224 to 480 maximum Whether an expansion module is used or not seven functional modules such as analog I O DeviceNet slave and LON WORKS interface modules can be mounted at the maximum in either the normal or expansion slots Expansion Power Supply Module Type Number Module Name Expansion Power Supply M
347. current values to the value that has been programmed in When the timer value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When a timer comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a timer comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the TC or TC2 instruction a timer number TO through T255 fol lowed by the preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D7999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram TC Program List Timer to compare with IE Preset value to compare Ladder Diagram gt Program List T 8 LQ Pram Ads Nx pis The TC and TC2 instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values e The comparison instructions only compare the current value The status of the timer does not affect this function The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction and must be programmed at the beginning of a ladder line e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or at a separate program address e Like LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram 10 10 90 4 10 MO Program List Program
348. d by S3 Since the PID instruction uses the word data type negative constants cannot be entered directly to operand 53 Use the MOV instruction with the integer I data type to store a negative value to a data register The set point value S3 must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value S146 and smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value S1 5 When an invalid value is designated as a set point the PID action is stopped and an error code is stored to the data register designated by S142 See Operating Status on page 20 3 Source Operand S4 Process Variable before Conversion The analog output from the transducer is inputted to the analog input module which converts the input data to a digital value of 0 through 4000 The digital value is stored to a link register L100 through L705 depending on the mounting posi tion of the analog input module and the analog input channel connected to the transducer Designate a link register as source operand S4 to store the process variable For example when the analog input module is mounted in the first slot from the CPU module among all functional mod ules such as analog I O and OpenNet interface modules not including digital I O modules and when the analog input is connected to channel 0 of the analog input module designate link register L100 as source operand S4 When the analog input module is mounted in the third slot and the analog input is connected to ch
349. d in a PBX environment Solution 2 Add 10 or 20 to the value stored in D8201 D8301 when using RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively and try initialization again Dialing completes successfully but the telephone line is disconnected in a short period of time Cause 1 The modem settings at the both ends of the line are different Solution 1 Make the same settings for the modems at the both ends Cause 2 The model of the modems at the both ends of the line is different Solution 2 Use the same modems at the both ends Cause 3 The quality of the telephone line is low Solution 3 Decrease the baud rate of the OpenNet Controller to lower than 9600 bps 23 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Introduction The OpenNet Controller uses the INTERBUS open network to set up a remote I O system Input data from a remote I O slave station is stored to link registers allocated to input data in the OpenNet Controller Output data is sent from the link registers allocated to output data in the OpenNet Controller A remote I O slave station can have a maximum of 128 I O points 64 inputs and 64 outputs When using 32 IDEC s SX5S modules with 16 input or output points a total of 512 I O points can be distributed to 32 remote slave stations at the maximum The total cable length can be 12 8 km 7 95 miles maximum For the remote I O m
350. d noise immunity Quantity of Channels per COM 1 channel per COM Effect of Improper Output Connection Permanent damage may be caused Terminal Block Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Applicable Load Type Resistive load Internal Current Draw 120 mA 24V DC Weight approx 2300 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Analog Output Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A DA1221 2 channel Analog Output Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Rotary Switch Terminal No Channel be Position Voltage output 0 to 10V COM GND Voltage output 10V COM GND Voltage output 0 to 5V COM GND Voltage output 5V COM GND Current output 4 to 20mA COM GND Voltage output 0 to 10V COM GND Voltage output 10V COM GND Voltage output 0 to 5V COM GND Voltage output 5V COM GND Current output 4 to 20mA COM GND Channel 0 Channel 1 C C0 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 Co C2 C2 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C20 C2 CD Wiring Example Suppose that an analog output module is the sixth fun
351. d through the remote I O line to the CPU The data received through modems is monitored on a computer and also sent to a pager transmitter For details about the remote I O system see page 24 1 For details about the modem mode see page 23 1 OpenNet Controller Master Station n ao I GURIEN E Terminal Block e a Module Type E Slave Station Pager Transmitter Data Transmission 1 Remote Machine ie Commu nication 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Idec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Computer Link System When the OpenNet Controller is connected to a computer operating status and I O status can be monitored on the com puter data in the CPU module can be monitored or updated and user programs can be downloaded and uploaded A max imum of 32 OpenNet Controller CPU modules can be connected to one computer in the 1 N computer link system For details about the computer link communication see page 22 1 Computer Link 1 1 Communication B Computer Link Cable 4C FC2A KC4C E 3m 9 84 ft long DS ti D sub 9 pin Female Connector RS232C Port 1 or Port 2 oe
352. d to the constant value Special Data Registers for Scan Time In addition to D8022 three more special data registers are reserved to indicate current maximum and minimum scan time values D8022 Constant Scan Time Preset Value 1 to 1 000 msec D8023 Scan Time Current Value msec D8024 Scan Time Maximum Value msec D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value msec Example Constant Scan Time This example sets the scan time to a constant value of 500 msec x M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay ps po When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 500 to special data register D8022 The scan time is set to a constant value of 500 msec 5 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Introduction This chapter describes allocation numbers available for the OpenNet Controller CPU module to program basic and advanced instructions Special internal relays and special data registers are also described The OpenNet Controller is programmed using operands such as inputs outputs internal relays timers counters shift reg isters data registers and link registers Inputs I are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals Outputs Q are relays to send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals Internal relays M are relays used in t
353. damage or accidents Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage to equipment nstall the OpenNet Controller according to instructions described in this user s manual Improper installation will result in falling failure or malfunction of the OpenNet Controller The OpenNet Controller is designed for installation in a cabinet Do not install the OpenNet Controller outside a cabinet Install the OpenNet Controller in environments described in this user s manual If the OpenNet Controller is used in places where the OpenNet Controller is subjected to high temperature high humidity condensation corrosive gases excessive vibrations and excessive shocks then electrical shocks fire hazard or malfunction will result The environment for using the OpenNet Controller is Pollution degree 2 Use the OpenNet Controller in environments of pollution degree 2 according to IEC 60664 1 The DC power applicable to the OpenNet Controller is PS2 type according to EN 61131 Prevent the OpenNet Controller from falling while moving or transporting the OpenNet Controller otherwise damage or malfunction of the OpenNet Controller will result Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the OpenNet Controller housing Put a cover on the Open Net Controller modules during installation and wiring Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard damage or malfunction
354. data to slave 7 Slave 23 D7440 D7449 Transmit data to slave 23 D7130 D7139 Receive data from slave 7 D7450 D7459 Receive data from slave 23 Slave 8 D7140 D7149 Transmit data to slave 8 Slave 24 D7460 D7469 Transmit data to slave 24 D7150 D7159 Receive data from slave 8 D7470 D7479 Receive data from slave 24 Slave 9 D7160 D7169 Transmit data to slave 9 Slave 25 D7480 D7489 Transmit data to slave 25 D7170 D7179 Receive data from slave 9 D7490 D7499 Receive data from slave 25 Slave 10 D7180 D7189 Transmit data to slave 10 Slave 26 D7500 D7509 Transmit data to slave 26 D7190 D7199 Receive data from slave 10 D7510 D7519 Receive data from slave 26 Slave 11 D7200 D7209 Transmit data to slave 11 Slave 27 D7520 D7529 Transmit data to slave 27 D7210 D7219 Receive data from slave 11 D7530 D7539 Receive data from slave 27 Slave 12 D7220 D7229 Transmit data to slave 12 Slave 28 D7540 D7549 Transmit data to slave 28 D7230 D7239 Receive data from slave 12 D7550 D7559 Receive data from slave 28 Slave 13 D7240 D7249 Transmit data to slave 13 Slave 29 D7560 D7569 Transmit data to slave 29 D7250 D7259 Receive data from slave 13 D7570 D7579 Receive data from slave 29 Slave 14 D7260 D7269 Transmit data to slave 14 Slave 30 D7580 D7589 Transmit data to slave 30 D7270 D7279 Receive data from slave 14 D7590 D7599 Receive data from slave 30 Slave 15 D7280 D7289 Transmit data to slave 15 Slave 31 D7600 D7609 Transmit dat
355. ded Consult IDEC for the external interface file The user must keep a backup file of the network configuration information used for network man agement 26 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Precautions for Modifying Application Program The LONWORKS interface module is shipped with a standard application program installed Users with expertise in pro gramming can also modify or create application programs using a special programming tool such as LonBuilder Devel oper s Kit The application program is written in Neuron C Read this section before starting modifications Define Neuron Chip 1 pins As shown in the sample program on page 19 define I O pins IO 0 through IO 4 and IO 6 of the Neuron Chip If these pins are not defined correctly the LONWORKS interface module may be damaged For the description of I O pins see page 26 15 Include necessary codes in the application program When you modify or create an application program make sure that the codes shown in italics in the application program examples on pages 26 18 through 26 22 are included in the application program Defined network variables The application program installed in the LONWORKS interface module defines network variables for transmit and receive data listed on page 26 23 When you modify or create an application program do
356. destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands If the value of data register D10 designated by source operand M27 M20 M17 M15 M10 S2 is 5 the source data is determined by adding the offset to M internal relay M10 designated by source operand S1 Lon wa vA wv 5th from M10 If the current value of counter C5 designated by destination M TT m operand D2 is 12 the destination is determined by adding the gt 1 offset to output Q30 designated by destination operand D1 AGI 12th from Q30 As a result when input IO is on the ON OFF status of internal relay M15 is moved to output Q44 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not x 51 52 NOT gt DI D2 Z IBMVN W S1 52 DI 02 l When input is the values contained in operands designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 1 bit data so determined is inverted and moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in oper ands designated by D1 and D2 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X
357. divided by 16 or 32 bit data designated by source operand S2 The quotient is set to 16 or 32 bit destination oper and D1 and the remainder is set to the next 16 or 32 bit data When S2 is 0 dividing by 0 the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error are turned on A user program execution error also occurs in the following division operations Data type I 32768 1 Data type L 2147483648 1 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 11 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS Valid Operands Operand Function QM R C D L Constan Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for calculation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Data for calculation X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Since the binary arithmetic instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D do
358. e 51 1 8096 6096 5096 Control Output S2 46 ON 4 sec ON 3 sec ON 2 5 sec OFF Control Period 1413 5 sec 5 sec 1414 High Alarm Value The high alarm value is the upper limit of the process variable S1 0 to generate an alarm When the process variable is higher than or equal to the high alarm value while the start input for the PID instruction is on the high alarm output control relay S24 is turned on When the process variable is lower than the high alarm value the high alarm output control relay S2 4 is turned off When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required high alarm value of 0 through 4000 to the data regis ter designated by 51 14 When S1 14 stores a value larger than 4000 the high alarm value is set to 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled 5 1 4 set to 1 set a required high alarm value of 32768 through 32767 to the data register designated by 51 14 The high alarm value must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value S146 and must be smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value 51 5 If the high alarm value is set to a value smaller than the linear conversion minimum value S146 the linear conversion minimum value will become the high alarm value If the high alarm value is set to a value larger than the linear conversion maximum value S 1 5 the lin ear conversion maximum value will become the high alarm value
359. e 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS IMOVN Indirect Move Not amp tee RURI When input is on the values contained in operands desig nated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the source of data The 16 or 32 bit data so determined is inverted and moved to destination which is determined by the sum of values contained in operands designated by D1 and D2 H SI S2 NOT DI D2 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 D2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or D2 the operand data is the timer counter current value When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the operand data is the timer counter preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 16 points word data type or 32 points do
360. e Answer Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8096 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8097 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Operational State Maintained Cleared M8100 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8101 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8102 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Failure Maintained Cleared M8103 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Failure Maintained Cleared M8104 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Failure Maintained Cleared M8105 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8106 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8107 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Line Connection Status Maintained Cleared M8110 M8117 Reserved Special Internal Relays Read Only A Description CPU Stopped Power OFF umber M8120 Initialize Pulse Cleared Cleared M8121 1 sec Clock Operating Cleared M8122 100 msec Clock Operating Cleared M8123 10 msec Clock Operating Cleared M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed Maintained Maintained OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 6 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS ae
361. e 5 L1051 Depends on the module L1055 Depends on the module 5 0 L1052 specifications L1056 specifications L1053 L1057 L1060 L1064 Node 6 L1061 Depends on the module L1065 Depends on the module 5 1 L1062 specifications L1066 specifications L1063 L1067 Node 7 L1070 7 0 L1074 7 0 L1071 Not used L1075 Not used ote e aHa 1072 Notused Notused 11076 Not used Notused L1073 Not used L1077 Not used Node 8 L1080 L1084 7 0 15 8 7 0 L1081 Not used L1085 Not used Not used 16 out ut modul L1082 L1086 Not used Not used p L1083 L1087 Not used Not used ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 245 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Special Data Registers for Remote 1 Node Information Four data registers are allocated to each node to store information of the slave station The remote I O node information is stored to special data registers D8050 through D8177 while the remote I O communication is in normal operation The remote I O node information is not stored when special data register D8178 INTERBUS master system error information stores 6 7 or 8 to indicate a data size error ID code error or maximum node quantity over respectively See page 24 10 Logical Device No Bus Segment No Position 151413121110 9 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 Bus segment number Position Length Code Note The data register assigned to the length code stores
362. e CPU is turned off and remains on until M8006 is reset using WindLDR M8007 Data Link Communication Initialize Flag Master Station Data Link Communication Stop Flag Slave Station M8007 has a different function at the master or slave station of the data link communication system Master station Data link communication initialize flag When M8007 at the master station is turned on during operation the link configuration is checked to initialize the data link system When a slave station is powered up after the master station turn M8007 on to initialize the data link system After a data link setup is changed M8007 must also be turned on to ensure correct communication Slave station Data link communication stop flag When a slave station does not receive communication data from the master station for 10 sec or more in the data link sys tem M8007 turns on When the slave station receives correct communication data M8007 turns off M8010 High speed Counter Comparison Output Reset When M8010 is turned on the high speed counter comparison output is turned off See page 5 10 M8011 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Outputs are normally turned off when the CPU is stopped M8011 is used to maintain the output statuses when the CPU is stopped When the CPU is stopped with M8011 turned on the output ON OFF statuses are maintained When the CPU restarts M8011 is turned off automatically dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 9 Phone 8
363. e Failure Maintained Cleared M8074 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Failure Maintained Cleared M8075 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Failure Maintained Cleared M8076 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Failure Maintained Cleared M8077 RS232C Port 1 Modem Mode Line Connection Status Maintained Cleared M8080 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8081 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8082 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Start Maintained Maintained M8083 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Start Maintained Maintained M8084 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Start Maintained Maintained M8085 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer Initialization String Start Maintained Maintained M8086 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Answer ATZ Start Maintained Maintained M8087 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode AT Command Execution Maintained Cleared M8090 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Initialization String Completion Maintained Cleared M8091 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate ATZ Completion Maintained Cleared M8092 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Originate Dialing Completion Maintained Cleared M8093 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode Disconnect Disconnect Line Completion Maintained Cleared M8094 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mode General Command AT Command Completion Maintained Cleared M8095 RS232C Port 2 Modem Mod
364. e RS485 port on the OpenNet Controller CPU module enable the mainte nance mode for the RS485 port To enable the maintenance mode for the RS485 set the DIP switch 1 to OFF To set up a 1 1 computer link system connect a computer to the OpenNet Controller using the computer link cable 6C FC2A KC6C An AC adapter is needed to supply 5V DC power to the RS232C RS485 converter on the computer link cable 6C For the applicable output plug of the AC adapter see page A 5 Computer Link Cable 6C FC2A KC6C 2m 6 56 ft long m N l Pr El RS232C j 8 D sub 9 pin Female Connector dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 4 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS Start Stop Operation This section describes operations to start and stop the OpenNet Controller and to use the stop and reset inputs Caution Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the OpenNet Controller Incorrect operation on the OpenNet Controller may cause machine damage or accidents Start Stop Schematic The start stop circuit of the OpenNet Controller con sists of three blocks power supply M8000 start Ea ie CIR Lid Red Controller while the other two blocks are set to run the OpenNet Controller control special internal relay and stop reset inputs gcn E Power M8000 op
365. e RXD instruction does 9 not match the BCC appended to the received The receive completion output goes on data The end delimiter code specified in the RXD 10 instruction does not match the received end The receive completion output goes on delimiter code Receive timeout between characters After receiving one byte of data the next byte is 5 not received in the period specified for the The receive on receive timeout value Overrun error 12 Before the receive processing is completed the The receive completion output goes on next data is received Framing error E Detection error of start bit or stop bit completion output Parity check error 14 act is found in the parity check No effect on the completion output TXD1 RXD1 or TXD2 RXD2 instruction is exe 15 cuted while the communication selector DIP No effect on the completion output Switch is not set to select user communication mode for the RS232C port 1 or RS232C port 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1725 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info 2clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS ASCII Character Code Table 0 Decima 1 Decima Decima 4 Decima 5 Decima Decima 8 Decima 9 Decima Decima Decima D Decima
366. e When initialized 24 6 D8065 INTERBUS Node 3 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8066 INTERBUS Node 4 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8067 INTERBUS Node 4 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8068 INTERBUS Node 4 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8069 INTERBUS Node 4 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8070 INTERBUS Node 5 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8071 INTERBUS Node 5 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8072 INTERBUS Node 5 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8073 INTERBUS Node 5 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8074 INTERBUS Node 6 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8075 INTERBUS Node 6 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8076 INTERBUS Node 6 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8077 INTERBUS Node 6 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8078 INTERBUS Node 7 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8079 INTERBUS Node 7 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8080 INTERBUS Node 7 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8081 INTERBUS Node 7 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8082 INTERBUS Node 8 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8083 INTERBUS Node 8 Length Code When initialized 24 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS seed Description Updated See Page D
367. e and IDEC SX5L communication I O terminals can be connected to the LONWORKS network The OpenNet Controller can be used as a node by adding the LONWORKS interface module to the right of the OpenNet Controller CPU module A maximum of seven OpenNet interface modules such as LONWORKS interface modules and DeviceNet slave modules and analog I O modules can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module LoNWoRks Network oooo00000000000 ooooo0 C POWER ooooo0o000000000000000000 ORUN EERROR OUT LON 00 SER O ogooooo000000000000000 ogooooo000000000000000 IDEC SX5L Communication 1 Terminal oo000000000000000000000 IT fa goog0000000000000000000000 oooo0000000000000000000000 sem x up De 1O Module pean OpenNet Controller CPU Module
368. e current configuration This indicates that the error cause always occurs for a short time only The error affected data cycles but no ID cycles The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info OBE7hex BUS FA IL The controller board could not activate the services when the following services were processed Activate Configuration 0711hex or Meaning Control_Active_Configuration 0713hex The error location could not be detected The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM
369. e first byte of source operand S1 the one byte data serves as a start delimiter to start the processing of the received data The valid start delimiter value depends on the data bits selected in Configure gt Function Area Settings gt Comm Port gt Port 1 or 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C gt Communication Parameters dialog box When 8 data bits are selected start delimiters can be 00h through FFh When 7 data bits are selected as default start delimiters can be 00h through 7Fh Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal nota tion into the source data A maximum of five RXDI and five RXD2 instructions with different start delimiters can be executed at the same time When the first byte of the incoming data matches the start delimiter of a RXD1 RXD2 instruction the received data is pro cessed and stored according to the receive format specified in the RXD1 RXD2 instruction If the first byte of the incom ing data does not match the start delimiter of any RXDI RXD2 instruction that is executed the OpenNet Controller discards the incoming data and waits for the next communication While a RXDI RXD2 instruction without a start delimiter is executed any incoming data is processed continuously according to the receive format Only one RXD1 and one RXD2 instructions without a start delimiter can be executed at a time If start inputs to two or more RXDI RXD2 instructions without a start delimiter are turned on simultaneously one at
370. e is executed When the user program is downloaded from the memory card to the CPU the user program stored in the flash ROM in the OpenNet Controller CPU module is overwritten Power down the CPU before inserting or removing the memory card Program execution using the memory card must be limited to operation check only Do not use the memory card for normal execution of user programs Downloading User Program from Memory Card to the CPU 1 Power down the OpenNet Controller CPU module Insert a memory card into the CPU module until the card clicks into place as shown at right Power up the CPU module The CPU starts to run the user program stored on the memory card 2 3 4 Check the operation of the user program stored on the memory card 5 If there is no problem in the program operation power down the CPU 6 Hold the communication enable button depressed and power up the CPU The user program is downloaded from the memory card to the flash ROM in the CPU For the communication enable button see page 2 1 While program download is in progress the ERROR LED flashes If program download fails the ERROR LED goes on 7 Power down the CPU and remove the miniature card by pressing the miniature card eject button 8 Power up the CPU to start the program Memory Card Eject Button Specifications Card Type Miniature memory card FC9Z MC02 Accessible Memory Capacity 2MB 5V type Download
371. e not moved When the BPP bit push instruction is used all program blocks in bit stack registers are shifted back by one place The program in the first bit stack register is moved to the operation register Ladder Diagram BPS 10 11 01 BRD 12 02 13 Q3 Operation Register Bit Stack Register 8 maximum LOD 10 yr s H Taa QUERN E AND 11 m OUT Q1 B 1 Q 10 Hu CMM am AND I2 91 OUT Q2 12 02 10 Ge See octet ee tes se eee ee Rod m X Eom DEM A E m AG RUE E arid ANDIS Eze g1 OUT Q3 E 6 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS TML TIM TMH and TMS Timer Four types of timers are available 1 sec timedown timer TML 100 msec timedown timer TIM 10 msec timedown timer TMH and 1 msec timedown timer TMS A total of 256 timers can be programmed in a user program Each timer must be allocated to a unique number TO through T255 Timer Allocation Number Range Increments Preset Value TML 1 sec timer TO to T255 0 to 65535 sec 1 sec TIM 100 msec timer TO to T255 0 to 6553 5 sec 100 msec Constant 0 to 65535 TMH 10 msec timer TO to T255 0 to 655 35 sec 10 msec Data registers DO to D7999 TMS 1 msec timer TO to T255 0 to 65 535 sec 1 msec
372. e number to data registers starting with D8270 D8370 telephone number Store two characters each in one data register Enter ODh at the end of the telephone number See page 23 5 If you want to change the default value of 3 retry cycles program to move a required value to data register D8209 D8309 retry cycles in the next scan after entering 1 to D8200 D8300 Include internal relays M8050 M8077 RS232C port 1 and M8080 M8107 RS232C port 2 in the user program to control the modem communication as required Setting Up the CPU Module 1 Determine which RS232C port to use port 1 port 2 or both Connect the OpenNet Controller CPU module to a modem using the modem cable 2 as shown on page 23 1 Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively 2 RS232C port 1 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the communication mode while the CPU is powered up After changing the settings of the communica tion selector DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the com
373. e output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 and the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 are enabled or disabled using the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 To enable the output manipulated variable upper lower limits turn on 5242 To disable the output manipulated variable upper lower limits turn off S242 243 Integral Start Coefficient Disable The integral start coefficient S1 10 is enabled or disabled using the integral start coefficient disable control relay S243 To enable the integral start coefficient S1 10 turn off S2 3 the integral term is enabled as specified by the integral start coefficient S 12 10 To disable the integral start coefficient 1 10 turn on S23 the integral term is enabled at the start of the PID action 244 High Alarm Output When the process variable S1 0 is higher than or equal to the high alarm value 5 1 14 while the start input for the PID instruction is on the high alarm output control relay S2 4 goes on When 1 0 is lower than S1 14 S244 is off 245 Low Alarm Output When the process variable 5 1 0 is lower than or equal to the low alarm value S1 15 while the start input for the PID instruction is on the low alarm output control relay S2 5 goes on When S140 is higher than S1 15 S245 is off 246 Control Output During auto tuning in auto mode with the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 set to off the control output S246 i
374. e set point S3 or process variable S4 is changed due to disturbance overshoot or undershoot will be caused Before putting the PID control into actual application perform simulation tests by changing the set point and process variable disturbance to anticipated values in the application e The PID parameters such as proportional gain S 1 7 integral time S1 8 and derivative time S1 9 determined by the auto tuning may not always be the optimum values depending on the actual application To make sure of the best results adjust the parameters Once the best PID parameters are determined perform only the PID action in usual opera tion unless the control object is changed When a feedback control is executed using the control output S2 6 the optimum control may not be achieved depend ing on the controlled object If this is the case use of the manipulated variable D1 in the feedback control is recom mended dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION 20 18 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Introduction This chapter describes the data link communication function used to set up a distributed control system A data link communication system consists of one master station and a maximum of 31
375. e sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range If the S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the BTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOA Quantity of Digits 5 BTOAW S1 S2 D1 10 D10 5 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 4 BTOA W 51 S2 01 11 D10 4 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 3 BTOA W S1 52 1 12 D10 3 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 2 BTOAW S1 S2 D1 13 D10 2 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 1 BTOAW S1 S2 D1 14 D10 1 D20 D10 14 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h BCD Binary 12345 3039h
376. e the source and destination operands D20 15 If the data of data register D10 designated by source operand S2 is 4 then the source data is deter D21 mined by adding the offset to counter C10 designated by source operand S1 Mu C 10 4 4 14 DAD 53085 D46 If data register D20 designated by destination operand D2 contains a value of 15 then the destina pr tion is determined by adding the offset to data register D30 designated by destination operand D1 quisa C13 D 30 15 D45 C14 6450 As a result when input IO is on the current value of counter C14 is inverted and moved to datareg ister D45 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 9 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS BMOV Block Move 8 S1 S141 S122 SIT N 1 gt D1 1 1 D122 DI N 1 HF BMOV W S1 N W D1 KK k K k When input is on N blocks of 16 bit word data starting with operand designated by S1 are moved to N blocks of destinations starting with operand designated by D1 N blocks of 16 bit data N blocks of 16 bit data S1 First 16 bit data D1 First 16 bit data S1 1 Second 16 bit data Block Move D1 1 Second 16 bit data S1 2 Third 16 bit data Ee S1 N 1 Nth 16 bit data D1 N 1 Nth 16 bit data D142 Third 16 bit data Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Consta
377. eNet Network Troubleshooting Three LED indicators are provided on the DeviceNet slave module When a trouble occurs during DeviceNet communica tion these status LEDs go on or flash depending on the error When the LEDs go on or flash locate the error referring to the table described below Probable Causes for Network Errors When a trouble occurs during DeviceNet communication the following causes are suspected e Strong external noise The power voltage to the DeviceNet slave module has dropped below the minimum operating voltage at least momen tarily Use of a faulty communication line incorrect cable or transmission over the rated distance mproper terminator DeviceNet master module fails to recognize the DeviceNet slave module Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Module POW OFF MNS OFF 10 OFF Cause Power is not supplied to the OpenNet Controller CPU module Action Supply 24V DC to the OpenNet Controller CPU module Plug in the expansion connector correctly Green ON OFF OFF Power is not supplied to the DeviceNet interface Plug in the communication connector correctly Connect the DeviceNet power lines red V and black V correctly Supply 11 25V DC to the DeviceNet power line Green ON OFF Green ON Master is not found Plug in the communication connector correctly Set the data rate correctly using DIP switches Set the data rate of the
378. ecompiling the user program After completing the recompilation operation resumes 3 Outputs where error occurs are turned off and restore normal operation when the cause of error is removed Error Causes and Actions 0001h Power Failure This error indicates when the power supply is lower than the specified voltage This error is also recorded when the power is turned off Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 0002h Watchdog Timer Error The watchdog timer monitors the time required for one program cycle scan time When the time exceeds approximately 1 68 seconds the watchdog timer indicates an error Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer If this error occurs frequently the OpenNet Controller CPU module has to be replaced 0004h Data Link Connection Error This error indicates that data link station numbers are incorrect Make sure that the communication selector DIP switches are set to station number 0 at the master station and to station numbers 1 through 31 at slave stations No duplication of station numbers is allowed See page 21 2 To correct this error change the communication selector DIP switch setting to 0 at the master station and to 1 through 31 at slave stations Turn power off and on again for the slave station Then take one of the following actions Turn power off and on for the master station Initialize data link communication for the master station using WindLDR on a computer See
379. econd scan is used as a preset value to compare with the cur rent value In subsequent counting cycles the D8047 value at the moment when coincidence occurred is used as a preset value for the next counting cycle Gate and Reset Inputs for High speed Counter No Deos Any Input or Internal Relay High speed Counter Gate Input Enables counting Stops counting R W Any Input or Internal Relay High speed Counter Reset Input M eni cand R W Any input or internal relay number can be designated as a high speed counter gate input and reset input using Function Area Settings Others Enable High speed Counter in WindLDR Clearing High speed Counter Current Value The high speed counter current value is cleared to zero in five ways when the CPU is powered up when a user program is downloaded to the CPU when the phase Z or reset to zero input at terminal No 4 is turned on when the communication enable button on the CPU module is pressed or when the reset input not the high speed counter reset input designated in the Function Area Settings is turned on OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Others tab OpenNet Function Area Setting xi
380. ected to the specified INTERBUS device Defective local bus cable that belongs to the local bus of the specified device Defective INTERBUS device connected to the local bus of the specified INTERBUS device Case Failure of the supply voltage communication voltage U for the module electronics made available by the BK module Remedy Check this local bus Add Error Info Error location Segment Position 0CD8hex to OCDBhex RB FAIL or ODD8hex to ODDBhex LB FAIL The local bus connected to the specified bus terminal module consists of more local bus devices than Meaning were entered in the active configuration Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position OCDChex to OCDFhex RB FAIL or ODDChex to ODDFhex LB FAIL The INTERBUS device connected to the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS Meaning device has an invalid ID code Add_Error_Info Error location Segment Position The error codes described above are excerpts from INTERBUS User Manual Generation 4 Controller Boards as of Firmware 4 12 Designation IBS SYS FWG4 UME Order No 27 45185 Section 3 Error Codes 24 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Introduction This chapter describes DeviceNet slave module FC3A SX5DS1 used with the OpenNet Controller to interface with the DeviceNet
381. ed 24 6 D8109 INTERBUS Node 14 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8110 INTERBUS Node 15 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8111 INTERBUS Node 15 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8112 INTERBUS Node 15 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8113 INTERBUS Node 15 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8114 INTERBUS Node 16 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8115 INTERBUS Node 16 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8116 INTERBUS Node 16 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8117 INTERBUS Node 16 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8118 INTERBUS Node 17 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8119 INTERBUS Node 17 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8120 INTERBUS Node 17 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8121 INTERBUS Node 17 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8122 INTERBUS Node 18 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8123 INTERBUS Node 18 Length Code When initialized 24 6 D8124 INTERBUS Node 18 ID Code When initialized 24 6 D8125 INTERBUS Node 18 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8126 INTERBUS Node 19 Logical Device No When initialized 24 6 D8127 INTERBUS Node 19 Length Code When initialized 24 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Description Updated See Page D81
382. ed to data registers according to the receive format The end delimiter is not stored to a data register Any data arriving after the end delimiter is discarded 3 When a RXD instruction with end delimiter ETX 03h and one byte BCC is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated 0100 h ao oa UU ETX l BCC as the first data register 0101 31h 32h 03h Code End delimiter End of receiving data D1004n x h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format The end delimiter and BCC code are not stored to data registers After receiving the end delimiter the OpenNet Controller receives only the one byte BCC code dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Skip When skip is designated in the receive format a specified quantity of digits in the incoming data are skipped and not stored to data registers A maximum of 99 digits bytes of characters can be skipped continuously Example When a RXD instruction with skip for 2 digits starting at the third byte is executed Incoming Data 0102 0035h 0103 0036h 0104 0037h D105 0038h Skipped When D100 is designated as the first data register D1000031h D101 0032
383. eed counter operation The gate input and reset input are designated using the Function Area Settings When a gate input is designated counting is enabled while the gate input is on and is disabled while the gate input is off When a gate input is not designated counting is always enabled When the reset input is turned on the current value is reset to the reset value High speed Counter Operation Modes and Input Output Terminals CPU Module Terminal No Rotary Encoder Mode Dual pulse Reversible Counter Mode 1 COM COM 2 Phase A CW 3 Phase B CCW 4 Phase Z Reset to zero 5 Comparison output Comparison output Note When using the phase Z reset to zero input keep the input signal on for 100 usec or more Comparison Output Timing Chart The comparison output at terminal 5 comparison output is turned on when the current value exceeds the preset value The comparison output does not go on when the current value equals the preset value but goes on when another input pulse enters after reaching the preset value The figure below illustrates the comparison output timing when the preset value is N ON Pulse Input orp HSC Current Value ON Comparison Output occ 20 usec maximum OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 5 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS High speed Counter Input Specifications Maximum Counting Frequency 10 kHz
384. efresh Mode Communication Sequence Unlike the separate refresh mode the master station performs data link communication using an interrupt processing dur ing normal scanning When communication with all slave stations is complete the master station refreshes all received data simultaneously As with the separate refresh when a slave station receives a communication from the master station the slave station returns data stored in data registers assigned for data link communication to the master station Data refresh at the master and slave stations is done in the END processing at the respective station When the master station completes data refresh special internal relay M8177 all slave station communication completion relay goes on at the master station Special internal relays M8140 through M8176 slave station communication comple tion relay do not go on at the master and slave stations in the simultaneous refresh mode The communication sequence in the simultaneous refresh mode is shown below 1 scan Simultaneous Refresh for Slave Stations 1 through 31 END Processed Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 Slave Station 31 Master Station 1 Completion M8177 S o edem Simultaneous Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with One Slave Station Trf When no transmit receive data has been changed during communication at 19200 bp
385. emote 1 slave station When this error occurs the remote 1 network contin ues to work Special internal relay M8037 INTERBUS master periph eral fault is also turned on Special data register D8182 INTERBUS master error code stores user error code OBBIh peripheral fault See page 24 16 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com APPENDIX Execution Times for Instructions Execution times for main instructions of the OpenNet Controller are listed below Operand and Maximum Execution Time usec Instruction Condition w o Data Type Data Type W or Data Type D or L LOD LODN 0 65 OUT OUTN 1 15 SET RST 1 AND ANDN OR ORN 0 5 AND LOD OR LOD 0 3 BPS 3 BRD 0 5 BPP 3 TML TIM TMH TMS 43 CNT CDP CUD 42 CC CC gt TCs gt 22 DC DC gt Reset input ON 190 1 1N Pulse input 252 2 8N Others 113 SOTU SOTD 50 JMP JEND MCS MCR 3 END See the next page M gt M 170 240 MOV M OVN DoD 70 74 MoMoM 210 260 CMP lt gt lt gt lt gt DoDoM 115 125 172 232 ADD 0 98 110 172 232 SUB D D9D 98 110 MxM gt D 172 238 MUL DxDoD 98 140 M M 5D 205 280 DIV 05 136 192 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr co
386. en input 10 is turned on data of 5 data registers starting with D10 desig D13 nated by source operand S1 is moved to 5 data registers starting with D20 D14 designated by destination operand D1 20 1998 gt 021 12 D22 25 p23 12 Th 9 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS NSET N Data Set 8s 51 S2 S3 SNO DL D2 D3 DN H NSET 51 2 n SN D1 RRR RK When input is on N blocks of 16 or 32 bit data in operands designated by S1 S2 S3 SN are moved to N blocks of destinations starting with operand designated by D1 N blocks of 16 32 bit data N blocks of 16 32 bit data D1 N Data Set D1 1 or D1 2 D1 2 or D144 First 16 32 bit data Second 16 32 bit data S1 S2 53 First 16 32 bit data Second 16 32 bit data Third 16 32 bit data Third 16 32 bit data Rc Nr ex EE ei SN Nth 16 32 bit data D14N 1 or D1 2N 2 Nth 16 32 bit data Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through
387. epending on input conditions to these instructions When performing repetitive control the scan time can be made constant by entering a required scan time value into a special data register reserved for constant scan time Keep Output Status during User Program Download Outputs can be designated to maintain the current statuses when downloading a user program from WindLDR to the CPU This function can be used when the output status change does not occur frequently Stop and Reset Inputs Any input number can be designated as a stop or reset input to control the OpenNet Controller operation 1 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com S O 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ystem Setup This section describes various system setup configurations for using powerful communication functions of the OpenNet Controller pen Network Communication System The OpenNet Controller can be connected to three open network communication lines DeviceNet LONWORKS and INTERBUS OpenNet interface modules are available for communication through DeviceNet and LONWoRKS networks The OpenNet interface modules such as DeviceNet slave modules and LONWORKS interface modules serve as a slave station or node in the network A remote I O system can be set up using a remote I O master module mounted next to the CPU module and SX5S commu nication I O terminals at remote I O slave
388. er or L link register is designated as the source 2 points double word type are used Example BCDLS 8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay MOVW S1 123 1 D10 REP M8120 When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instructions set 123 and 4567 to data registers D10 and D11 respectively MOV W S1 1 REP 4567 D11 Each time input IO is turned on the 32 bit binary data of data registers D10 and D11 designated by S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits shifted to the left by 1 digit as designated by operand digits and converted back to BCDLS D S1 digits D10 1 10 32 bit binary data Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits shifted Data Type Double Word digits to shift 1 D10 11 Before shift o 1 2 a 4 5 e 7 o Shift to the left After first shift 0 112 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 After second shift 1 lt 2 3 4 5 6 7100 50 LSD ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 13 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS 13 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Data conversion instructions are used
389. er as described on page 4 1 Sample User Program Create a simple program using WindLDR The sample program performs the following operation When only input 10 is turned on output QO is turned on When only input I1 is turned on output 1 is turned on When both inputs IO and I1 are turned on output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments Rung No Input 10 Input I1 Output Operation 01 ON OFF Output 00 is turned ON 02 OFF ON Output Q1 is turned ON 03 ON ON Output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments Start WindLDR From the Start menu of Windows select Programs WindLDR WindLDR WindLDR starts and a blank ladder editing screen appears with menus and tool bars shown on top of the screen WindLDR 98 05 30 03 27 INTERNAL File Edit View Configure Compile Online Window Help Ota ejr lt aJ 1 coles 2 1 01 9 01 1 EE Edit User Program Rung by Rung Start the user program with the LOD instruction by inserting a NO contact of input 10 1 Click the Normally Open contact icon TH When the mouse pointer is placed on an icon the name of the icon is indicated 44 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Idec Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS 2 Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact and click the left mouse button YAMAHA The Normally Open dialog bo
390. erand and the new value is stored to the same operand DEC Decrement DEC ERD K K k K When input is on one is subtracted from the value in the operand and the new value is stored to the same operand Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S D Source Destination Operand to increment data For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 Since the INC and DEC instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used Increment beyond Limits In the word data type valid values are 0 to 65535 If the designated operand is currently 65535 the value will become 0 after it is incremented by one The carry M8003 is not set by this operation In the double word data type valid values are 0 to 4 294 967 295 If the designated operand is currently 4 294 967 295 the value will become 0 after it is incremented by one The carry M8003 is not set by this operation Decrement beyond Limits In the word data type valid values are 0 to 65535 If the designated operand is currently 0 the value will become 65535 after it is decremented
391. erands Operand Function QM R C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Sampling data X X X X X X X X 2 Source 2 Sampling end input X X X 3 Source 3 Sampling cycles X X X X X X X X 055535 D1 Destination 1 First operand number to store results X X D2 Destination 2 Sampling completion output X A For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D2 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D2 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 or S3 the timer counter current value is read out While input is on the AVRG instruction is executed in each scan When the quantity of sampling cycles designated by operand S3 is 1 through 65535 sampling data designated by operand S1 is processed in each scan When the designated sampling cycles have been completed the average value of the sampling data is set to operand designated by D1 The max imum value of the sampling data is set to the next operand D1 1 The minimum value of the sampling data is set to the next operand D1 2 The sampling completion output designated by operand D2 is turned on When the quantity of sampling cycles designated by operand 53 is 0 sampling is started when the input to AVRG instruction is turned on and stopped when the sampling end input designated by operand 52 is turned on Then the aver age
392. erminals Not isolated Connector on Mother Board Nylon Connector BS18P SHF 1AA x 2 J S T Mfg Fujitsu Connector FCN 365P040 AU Fujitsu Connector Insertion Removal Durability 50 times minimum 500 times minimum Internal Current Draw All outputs ON 90 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 40 mA 24V DC Turn ON time 500 usec maximum Turn OFF time 500 usec maximum Weight approx 190g 200g Output Internal Circuit 0 w s F 3 E Output g 3 COM COM terminals are connected together internally OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Output Module Terminal Arrangement FC3A R161 16 point Relay Output Module Screw Terminal Type Applicable Connector SMSTB2 5 20 ST 5 08 Phoenix Contact Terminal No Name 22 2 mm BONES WW CO NI GD OT BY GW NM C C C5 C C2 C2 C2 C20 C0 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 C2 CD ooo Wiring Schematic COM terminals are not connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the output module For wiring
393. error D8413 Slave station 14 communication error D8429 Slave station 30 communication error D8414 Slave station 15 communication error D8430 Slave station 31 communication error D8415 Slave station 16 communication error If any slave stations are not connected master station data registers which are assigned to the vacant slave stations can be used as ordinary data registers Slave Station Special Data Register Data Link Communication Error Data D8400 Slave station communication error Note Slave station data registers D8401 through D8430 can be used as ordinary data registers Data Link Communication Error Code The data link error code is stored in the special data register allocated to indicate a communication error in the data link system When this error occurs special internal relay M8005 data link communication error is also turned on at both master and slave stations The detailed information of general errors can be viewed using WindLDR Select Online Mon itor then select Online PLC Status Error Status Details Error Code Error Details 1h Overrun error data is received when the receive data registers are full 2h Framing error failure to detect start or stop bit 4h Parity error an error was found by the parity check 8h Receive timeout line disconnection 10h BCC block check character error disparity with data received up to BCC 20h Retry cycle over error occurred in all 3 trials o
394. es until the telephone line is connected dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 235 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE When the dial command has been completed successfully internal relay M8062 M8092 is turned on If the dial command fails internal relay M8072 M8102 is turned on The dial command is determined successful when the DCD signal is turned on Note When the OpenNet Controller is powered down while the telephone line is connected the telephone line is discon nected because the DTR signal is turned off This method should not be used for disconnecting the telephone line Always use M8053 M8083 to disconnect the telephone line as described below RS232C Port Communication Protocol Before the telephone line is connected in the modem mode after power up the RS232C port 1 or port 2 can only send out an AT command by turning on a start internal relay M8050 M8056 or M8080 M8086 The communication protocol for the RS232C port after the telephone line is connected is selected by the value stored in data register D8203 D8303 D8203 D8303 RS232C Port Communication Protocol in the On Line Mode 0 other than 1 Maintenance protocol 1 User protocol When the telephone line is disconnected the RS232C port restores the state as before the telephone line is connected whether D8203 D8303 is set to 0 or 1 When using a TXD or RXD instruction in the user communica
395. eset Each block can be used to start and stop the OpenNet Supply Start Control Input Input WindLDR Start Stop Operation Using WindLDR The OpenNet Controller can be started and stopped using WindLDR run on a PC connected to the OpenNet Controller CPU module When the PLC Start button is pressed in the dialog box shown below start control special internal relay M8000 is turned on to start the OpenNet Controller When the PLC Stop button is pressed M8000 is turned off to stop the Open Net Controller 1 Connect the PC to the OpenNet Controller start WindLDR and power up the OpenNet Controller See page 4 1 2 Check that a stop input is not designated using Configure Function Area Settings Run Stop See page 5 1 Note When a stop input is designated the OpenNet Controller cannot be started or stopped by turning start control special internal relay M8000 on or off 3 Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar then select Download Program Or click the download icon By OpenNet Download Program dialog box appears Download To Transfer Mode G Binary Loader C Ascii 9 Download Program Size 01384 PLC Start LLLDS DIT BEN 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 3S0 100 PLC Stop Automatic stop before download Comm Setting y Automatic start after download _ Keep output during download 4 Click the PLC Start button to start operation then the start control special in
396. everse control action the manipulated variable D1 is increased while the difference between the process variable S1 0 and the set point S3 increases Reverse Control Action Time 52 1 Auto Manual Mode To select auto mode turn off the auto manual mode control relay designated by 52 1 before or after starting the PID instruction In auto mode the PID action is executed and the manipulated variable D1 stores the PID calculation result The control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the output manipulated vari able S11 To select manual mode turn on the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 When using manual mode set a required value to the manual mode output manipulated variable 814 18 before enabling manual mode In manual mode the output manipulated variable S1 1 stores the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 and the control output S246 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the manual mode output manipulated variable S 1 18 While auto tuning is in progress manual mode cannot be enabled Only after auto tuning is complete auto or manual mode can be enabled Auto manual mode can also be switched while executing the PID instruction 20 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION 242 Output Manipulated Variable Limit Enable Th
397. executed data receiving ends when the specified bytes of data in the receive format such as data registers and skips have been received In addition data receiving also ends when the interval between incoming data characters exceeds the receive timeout value specified in the Communication Parameters dialog box whether the RXD has an end delimiter or not The character interval timer is started when the first character of incom ing communication is received and restarted each time the next character is received When a character is not received within a predetermined period of time timeout occurs and the RXD ends data receive operation Example 1 When a RXD instruction without an end delimiter is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated D100 o ar a C as the first data register D101 n 30h 31h 32h 33h Total of received characters D100 n h The incoming data is divided converted and stored to data registers according to the receive format Receive operation is completed when the total characters programmed in RXD are received 2 When a RXD instruction with end delimiter ETX 03h and without BCC is executed Incoming data When D100 is designated 0100 h 77 as the first data register D101 h 31h 32h 33h End delimiter End of receiving data D100 n h The incoming data is divided converted and stor
398. f communication 40h 1 O definition quantity error discrepancy of trans mit receive station number or data quantity When more than one error is detected in the data link system the total of error codes is indicated For example when framing error error code 2h and BCC error error code 10h are found error code 12 is stored 214 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link Communication between Master and Slave Stations The master station has 10 data registers assigned to transmit data to a slave station and 10 data registers assigned to receive data from a slave station The quantity of data registers for data link can be selected from 0 through 10 using WindLDR The following examples illustrate how data is exchanged between the master and slave stations when 2 or 10 data registers are used for data link communication with each slave station Example 1 Transmit Data 2 Words and Receive Data 2 Words Master Station D8400 Communication Error D7000 D7001 Transmit Data D7010 D7011 Receive Data D8401 Communication Error D7020 D7021 Transmit Data D7030 07031 Receive Data D8402 Communication Error D7040 D7041 Transmit Data D7050 D7051 Receive Data D8403 Communication Error D7060 D7061 Transmit Data D7070 D7071
399. f the AT output manipulated variable S1 22 is outputted to the output manipulated variable S1 1 and the control output S246 is turned on and off according to the AT control period S1 20 and the AT output manipulated variable S1 22 To keep the control output S2 6 on during auto tuning set 100 to 1422 Auto Tuning AT When auto tuning is selected with the operation mode 5 1 3 set to 1 AT PID or 2 AT the auto tuning is executed before starting PID control to determine PID parameters such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S1 8 derivative time S149 and control action S240 automatically The OpenNet Controller uses the step response method to execute auto tuning To enable auto tuning set four parameters for auto tuning before executing the PID instruction such as AT sampling period S1 19 AT control period S 1 420 AT set point S1 21 and AT output manipulated variable S 14 22 Step Response Method The OpenNet Controller uses the step response method to execute auto tuning and determine PID parameters such as proportional gain S147 integral time S1 8 derivative time 5 1 9 and con trol action S2 0 automatically The auto tuning is executed Set Point 51421 following steps Process au 140 Maximum Slope 1 Calculate the maximum slope of the process variable S1 0 before the process variable reaches the AT set point 81421 2 Calculate the dead time based on the der
400. ferent data register YES Correct the program to make sure that inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions do not go on simultaneously NO Make sure that the busy signal at the remote terminal does not exceed 5 sec NO Make sure that the transmit data desig nated as source 1 operand is correct When the user communication still has a problem after completing the above procedure also perform the procedure of Diagram 9 described on the preceding page Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2747 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 11 Data is not received at all in the user communication mode Is the comm selector DIP switch set to user communi cation NO YES Set communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communication mode for RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Did you press the du NO communication enable button for 4 sec YES Did you power down and up after chang ing the comm selector DIP switch NO Press the communication enable button for more than 4 sec until the ERROR LED blinks once NO communication cable connected correctly YES Is the input to the NO RXD instruction on YES Is the POWER LED on do
401. fferent results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW W STR S2 DIR REP H SOTU ae D10 D20 D30 D11 D20 gt D31 D12 gt D20 D32 Data Type Double Word When S1 source and D1 destination are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D STR 52 DIR REP 1 D10 020 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 D30 D31 D12 D13 D20 D21 D32 D33 D14 D15 D20 D21 D34 D35 Repeat All Source and Destination Operands Data Type Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW W STR 52 DIR REP 11 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D20 E D30 D11 D21 D31 D12 D22 D32 Data Type Double Word When all operands are designated to repeat different results are set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ANDW D SIR S2R DIR REP 1 10 020 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 D30 D31 D12 D13 D22 D23 D32 D33 D14 D15 D24 D25 D34 D35 Note When a user program error occurs in any repeat operation special internal relay M8004 user program execution error and the ERROR LED are turned on and maintained while operation for other instructions is continued For the advanced instruction which has caused a user prog
402. for 4 sec YES Did you power down and up after chang ing the comm selector DIP switch NO Press the communication enable button for more than 4 sec until the ERROR LED blinks once NO communication cable connected correctly YES Is the input to the NO TXD instruction on YES Is the POWER LED on do YES Call IDEC for assistance Make sure of correct wiring Turn on the input to the TXD instruction See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 10 Data is not transmitted correctly in the user communication mode Are communication parameters set correctly using WindLDR Is the data register designated as transmit status used repeatedly Are inputs to more than 5 TXD instructions on simultaneously Is duration of the busy signal at the remote terminal less than 5 sec Did you make Sure of source 1 operand of the TXD instruction Call IDEC for assistance 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Set the communication parameters to match those of the remote terminal using WindLDR see page 17 3 Correct the program to replace the repeated data register with a dif
403. fore Execution After Execution H NEGO 50 10 Dol o nol o D10 1 D10 1 010 32768 D10 32768 e Data Type Long Before Execution After Execution SOTU S D 11 D20 D20 D21 0 gt D20 D21 0 D20 D21 1 D20 D21 1 D20 D21 2147483648 gt D20 D21 2147483648 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 125 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS 126 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 BIT SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction Bit shift and rotate instructions are used to shift the 16 or 32 bit data in the designated source operand S1 to the left or right by the quantity of bits designated The result is set to the source operand S1 and a carry special internal relay M8003 SFTL Shift Left 84 SFTL E uuu NE FRE OX When input is on 16 or 32 bit data of the designated source operand S1 is shifted to the left by the quantity of bits designated by operand bits The result is set to the source operand S1 and the last bit status shifted out is set
404. g receiving data R W Control Signal Status D8204 D8304 Special data registers D8204 and D8304 store a value to show that RTS DSR and DTR are on or off at RS232C port 1 or port 2 respectively The data of D8204 and D8304 is updated at every END processing D8204 D8304 Value RTS DSR DTR Description 0 OFF OFF OFF All RTS DSR and DTR are off 1 ON OFF OFF RTS is on 2 OFF ON OFF DSR is on 3 ON ON OFF RTS and DSR are on 4 OFF OFF ON DTR is on 5 ON OFF ON RTS and DTR are on 6 OFF ON ON DSR and DTR are on 7 ON ON ON All RTS DSR and DTR are on Control Signal Statuses in RUN Mode Communication DR Value DSR Input DTR Output RTS Output Mode D8205 D8305 08206 D8306 D8207 D8307 While transmitting OFF 0 default No effect ON Not transmitting 1 ON Enable TXD RXD OFF While transmitting ON OFF Disable TXD RXD Not transmitting OFF U 2 ON Disable TXD RXD RXD enabled ON UH OFF Enable TXD RXD RXD disabled OFF Communication Mode 3 ON Enable TXD ON OFF OFF Disable TXD 4 ON Disable TXD ON While transmitting OFF OFF Enable TXD Not transmitting While transmitting OFF ee m Not transmitting Maintenance While transmitting OFF Mode B No eget ON Not transmitting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 1727 info clirwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION I
405. g data While the OpenNet Controller is stopped DTR remains off Use this option to indi cate the OpenNet Controller operating status OpenNet Controller Stopped Ruminge Stopped DTR signal __ A D8206 D8306 1 Whether the OpenNet Controller is running or stopped remains off OpenNet Controller Stopped Running Stopped ON DTR signal Ok D8206 D8306 2 While the OpenNet Controller can receive data is turned on While the OpenNet Controller can not receive data DTR remains off Use this option when flow control of receive data is required Receive Impossible Impossible ON i signal D8206 D8306 3 or more Same as D8206 D8306 0 RTS Output Control Signal Option D8207 D8307 D8207 and D8307 are used to control the RTS request to send signal to indicate the OpenNet Controller transmission sta tus or operating status The RTS control signal option can be used only in the user protocol to communicate through the RS232C port or port 2 D8207 D8307 0 system default While the OpenNet Controller is transmitting data RTS remains off While the OpenNet Controller is not transmitting data RTS is turned on Use this option for communication with a remote terminal in the half duplex mode since RTS goes on or off according to the data transmission from the OpenNet Controller Data transmission Transmitting ON RTS signal dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER
406. g of key words IMPORTANT INFORMATION Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of or the application of IDEC PLC components individually or in combination with other equipment All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit their appli cation and for choosing an application appropriate for the component individually or in combination with other equipment All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only In no way does including these diagrams and examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application To test and approve all pro grams prior to installation is the responsibility of the end user PREFACE 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com TABLE OF CONTENTS HAPTER 1 C HAPTER 2 C HAPTER 3 C HAPTER 4 HAPTER 5 GENERAL INFORMATION About the OpenNet Controller 1 1 Features er c TTE 1 1 Sp cial FUNCIONS z ais xem erai voe dpi Gah oe e ete By ee Reg SERE 1 2 System S c aL a es a A ede 1 3 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS CPU Modulen Sonena a here ae a ek ie e ne ae SGT eA 2 1 InputeModule 2r Gee Rte a DECI
407. ge 25 1 DeviceNet Slave Module Type Number and Weight Module Name DeviceNet Slave Module Type No FC3ASX5DS1 Weight approx 180g Parts Description 5 Expansion Connector 1 Module ID 4 Status LED 2 DIP Switch 3 Connector 1 Module ID FC3A SX5DS1 indicates the DeviceNet slave module ID 2 DIP Switch 10 pole DIP switch for setting the node address MAC ID media access control identi fier data rate output hold load off and physical port number 3 Connector Network interface connector for connecting an input communication cable 4 Status LED Indicates operating status POW POWER Green ON Power is on MODULE NETWORK STATUS OFF Duplicate MAC ID test not completed Green Flash Normal operation not communicating with master MNS Green ON Normal operation communicating with master Red Flash Minor fault e g timeout Red ON Critical fault e g duplicate MAC ID I O STATUS 10 Green ON Normal operation Red ON Fault 5 Expansion Connector Connects to CPU and other modules 2 38 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS LoNWonRks Interface Module P The OpenNet Controller can be linked to LONWORKS networks For communication through the LONWORKS network the LONWORKS interface module is available For details about the LONWORKS interface module and
408. gisters Special Data Register Allocation Numbers Allocation Number Description Updated See Page D8000 System Setup ID Quantity of Inputs When 1 0 initialized D8001 System Setup ID Quantity of Outputs When 1 0 initialized D8002 System Setup ID Quantity of Functional Modules When 1 0 initialized D8003 System Setup ID Data Link Usage 1 Yes 0 No When 1 0 initialized D8004 System Setup ID INTERBUS Master Usage 1 Yes 0 No When 1 0 initialized D8005 General Error Code When error occurred 273 D8006 User Program Execution Error Code When error occurred 274 D8007 User Program Execution Error Address When error occurred 276 08008 Year Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8009 Month Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8010 Day Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8011 Day of Week Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8012 Hour Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8013 Minute Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8014 Second Current Data Read only Every 100 msec 15 7 D8015 Year New Data Write only 15 7 D8016 Month New Data Write only 15 7 D8017 Day New Data Write only 15 7 D8018 Day of Week New Data Write only 15 7 D8019 Hour New Data Write only 15 7 D8020 Minute New Data Write only 15 7 D8021 Second New Data Write only 15
409. gnated as D1 or D2 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 or D2 When T timer or C counter is used as D1 or D2 the current value is read and written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the destination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the destination point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used Examples XCHG sotu XCHG W D1 D2 Before Exchange After Exchange D21 D25 021 100 021 200 D21 025 Md pee When input 10 is turned on data of data registers D21 and D25 D23 D23 designated by operands D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other D24 D24 D25 200 D25 100 Before Exchang D After Exchange sotu B5 D31 100 7031 500 032 200 032 600 When input I1 is turned on data of data registers D31 D32 and D34 D34 D35 D36 designated by operands D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other 035 500 D35 100 036
410. gnated by S1 and a carry special x le eu s internal relay M8003 rotated to the left by quantity of bits designated by operand bits The last bit status rotated out of the source operand is set to a carry M8003 and the carry status is set to the LSB of the source operand Data Type Word bits to rotate 1 CY MSB S1 LSB Before rotation 0 110101111110 1110111111100 11110 M8003 Rotate to the left cy MSB 51 LSB After rotation 1 0101111110110 111111110 10111111010 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation 5 51 LSB 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Rotate to the left After rotation CY MSB 51 LSB 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 0 1 1 0 10 11 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate
411. h BCC Block Check Character The OpenNet Controller has an automatic BCC calculation function to detect a communication error in incoming data If a BCC code is designated in the receive format of a RXD instruction the OpenNet Controller calculates a BCC value for a specified starting position through the position immediately preceding the BCC and compares the calculation result with the BCC code in the received incoming data The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC calculated in either XOR or ADD can be 1 or 2 digits When an end delimiter is not used in the RXD instruction the BCC code must be positioned at the end of the receive for mat designated in Source 1 operand When an end delimiter is used the BCC code must be immediately before or after the end delimiter The OpenNet Controller reads a specified number of BCC digits in the incoming data according to the receive format to calculate and compare the received BCC code with the BCC calculation results BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting at the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the receive data Example Received data consists of 17 bytes plus 2 BCC digits 1 Calculation start position 1 Ist 2nd 3rd
412. h ROTRC Rotate Right with Carry BCDLS BCD LeftShift DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS HTOB BTOH HTOA ATOH BTOA ATOB DTDV DTCB pow daen WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS WKCMP ON Week Compare ON WKCMP OFF Week Compare OFF WKTBL Week Setting Calendar Clock Using WindLDR Setting Calendar Clock Using a User Program Adjusting Clock Using a User Program OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL oe Aare RN BED to HEX see ecg eens ak ea CRECEN Hex to AS GIN ic je e CE SS ASCIIEtO HOX i ec ren ERES BCD to AS CU aiti n Ree CEU ASCIE tO BCD a arises i eae a aoe Data Divide o ae eae pata Combine eA ee TABLE OF CONTENTS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com TABLE OF CONTENTS 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS DISP Display 2 disse GR A RE b ek RS DGRD Digital Read rrei creena wip En Ea rarae Ie CDISP Character Display HAPTER 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS User Communication Overview User Communication System Setup TXD1 1
413. he CPU and cannot be outputted to the output terminals Special internal relays M are internal relays dedicated to specific functions Timers T are relays used in the user program available in 1 sec 100 msec 10 msec and 1 msec timers Counters C are relays used in the user program available in adding counters and reversible counters Shift registers R are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs Data registers D are registers used to store numerical data Some of the data registers are dedicated to special functions Link registers L are registers used for inputting and outputting numerical values to and from functional modules dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Operand Allocation Numbers Operand Allocation Numbers Total Points 10000 10007 1001040017 Input 1 10040 10047 10050 0057 10080 10087 10090 0097 1012040127 1013040137 10160 10167 1017040177 10200 10207 1021040217 1024040247 1025040257 1002040027 1006040067 1010040107 1014040147 1018040187 1022040227 1026040267 1003040037 1007040077 1011040117 1015040157 1019040197 1023040237 1027040277 224 10280 10287 10290 10297 1032040327 1033040337 10360 10367 1037040377 10400 10407 1041040417 10440 10447 1045040457 10480 10487 1049040497 10520 10527 1053040537 10560 10567 1057040577 1030040307
414. he END processing at each station When data refresh is complete communication completion special internal relays M8140 through M8176 slave station communication com pletion relay go on at the master and slave stations for one scan time after the data refresh When the master station completes communication with all slave stations special internal relay M8177 all slave station communication completion relay goes on at the master station 21 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION The communication sequence in the separate refresh mode is shown below 1 scan time END Processed Master Station a Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3 Slave 31 Slave 1 Refresh Refresh Refresh Refresh Refresh Slave 1 Comm Completion M8140 L 11 aum Master mdr i ave 2 Comm Station Completion M8141 E _ _ Slave 31 Comm Completion M8176 ee 00 All Slave Comm Completion M8177 1 scan Slave Slave Station 1 a a Station 1 END Processed Slave 1 Comm Completion M8140 a EO 1 scan time Slave Slave Station 2 mo EM RERO S TEM Station 2 END Processed Slave 2 Comm Completion M8141 M Y 1 scan time Slave Slave Station 31 zh Station E E 31 END Processed S
415. he LJMP instruc tion after the program branch Valid Operands Operand Function 1 QM S1 Source 1 Label number to jump to X X X Constant Repeat T C D L X X X X X 0 255 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Since the LJMP instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Note Make sure that a LABEL instruction of the label number used for a LJMP instruction is programmed If a matching label does not exist a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 18 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS Example 1 and LABEL The following example demonstrates a program to jump to three different portions of program depending on the input When input 10 is on program execution jumps to label 0 When input I1 is on program execution jumps to label 1 When input I2 is on program execution jumps to label 2 M8121 is the 1 sec clock special internal relay When jump occurs to label 0 output QO oscillates in 1 sec increments 1 M8122 is the 100 msec clock special internal relay Q When jump occurs to label 1 output Q1 oscillates in 100 msec increments 2 M8
416. he specified INTERBUS segment for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device 0BF5hex BUS FA IL Transmission error CRC error in the data return path at the incoming bus interface IN of the speci fied INTERBUS device Check the specified INTERBUS segment for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 19 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE I O OBF6hex BUS FA Meaning SYSTEM IL Bus error Data transmission was temporarily interrupted As a result the controller board reset all outputs and stopped data transmission The display shows the INTERBUS device number The error can be found in the preceding bus segment of a local bus in the preceding bus segment of a ST compact statio
417. heck error XxX xX OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 3 27 TROUBLESHOOTING OpenNet Controller Operating Status Output and ERROR LED during Errors Error Items Operating Output ERROR LED Checked at Status Power failure Stop OFF ON 1 Any time Watchdog timer error Stop OFF ON Any time Data link connection error Stop OFF OFF Initializing data link User program ROM sum check error Stop OFF ON During operation TIM CNT preset value sum check error Maintained Maintained OFF Starting operation User program RAM sum check error Stop 2 OFF ON Starting operation Keep data sum check error Maintained Maintained OFF Turning power on User program syntax error Stop OFF ON Downloading user program User program writing error Stop OFF ON Downloading user program Protect output overload error Maintained Maintained 3 ON During operation Calendar clock error Maintained Maintained ON Any time I O bus error Stop OFF ON Any time INTERBUS master access error Maintained Maintained ON Any time I O bus initialize error Stop OFF ON Turning power on User program execution error Maintained Maintained ON Executing user program 1 When the power voltage to the OpenNet Controller CPU module drops below the rated value the ERROR LED is lit While the power voltage remains below the rated value the ERROR LED does not go on 2 When a program RAM sum check error occurs operation is stopped momentarily for r
418. herwise electrical shocks may be caused Ferrules Crimping Tool and Screwdriver for Phoenix Terminal Blocks The screw terminal block can be wired with or without using ferrules on the end of cable Applicable ferrules for the Phoe nix terminal blocks and crimping tool for the ferrules are listed below The screwdriver is used for tightening the screw ter minals on the OpenNet Controller modules These ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are made by Phoenix Contact and are available from Phoenix Contact Type numbers of the ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver listed below are the type numbers of Phoenix Contact When ordering these products from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and quantity listed below Ferrule Order No Quantity of Cables Cable Size Phoenix Type Order No Pcs Pkt UL1007 AWG18 Al 1 8 RD 3200030 100 For 1 cable connection UL1015 AWG22 Al 0 5 8 WH 3200014 100 01007 AWG18 AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD 3200810 100 For 2 cable connection UL1015 AWG22 AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH 3200933 100 Crimping Tool and Screwdriver Order No Tool Name Phoenix Type Order No Pcs Pkt Crimping Tool CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 1 Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x 35 1205053 10 Screw Terminal Tightening Torque 0 5 to 0 6 Nem If ferrules other than listed above are used the ferrule may come in contact with the terminal block cover Then remove the terminal block cover from the module OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL P
419. hich can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments xamples M OVN M10 NOT M50 p MOVNO MED MER nee When input 10 is on the 16 internal relays starting with M10 designated by source operand S1 are inverted bit by bit and moved to 16 internal relays starting with M50 designated by destination operand D1 M10 through M17 M20 through M27 NOT M50 through M57 M60 through M67 MSB S1 LSB The ON OFF statuses of the 16 internal relays M10 BEIE T 010111111010 10 0 10 10111111110 1011 through M17 and M20 through M27 inverted A ch D1 moved to 16 internal relays M50 through M57 and After inversion 17170 1 0 110 M6
420. hone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Output Wiring for Application in Europe When equipment containing the OpenNet Controller is intended for use in European countries insert an IEC 60127 approved fuse to each output of every output module for protection against overload or short circuit This is required when exporting equipment containing the OpenNet Controller to Europe Example FC3A R161 Relay Output Module Wiring Fuse S2 Load Load BES aun gt WYN nun Data Link Wiring For wiring the data link cable to the RS485 terminals on the CPU f module use a two core twisted pair shielded cable with a minimum eR C core diameter of 0 9 mm gt C e Separate the data link cable from the output line power line and motor line a eJ IC 2 2 0 i C ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Analog Input Output Wiring When using an analog input or output module connect analog signals and ground wire as shown below For wiring analog input or output module use a two core twisted pair shielded cable with a minimum core diameter of 0 9 mm Connect the shield to a proper frame ground grounding resistance 1000 maximum e Co
421. hone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS Introduction This chapter describes general information about setting up the basic OpenNet Controller system for programming start ing and stopping OpenNet Controller operation and introduces simple operating procedures from creating a user program using WindLDR on a computer to monitoring the OpenNet Controller operation Connecting OpenNet Controller to PC 1 1 Computer Link System The OpenNet Controller can be connected to an IBM PC or compatible computer in two ways Computer Link through RS232C Port 1 or Port 2 When connecting a Windows computer to the RS232C port 1 or port 2 on the OpenNet Controller CPU module enable the maintenance mode for the RS232C port To enable the maintenance mode for the RS232C port 1 set the DIP switch 2 to OFF To enable the maintenance mode for the RS232C port 2 set the DIP switch 3 to OFF To set up a 1 1 computer link system connect a computer to the OpenNet Controller using the computer link cable 4C FC2A KCAC n 1 RS232C Port 2 5 Computer Link Cable 4 uc 2 sie 3m 9 84 ft long E ui Nunun 5999656 ri Ey SS RS232C fell H D sub 9 Female Connector RS232C Port 1 Computer Link through RS485 Port When connecting a Windows computer to th
422. ication with the DeviceNet network continues Data exchange between the CPU and DeviceNet slave modules is asynchronous with the user program scanning in the CPU module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Transmission Time The response time of the DeviceNet network varies greatly depending on factors such as the quantity of nodes data bytes and DeviceNet system setup To determine the accurate response time confirm the response time on the actual network system The following example describes a response time in a DeviceNet network system comprised of IDEC SX5D communica tion I O terminals Example DeviceNet Transmission Time e System Setup PLC 17474532 SLC5 03 CPU made by Rockwell Automation Master 1747 SDN SLC500 DeviceNet Scanner Module made by Rockwell Automation Slaves SX5D SBM 16K 8pt transistor source input 8pt transistor sink output SX5D SBM16P 8pt transistor sink input 8pt transistor protect source output SX5D SBRO8 8pt relay output Data Rate 125k baud Operation Mode Communication according to the scan list in the master e System Operation Data Flow 1 SX5D SBM16K sends 8 input data to the master and the master sends 8 output data to SX5D SBM16K 2 SX5D SBM16P sends 8 input data to the master and the master sends 8 output data to SX5D SBM16P 3 SX5D SBM16K sends 8 i
423. ication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode Device numbers 0 through 31 for the CPU in the computer 4 08 Device number selection ARA link or data link communication network Data link mode Used for data link communication User communication mode Used for user communication or modem communication Maintenance mode Used for computer link communication between the CPU and WindLDR on computer After changing the settings of the communication selector DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communica tion enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode for the RS485 or RS232C port takes effect When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the DIP switch settings while the CPU is powered up Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary 4 Memory Card Connector Plug a miniature memory card into the memory card connector When a memory card is inserted the CPU runs the user program contained in the memory card instead of the user program stored in the CPU memory The memory card connector is provided on CPU modules FC3A CP2KM and FC3A CP2SM 5 Memory Card Eject Button
424. ice level 24 6 numbers 21 2 22 2 DeviceNet 25 1 cable 25 4 slave module 2 38 DGRD 16 3 dialing 23 2 telephone number 23 5 digital F INDEX I O module operands 6 18 read 16 3 dimensions 2 40 DIN rail 3 3 DIP switch settings 25 6 direct control action 20 10 disabling protection 5 18 disassembling modules 3 3 disconnect line 23 2 mode 23 2 23 6 discontinuity of operand areas 8 5 DISP 16 1 disparity run stop operation upon 5 5 display 16 1 DIV 11 1 division 11 1 DJNZ 18 5 double word data move in data registers and link registers 9 2 operands in data registers and link registers 8 5 download program 4 6 5 19 DSR input control signal option D8205 D8305 17 28 DTCB 14 14 DTDV 14 13 DTR output control signal option D8206 D8306 17 29 dual pulse reversible counter CDP 7 12 edit user program 4 4 enabling protection 5 18 END instruction 7 28 processing time breakdown A 2 end delimiter 17 17 plate 2 3 error causes and actions 27 4 code data link communication 21 4 general 27 3 general bus error 24 16 INTERBUS 24 16 INTERBUS master 24 10 remote local bus errors 24 22 user errors 24 16 user program execution 27 6 data 25 7 26 17 location INTERBUS master 24 10 ERROR LED 27 1 during errors 27 4 ESD 2 37 exchange 9 13 exclusive OR word 12 1 execution times for instructions 1 expansion connector 2 3 module ID 26 17 power supply module 2 34 A 3 system 1 6 external interface file 26 2 26 12 ferrule 3 1
425. id eT muon T 7 C R 1 AND 02557 100071715 ANDN 0597 0597 5000 8237 0239 0 255 0255 10000131715 OR aH and ORN Or Not ud The OR instruction is used for programming a NO contact in parallel The ORN instruction is used for programming a NC contact in parallel The OR or ORN instruction is entered after the first set of contacts Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 bes 10 00 ON Il 11 ON Q0 ON 10 Ql Ql gr 11 When either input IO or 11 is on output QO is on When both inputs IO and 11 are off output QO is off When either input IO is on or input I1 is off output Q1 is on When input IO is off and input I1 is on output Q1 is off Valid eI muon 1 0 1 OR 100 0 717 15 0 2557 8000 8237 0259 10255 10255 1000 0 1317 15 74 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS AND LOD Load The AND LOD instruction is used to connect in series two or more circuits starting with the LOD instruction The AND LOD instruction is the equivalent of a node on a ladder diagram When using WindLDR the user need not program the AND LOD instruction The circuit in the ladder diagram shown below is converted into AND LOD when the ladder diagram is compiled Ladder Diagram Program List Prom Adr 1
426. ile the CPU is powered up Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary Selecting Maintenance M ode To select the maintenance mode set communication selector DIP switch 1 to OFF at all OpenNet Controller CPU modules in the 1 N computer link network RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode OFF Maintenance mode dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 22 1 DIP Switch No Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 22 COMPUTER LINK COMMUNICATION Selecting Device Numbers Set communication selector DIP switches 4 through 8 to assign a unique device number of 0 through 31 to each CPU in the computer link network The device numbers do not have to be consecutive Device Number DEN r x 9X 14005 eo ee 3T 1 33 103147 35 4 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON 7 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Device Number DIP Switch 75
427. ime Selection Input filter time is selected in groups of eight inputs For example input numbers of module number 1 containing 32 inputs are divided into four groups IN FLTO0 IO through 17 only IN FLTO has effect on catch inputs IN_FLT1 I10 through I17 IN FLT2 120 through 127 IN FLT3 130 through 137 Select an input filter value from 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 msec for each input group Default 4 msec Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection No effect on the input filter Input Filter Values and Input Operation Depending on the selected values the input filter has three response areas to receive or reject input signals Input reject area Input signals are ignored and not received one third of the selected filter value or less Input indefinite area Input signals may be received or ignored Input accept area Input signals are received the selected filter value or higher Example Rejecting Input Pulses of 2 6 msec at Inputs 0 through 7 To accept input pulses of 8 msec plus 1 scan time using normal inputs select 8 msec in the Input Filter Time Selection area for IN FLTO Then since 8 3 approximately equals 2 6 msec input pulses shorter than 2 6 msec are rejected 2 6 msec 8 msec 1 scan Inputs IO to 17 Reject Indefinite Accept 5 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Catch Input The
428. in oper ands designated by S1 S2 S3 SN are set to the week table The quantity of special days can be up to 50 The special days stored in the week table are used to add or skip days to turn on or off the comparison outputs programmed in subsequent WKCMP ON or WKCMP OFF instructions The WKTBL must precede the WKCMP instructions Valid Operands Operand Function C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Special month day data X T X X X X 1014231 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as 51 through SN the timer counter current value is read out S1 through SN Special month day data Specify the months and days to add or skip days to turn on or off the comparison outputs programmed in WKCMP ON or WKCMP OFF instructions Month Day 01 through 12 01 through 31 Example To set July 4 as a special day designate 704 as S1 Make sure that the values set for S1 through SN are within the valid ranges If any data is over the valid value a user pro gram execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED 152 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com E 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS xamples WKCMP ON OFF Without Special Days S3 0 This example is the basic program for week programmer application without using the WKTBL week table inst
429. inary ASCII to BCD and no conversion When repeat is designated received data is divided converted and stored into data registers as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated data register Repeat cycles can be up to 99 Receive Digits The received data is divided into a block of specified receive digits before conversion as described below Example Received data of 6 bytes are divided in different receive digits Repeat is also designated 2 Receive digits 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 1 Receive digits 2 Mta oap qns gn 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 3 digits 1st block 3 digits 2 digits 2nd block 1st block 2 digits 2nd block 2 digits 3rd block 17 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Conversion 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS The data block of the specified receive digits is then converted according to the designated conversion type as described below Example Received data has been divided into a 2 digit block 1 ASCII to Binary conversion 0012h ASCII to Binary conversion 2 ASCII to BCD conversion ASCII to BCD conversion 100012 3 Y No conversion 3132h Repeat Cycles Hexadecimal value Y
430. inary Arithmetic Boolean Computation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Symbol Name ci T ved P NOP No Operation 1 8 6 MOV Move X X 6 0r7 9 1 MOVN Move Not X X 7 9 5 IMOV Indirect Move X X 9 or 10 9 6 IMOVN Indirect Move Not X X 9 or 10 9 7 BMOV Block Move X 7 9 8 NSET N Data Set X X 2 51 4 9 9 NRS N Data Repeat Set X X 7 or8 9 10 IBMV Indirect Bit Move X 9 9 11 IBMVN Indirect Bit Move Not X 9 9 12 XCHG Exchange X X 5 9 13 Compare Equal To X X X X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP lt gt Compare Unequal To X X X X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP lt Compare Less Than 8 to 10 10 1 gt X X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP lt Compare Less Than or Equal To X X X X 8 to 10 10 1 CMP gt Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X xX 8 to 10 10 1 ICMP gt Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To X X X X 9 to 12 10 4 ADD Addition 8 to 10 11 1 SUB Subtraction XX 8 to 10 11 1 MUL Multiplication X X X X 8 to 10 11 1 DIV Division X X X X 8 to 10 11 1 INC Increment X X 3 119 DEC Decrement X X 3 119 ROOT Root X 5 1140 SUM Sum X 8 11 11 ANDW AND Word X X 8 to 10 12 1 ORW OR Word X X 8 to 10 124 XORW Exclusive OR Word X X 8 to 10 124 NEG Negate X X 3 12 5 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL 8 1 Grou
431. info clrwtr com 13 SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS BCDLS BCD Left Shift 84 BCDLS diait When input is on the 32 bit binary data designated by S1 is converted into 8 giS BCD digits shifted to the left by the quantity of digits designated by operand digits and converted back to 32 bit binary data Valid values for each of S1 and 51 1 are 0 through 9999 The quantity of digits to shift can be through 7 Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits shifted Data Type Double Word digits to shift 1 51 S141 Before shift 0 1 2 3 4 5 e 7 0 Shift to the left After shift 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 o 0 MSD LSD Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 51 Source 1 Data for BCD shift digits Quantity of digits to shift 1 7 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 The quantity of digits to shift can be 1 through 7 for the double word data type Make sure that the source data determined by S1 and S141 is between 0 and 9999 for each data register or link register If either source data is over 9999 a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X A When a word operand such as D data regist
432. ing y Automatic start after download Keep output during download Note When downloading a user program all values and selections in the Function Area Settings are also downloaded to the OpenNet Controller For Function Area Settings see pages 5 1 through 5 18 4 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS Monitor Operation Another powerful function of WindLDR is to monitor the PLC operation on the PC The input and output statuses of the sample program can be monitored in the ladder diagram From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor When both inputs IO and I1 are on the ladder diagram on the monitor screen looks as follows Rung 01 abs 1 Rung 01 When both inputs IO and I1 are on output QO is turned 10000 10001 00000 off Rung ge Rung 02 When both inputs IO and I1 are on output Q1 is turned 2 8 off ro000 I0001 Q0001 Rung 03 3 g Ti Rung 03 When both input IO and I1 are on internal relay M10 is r0000 10001 0010 turned M8121 is the 1 clock special internal relay 4 L L While M10 is on output Q2 flashes in 1 sec increments m0010 M8121 Q000z Quitting WindLDR When you have completed monitoring you can quit WindLDR either directly from the monitor screen or from the editing screen In both cases from the menu bar select File gt Exit Wind LDR dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER
433. ing or modifying production lines Maintenance for communication lines will also become even easier Master Station Remote 1 INTERBUS Slave Station DeviceNet LONWORKS High performance CPU Module The OpenNet Controller CPU module has multiple functions to work as a brain of the control system connected to the open networks Optimum control systems can be made possible using the OpenNet Controller Powerful Communication Functions In addition to connection to the open networks the OpenNet Controller features three more communication functions The OpenNet Controller can be linked to external RS232C devices such as computers User Communication pus modems printers and barcode readers using the user communication function One OpenNet Controller at the master station can communicate with 31 slave stations Pags Hint through the RS485 line to exchange data and perform distributed control effectively When the OpenNet Controller is connected to a computer operating status and 1 status can be monitored on the computer data in the CPU can be monitored or updated and user programs can be downloaded and uploaded A maximum of 32 OpenNet Controller CPUs can be connected to one computer in the 1 N computer link system Computer Link International Safety Standards and Approvals The OpenNet Controller is certified by UL and CSA dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 1 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723
434. ing DeviceNet slave module or LonWorks inter face module specify the data bytes to communicate through each slave or inter face module me YN 3 To specify the quantity of nodes connected click the Configure Communication Master Module check box 4 Select the quantity of slave stations 1 through 32 in the Quantity of Nodes Connected list box 5 Click the OK button and download the user program to the OpenNet Controller dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Example 1 Reading and Writing 1 Data in Remote 1 System This example demonstrates a program to receive input data from the input slave module at node 0 and to send input data to the output slave module at node 1 in the remote I O system shown below Remote 1 Master Module FC3A SX5SM1 INTERBUS Cable Remote 1 Master Station 0000000000
435. ing FTT 10A transceivers only M aximum Nodes 32 385 nodes in a network Network Interface Connector In the module To the cable MSTB2 5 2 GF 5 08 made by Phoenix Contact FRONT MSTB2 5 2 STF 5 08 made by Phoenix Contact Network Cable 1 wire connection 2 wire connection 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG24 to 14 0 2 to 1 5 mm AWG24 to 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Wiring LonWorks Interface Module Precautions for Wiring Use a twisted pair cable to connect the LONWoRKS interface module to the network Do not run the network cable in parallel with or near power lines output lines and motor lines Keep the network cable away from noise sources Power down the LONWORKS interface module before you start wiring Make sure wiring is correct before powering up the LONWORKS interface module One or two cables can be connected to one terminal of the network interface connec tor When connecting one cable use AWG24 to AWG14 cables core cross section 0 2 to 2 5 mm When connecting two cables to one terminal use the same cables of AWQG2A to AWGI6 0 2 to 1 5 mm Do not use cables of different diameters Strip 7mm the cable insulation as shown at right e Tighten the mounting screws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 3 to 0 5 N m e Tighten the terminal scre
436. into upper SI gt D1 D1 1 Ri HE DTDV ee 51 D1 and lower bytes When a data register is selected as destination operand the upper byte data is stored to the destination designated by operand D1 The lower byte data is stored to the operand next to D1 When a link register is selected as destination operand the lower byte data is stored to the destination designated by operand D1 The upper byte data is stored to the operand next to D1 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to divide X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Since the DTDV instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X a When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used xamples DTDV
437. ion WKCMP instructions can be used as many as required to turn on and off designated output and internal relays at predeter mined times and days of the week Once the internal calendar clock is set the WKCMP ON and OFF instructions compare the predetermined time with the internal clock When the preset time is reached internal relay or output designated as destination operand is turned on or off as scheduled WKCMP ON Week Compare ON ON MR E ADEL Sede Seek OERGOR BOR BIER preset data with the current day and time When input is on the WKCMP ON compares the S1 and S2 H WKCMP S1 S2 53 D1 When the current day and time reach the presets an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned on depend ing on the week table output control designated by S3 WKCMP OFF Week Compare OFF When input is on the WKCMP OFF compares the S1 and S2 H m j z d i e 32 we De 2 preset data with the current day and time When the current day and time reach the presets an output or internal relay designated by operand D1 is turned off depend ing on the week table output control designated by S3 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Day of week comparison data X X X X X X X X 0 127 S2 Source 2 Hour minute comparison data X X X X X X X 02359 3 Source 3 Week table output control X X X X X X X X 0 2 D1 Destination 1 Comparison ON output WKCMP ON
438. ipulated Variable Upper Limit The value contained in the data register designated by S1 16 specifies the upper limit of the output manipulated variable S1 1 in two ways direct and proportional 51416 Value 0 through 100 When 1 16 contains a value 0 through 100 the value directly determines the upper limit of the output manipulated vari able S1 1 If the manipulated variable D1 is greater than or equal to the upper limit value S1 1 the upper limit value is outputted to the output manipulated variable S1 1 Set a required value of 0 through 100 for the output manipulated variable upper limit to the data register designated by 1 16 When S1 16 stores a value larger than 100 except 10001 through 10099 the output manipulated variable upper limit 5 1 16 is set to 100 The output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 must be larger than the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 To enable the manipulated variable upper limit turn on the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 When S222 is turned off the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 has no effect 1416 Value 10001 through 10099 disables Output Manipulated Variable Lower Limit 1417 When S1 16 contains a value 10001 through 10099 the value minus 10000 determines the ratio of the output manipulated variable 5 1 1 in proportion to the manipulated variable D1 of O through 100 The output manipulated variable S 1 1 can be calc
439. irst loop Since the END instruction is not executed as long as MO remains on output Q1 is not turned on even if input I1 is on 18 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com L 18 PROGRAM BRANCHING INSTRUCTIONS CAL Label Call amp When input is on the address with label 0 through 255 designated by S1 is called When LCAL E input is off call takes place and program execution proceeds with the next instruc tion The LCAL instruction calls a subroutine and returns to the main program after the branch is executed A LRET instruction see below must be placed at the end of a pro gram branch which is called so that normal program execution resumes by returning to the instruction following the LCAL instruction Note The END instruction must be used to separate the main program from any subrou tines called by the LCAL instruction A maximum of 10 LCAL instructions can be nested Valid Operands Operand Function 51 Source 1 Label number to call X X X Constant Repeat T C D L X X X X X 0 255 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When designating S1 using other than a constant the value for the label is a variable When using a variable for a label make sure that all probable LABEL numbers are included in
440. is communicated through the DeviceNet slave module Since seven functional modules including the DeviceNet slave module can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module link registers are allocated depending on the position where the DeviceNet slave module is mounted Link Register Allocation Numbers Allocation Number Area Function Description R W L 00 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 01 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 02 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 03 Data area Receive data Stores received data from the network Read L 04 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 05 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 06 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 07 Data area Transmit data Stores transmit data for the network Write L 12 Status area Error data Stores various error codes Read L 13 Status area I O counts Stores the byte counts of transmit receive data Read L 14 Status area Connection status Stores the allocation choice byte Read L 24 Reserved area Software version Stores the system software version Read Note A number 1 through 7 comes in place of depending on the position where the functional module is mounted such as OpenNet interface module or analog 1 module Consequently operand numbers are
441. is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 51 Repeat 0 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD W S1 52 DIR REP D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 p30 35 D10 10 D20 25 gt 031 35 D10 10 D20 25 p32 35 Data Type Double Word When only D1 destination is designated to repeat the same result is set to 3 operands starting with D1 D1 1 51 Repeat 0 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 3 SOTU ADD D 51 S2 D1 R REP 1 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 gt 030 031 D10 D11 D20 D21 032 033 10 011 020 021 034 035 Repeat Two Source Operands Data Type Word When S1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 S1 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 H Hs SOTU ADD W S1R 52 D1 REP ee RER D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 D20 25 030 35 011 15 021 35 30 50 012 20 022 45 030 65 Data Type Double Word When 1 and S2 source are designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 soru ADDO SIR STR DI REP 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 3 D1 Repeat 0 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21
442. is transferred to a link register in the CPU module as illustrated below COO1h 8 bits C000h 8 bits Registers in the b5 b2 LoNWoRks Interface Module Link Register L 00 in the CPU Module Example 2 Transmit Data in Link Register L 04 When transmit data is stored to link register L 04 in the CPU module the data is transferred to registers in the LONWORKS interface module as illustrated below Link Register L 04 in the CPU Module C009h 8 bits Registers in the b4 b3 LoNWoRks Interface Module 26 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Example 3 Error Data in Register C012h When error data enters register CO12h in the LONWORKS interface module the data is transferred to a link register in the CPU module as illustrated below C012h 8 bits Link Register L 12 in the CPU Module Example 4 1 Counts in Link Register L 13 When 8 bytes output and 4 bytes input are selected as the transmit and receive data quantities in WindLDR Function Area Settings respectively these values are stored to link register L 13 in the CPU module and the data is transferred to register CO13h in the LONWORKS interface module as illustrated below Link Register L 13 in the C
443. it data and to read data from link registers allocated to receive data xample When a DeviceNet slave module is mounted in the first slot of all functional modules Transmit Data 65535 L104 through L107 Hs When input IO is on constant 65535 FFFFh designated by source oper and S1 is moved to four link registers L104 through L107 designated by destination operand D1 64 bits 8 bytes in link registers L104 through L107 are turned on Since link registers L104 through L107 transmit data the data is transmitted to the network e Receive Data L100 L101 DO D1 When input I1 is on 32 bit 4 byte data in two link registers L100 and L101 designated by source operand S1 is moved to data registers DO and D1 designated by destination operand D1 Since link registers L100 and L101 receive data communication data read to L100 and L101 is moved to data registers DO and D1 Starting Operation 1 Set up the OpenNet Controller CPU and DeviceNet slave modules and connect the DeviceNet slave module to the DeviceNet network using DeviceNet cables 2 Power up the CPU module and download the user program to the CPU module using WindLDR 3 Start the CPU module to run then DeviceNet communication starts The delay until the communication starts after power up depends on the size of the user program and the system setup While the CPU is stopped data exchange between the CPU and DeviceNet slave modules is halted but commun
444. it status rotated out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Data Type Word bits to rotate 1 CY MSB S1 LSB Before rotation r 311 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 M8003 Rotate to the left MSB 51 15 After rotation 1 0 01 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 00 1 1 0 1 M8003 Data Type Double Word bits to rotate 1 Before rotation CY MSB S1 LSB r 1 o o i oj1 o 1 1 1 oj e 1 1 o 1 o o 1 1 o 1 0 1 1 1 o o 0 M8003 Rotate to the left After rotation MSB 51 LSB 1 o oj1ijijpem oe i a iejo j1 o 1 e o 1 1j e 1 o i 1i 1 o o 1 i o i M8003 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data for bit rotation X X X X bits Quantity of bits to rotate 145 131 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as S1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S1 The quantity of bits to rotate can
445. ith the entry in the configuration frame Add_Error_Info 0C44hex to 0C47 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or 0D44hex to 0D47hex LB FAIL The ID code of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical with the entry in the configuration frame Add Error Info 0C48hex to 0 4 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD48hex to OD4Bhex LB FAIL Only ID cycles but no data cycles can be run Cause The data register of the specified INTERBUS device has been interrupted The number of data registers of the specified INTERBUS is not identical with the length code entered in the configuration frame Add Error Info 0C4Chex to 0 4 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD4Chex to 0D4Fhex LB FAIL The specified INTERBUS device has an invalid ID code Add Error Info 2424 Error location Segment Position OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 0D50hex to 0053 Meaning 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM hex LB FAIL The specified INTERBUS device has the ID code of a remote bus device Add_Error_Info 0C58hex to 0C5B Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD58hex to OD5Bhex LB FAIL The data transmission is interrupted at the outgoing remote bus interface OUT1 of the specified INTERBUS device
446. itialization string modify the initialization string to match your modem E0 Characters NOT echoed The modem mode of the OpenNet Controller operates without echo back Without the EO command the OpenNet Controller misunderstands an echo for a result code An error will be caused although a com mand is executed correctly This command must be included in the initialization string 00 Result codes displayed The modem mode of the OpenNet Controller is configured to use result codes Without the Q0 com mand a timeout error will be caused although a command is executed correctly This command must be included in the initialization string V1 Word result code The modem mode of the OpenNet Controller is configured to use word result codes Without the V1 command result codes are regarded as invalid and a timeout error will be caused although a command is executed correctly This command must be included in the initialization string amp D2 Hang up and disable auto answer on DTR detection When the DTR signal turns off the telephone line is disconnected The OpenNet Controller uses this function to disconnect the telephone line This command must be included in the initialization string amp 1 DCD ON with carrier from remote modem DCD tracks the state of the data carrier from the remote modem An ON condition of DCD indicates the presence of a carrier This command must be included in the initializati
447. itting 5 digits 3 No conversion ASCII data NUL FF D10 000Ch No conversion 00h 0Ch When transmitting 2 digits 176 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Transmit Digits Bytes After conversion the transmit data is taken out in specified digits Possible digits depend on the selected conversion type Example D10 stores 010Ch 268 1 Binary to ASCII conversion Transmit digits 2 ASCII data Transmitted data o 1 O C Binary to ASCII conversion 30h 31h 30h 43h 2 BCD to ASCII conversion Transmit digits 3 D10 010 Lowest 2 digits ASCII data Transmitted data o 0 2 6 8 2 6 8 30h 30h 32h 36h 38h 32h 36h 38h Lowest 3 digits D10 010Ch Decimal BCD to ASCII value conversion 3 No conversion Transmit digits 1 ASCII data Transmitted data SOH FF FF D10 010 No conversion och Lowest 1 digit Repeat Cycles When a data register is designated to repeat consecutive data registers as many as the repeat cycles are used for transmit data in the same conversion type and transmit digits Example D10 000Ch Da
448. ived maximum slope 3 Based on the maximum slope and dead time calculate the four Dead Time PID parameters dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Source Operand S2 Control Relay Turn on or off appropriate outputs or internal relays starting with the operand designated by S2 before executing the PID instruction as required Operands S244 through S2 7 are for read only to reflect the PID and auto tuning statuses Operand Function Description R W ON Direct control action SEnHOLGquen OFF Reverse control action ROW ON Manual mode 241 Auto manual mode OFF Auto mode R W 242 Output manipulated ON Enable output manipulated variable upper and lower limits 51 16 and 1417 R W variable limit enable OFF Disable output manipulated variable upper and lower limits 512 16 and 51 417 243 Integral start coefficient ON Disable integral start coefficient 51 10 R W disable OFF Enable integral start coefficient 51 10 ON When process variable S1 0 gt high alarm value S1 14 note High alert output OFF When process variable S1 0 lt high alarm value 1414 R ON When process variable S1 0 lt low alarm value S1 15 55 Lowialarni output OFF When process variable S1 0 gt low alarm value 51 15 R S2 6 Control output Goes on and off according to the AT parameters or PID calcula
449. l I Analog 1 Expansion Power Supply Remote 1 Master DeviceNet Slave and LonWorKS Interface Modules Digital I O analog 1 expansion power supply remote I O master Devicenet Slave and LonWorks interface modules have the same outside dimensions Example The following figure illustrates a system setup consisting of a remote I O master module a CPU module and three I O modules 195 gt 35 55 35 35 35 gt gt gt 1 o A a o oo a o g 8 o s oo s nn aj o g uu oj 0 aj o o z nu 5 oo aj oo ajo a a o B B nu Bl o n 9 oo af oo s nn 8 o a 8 8 N m 8 eo c oo af aj oo zs c a E Bn B a a EL Ic a o c nu o o c oo un oo o o o o eoo o D es na nu oo oo oo _y v All dimensions in mm 240 OPE
450. l internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Note The DGRD instruction can be used up to 16 times in a user program When transferring a user program containing more than 16 DGRD instructions to the CPU a user program syntax error occurs turning on the ERROR LED The user pro gram cannot be executed Conversion BCD To connect BCD decimal digital switches BIN To connect BIN hexadecimal digital switches Input Points Inputs are used to read the data from digital switches The quantity of required input points is always 4 Four input points must be reserved starting with the input number designated by operand I For example when input IO is designated as operand I inputs IO through I3 are used Output Points Outputs are used to select the digits to read The quantity of required output points is equal to the quantity of digits to read When connecting the maximum of 5 digital switches 5 output points must be reserved starting with the output number designated by operand Q For example when output QO is designated as operand Q to read 3 digits outputs QO through Q2 are used Digital Switch Data Reading Time Reading digital switch data requires the following time after the input to the DGRD instruction is turned on Keep the input to the DGRD instruction for the period of time shown below to read the digital switch data For example when read ing data from 5 digital switches to the destination operand 14 scans are required Digital Swi
451. lation of the INTERBUS Cycle Time The I O data is refreshed continuously The cycle time of the INTERBUS system Cycle Time Examples depends on few factors and increases almost linearly with an increasing number 1 Points Cycle Time of I O points Due to the high effectiveness of the protocol the greater part of the 512 2 1 msec cycle time is determined by the number of I O points However it is also required to consider quantities such as the number of installed remote bus devices the 2225 duration of the check sequence firmware runtime and the signal runtime on 2048 7 5 msec 24 12 the transmission medium Remote I O slave stations have a specific data length depending on the I O type The data length register width is a factor to determine the cycle time SX5S Type No Slave Module Name Inputs Outputs Tcu S SX5S SBN16S SBN16K 16 input module 2 bytes 2 bytes SX5S SBR08 8 elay output module 2 bytes 2 bytes SX5S SBT16K SBT16P 16 output module 2 bytes 2 bytes SX5S SBM 16K SBM16P Mixed I O module 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte The cycle time refresh time can be calculated according to K x 13 x 6 n 4 x tgit tow t tph rx ty whereby teycle INTERBUS cycle time 1 scan time K 1 15 n Number of user data bytes m Number of installed remote bus devices tit Bit duration 0 002 msec tsw Firmware run time 1 msec Signal run time on the transmission mediu
452. lave 31 Comm Completion M8176 500000 c Separate Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with One Slave Station When the baud rate is set at 19200 bps the master station requires the following time to refresh the transmit and receive data for communication with one slave station Trf 2 083 msec x Transmit Words Receive Words 3 125 msec 1 scan time Total Separate Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with All Slave Stations Trfn When the baud rate is set at 19200 bps the master station requires the following time to refresh the transmit and receive data for communication with all slave stations that is the total of refresh times Trfn Trf 2 Y 2 083 msec x Transmit Words Receive Words 3 125 msec 1 scan time Example Refresh Time in Separate Refresh Mode When data link communication is performed with such parameters as transmit words 10 receive words 10 slave stations 8 average scan time 20 msec and baud rate 19200 bps then the total refresh time Trf8 for communication with all eight slave stations in the separate refresh mode will be Trf8 2 083 msec 10 10 3 125 msec 20 msec x 8 518 28 msec When the baud rate is 38400 bps the total refresh time will be Trf8 518 28 msec 2 259 14 msec dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 21 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Simultaneous R
453. lays as many as the repeat cycles are used Examples CMP gt The comparison output is usually maintained while the input to the data comparison instruction is off If the comparison output is on the on status is maintained when the input is turned off as demonstrated by this program ON CMP gt W S1 S2 Dl REP Input 10 oe 10 D10 Cl Q0 Comparison 010 gt 1 Result 10 ci Comparison Output 00 This program turns the output off when the input is off ON CMP gt W S1 S2 1 REP Input I0 10 D10 Cl MO Comparison 010 gt 1 Result D10 ci Output QO 10 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 10 DATA COMPARISON INSTRUCTIONS Repeat Operation in the Data Comparison Instructions Repeat One Source Operand When only S1 source is designated to repeat source operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the operand designated by S1 are compared with the operand designated by S2 The comparison results are ANDed and set to the des tination operand designated by D1 Data Type Word 1 R t S2 R t 0 D1 R t 0 CMP gt W SIR S2 Dl REP ah 3 Repeat 0 010 15 M10 3 p10 10 gt 15 Dll 15 15 AND gt M10 12 20 gt 15 Data Type Double Word 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repe
454. ld The start keep number must be smaller than or equal to the end keep number Valid shift register bit numbers are RO through R255 When a range of R17 R32 is designated R17 through R32 are keep types RO through R16 and R33 through R255 are clear types Counter Clear Designation Keep counter current values are maintained at startup default Clear counter current values are cleared at startup Clear Range designated area of counter current values are cleared at startup Enter the start clear number in the left field and the end clear number in the right field The start clear number must be smaller than or equal to the end clear number Valid counter numbers are CO through C255 When a range of C10 is designated CO through C10 are clear types and C11 through C255 are keep types Data Register Clear Designation Keep data register values are maintained at startup default Clear data register values are cleared at startup Clear Range A designated area of data register values are cleared at startup Enter the start clear number in the left field and the end clear number in the right field The start clear number must be smaller than or equal to the end clear number Valid data register numbers are DO through D7999 Special data registers cannot be designated When a range of D100 D7999 is designated DO through D99 are
455. letion and failure internal relays are turned off at the first scan in the modem mode Start and Result Internal Relays for RS232C Port 1 Mode Command Start IR Completion IR Failure IR Data Registers Initialization String M8050 M8060 M8070 D8245 D8269 Originate Mode ATZ M8051 M8061 M8071 Dialing M8052 M8062 M8072 D8270 D8299 Disconnect Mode Disconnect Line M8053 M8063 M8073 AT General Command Mode AT Command M8054 M8064 M8074 D8230 D8244 Mode Initialization String M8055 M8065 M8075 D8245 D8269 ATZ M8056 M8066 M8076 Start and Result Internal Relays for RS232C Port 2 Mode Command Start IR Completion IR Failure IR Data Registers Initialization String M8080 M8090 M8100 D8345 D8369 Originate M ode ATZ M8081 M8091 M8101 Dialing M8082 M8092 M8102 D8370 D8399 Disconnect Mode Disconnect Line M8083 M8093 M8103 AT General Command Mode AT Command M8084 M8094 M8104 D8330 D8344 Initialization String M8085 M8095 M8105 D8345 D8369 Answer Mode ATZ M8086 M8096 M8106 When one of start internal relays M8050 M8056 or M8080 M8086 is turned on a corresponding command is executed once To repeat the command reset the start internal relay and turn the internal relay on again Completion or failure of a command is determined as described below Completion The command is transmitted repeatedly as many as the retry cycles specified in data register D8209 or
456. limit S1 16 to a value other than 10001 through 10099 When the manipulated variable D1 is smaller than or equal to the specified lower limit the lower limit value is outputted to the out put manipulated variable S1 1 When the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S2 2 is turned off the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 has no effect 1418 Manual Mode Output Manipulated Variable The manual mode output manipulated variable specifies the output manipulated variable 0 through 100 for manual mode Set a required value of 0 through 100 for the manual mode output manipulated variable to the data register designated by 51 18 When 51 18 stores a value larger than 100 the manual mode output manipulated variable is set to 100 To enable the manual mode turn on the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 While in manual mode the PID action is disabled The specified value of the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 is outputted to the output manipu lated variable S1 1 and the control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the control period S 12 13 and the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 1419 AT Sampling Period The AT sampling period determines the interval of sampling during auto tuning When using auto tuning set a required value of 1 through 10000 to specify an AT sampling period of 0 01 sec through 100 00 sec to the data register designated by S119 When 5 1 19 s
457. lk Protocol The LonTalk protocol has all seven layers in compliance with the reference model of the Open System Interconnection OSD issued by the International Standard Organization ISO Neuron Chip Some special LSI Neuron Chips that support the LonTalk protocol have firmware embedded in the built in memory The Neuron Chip used in the LONWORKS interface module is Toshiba TMP3150B1AF with firmware embedded in the exter nal memory flash memory This Neuron Chip uses a 10MHz quartz clock oscillator The Neuron Chip and peripheral cir cuit are powered through the CPU bus Application Program The application program for the LONWORKS interface module is in compliance with the application layer of the OSI refer ence model and is described in Neuron C that is derived from ANSI C Communication data is transferred through the registers located between the OpenNet Controller CPU bus and the Neuron Chip external memory expansion bus An application program including access to the registers is created and embedded in the external memory flash memory along with firmware by IDEC before shipment Users do not have to create and install application programs although programmers familiar with Neuron C can also create or modify the application pro gram using a special tool such as LonBuilder Developer s Kit When a user creates or modifies the application program the user must keep a backup file For application program examples see pages 26 18 th
458. log Input Output Wiring 3 8 Power Supply neiise e Son dae s io IRR NR LR MUR Edd ga 3 9 Terminal 3 10 OPERATION BASICS Connecting OpenNet Controller to PC 1 1 Computer Link System 4 1 Start Stop Operation canner Ste ied Ok dog odo PUER NUS ala NA 4 2 Simple Operation 544 2 22 3 0 m pose ye ed ae AS eRe 4 4 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Stop Input and Reset Input 0 0 ce 5 1 Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error 5 2 Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers 5 3 Module ID Selection and Run Stop Operation upon 5 5 Ipod din cr Lr 56 e ire m 5 7 Highspeed Counter i a sue ea hie A ed a aa Ud 5 9 au Sos dere v sae a e bn Ps be elects 5 16 User Program Protection aides see ed owe a had RACK ee ee E d 5 18 Memory Card 2 2 oe deeds alice Weer nd eh dta alah Pate eqs ea Ss 5 19 Constant Scan Time tet Mur o M OR RIO Sie ies 5 20 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL i Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com TABLE OF CONTENTS C 6 ALL
459. lowing values The temperature values are multiplied by 10 to calculate the process variable Control mode 51 4 1 enable linear conversion Linear conversion maximum value 51 5 1990 199 0 C Linear conversion minimum value S146 500 50 0 C Process Variable after Conversion S140 Linear Conversion Maximum Value S145 1990 199 0 C gt 0 Linear Conversion Minimum Value S146 500 50 0 C gt 4000 Digital Output from Analog Input Module S147 Proportional Gain The proportional gain is a parameter to determine the amount of proportional action in the proportional band When auto tuning is used by setting the operation mode S 1 3 to 1 AT PID or 2 AT a proportional gain is determined automatically and does not have to be specified by the user When auto tuning is not used by setting the operation mode 51 3 to 0 PID set a required value of 1 through 10000 to specify a proportional gain of 0 01 through 100 00 to the data register designated by 51 7 When S1 7 stores 0 the proportional gain is set to 0 01 When S1 7 stores a value larger than 10000 the proportional gain is set to 100 0096 When the proportional gain is set to a large value the proportional band becomes small and the response becomes fast but overshoot and hunching will be caused In contrast when the proportional gain is set to a small value overshoot and hunching are suppressed
460. ls of reset pulse and data inputs see SFRN instruction in the same rung the program is not page 7 20 compiled correctly Structural Diagram Shift Direction Reset PETERSE o opaa JCTESESET I i Last Bit R20 of Bits 7 11 Note Output is initiated only for those bits highlighted in bold print Note When power is turned off the statuses of all shift register bits are normally cleared It is also possible to main tain the statuses of shift register bits by using the Function Area Settings as required See page 5 3 Note SFR N shifting flag special internal relay M8012 is turned on when the CPU is powered down while data shifting is in progress See page 6 10 7 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Bidirectional Shift Register A bidirectional shift register can be created by first programming the SFR instruction as detailed in the Forward Shift Reg ister section on page 7 20 Next the SFRN instruction is programed as detailed in the Reverse Shift Register section on page 7 22 Ladder Diagram Program List Reset Prgm Adrs Instruction Rung 1 11 2 12 3 4 5 13 6 7 Rung 2 8 2 9 Rung 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 Rung 3 R23 00 R24 Ql R26 Q2 Structural Diagram Forward Shifting Reset First Bit R22 3t of Bits 6 Reset 12 Last Bit R22 of Bits 6 15 Reverse
461. lt turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the BTOH instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples BTOH Data Type Word sotu H BTOH W si bi H Hsen Data Type Double Word BTOH D 51 D1 p 10 020 14 4 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL D10 D10 D10 D10 011 10 011 10 D11 BCD 0 0000h 4660 1234h 39321 9999h BCD 0 0000h 0 0000h 4660 1234h 22136 5678h 39321 9999h 39321 9999h D20 D20 D20 Binary 0 0000h 1234 04D2h 9999 270Fh Bi
462. lt initialization string specifies to be stored in the non volatile memory of the modem using the amp W command The initialization string is restored when the modem is powered up or when the ATZ command is issued The OpenNet Controller sends the ATZ command to the modem following the initialization string when M8050 M8080 is turned on The ATZ command can also be issued separately by turning M8051 M8081 on followed by the dial command to be exe cuted automatically ATZ Command When the ATZ command has been completed successfully internal relay M8061 M8091 is turned on If the ATZ com mand fails internal relay M8071 M8101 is turned on When the subsequent dialing is also completed successfully M8062 M8092 will also be turned on If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem M8050 M8080 may be skipped Start with 805 1 8081 to send the ATZ command Dialing the Telephone Number When the modem mode is enabled data registers D8270 D8299 or D8370 D8399 are allocated to the telephone number Before turning on one of the start internal relays M8050 M8052 or M8080 M8082 for the originate mode store the tele phone number in data registers starting with D8270 D8370 One data register stores two characters the first character at the upper byte and the second character at the lower byte in the data register Since 30 data registers are allocated to the telephone number up
463. ly the remote I O module has to be replaced 2000h 1 Bus Initialize Error This error indicates that an I O module has a trouble If this error occurs frequently or normal I O function is not restored automatically the I O module has to be replaced dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 275 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING User Program Execution Error This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a user program When this error occurs the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error are also turned on The detailed information of this error can be viewed from the error code stored in special data register D8006 user program execution error code The error address is stored in special data register D8007 user program execution error address User Program Execution Error Code Error Details D8006 1 Source destination operand is out of range 2 MUL result is out of data type range 3 DIV result is out of data type range or division by 0 4 BCDLS has 51 or S141 exceeding 9999 5 HTOB W has S1 exceeding 9999 HTOB D has 1 S1 1 exceeding 99999999 6 BTOH has any digit of S1 S 1 exceeding 9 7 HTOA ATOH BTOA ATOB has quantity of digits to convert out of range 8 ATOH ATOB has non ASCII data for 51 through 51 4 WKCMP has 51 S2 and 53 exceeding the valid range
464. m 1 APPENDIX Breakdown of END Processing Time The END processing time depends on the OpenNet Controller settings and system configuration The total of execution times for applicable conditions shown below is the actual END processing time Item Condition Execution Time Housekeeping 540 usec IN OUT 32 32 points 630 usec IN OUT 64 64 points 730 usec 1 service IN OUT 128 128 points 910 usec IN OUT 240 240 points 1400 usec Calendar clock function processing Note 1 66 usec Data link master station processing When using a data link system Pe at 19200 bps Note 2 separate refresh mode See page 21 9 Note 1 Calendar clock function is processed once every 100 msec Note 2 Data link slave stations are processed in interrupt processing asynchronous to the ordinary system processing In addition to processing user program instructions and END instruction the OpenNet Controller system processing includes interrupt processing of various functions I O Delay Time The minimum delay from a standard input to a standard output in the program below is 1 31 msec 10 Q0 LOD OUT e Maximum execution time LOD 0 65 usec OUT 1 15 usec END processing time without interrupt processing Housekeeping 540 usec T O service 630 usec Input delay time DC input without filter setting 40 usec Output delay time transistor output Approx 100 usec The I O delay ti
465. m 0 016 msec km r 1 tw 13 x 2 usec conversion time Note Data exchange between the OpenNet Controller CPU module and the remote 1 master module is asynchronous with the INTERBUS cycle time Start and Stop of Remote 1 Communication The remote I O master module is powered by the CPU module The remote I O communication is started and stopped by turning power on and off to the CPU module After connecting remote I O slave modules to the remote I O master module using INTERBUS cable power up the slave modules first followed by the CPU module at the remote I O master station The start delay after power up depends on the contents of the user program remote I O system setup and data link config uration rough estimate of the start delay is the operation start time depending on the user program size plus approxi mately 4 seconds While the CPU module is powered up and program operation is stopped the remote I O network is in the run state but the data exchange between the CPU and the remote I O master module is stopped OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Function Area Setting for Remote 1 Master Station Normally the remote I O communication does not require the Function Area Settings The CPU module at the remote I O master station recognizes the remote I O slave stations automatically at power up and e
466. m The basic network consists of a trunkline dropline topology Multi drop or daisy chain configuration is also possible The DeviceNet protocol is based on CAN Controller Area Network which has been widely used for networks on auto mobiles making it possible to configure reliable networks with high noise immunity Transmission Distance and Nodes The maximum transmission distance is 500 meters when using a thick trunk cable at a data rate of 125k baud and the maximum quantity of nodes is 64 including a master station DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc ODVA dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 25 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE DeviceNet Network System Setup Various DeviceNet compliant devices such as the DeviceNet slave module and IDEC SX5D communication I O termi nals can be connected to the DeviceNet network The DeviceNet network requires a DeviceNet master module available from other manufacturers The OpenNet Controller can be used as a slave station by adding the DeviceNet slave module to the right of the OpenNet Controller CPU module A maximum of seven OpenNet slave modules such as DeviceNet slave modules and LONWORKS interface modules and analog I O modules can be mounted with one OpenNet Controller CPU module 252 O C POWER ORUN EERROR HSC our 2
467. mail info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Operating Procedure for Data Link System To set up and use a data link system complete the following steps 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears First determine the assignments for the master station and slave stations Connect the OpenNet Controller CPU modules at the master station and all slave stations as illustrated on page 21 2 Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON at all master and slave stations to select the data link mode for the RS485 port Set communication selector DIP switches 4 through 8 to select master station number 0 and slave station numbers 1 through 31 as many as required The slave station numbers do not have to be consecutive Create user programs for the master and slave stations Different programs are used for the master and slave stations Using WindLDR enter settings to Configure gt Function Area Settings gt Data Link for the master station Only when a baud rate of 38400 bps is used enter the setting to the Data Link page in WindLDR for the slave station For program ming WindLDR see page 21 7 Power up all OpenNet Controller CPU modules at the same time and download the user programs to the master and slave stations 9 Note To enable data link communication power up all OpenNet Controller modules at the same time or power up slave sta tions fir
468. make sure to note the protect code which is needed to disable the user program protection If the user program in the OpenNet Controller CPU module is write or read write protected the user program cannot be changed without the protect code Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box Fiter Cotch Data Link Comm Port Open Bus Others lt gt appears T Enable High speed Counter 2 Select the Others tab Rotary Encoder Enable HS Reset Input Enable HSC Gate Input Enable Comparison Output Gurrent Value Automatic Reset T Enable Key Matrix Input First Input No Inputs First Output No Outputs First IR for Storing Information Protect Mode Read Wiite Protec rl Protect Code rnm Code Confirm 3 Click the Protect User Program check box and enter required data in the areas shown below Protect Mode Select from Write Protect Read Protect or Read Write Protect Protect Code Enter a protect code of 1 through 16 ASCII characters from the keyboard Code Confirm Repeat to enter the same protect code for confirmation Download the user program to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Disabling and Enabling Protection 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor The monitor mode is enabled 2 From the
469. master station correctly Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Connect terminators 121Q at both ends of the network Green ON Red ON Green ON Physical communication trouble or duplicate MAC ID exists in the network Plug in the communication connector correctly Set the data rate correctly using DIP switches Set the MAC ID correctly using DIP switches Make sure that nodes with duplicate MAC ID does not exist in the same network Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Connect terminators 121Q at both ends of the network Green ON Green Flash Green ON Slave operates nor mally but is not recog nized by the master OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Supply power to the DeviceNet master Make sure that the settings for the master are correct Plug in the communication connector correctly Set the data rate correctly using DIP switches Set the MAC ID correctly using DIP switches Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network Connect terminators 121Q at both ends of the network 25 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Communication error occurs Status LEDs on DeviceNet Slave Mod
470. maximum and minimum values are set to 3 operands starting with operand designated by D1 When the sampling exceeds 65535 cycles the average maximum and minimum values at this point are set to 3 operands starting with operand designated by D1 and sampling continues When the sampling end input is turned on before the sampling cycles designated by operand 53 have not been completed sampling is stopped and the results at this point are set to 3 operands starting with operand designated by D1 The average value is calculated to units rounding the fractions of one decimal place When the sampling end input is not used designate an internal relay or another valid operand as a dummy for source oper and S2 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type are used When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type is used 19 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example AVRG The following example demonstrates a program to calculate average values of the data register D100 and store the
471. me may be increased by such factors as increased END processing time caused by frequent interrupt pro cessing and larger program size and input filter setting 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com APPENDIX Type List CPU Modules HSC Output Memory Card Connector Type No Without FC3A CP2K Sink Output Type With FC3A CP2KM Without FC3A CP2S Source Output Type With FC3A CP2SM Note Every CPU module is supplied with a pair of end plates Input Modules Input Type Input Points Terminal Connector Type No Screw Terminal FC3AN16B1 16 points Nylon Connector 10 2 FC3A N16B3 24V DC Sink Source Nylon Connector 18P x 2 FC3AN32B4 32 points Fujitsu Connector FC3A N32B5 100 120V AC Input 8 points Screw Terminal FC3A N08A11 Analog Input 12 bit resolution 1 4000 6 channels Screw Terminal FC3A AD1261 4 20mA 0 5 0 10V 5V 10V input Output M odules Output Type Output Points Terminal Connector Type No Relay Output Screw Terminal FC3AR161 16 points 240V AC 24V DC 2 Nylon Connector 5P x 4 FC3AR162 Transistor Sink Output Screw Terminal FC3AT16K1 24V DC 0 5A point 16 points 2 0A common Nylon Connector 10P x 2 FC3A T16K3 Transistor Protect Source Output 24V DC 0 5A point 16 points Screw Terminal FC3A T16P1 2 0A common Transistor Sink Output Nyl
472. menu bar and clicking where you want to insert the RXD instruction in the program edit area then the Transmit dialog box appears Click RXD to change the dialog box to the Receive dialog box The Receive instruction dialog box appears Port Port 1 Pott 2 Insert Delete Edit 2 Check that RXD is selected in the Type box and click Port 1 in the Port box Then click Insert The Data Type Selection dialog box appears You will program source operand S1 using this dialog box 3 Click Constant Hexadecimal in the Type box and click OK Next in the Constant Hexadecimal dialog box type 02 to program the start delimiter STX 02h When finished click OK Data Type Selection x Constant x Type Hexadecimal Constant Character y OK o C Variable DR x Cancel Help Skip 17 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS 4 Since the Receive instruction dialog box reappears repeat the above procedure In the Data Type Selection dialog box click Skip and click OK Next in the Skip dialog box type 4 in the Digits box and click OK Data Type Selection x Type v OK Constant Character C Constant Hexadecimal Variable DR 5 Again in the Data Type Selection dialog box click Variable DR
473. minal TE as electromagnetic contactors and solenoid valves use a surge absorber for AC power or a Surge D Diode diode for DC power L Absorber Terminal Relay Output Transistor Sink Output Insert a fuse compatible with the load Load lr Fo OUT jale Load E12 C Load 2 C Load 3 6l u T pha Insert a fuse 190 Load 4 C lg compatible Load 5 Load Esie with the load iLoad EJI6 C djele Load 716 a J Load Load BIC 38 Load Eis lC 28 9 Load ole a 100 im e Load IholC kg Load mje 75 75 Load 1210 Load 12 e Load L310 C9 130 Load 14 C Load 1410 e Load 1510 e Load F 15 r Load 16 Fel Load 12710 Load 17 Load 18 0 C9 Hoad 180 i 19 C Load 1910 Rojc 9 Load F 120 Power supply L for source output T 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL P
474. minute Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Nylon Connector B5PS VH x 4 5 Mfg Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum 50 times minimum Internal Current Draw All outputs ON 170 mA 24V DC All outputs OFF 20 mA 24V DC Turn ON time 6 msec maximum Output Delay Chatter 6 msec maximum Turn OFF time 10 msec maximum Weight approx 260g 230g Contact Protection Circuit for Relay Output Depending on the load a protection circuit may be needed for the relay output of the OpenNet Controller Choose a protec tion circuit from A through D shown below according to the power supply and connect the protection circuit to the outside of the relay output module Protection Circuit A Protection Circuit B Output Q Inductive Load Output QC Inductive Load o R R C C3 COMO ae AE Protection circuit A can be used when the load impedance is smaller than the RC impedance in an AC load power circuit C 0 1 to 1 uF R Resistor of about the same resistance value as the load Protection Circuit C Protection circuit B can be used for both AC and DC load power circuits C 0 1 to 1 uF R Resistor of about the same resistance value as the load Protection Circuit D Inductive Load Inductive Load Outpu
475. mmands 23 9 Preparation for Using Modem 23 10 Setting Communication Parameters 23 10 Programming Data Registers and Internal Relays 23 11 Setting Up the CPU Module 23 11 Operating Procedure 23 11 Sample Program for Modem Originate Mode 23 12 Sample Program for Modem Answer Mode 23 13 Troubleshooting in Modem Communication 23 14 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Remote I O System Setup s 24 1 Specifications wc x es 24 2 Link Registers for Remote I O System 24 2 About INTERBUS us dna ER EGRE V PPERPCsw hes 24 2 Data Communication between Remote 1 Master and Slave Stations 24 3 Logical Device Number and Node Number 244 ER EV Ob ede v ot ade WAR dus E e oe E ERES DAR CUR 24 5 Special Data Registers for Remote I O Node Information 24 6 Special Data Registers for INTERBUS Master Information 24 10 Special Internal Relays for INTERBUS Master Information
476. modules can be mounted in any of 15 slots 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Introduction This chapter describes OpenNet Controller modules parts names and specifications of each module Available modules include CPU modules digital I O modules analog I O modules expansion power supply module remote I O master module and OpenNet interface modules such as DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules Analog I O modules and OpenNet interface modules are also called functional modules A maximum of seven functional modules can be mounted with one CPU module CPU Module The CPU modules are available in sink and source output types which have a transistor sink or source output of the high speed counter respectively Either type is available with or without a memory card connector All CPU modules have two RS232C ports and one RS485 port CPU Module Type Numbers CPU Module Types Without Memory Card Connector With Memory Card Connector High speed Counter Sink Output Type FC3ACP2K FC3A CP2KM High speed Counter Source Output Type FC3ACP2S FC3ACP2SM Parts Description 1 Status LED 10 Remote Master Module Connector 8 Terminal Block 2 Communication Enable Button 11 End Plate 3 Communication Selector DIP Switch 7 RS232C Port 2
477. more pulses enter within one scan subsequent pulses are ignored Note 2 The pulse entering at the timing shown above cannot be used as pulse inputs for counters and shift registers Example Counting Catch Input Pulses This example demonstrates a program to count short pulses using the catch input function Input IO is used as a reset input for adding counter C2 Input I1 is designated as a catch input using the Function Area Settings Counter C2 counts short pulse inputs to input I1 Note When a catch input is used as a pulse input to a counter the repeat cycle period of the pulse inputs must be more than 2 scan times Designate input 11 as a catch input Example Maintaining Catch Input When a catch input is received the input relay assigned to a catch input is turned on for only one scan This example dem onstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan Input IO is designated as a catch input using the Function Area Settings PN 10 MO When input 10 is turned on internal relay MO is turned on and MO is maintained in the self holding circuit Catch input When NC input is turned off the self holding circuit is unlatched and MO is turned off is used as an input condition for the subsequent program instructions MO Note To catch as short inputs as possible select 0 msec in the Input Filter Time Selection field 5 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 04
478. munication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode takes effect Do not power up the CPU while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is nec essary Operating Procedure 1 After completing the user program including the Function Area Settings download the user program to the OpenNet Controller from a computer running WindLDR through the RS232C port or the data link terminals To download the user program the loader port or the data link terminals must be set to maintenance mode by setting communication selector DIP switches 1 through 3 to OFF After downloading the user program set the communication selector DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to select user communi cation mode for the RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Press the communication enable button for 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once if necessary 3 Start the OpenNet Controller to run the user program 4 Turn on start internal relay M8050 M8055 port 1 or M8080 M8085 port 2 to initialize the modem dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE When originating the modem communication turn on M8050 M8080 to send the initialization string the ATZ command and the dial command If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem t
479. munication mode for the RS232C port 2 set 0 to special data register D8300 When the modem mode is not used for the RS232C port or 2 make sure that special data register D8200 or D8300 is set to 0 Setting Communication Selector DIP Switches The communication selector DIP switch is used to select communication modes for the RS232C ports 1 and 2 When the CPU is powered up the selected communication modes are enabled automatically If the communication selector DIP switch setting is changed after the CPU is powered up the new setting does not take effect until the communication enable button is depressed Set DIP switch 2 or 3 to ON to enable the user communication mode for the RS232C port 1 or 2 respectively Communication Mode for RS232C Ports Communication Selector DIP Switch Port ON OFF 2 RS232C port 1 User communication mode Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 User communication mode Maintenance mode User communication mode Used for user communication instructions Maintenance mode Used for communication between the CPU and WindLDR on computer Communication Enable Button To enable the new settings of the communication selector DIP switches press the communication enable button for 4 sec onds While the CPU is powered up pressing the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once makes the CPU read the settings on the communication selector DIP switches Then the CPU updates the com m
480. n in the bus segments of a preceding remote bus branch e g installation remote bus or in the bus segment of the indicated INTERBUS device Cause Voltage reset of an INTERBUS device in the specified area Cable break in the specified bus segment The bridge RBST or LBST in the connector for the outgoing bus is defective for a device in the specified area Add Error Info OBF8hex BUS FA INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device IL Multiple errors when acquiring 1 data at the specified device It was not possible to exactly locate Meanin 9 The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBF9hex BUS FAIL Multiple error at the specified device during quick diagnostics It was not possible to exactly locate Meanin the error The erro
481. n This chapter describes the procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the OpenNet Controller The OpenNet Controller has self diagnostic functions to prevent the spread of troubles if any trouble should occur In case of any trouble follow the troubleshooting procedures to determine the cause and to correct the error Errors are checked in various stages While editing a user program on WindLDR incorrect operands and other data are rejected User program syntax errors are found during compilation on WindLDR When an incorrect program is down loaded to the OpenNet Controller user program syntax errors are still checked Errors are also checked at starting and dur ing operation of the OpenNet Controller When an error occurs the error is reported by turning on the ERROR LED on the OpenNet Controller and an error message can be viewed on WindLDR ERROR LED The OpenNet Controller CPU module has an error indicator ERROR When an error occurs in the OpenNet Controller CPU module the ERROR LED is lit See the trouble shooting diagrams on page 27 10 For error causes to turn on the ERROR LED see page 27 4 Reading Error Data ERROR LED OPENNET CONTROLLER POWER RUN J ERROR C HSC OUT U E HEE O Hie e
482. n R after conversion When S144 linear conversion 0 disable linear conversion Stores the process variable without conversion Stores the output manipulated variable manual mode output variable and AT 5141 Output manipulated variable output manipulated variable in percent R 0 to 100 096to 100 5142 Operating status Stores the operating or error status of the PID instruction R 0 PID action 5143 Operation mode 1 AT auto tuning PID action R W 2 AT auto tuning 5144 nesr conversion 0 Disable linear conversion R W 1 Enable linear conversion S145 Linear conversion maximum 32768 to 432767 R W value 146 Linear conversion minimum 32768 to 32767 R W value 1 to 10000 0 01 to 100 0090 BPEL Proportional gain 0 designates 0 01 gt 10001 designates 100 00 REW 5148 Integral time 1 to 65535 0 1 sec to 6553 5 sec 0 disables integral action R W 149 Derivative time 1 to 65535 0 1 sec to 6553 5 sec 0 disables derivative action R W 0 0 0 51 10 Integral start coefficient 1 to 100 1 to 100 0 and 2101 except 200 designate 100 R W 200 executes integral action within the proportional range 51411 Input filter coefficient 0 to 99 0 to 99 2100 designates 99 R W 1 to 10000 0 01 sec to 100 00 sec Sampling period 0 designates 0 01 sec gt 10001 designates 100 00 sec R W 1 to 500 0 1 sec to 50 0 sec a Control penod 0 designates 0 1 sec gt 501 designates 50 0 sec RAN When S144 linear conve
483. n Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X N W N words Quantity of blocks to move X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or N W the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 N 1 and the last destination data determined by D1 N 1 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program exe cution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED on the CPU module Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X E When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source N W or destination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source N W or destination point word data type is used Example BM OV BMOV W S1 NW Dl D10 10 010 5 20 Di D10 through D14 D20 through D24 Die Wh
484. n operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands If the value of data register D10 designated by source operand M37 M30 M27 M20 S2 is 8 the source data is determined by adding the offset to internal relay M20 designated by source operand S1 LVW WW YV W W wW NOT gth from M20 If the current value of counter C5 designated by destination operand D2 is 10 the destination is determined by adding the offset to output Q10 designated by destination operand D1 Q27 Q22 Q20 Q17 Q10 YYY W WY W Y vv W 10th from Q10 As a result when input 10 is on the ON OFF status of internal relay M30 is inverted and moved to output Q22 9 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS XCHG Exchange gt D1 o D2 XCHG NR D2 NR When input is on 16 or 32 bit data in operands designated by D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other Valid Operands Operand Function Constant Repeat D1 Destination 1 First operand number to exchange x x O gt gt z x x d x x O x x J x x m D2 Destination 2 First operand number to exchange For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be desi
485. n the ADD SUB and MUL Instructions Source operands S1 and S2 and destination operand D1 can be designated to repeat individually or in combination When destination operand D1 is not designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 When repeat is desig nated consecutive operands as many as the repeat cycles starting with the designated operand are used Since the repeat operation works similarly on the ADD addition SUB subtraction and MUL multiplication instructions the following examples are described using the ADD instruction Repeat One Source Operand Data Type Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 51 Repeat 3 S2 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 SOTU ADD W STR S2 Dl REP Repeat 3 Repeat 0 Repeat 0 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 10 020 25 030 35 11 15 020 25 30 40 D12 20 D20 25 30 45 Data Type Double Word When only S1 source is designated to repeat the final result is set to destination operand D1 D1 1 H Hsen soru ADDO SIR S2 DI REP 51 Repeat 3 52 Repeat 0 D1 Repeat 0 D10 D20 D30 3 D10 D11 D20 D21 030 031 12 13 D20D21 030 031 14 015 D20D21 030 031 Repeat Destination Operand Only Data Type Word When only D1 destination
486. n the designated input YES Monitor the designated stop or reset input using WindLDR ona computer The input circuit in the input module is damaged Replace the input module Does the monitored input turn on and off YES YES Is M8000 off Y Call IDEC for assistance Turn off the start control special internal relay M8000 using WindLDR on a computer Note To turn off M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Set Reset Enter M8000 in the Direct Set Reset Dialog Press Reset and OK 27 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 8 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Data link communication is impossible Is Ommunication selector DIP switch 1 set to ON YES Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON to select data link mode Did you pres the communication enable NO button for 4 sec Did you power down and up after changing the DIP switch S Enable Data Link selected at the master station Y Press the communication enable button for more than 4 sec until the ERROR LED blinks once Click the check box for Enable Data Link in the WindLDR Function Area Settings and down load the user program again
487. n the three conditions shown below are satisfied the interval comparison is enabled Otherwise the instructions work as ordinary clock data comparison instructions 1 WKCMP ON is followed by WKCMP OFF immediately which has the same input contact 2 The matching WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instructions have the same values for the day of week comparison data S1 constant week table output control S3 and comparison output operand D1 3 Hour minute comparison data S2 constant has a relationship ON time lt OFF time Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times on the same day When the current day and time reach the presets the output designated by operand D1 is turned on and off 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 8 30 17 15 wee m m m m w w wj Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay S1 62 specifies Monday through Friday WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 8 30 on Monday through Friday S1 52 53 WKCMP D ON 62 830 0 00 8125 51 62 52 1715 53 00 S1 Same constant value WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 17 15 on the same day 2 Constant values ON time OFF time 3 Same constant value D1 Same operand 154 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER
488. n the user program to detect any error in the remote I O system When the CPU module at the remote I O master station and the remote I O slave modules are pow ered up simultaneously the remote I O master module may fail to recognize the slave modules If this trouble occurs include special data register D8179 INTERBUS master status transition num ber to detect failure to run nclude special internal relay M8030 INTERBUS master initialize in the user program and turn on M8030 to initialize the remote I O master module CMP lt gt W S1 S2 M8125 is the in operation output special D8178 0 internal relay CMP lt gt W S1 S2 D8178 stores 0 during normal operation D8179 5 When 08178 is not equal to 0 is turned on D8179 stores 5 during normal operation When D8179 is not equal to 5 M2 is turned on When either M1 or M2 is turned on M8030 is turned on for one scan to initial ize the master module Note When M8030 is turned on outputs of the remote I O slave modules are initialized For exam ple when using IDEC s SX5S communication I O terminals as slave modules all outputs are turned off during initialization and restore normal operation to turn on or off according to the output data transmitted from the OpenNet Controller CPU module dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Calcu
489. n to store results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Since the DTCB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types X When a bit operand such as Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the destination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used Example DTCB Source Operand Data Register Before execution After execution B IBW XO 020 48 123015 4 D10 0030n UPPer byte D20 5039h 57 D11 0039h Lower byte Source Operand Link Register Before execution After execution B 316 D D20 57 12345 12 11316 0039h Lower byte j 3039h 48 L1317 0030h Upper byte 14 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS ntroduct
490. nary 0 0000h 0 0000h 188 00BCh 24910 614Eh 1525 05F5h 57599 EOFFh Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS HTOA Hex to ASCII HTOA W 51 52 KKK k k When input is on the 16 bit binary data designated by S1 is read from the lowest digit as many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 converted into ASCII data and stored to the destination starting with the operand designated by D1 H DI 51 2 DI D1 1 D1 2 D1 3 The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X X 52 Source 2 Quantity of digits to convert X X X X X X X X 14 D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4 Make sure that the quantity of digits designated by S2 is within the valid range If the S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the HTOA instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pul
491. nated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram Reset Program List Instruction AN Caution When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be programmed immediately above and below the CNT instruction To program other instructions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above or below the CNT instruction in the same rung the program is not compiled correctly Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Reset Input IO Pulse Input I1 Counter Input I2 Output 00 The preset value 0 through 65535 can be designated using a data register DO through D7999 then the data of the data register becomes the preset value Directly after the CNT instruction the OUT OUTN SET RST TML TIM TMH or TMS instruction can be pro grammed Ladder Diagram Reset OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL The same counter number cannot be programmed more than once While the reset input is off the counter counts the leading edges of pulse inputs and compares them with the preset value When the current value reaches the preset value the counter turns output on The output stays on until the reset input is turned on When the reset input changes from off to on the current value is reset When the reset input is on all pulse inputs are ignored
492. nd is issued and the telephone number is dialed successively When the D8200 D8300 value is changed to 1 to enable modem mode or when the D8201 D8301 value is changed an ini tialization string is stored to D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 depending on the value stored in D8201 D8301 Modem Initialization String D8201 D8301 Value Initialization String D8245 D8269 or D8345 D8369 Applicable Modem 0 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 Q3 J0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W AIWA 33 6 Kbps or less ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 Q2 J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W OMRON 2 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 Q3 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W AIWA 56 Kbps 3 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 amp A0X4 amp H1 amp I0 amp B1 amp M5S0 2 amp W OMRON 56 Kbps 4 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX4 amp K3 A01 N3S0 2 amp W Sun Corporation Micro Research 5 ATEQQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 V0X4 amp K3V N3S0 2 amp WO Seiko Instruments 10 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX3 Q3 J0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 11 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX3 Q21J 0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 12 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 V0X3 Q3 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 13 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 amp A0X3 amp H1 amp I0 amp B1 amp M5S0 28 amp W 14 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX3 amp K3 N3S0 2 amp W 15 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX3 amp K3 N3 S0 2 amp WO 20 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX0 Q3 J0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 21 ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C1 VOX0 Q2 J0 AO amp M5 N2S0 2 amp W 22 ATE
493. nd started by M8054 M8056 or M8084 M8086 is completed successfully Invalid character is included in the initialization string 60 AT command program error dial number or AT command string Correct the program to include ODh in the AT command Two or more start internal relays are on 61 Simultaneous start of commands Correct the user program so that only one start internal relay goes on at a time A start IR other than M8053 M8083 disconnect line 62 amp is turned on while the telephone line is connected Correct the program so that only the disconnect com mand is sent while the line is connected 63 AT command execution error Command failed in the first and all retry cycles OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Initialization String Commands The built in initialization strings see page 23 4 include the commands shown below The commands are divided into two groups by importance For details of modem commands see the user s manual for your modem When you make an optional initialization string include the commands in the first category to make sure of correct modem communication Commands included in all initialization strings Commands in this category are essential to use the modem mode Some modems have the same function by a different command name When you make an optional in
494. network e Supply power to each slave station or to each group of stations separately Master and slave stations may be powered up in any order But if a slave station is not powered up while the master is in preparation for transmission a network error will result e Causes of network errors include disconnection or short circuit of the network cable strong external noise invalid com mand sent to the master station momentary power voltage drop below the minimum power voltage faulty transmission line incorrect cable and transmission longer than the rated distance When a network error occurs all outputs are turned off dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 15 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE I O SYSTEM INTERBUS Error Codes One of the useful features of INTERBUS is the powerful error detection function This function makes it possible to detect cable disconnection remote bus failures and also to locate the errors so the system downtime can be minimized Two special data registers are assigned to store error information D8182 INTERBUS master error code stores an error code for user error general bus error remote or local bus error D8183 INTERBUS master error location stores the ADD_Error_Info to indicate the error location For example when a peripheral fault is found at node 0 logical device number 1 0 D8182 and D8183 store information
495. nication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OBFBhex BUS FA Meaning IL Error detected by means of quick diagnostics Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 2421 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Error Codes for Remote Bus and Local Bus Errors The Add_Error_Info provides the coded error location for remote or local bus errors The exact error position is only indi cated if no interface error occurred In the case of an interface error the defective bus segment will be indicated Bit 7 indi cates whether an interface error occurred The meanings of bits 0 to 6 will also change This results in three different states which have the following bit combinations in the Add_Error_Info No interf
496. nnect the FG terminals of the 24 DC power supply and the CPU module to the ground grounding resistance 1000 maximum The ground connection improves the stability of analog digital conversion e Terminal numbers are marked on the terminal block label on the input output module For analog input and output module specifications see pages 2 28 and 2 31 Wiring Schematic Analog Voltage Input rotary switch set to 0 through 3 Analog Current Input rotary switch set to 4 Analog Input Module Analog Input M odule Terminal No Channel Name Terminal No Channel Name 1 TV Ch 0 Output cue Device Voltage Output Device 0 to 10V 10V 0 to 5V 5 Chi 5 Chil COM terminals of unused channels together Connect V and COM terminals of unused channels together rh FG m FG Analog Output Module Chan Voltage Input Device 0 to 10V DC Current Input Device Voltage 0 to 20 mA Input Device 0 to 10V DC Current Input Device 0 to 20 mA 3 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND W
497. nnected user communication instruction RXD1 is executed to receive an incoming communication M8055 RXD M8077 1 51 D1 D2 20 MO DO M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay instructions store values to data registers for the modem mode at RS232C port 1 1 08200 to enable the modem mode for port 1 D8201 to select a predetermined initialization string 1 gt 08203 to enable user protocol after telephone line is con nected 8125 is the in operation output special internal relay Timer TO 1 sec timer TML starts to time down when the Open Net Controller is started to run When timer TO times out 5 seconds M8055 is turned on to send the initialization string for the modem answer mode M8077 line connection status is on while telephone line is con nected RXDI receives incoming communication and stores received data to data registers starting with D10 The RXDI instruction is programmed using WindLDR with parameters shown below Source S1 Data register D10 No conversion 2 digits Repeat 10 Receive Type 1 D1 D2 lt D0010 2 10 gt 00000 RXD 00000 Port Port 1 Port 2 insert Delete Edit OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Variable Data Register x Conversion Type 00010 ASCII to BIN 0010 ASCII to BCD None REP Digits Il 23 13 Phone 800 894 0412
498. not include input delay caused by the hardware Minimum Error Maximum Error Program Processing ms Program Processing END M Actual Input mds Actual Input b Input Input 2 Timer Start Timer Start Tet E Tie Tet o lt gt t i of gt lt gt 1 scan time 1 scan time When the input turns on immediately before the When the input turns on immediately after the END pro END processing Tie is almost 0 Then the timer cessing Tie is almost equal to one scan time Then the input error is only Tet behind error and is at its timer input error is Tie Tet one scan time Tet minimum behind error and is at its maximum Tie Time from input turning on to the END processing Tet Time from the END processing to the timer instruction execution dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 79 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Timer Accuracy continued Timer Counting Error Every timer instruction operation is individually based on asynchronous 16 bit reference timers Therefore an error occurs depending on the status of the asynchronous 16 bit timer when the timer instruction is executed Error TML TIM TMH TMS 1 sec timer 100 msec timer 10 msec timer 1 msec timer 2 Advance error 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec Minimum Behind error 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec Advance error 1000 msec 100 msec 10 msec 1 msec Maximum
499. not write data into this area Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 15 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Data Exchange between LonWorks Interface Module and CPU Module Communication data status data and ID data are exchanged through registers in the LONWORKS interface module and link registers in the CPU module The registers correspond to link registers as listed below Register Address in LonWorks Interface Module Link Register in CPU Module Function Area C000h C001h L 00 C002h C003h L 01 Receive Data C004h C005h L 02 C006h C007h L 03 Communication C008h C009h L 04 Data Area C00Ah COOBh L 05 Transmit Data COOCh CO0Dh L 06 COOEh COOFh L 07 C012h L 12 Error Data Status Area C013h L 13 1 0 Counts C018h L 24 Software Version ID Area C019h L 25 Expansion Module ID Note A number 1 through 7 comes in place of depending on the position where the functional module such as OpenNet interface module or analog 1 module is mounted Consequently operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 Example 1 Receive Data in Registers C000h and COO1h When receive data enters registers and 1 in the LONWORKS interface module the data
500. nput data to the master and the master sends 8 output data to SX5D SBRO8 Calculating the Response Time Response time Input processing time slave Communication time slave to master Data processing time master and PLC Communication time master to slave Output processing time slave e Measured Value of Response Time SX5D SBM16K Input OFF SX5D SBM16K Output ON OFF response time Approx 18 msec PLC 17474532 Node 0 MAC ID 0 De MODULE NET oo d ADDRESS ERROR DeviceNet Master Power Supply Module 1747 SDN Oooo0000000000000 oooo0oc00000000000 OQooo000000000000000000 oooo00000000000000000 oooo Ooo000000000000000000000000 oooo onoooonoononaO000000000000000 OW Pow Pow O SD 0000000 55 SD OO00000 100 100 100 DeviceNet 0o 0000000 DeviceNet S DeviceNet 00000000000000000000000 B 00000000000000000000000 S 00000000000000000000 20000000000 90000000003 SX5D SBM16K SX5D SBM16P SX5D SBR08 25 10 CONTROLLER USER s MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Devic
501. nt for using the OpenNet Controller is Pollution degree 2 Use the OpenNet Controller in environments of pollution degree 2 according to IEC 60664 1 Make sure that the operating temperature does not drop below 0 or exceed 55 C If the temperature does exceed 55 use a fan or cooler Mount the OpenNet Controller on a vertical plane To eliminate excessive temperature build up provide ample venti lation Do not install the OpenNet Controller near and especially above any device which generates considerable heat such as a heater transformer or large capacity resistor The relative humidity should be above 30 and below 95 The OpenNet Controller should not be exposed to excessive dust dirt salt direct sunlight vibrations or shocks Do not use the OpenNet Controller in an area where corrosive chemicals or flam 959900 magoaggag 000900009 5800500909 BNL6 mable gases are present The modules should not be exposed to Mounting Clip chemical oil or water splashes dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Assembling Modules Caution Assemble OpenNet Controller modules together before mounting the modules onto a DIN rail Attempt to assemble modules on a DIN rail ma
502. nt values or data registers BCC code can also be calculated automatically and appended to the transmit data One TXD instruction can transmit 200 bytes of data at the maximum S1 Source 1 Transmit Data Operand Conversion Type oei Repeat Calculation M Constant OOh FFh 7Fh No conversion 1 A Binary to ASCII 14 Data Register D0 D7999 B BCD to ASCII 15 1 99 No conversion 1 2 A Binary to ASCII X XOR PEE i No T Designating Constant as 51 When a constant value is designated as source operand S1 one byte data is transmitted without conversion The valid transmit data value depends on the data bits selected in Configure gt Fun Area Settings gt Comm Port gt Port 1 or 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C gt Communication Parameters dialog box When 8 data bits are selected 00h through FFh is transmitted When 7 data bits are selected as default 00h through 7Fh is transmitted Constant values are entered in character or hexadecimal notation into the source data Constant Character Any character available on the computer keyboard can be entered One character is counted as one byte Constant Hexadecimal Use this option to enter the hexadecimal code of any ASCII character ASCII control codes NUL 00h through US 1Fh can also be entered using this option Example The following example shows two methods to enter 3 byte ASCII data 1 31h 2
503. number When input IO is turned on M8050 initialization string 10 M8050 is turned on to send the initialization string ATZ and dial command to the modem 4 SOTU M a M8077 line connection status is on while telephone line 1 8077 is connected When is turned on TXD1 sends seven characters Connect See the next page for the WindLDR dialog When input I2 is turned on M8053 disconnect line is 2 8053 turned on to disconnect the telephone line Note The MACRO instruction is not included in the OpenNet Controller instruction set but can be programmed using WindLDR to move data to consecutive data registers using the MOV instructions Type D1 D2 Macro ps270 08272 2 08272 Insert Delete Edit 23 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Sample Program for Modem Answer Mode 23 MODEM MODE The TXD1 instruction in the sample program for the modem originate mode is programmed using WindLDR with parame ters shown below Transmit Type TXD C RXD Connect Port Port 1 Lx Di D2 C Port 2 Insert Delete Edit This program demonstrates a user program for the modem answer mode to move values to data registers assigned to the modem mode at RS232C port and initialize the modem While the telephone line is co
504. ny of 15 slots 2 34 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Expansion Power Supply Module Specifications Type No Rated Power Voltage FC3A EA1 24V DC Allowable Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC including ripple Dielectric Strength Between power terminal and FG 1 000V AC 1 minute Maximum Input Current 5A at 24V DC Internal Current Draw 30 mA 24V DC Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 msec 24V DC Level PS 2 EN61131 Insulation Resistance Between power terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Inrush Current 50A total of inrush currents into CPU and expansion power supply modules Ground Grounding resistance 1000 maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 Power Supply Wire UL1015 AWG22 Effect of Improper Power Supply Connection Reverse polarity Improper voltage or frequency Improper lead connection No operation no damage Permanent damage may be caused Permanent damage may be caused Weight approx 180g Power Supply Wiring to Expansion Power Supply Module Connect a 24V DC power source to the 24V and OV pins on the expansion power supply module connector Use the same power source for the CPU module to power the expansion power supply module The inrush current to both the CPU and expansion power supply module
505. o Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical
506. o send the ATZ command dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 23 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Modem Mode Status Data Register When the modem mode is enabled data register D8211 RS232C port 1 or D8311 RS232C port 2 stores a modem mode status or error code D8211 08311 23 8 Value Status Description 0 Not in the modem mode Modem mode is not enabled 10 Ready for connecting line Start internal relays except for disconnecting line can be turned on Sending initialization string 20 originate mode 21 Sending ATZ originate mode 22 Dialing A start internal relay is in operation in the first try or 23 Disconnecting line subsequent retrial 24 Sending AT command 25 Sending initialization string answer mode 26 Sending ATZ answer mode Waiting for resending initialization string 30 hg originate mode 31 Waiting for resending ATZ originate mode 32 Waiting for re dialing 33 Waiting for re disconnecting line The command started bya start internal relay was not completed and is waiting for retrial 34 Waiting for resending AT command 35 Waiting for resending initialization string answer mode 36 Waiting for resending ATZ answer mode 40 hingecan nected Telephone line is connected Only M8053 M8083 dis connect line can be turned on 50 AT command completed successfully Comma
507. ock 2 3 connection 3 10 terminator 25 4 26 7 timeout receive 17 17 timer accuracy 7 9 comparison instructions 7 16 instruction using with program branching 18 2 or counter as destination operand 8 3 as source operand 8 3 timer counter preset value changed M8124 6 11 sum check error 27 4 TML TIM TMH and TMS instructions 7 8 transceiver 26 2 transmission dee OpenNet Controller User s Manual vii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com INDEX W Viii distance 25 4 time 25 10 26 9 transmit bytes 17 7 completion output 17 9 data 17 5 byte count 17 10 digits 17 7 status 17 9 code 17 9 transmit 1 17 4 transmit 2 17 4 transmit data 25 9 26 11 26 16 reading 26 22 troubleshooting 27 1 DeviceNet network 25 11 diagrams 27 7 LonWorks network 26 25 modem communication 23 14 TXD1 17 4 TXD2 17 4 type list A 3 of protection 2 28 2 31 up counter CNT 7 11 up down selection reversible counter CUD 7 13 user communication cable 1C 17 2 17 31 17 33 error 17 25 error code 17 25 instructions 17 1 mode 2 2 17 2 receive instruction cancel flag 17 21 RS232C port 1 M8022 6 10 RS232C port 2 M8023 6 10 system 1 4 setup 17 2 user fail 24 16 user program adjusting clock 15 8 execution error 27 6 execution error M8004 6 9 protection 5 18 RAM sum check error 27 5 ROM sum check error 27 4 setting calendar clock 15 7 syntax error 27 5 writing error 27 5 watchdog
508. odule Type No 1 The expansion power supply module is supplied with the following attachments Cable Connector 1 pc cable length 1m 3 28 ft Contact 3 pcs used to extend the cable length Parts Description 6 Expansion Connector WSS 1 Module ID on Won bon bn on on 4 0m on Ya 2 Power LED an 3 Terminal Cover annn d 4 Terminal Label 5 Cable Connector 1 Module ID EXP indicates the expansion power supply module ID 2 Power LED Turns on when power is on 3 Terminal Cover The terminal cover flips open to the right 4 Terminal Label Indicates terminal numbers 5 Cable Connector Nylon connector 5 pin 6 Expansion Connector Connects to CPU and other modules Expansion Power Supply Module Mounting Position Mount the expansion power supply module in the eighth slot Do not mount the expansion power supply module in any other slot than the eighth otherwise correct allocation of I O and link register numbers may not occur Beet 7 modules I O and functional A 8 modules 1 and functional CPU Module Expansion Power Supply Module maximum of 7 functional modules can be mounted in a
509. odule on Supply power to the power supply terminals on the CPU module See Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POW LED on the interface module does not go on YES 9 NO Is the POW LED on the interface module on NO Is the RUN LED on the interface module on Y Call IDEC for assistance END 26 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 3 The ERR LED on the LonWorks interface module goes on 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Is the interface module connected to the LonWorks network correctly YES Connect the interface module to the LonWorks network correctly Is the ERR LED on the interface module on Is installation of the network information Install the network information completed YES YES Is the ERR LED on the interface module on Is the target node operating normally Make sure the target node oper ates normally YES YES Is the ERR LED on the interface module on Is the network affected by surrounding noise Remove the noise source YES Y Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Is the ERR LED on the interface module on END 26 27
510. of NC contacts 2 OUT Output Outputs the result of bit logical operation 2 OUTN Output Not Outputs the inverted result of bit logical operation 2 RST Reset Resets output internal relay shift register or link register bit 2 SET Set Sets output internal relay shift register or link register bit 2 SFR Shift Register Forward shift register 3 SFRN Shift Register Not Reverse shift register 3 SOTD Single Output Down Falling edge differentiation output 1 SOTU Single Output Up Rising edge differentiation output 1 Timer Comparison Equal to comparison of timer current value 3 TC gt Timer Comparison gt Greater than or equal to comparison of timer current value 3 TIM 100 msec Timer Subtracting 100 msec timer 0 to 6553 5 sec 3 TMH 10 msec Timer Subtracting 10 msec timer 0 to 655 35 sec 3 TML 1 sec Timer Subtracting 1 sec timer 0 to 65535 sec 3 TMS 1 msec Timer Subtracting 1 msec timer 0 to 65 535 sec 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 7 1 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS LOD Load and LODN Load Not d The LOD instruction starts the logical operation with a NO normally open contact The LODN instruction starts the log ical operation with a NC normally closed contact A total of eight LOD and or LODN instructions can be programmed consecutively Ladder Diagram Valid eI Instruction a ea LOD 100 0 717 15 02557 0717 LODN 059
511. oise sources Power down the DeviceNet slave module before you start wiring Make sure that wiring is correct before powering up the DeviceNet slave module Use the special DeviceNet cable for connecting the network A five color label is located beside the connector on the DeviceNet slave module Connect each of the five different color wires of the cable to the terminal of a matching color When using thick cables only one wire can be connected to a terminal of the network interface connector To connect two wires of thick cables use a device tap e Tighten the mounting screws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 3 to 0 5 N m e Tighten the terminal screws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m Either connect commercially available terminators at both ends of the network or connect the following resistor to the branch taps at both ends of the network Connect the terminator between the CAN white and CAN L blue lines Metal film resistor 1219 1 1 4W Ferrules Crimping Tool and Screwdriver for Phoenix Terminal Blocks The screw terminal block of the network interface connector can be wired with or without using ferrules on the end of the cable Applicable ferrules for the terminal block and crimping tool for the ferrules are listed below Use a screwdriver to tighten the screw terminals on the DeviceNet slave module Ferrules crimping tool and screwdri
512. olean computation bit shift rotate data conversion and coordi nate conversion instructions for the OpenNet Controller data types can be selected from word W integer I double word D or long L For other advanced instructions the data is processed in units of 16 bit word Data Type Symbol Bits podium Range of Decimal Values Word Unsigned 16 bits W 16 bits 1 0 to 65 535 Integer Signed 15 bits 16 bits 1 32 768 to 32 767 Double Word Unsigned 32 bits D 32 bits 2 0 to 4 294 967 295 Long Signed 31 bits L 32 bits 2 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Decimal Values and Hexadecimal Storage The following table shows hexadecimal equivalents which are stored in the CPU as the result of addition and subtraction of the decimal values shown Data Type Result of Addition Hexadecimal Storage Result of Subtraction Hexadecimal Storage 0 0000 65535 FFFF 65535 FFFF Word 131071 CY FFFF 1 BW FFFF 65535 BW 0001 65536 BW 0000 65534 CY 7FFE 65534 BW 7FFE 32768 CY 0000 32768 BW 0000 32767 7 FFF 32767 7 FFF 0 0000 0 0000 Integer 1 FFFF 1 FFFF 32767 8001 32767 8001 32768 8000 32768 8000 32769 CY FFFF 32769 BW FFFF 65535 CY 8001 65535 BW 8001 0 00000000 4294967295 FFFFFFFF 4294967295 FFFFFFFF Double Word 8589934591 CY FFFFFFFF 1 BW FFFFFFFF 4294967295 BW 00000001 4294967296 BW 00000000 4294967294 CY 7FFFFFFE 4294967294 BW 7FFFFFFE 2147483648 CY 00000000 214748
513. ompare the active configuration with the connected bus configuration taking any disabled bus seg ments into account Error location Segment Position Add Error Info 0C14hex to 0C17 Meaning hex RB FAIL or 0D14hex to 0D17hex LB FAIL Multiple errors in the segment of the connected INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Error location Segment Position Add Error Info 0C18hex to 0C1B Meaning hex RB FAIL or 0D18hex to OD1Bhex LB FAIL Multiple timeout in the segment of the specified INTERBUS device Cause Transmission errors Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info Error location Segment Position 0C1Chex to 0C1F hex RB FAIL or OD1Chex to 001 LB FAIL Transmission error CRC error in the forward data path at the incoming bus interface I
514. ompleted 48 Data transmission complete From completing all data transmission until the END processing is completed for the TXD instruction 64 Transmit instruction complete All transmission operation is completed and the next transmission is made possible If the transmit status code is other than shown above an error of transmit instruction is suspected See User Communica tion Error Code on page 17 25 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Transmit Data Byte Count The data register next to the operand designated for transmit status stores the byte count of data transmitted by the TXD instruction When BCC is included in the transmit data the byte count of the BCC is also included in the transmit data byte count Example Data register D100 is designated as an operand for transmit status D100 e Transmit status D101 Transmit data byte count Programming TXD Instruction Using WindLDR The following example demonstrates how to program a TXD instruction including a start delimiter BCC and end delim iter using WindLDR TXD sample program sou TXD SI DI D2 Communication port RS232C port 1 1 12 M10 0100 Transmit completion output M10 Transmit status register D100 Transmit data byte count D101 Data register contents 010 04
515. on 31 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8431 D8999 Reserved OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 6 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Digital 1 Module Operands Input and output numbers are automatically allocated to each digital I O module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module A maximum of 7 digital I O or functional modules can be mounted with one CPU module without using an expansion power supply module so that a maximum of 224 I O points can be allocated in total When using an expan sion power supply module 15 modules can be mounted so that the I O numbers can be expanded up to 480 points in total 1 Operand Numbers Operand Without Expansion Power Supply Module When Using Expansion Power Supply Module Input 10 through 1277 224 points 10 through 1597 480 points Output QO through Q277 224 points 00 through 0597 480 points Example Slot No 1 2 3 4 5 6 OpenNet Input Output Func Output Input Input Controller Module Module tional Module Module Module CPU Module Module 16 pt 32 pt 16 pt 16 pt 32 pt Input Output Output Input Input The system setup shown above will have operand numbers allocated for each module as follows Slot No Module Operand Numbers 1 Input Module 1 10 through 17 110 through 117 2 Output Module 1 00 through Q7 Q10
516. on Connector 18P x 2 FC3AT32K4 24V DC 0 1A point 32 points 2 0A common Fujitsu Connector FC3A T32K5 Analog Output 12 bit resolution 1 4000 2 channels Screw Terminal FC3ADA1221 4 20mA 0 5V 0 10V 5V 10V output Expansion Power Supply Module Input Power Voltage 24V DC Nylon Connector 5P x 1 FC3A EA1 Note The expansion power supply module is supplied with a cable connector 1 meter long and 3 contacts for expanding cables dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL A 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com APPENDIX Remote 1 Master Module Description Remote 1 Master Module compatible with INTERBUS OpenNet Interface Modules DeviceNet Slave Module Description Type No FC3A SX5SM1 Type No FC3A SX5DS1 LoNWoRks Interface Module FC3A SX5LS1 SX5 Communication 1 Terminals Bus INTERBUS DeviceNet LONWORKS A4 1 O Type Input Type Type No DC Input 16 point source input 24V DC SX5S SBN16S 16 point sink input 24V DC SX5S SBN16K Relay Output 8 point relay output 240V AC 24V DC 5 SX5S SBR08 Transistor Output 16 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 6A common SX5S SBT16K 16 point transistor protect source output 24V DC 0 5A pt 6A com SX5S SBT16P DC Input Transistor Output 8 point source input 24V DC 8 point transistor sink output 24V DC 0 5A point 4 common
517. on string 50 2 Ring to answer Specifies the ring on which the modem will pick up the telephone line SO 2 specifies that the modem answers an incoming call when detecting 2 ring calls S020 disables the auto answer function Commands included in several initialization strings Commands in this category are essential depending on the modem used for the OpenNet Controller MNP result codes disabled 0 Conventional result codes are used and reliable link result codes are not used AO Set MNP maximum block size to 64 bytes X4 Enables dial tone and busy detection X3 Enables busy tone detection X4 X3 X0 X0 Disables telephone line monitor signal detection PBX systems and outside telephone lines often use different line monitor signals When using the modem in the PBX environment include XO in the initialization string to disable the signal detection 103 192 Enables hardware flow control amp K3 amp HI amp IO The software flow control XON XOFF cannot be used for the OpenNet Controller modem mode Any of these commands must be included in the initialization string Set bps rate adjust off 0 amp 1 The bps rate between the modem and the OpenNet Controller is constant and independent of the tele phone line bps rate Enables auto reliable link amp M5 The modems at both ends of the telephone line detect the best communication format for the modems and establish a link N2 N3 Enables
518. on substitutes the number of register IO points for max out number or max in number init gate array function This function turns on the I O LED when initialization of registers fails within 5 seconds 2620 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Writing Receive Data to Data Registers in the LonWorks Interface Module The following diagram shows a typical example of writing receive data to the data registers in the LONWORKS interface module Preparation for data write Is preparation for data write complete YES C Yo Write data Y End data write Application Program Example for Data Write The following program is an example to write receive data to data register CO00h of the LONWORKS interface module when an 8 bit input network variable nv 18 is updated When you modify or create an application program make sure that the application program includes the following codes in italics 1 Input Network Variables 2 network input unsigned char nv i8 3 define 4 define GA BCTL OxCO1A 5 define BCTL NWR REQ 0 04 6 define GA_FCDR_RX OxCO00 D 8 when update occurs 18 9 unsigned char pGA 10 unsigned char dat l1 while TRUE 12 pGA unsigned char GA BCTL 135 pGA BCTL NWR REQ I4 dat pGA
519. onal modules 6 4 for master module 6 4 areas discontinuity 8 5 operands digital I O module 6 18 functional module 6 18 operating procedure 23 11 data link system 21 11 status during errors 27 4 operation basics 4 1 register 7 7 operational state 23 2 OR and ORN instructions 7 4 OR LOD instruction 7 5 OR word 12 1 originate mode 23 2 23 4 ORW 12 1 OSI 26 2 OUT and OUTN instructions 7 2 output during errors 27 4 hold or load off 25 6 module 2 16 terminal arrangement 2 22 modules A 3 network variables 26 23 dee OpenNet Controller User s Manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com INDEX vi wiring 3 6 diagram 16 2 16 6 overlapping coordinates 19 5 peripheral fault 24 16 PF 24 16 physical port number 25 6 PID control 20 1 instruction notes for using 20 17 pinout 17 2 17 31 23 1 24 15 PLC status monitoring 22 2 position 24 6 power failure 27 4 memory protection 7 10 supply 2 4 3 9 wiring 3 9 wiring expansion power supply module 2 35 preparation for using modem 23 10 process variable before conversion 20 12 program branching instructions 18 1 using with SOTU SOTD instructions 18 2 using with timer instruction 18 2 programming data registers and internal relays 23 11 high speed counter using WindLDR 5 11 RXD instruction using WindLDR 17 22 special data register 17 31 17 33 transmit receive data using WindLDR 25 9 26 11 TXD instruction using WindLDR
520. ool to install network configuration information external interface file XIF extension unique to each product series is needed to install the network configuration information The external interface file for the LONWORKS interface module is available from IDEC Find an XIF No printed on the side of the LONWORKS interface module or on the shipping package When requesting an external interface file inform IDEC of the XIF No that represents the external interface file version number Without a correct external interface file of the matching XIF No network configuration information cannot be installed successfully The network configuration information includes addressing binding and configuration Addressing Determines each node address Binding Determines target nodes to communicate with Configuration Determines the type of message service retry cycles timeout period etc AN Caution When using the LONWORKS interface module select the acknowledge ACKD service to enable the message service for network variables and set the retry cycles to a value of 1 or more If com munication is performed using other than the ACKD service the ERR LED on the interface mod ule does not function properly e When installing the network configuration information without modifying the application pro gram an external interface file XIF extension containing information such as the network vari ables of the LONWORKS interface module is nee
521. operand is always used with out regard to the data type Source operand S2 and destination operand D2 do not have to be designated If S2 or D2 is not designated the source or destination operand is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Make sure that the source data determined by S1 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED on the CPU module Example IM OV IMOVW S1 52 D1 D2 10 D20 C10 D10 D25 D20 C10 gt D10 D25 D20 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 D21 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determine the source and destination operands D22 If the current value of counter C10 designated by source operand S2 is 4 the source data is deter D23 mined by adding the offset to data register D20 designated by source operand S1 D24 6450 D 20 4 D24 D25 20 If data register D25 contains a value of 20 the destination is determined by adding the offset to 7 data register D10 designated by destination operand D1 D30 6450 D 10 20 D30 As a result when input IO is on the data in data register D24 is moved to data register D30 cH 2 96 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phon
522. or port 2 respectively This function is useful to cancel receive instruc tions only without stopping the OpenNet Controller To make the cancelled RXD instructions active turn off the flag and turn on the input to the RXD instruction again dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 21 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Programming RXD Instruction Using WindLDR The following example demonstrates how to program a RXD instruction including a start delimiter skip BCC and end delimiter using WindLDR Converted data is stored to data registers D20 and D21 Internal relay M20 is used as destination D1 for the receive completion output Data register D200 is used as destination D2 for the receive status and data register D201 is used to store the receive data byte count Receive data example BCC calculation range STX BCC BCC ETX 02h aan 4i EM aM pum od Pas don 39h 32h 03h Start Skip Stored to D20 Stored to D21 End Delimiter Delimiter RXD sample program sou RXD SI DI D2 Communication port RS232C port 1 1 16 M20 D200 Receive completion output M20 Receive status register D200 Receive data byte count D201 1 Start to program a RXD instruction Move the cursor where you want to insert the RXD instruction and type RXD You can also insert the RXD instruction by clicking the User Communication icon in the
523. ors Remedy missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add_Error_Info 0 28 to 0 2 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD28hex to 0D2Bhex LB FAIL The Medium Attachment Unit MAU diagnosed an interruption of the data transmission Cause Interruption in the return data path at the incoming bus interface IN of the specified INTERBUS device Remedy Check the cables male and female connectors on cables and devices for interruptions and repair them if required Add Error Info 0C2Chex to OC2F Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD2Chex to 0D2Fhex LB FAIL Unexpected change of the RBST or LBST signal Missing or defective bridge loose contact dry joint in the outgoing bus connector of the preceding saoe INTERBUS device Check the segment of the specified INTERBUS device for interruptions in the connector loose con Remedy tact dry joint Solder a bridge or ensure the proper connection of the already existing bridge to gener ate an errorfree RBST or LBST signal Add_Error_Info 0 40 to 0C43 Meaning Error location Segment Position hex RB FAIL or OD40hex to 0D43hex LB FAIL The length code of the specified INTERBUS device is not identical w
524. ount a module Digital I O and functional modules are numbered Module 01 through Module 15 starting with the module mounted next to the CPU module 4 Select a module type in the Module Type list box Not Set Module type is not selected for the selected slot Digital I O A digital I O module is selected for the selected slot Functional Module A functional module is selected for the selected slot such as an analog I O or OpenNet I F module 5 Click the check box under Module ID Operation Selection Check in the Box default CPU starts to run even if actual modules differ from the module ID settings No Check in the Box The CPU does not start to run when actual modules differ from the module ID settings Terminal and connector type difference has no effect When the check box is unchecked and the CPU does not start the ERROR LED is turned on and I O bus error is caused error code 0800h Then replace the I O and functional modules to match the information specified in the user program and retry to start the CPU dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 5 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Input Filter The input filter function is used to reject input noises The catch input function described in the next section is used to receive short input pulses On the contrary the input filter function ignores short input pulses when the OpenNet Cont
525. ous ways of communication About the OpenNet Controller IDEC s OpenNet Controller is a programmable logic controller with enhanced communication capabilities The OpenNet Controller is compatible with world s three major open networks INTERBUS DeviceNet and LONWORKS Since appli cation of these networks are expanding at a fast pace the OpenNet Controller is ideal for use in multi vendor control sys tems In addition the OpenNet Controller has user communication functions to communicate with various communication equipment Modem communication is also very easy using the built in modem communication functions to communicate with remote devices through telephone lines For these communication applications the OpenNet Controller CPU module features two RS232C ports and one RS485 port User programs for the OpenNet Controller can be edited using WindLDR on a Windows PC Since WindLDR can load exist ing user programs made for IDEC s preceding PLCs such as all FA series MICRO 1 MICRO and MICRO C your soft ware assets can be used in the new control system Digital I O points can be 480 total at the maximum when using an expansion power supply module Program capacity is 16K words 8K steps Features Connect to Open Networks The OpenNet Controller can be connected to the three major open networks INTERBUS DeviceNet and LONWORKS The versatile communication capabilities reduce the time and cost needed when constructing expand
526. out 0021 This indicates two conditions requiring attention User program sum check error from the third chart and Power failure from the fourth chart If the read out displays 000D this indicates three conditions exist from only the fourth chart Error Code Most Significant Digit Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com F000 E000 0000 C000 B000 A000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0000 INTERBUS master access error X X bus initialize error XIX Error Code 2nd Digit from Left FOO E00 DOO COO BOO A00 900 800 700 600 500 400 300 200 100 000 User program writing error X X X X X X X X Protect output overload error X X X X X X X X Calendar clock error X X X XxX X X X X I O bus error Error Code 3rd Digit from Left Fo eo co ao 90 70 60 so 40 30 20 10 00 TIM CNT preset value sum check error X X X X X X X X User program RAM sum check error X X X X X X X X Keep data sum check error X X X XxX X X X X User program syntax error X X X XX Error Code Least Significant Digit F E A 9 8 7 6 5 4 32 14 0 Power failure X X X X X X Watchdog timer error X X X X xX X XX Data link connection error X X X X X User program ROM sum c
527. oves current calen dar clock data to data registers D10 through D16 Adjusting Clock Using a User Program Special internal relay M8021 clock data adjust flag is provided for adjusting the clock data When M8021 is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds If seconds are between and 29 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented one M8021 is useful for precise timing which starts at zero seconds Example Adjusting Calendar Clock Data When input I2 turns on clock data adjust flag special internal relay M8021 is turned on and 30TU C the clock is adjusted with respect t d 2 M8021 j pect to seconds 15 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Introduction The DISP display instruction is used to display 1 through 5 digits of timer counter current values and data register data on 7 segment display units The DGRD digital read instruction is used to read 1 through 5 digits of digital switch settings to a data register This instruction is useful to change preset values for timers and counters using digital switches The CDISP character display instruction is used to display a maximum of 16 characters on dot matrix display units DISP Di
528. ox 200g 1 Module ID 5 Status LED 2 FG Terminal 3 Connector 1 V 24 Interface D sub 9 pin Male Connector 4 Connector 2 REMOTE OUT D sub 9 pin Female Connector FC3A SX5SM1 indicates the remote I O master module ID Frame ground V 24 Interface for monitoring the communication line using CMD CMD is a software program to run on Windows 3 1 95 for configuration monitoring and diagnosis supplied by Phoenix Contact REMOTE OUT for connecting a communication cable to the REMOTE IN connector on a remote I O slave module Turns on to indicate the following status RDY RUN READY RUN NO ERR REMOTE BUS ERR eet LOCAL_BUS_ERR CONTROLLER_ERR WATCHDOG_ERR HARDWARE FAULT BSA BUS_SEGMENT_DISABLED PF MODULE_ERROR HF HOST_HARDWARE_FAULT OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS Remote 1 Master Module General Specifications Type No Power Voltage FC3A SX5SM1 Supplied by the CPU module Dielectric Strength Between power terminal on the CPU module and FG 500V AC 1 minute Insulation Resistance Between REMOTE OUT terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Between V 24 Interface terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Internal Current Draw Approx 142 mA 24V DC See Power Consumption on page 2 4 FG Terminal
529. p Bit Shift and Rotate Data Conversion Week Programmer Interface User Communication Program Branching Coordinate Conversion PID 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS Symbol Name T Pn Ro SFTL Shift Left X X 4 13 1 SFTR Shift Right X X 4 133 ROTL Rotate Left X X 4 13 5 ROTR Rotate Right X X 4 13 7 ROTLC Rotate Left with Carry X X 4 13 9 ROTRC Rotate Right with Carry X X 4 1341 BCDLS BCD Left Shift X 4 1343 HTOB Hex to BCD X X 5 or6 14 1 BTOH BCD to Hex X X 5 or6 14 3 to ASCII X 7 14 5 ATOH ASCII to Hex X 7 14 7 BTOA BCD to ASCII X 7 14 9 ATOB ASCII to BCD X 7 14 11 DTDV Data Divide X 5 1443 DTCB Data Combine X 5 1444 WKCMP ON Week Compare ON 9 15 1 WKCMP OFF Week Compare OFF 9 15 1 WKTBL Week Table 4 2n 15 2 DISP Display 6 16 1 DGRD Digital Read 8 16 3 CDISP Character Display 4 2n 3m 165 TXD1 Transmit 1 7 n 2m 174 TXD2 Transmit 2 7 n 2m 174 RXD1 Receive 1 74n42m 1743 RXD2 Receive 2 7 n 2m 17 13 LABEL Label 2 18 1 LJ Label Jump 3 18 1 LCAL Label Call 3 18 3 LRET Label Return 1 18 3 DJNZ Decrement Jump Non zero 5 18 5 XYFS XY Format Set X 4 4n 19 1 CVXTY Convert X to Y X 7 192 CVYTX Convert Y to X X 7 19 3 AVRG Average X X 11 194 PID PID Control 11 20 1 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 8 ADV
530. p operation upon disparity 5 5 selection at memory backup error 5 2 RXDI1 17 13 RXD2 17 13 sample program modem answer mode 23 13 modem originate mode 23 12 turning all outputs off 2 20 screwdriver 25 5 26 6 selecting device numbers 22 2 master and slave station numbers 21 2 separate refresh mode 21 8 SET and RST instructions 7 3 set point 20 12 setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com calendar clock using auser program 15 7 using WindLDR 15 7 communication parameters 23 10 using WindLDR 17 3 SFR and SFRN instructions 7 20 SFR N shifting flag M8012 6 10 SFTL 13 1 SFTR 13 3 shift left 13 1 register instructions 7 20 right 13 3 simple operation 4 4 simultaneous refresh mode 21 10 single output instruction 7 24 skip 17 18 slave station communication completion relay M8140 M8176 21 6 M8177 21 6 numbers 21 2 software version 25 7 26 17 SOTU and SOTD instructions 7 24 SOTU SOTD instructions using with program branching 18 2 source and destination operands 8 3 operand 8 3 special data registers 6 12 for data link communication error 21 4 for data link master slave stations 6 17 for error information 27 3 for high speed counter 5 10 6 13 forINTERBUS 6 13 for INTERBUS master information 24 10 for modem mode 6 16 for remote I O node information 24 6 for RS232C line control signals 17 27 special functions 5 1 special internal relay allocation numbers 6 6 speci
531. p Error dialog box is used to select whether to start or stop the CPU when attempting to restart operation after the keep data in the CPU RAM has been lost Since this setting relates to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after chang ing this setting Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Run Stop tab Run Default Click the button on the left to start the CPU at memory backup error Stop Click the button on the left to stop the CPU when attempting to start at memory backup error When the CPU does not start because of the Stop selection the CPU can not be started alone then the CPU can still be started by sending a start command from WindLDR For start stop operation see page 4 2 Run Stop Keep Module ID Filter Catch Data Link c gt Stop Input Reset Input This example designates to allow Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error to start operation when the i C Stop keep data has been lost Default Run 52 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Keep Designation for Internal Relays Shift Registers Counters and Data Registers The statuses of internal relays and shift register bits are usually cleared a
532. page 21 11 Turn on special internal relay M8007 data link communication initialize flag at the master station See page 21 6 0008h User Program ROM Sum Check Error The user program stored in the OpenNet Controller CPU module ROM is broken Download a correct user program to the OpenNet Controller and clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer When a memory card is installed in the CPU module the user program in the memory card is checked 0010h Timer Counter Preset Value Sum Check Error The execution data of timer counter preset values is broken The timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the user program automatically Note that modified preset values are cleared and that the original values are restored Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 274 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING 0020h User Program RAM Sum Check Error The data of the user program compile area in the OpenNet Controller CPU module RAM is broken When this error occurs the user program is recompiled automatically and the timer counter preset values are initialized to the values of the user program Note that modified preset values are cleared and that the original values are restored Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 0040h Keep Data Sum Check Error This error indicates that the data design
533. parison 10 1 data conversion 14 1 interface 16 1 move 9 1 PID 20 1 program branching 18 1 user communication 17 1 week programmer 15 1 INTERBUS cable 24 15 cycle time 24 12 error code 24 16 master access error 27 5 acknowledge code 24 10 additional error information 24 10 bus NG M8036 6 10 error code 24 10 error location 24 10 error M8040 6 10 error M8041 6 10 initialize M8030 6 10 peripheral fault M8037 6 10 status transition number D8179 24 10 system error information D8178 24 10 internal relays for modem mode 23 2 structure LonWorks interface module 26 14 International Standard Organization 26 2 interval compare greater than or equal to 10 4 comparison in WKCMP ON OFF instructions 15 4 ISO 26 2 JMP and JEND instructions 7 27 jump instructions 7 27 keep data sum check error 27 5 designation 5 3 key matrix input 5 16 LABEL 18 1 label 18 1 call 18 3 jump 18 1 return 18 3 ladder diagram 17 32 17 34 LCAL 18 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com length code 24 6 line connection 23 2 control signals RS232C 17 27 linear conversion 19 4 link register bit designation 6 19 registers for DeviceNet network communication 25 7 for LonWorks network communication 26 8 for remote I O system 24 2 LJMP 18 1 LOD and LODN instructions 7 2 logical device no 24 6 number 24 4 LON 26 1 LonMaker 26 2 26 12 LonTalk protocol 26 2 LonWorks 26 1 interface module 2 39 net
534. peat S1 Source 1 Base address to move from X X X X X X X X 1 99 2 Source 2 Offset for 51 X X X X X X X X 1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 S2 or D2 the operand data is the timer counter current value When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the operand data is the timer counter preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments For source operand 52 and destination operand D2 16 points bit operand or 1 point word
535. power conduits and machinery compo nents which are frequently in motion IBS METER E T 27 23 14 9 Underground 3 x2 x 0 22 mm Fixed routing indoors outdoors or underground Cable Connector Pinouts D sub 9 pin Male Connector D sub 9 pin Female Connector O O 6 o o 51099 Ne ojs O O Soldered Strain Relief Strain Relief Soldered Side Side Bridge pins 5 and 9 inside the Use inch sized screws UNC4 40 to fasten housing of the male connector the cable connectors to INTERBUS ports Stripping and Clamping Cable Ends 20 Next place the braided shield back over the cable First strip the cable sheath 20 mm from both ends of sheath the cable and shorten the braided shield by 12 mm Clamp the shield under the strain relief in the connector Bare the wire ends 3 mm Trim the unused white wire housing for conductive connection with the housing Do not install the INTERBUS cable in parallel with or close to motor lines Keep the INTERBUS cable away from noise sources Turn power off before wiring the INTERBUS cable Make sure of correct wiring before turning power on Use a special INTERBUS cable and connect the cable as shown above Use D sub connectors with metal or metal coated housing Connect the cable shield with the connector housing electrically Leave open the remote out connector at the last station in the
536. pply eeee bj e epi e e EE IIIJ ge o Character Display Units IDEC s DD3S F57N OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Character Codes for IDEC DD3S Character Display Unit Decimal Decimal m m Aui D Decimal 3 Decimal 4 Decimal Decimal 6 Decimal Decimal 8 Decimal 9 Decimal A Decimal Decimal Decimal D Decimal Decimal Decimal Note These character codes are used with IDEC DD3S series character display units Those codes left blank are reserved for Japanese characters ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL 16 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS 168 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Introduction This chapter describes the user communication function for communication between the OpenNet Controller and external devices with an RS232C port The OpenNet Controller uses user communication instr
537. ppressed when the integral start coefficient is set to 1 and is least suppressed when the integral start coefficient is set to 100 When the integral start coefficient is too small overshoot is eliminated but offset is caused 51 11 Input Filter Coefficient The input filter has an effect to smooth out fluctuations of the process variable S4 Set a required value of 0 through 99 to specify an input filter coefficient of 0 through 99 to the data register designated by 51 11 When S1 11 stores a value larger than 99 the input filter coefficient is set to 99 The larger the coefficient the larger the input filter effect The input filter is effective for reading a process variable S4 such as temperature data when the value changes at each sampling time The input filter coefficient is in effect during auto tuning and PID action 51 12 Sampling Period The sampling period determines the interval to execute the PID instruction Set a required value of through 10000 to specify a sampling period of 0 01 sec through 100 00 sec to the data register designated by 51 12 When S1 12 stores 0 the sampling period is set to 0 01 sec When S1 12 stores a value larger than 10000 the sampling period is set to 100 00 sec When sampling period is set to a value smaller than the scan time the PID instruction is executed every scan Example Sampling period 40 msec Scan time 80 msec Sampling period lt Scan time 80 msec 80 msec 80 m
538. precautions see page 3 6 Terminal No Name Fuse T DC DC Fuse Fuse T DC DC Fuse Fuse T DC DC Fuse Fuse m DC DC Fuse 2 22 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A R162 16 point Relay Output Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connectors VHR 5N J S T Mfg SVH 21T P1 1 J S T Mfg CN1 CN3 Terminal No Name Terminal No Name ooooooooo0 CN2 CN4 Terminal No Name Terminal No Name nnn nn Wiring Schematic COM terminals are nof connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable For wiring precautions see page 3 6 CN1 Terminal No Name Fuse EE DC DC Fuse Fuse DC DC Fuse Fuse 2 DE DC Fuse lE OE Ex PUER DC Fuse D D V
539. process variable S4 fluctuated excessively To 201 restart AT set the AT sampling period S1 19 or the input filter coefficient 51 11 to a larger value 200 AT is stopped because of AT execution error dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION 51 3 Operation Mode When the start input for the PID instruction is turned on the CPU module checks the value stored in the data register des ignated by 51 3 and executes the selected operation The selection cannot be changed while executing the PID instruction 0 PID action The PID action is executed according to the designated PID parameters such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S148 derivative time S1 9 and control action S2 0 AT auto tuning PID action Auto tuning is first executed according to the designated AT parameters such as AT sampling period S1 19 AT con trol period S1 20 AT set point 51 21 and AT output manipulated variable S 12 22 As a result of auto tuning PID parameters are determined such as proportional gain S1 7 integral time S1 8 derivative time S149 and control direction S240 then PID action is executed according to the derived PID parameters AT auto tuning Auto tuning is executed according to designated AT parameters to determine PID parameters such as proportional gain S1 7 integral
540. put M internal relay R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 13 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 13 Bit SHIFT ROTATE INSTRUCTIONS Examples SFTL Data Type Word S1 1 43690 D10 REP MOV W S1 bits D10 1 Bits to shift 1 M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts operation the MOV move instruction sets 43690 to data register D10 Each time input 10 is turned on 16 bit data of data register D10 is shifted to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The last bit sta tus shifted out is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 Zeros are set to the LSB CY MSB D10 LSB Before shift 010 43690 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 M8003 Shift to the left CY MSB D10 LSB After first shift 010 21844 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 M8003 CY MSB D10 LSB After second shift 010 43688 0 1 01 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
541. put I2 to the SOTU instruction turns on while input I1 to the MCS instruction is on then the SOTU output turns on If input I2 to the SOTD instruction turns off while input I1 is on then the SOTD output turns on If input I1 turns on while input I2 is on then the SOTU output turns on However if input I1 turns off while input I2 is on then the SOTD output does not turn on as shown below Ladder Diagram Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Input I1 Input I2 SOTU Output M1 SOTD Output M2 No Output Output 724 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com MCS and MCR Master Control Set and Reset 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS The MCS master control set instruction is usually used in combination with the MCR master control reset instruction The MCS instruction can also be used with the END instruction instead of the MCR instruction When the input preceding the MCS instruction is off the MCS is executed so that all inputs to the portion between the MCS and the MCR are forced off When the input preceding the MCS instruction is on the MCS is not executed so that the program following it is executed according to the actual input statuses When the input condition to the MCS instruction is off and the MCS is executed other instructions between the MCS and MCR are executed as follows Instruction Status S
542. r Nth Unit N lt 32 Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to OFF at all elle Q 228 are OpenNet Controller stations A B DEBES to select the maintenance 7 C mode for the RS485 port E mA 1 s sity d Cable L e G H H D j WindowsiPC RS232C RS485 Converter FC2AMD1 RS232C Cable i HD9Z C52 Shielded twisted pair cable 200 meters 656 feet maximum 1 5m 4 92 feet long Core wire diameter 0 9 mm 0 035 minimum Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch The communication selector DIP switch is used to select the communication protocol for the RS485 and RS232C ports and also to select the device number for the OpenNet Controller CPU module used in a data link or computer link commu nication system When using the OpenNet Controllers in a 1 N computer link system set communication selector DIP switches 1 and 4 through 8 When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically After changing the settings of the communication selec tor DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode takes effect You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the communication mode wh
543. r or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X X X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments xamples M OV Data Type Word D10 MO H mn 0 When input 12 is on the data in data register D10 designated by source operand S1 is moved to 16 internal relays starting with MO designated by destination operand D1 D10 12345 MO through M7 M10 through M17 The data in the source data register is converted into 16 bit binary MSB LSB data and the ON OFF statuses of the 16 bits are moved to internal 010 11 0000 0 0 1 1 1 00 1 relays MO through 7 and M10 through M17 MO is the LSB
544. r Bit Definition BRR KK KK KKK AA AAA I I I I x define BCTL_CENABLE define BCTL_NWR_REQ define BCTL_NENABLE define MAX FCDR DATA LEN Define Neuron Chip IO pins as follows define define define define define define IO 0 IO 1 2 IO 3 IO 4 IO 6 IO GA BASE GA FCDR GA FVER GA EMID GA BCTL output bit output bit output bit input bit input bit output bit 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE I O Base Address 0x00 Data Register 0x12 Error Register 0x18 I O Version Register 0x19 Expansion Module ID Register Oxla J Ox10 0 04 0 01 16 PO RUN LED HIGH PO ERR LED HIGH PO IO LED HIGH PI ODE PI RUN PO F ERR LOW BRK KK KK KKK I AA AA KK I I I I x Prototype R BRK KK KK KK I I A A AA KK I I I I HH void void void void initialize void init_internal_io void init_external_io void init gate array void BRR KK KK KK AA AA AA I IK I I I x Global Variable BRK KK KK KK I I A A AA KA I I x f mtimer io check timer unsigned char csr error data void initialize void CSRI ERROR Reg data save area OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 19 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE 54 init_internal_io 555 init external io 56 57 void init internal io void 58 io change init PI ODE 59 io_change_init RUN
545. r Info Error location Segment Position O0CC4hex to OCC7hex RB FAIL or ODC4hex to ODC7hex LB FAIL Meaning Multiple timeout at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device Defective local remote bus cable that belongs to the local remote bus of the specified device Defective INTERBUS device connected to the local remote bus of the specified INTERBUS device Cause Failure of the supply voltage communication voltage UL for the module electronics made available by the BK module Failure of the supply voltage UL for the BK module Remedy Check this local remote bus Add Error Info Error location Segment Position OCC8hex to OCCBhex RB FAIL or ODC8hex to ODCBhex LB FAIL Unexpected devices were found at the outgoing bus interface OUT2 of the specified INTERBUS device INTERBUS device connected without an entry in the active configuration INTERBUS cable connected without any further INTERBUS devices Add Error Info Error location Segment Position Cause dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 24 27 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OCCChex to OCCFhex RB FAIL or ODCChex to ODCFhex LB FAIL Meaning Only ID cycles but no data cycles can be run Interrupted data register of the INTERBUS device connected to OUT2 The number of data registers of the
546. r com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N16B3 16 point DC Input Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connectors VHR 10N J S T Mfg SVH 21T P1 1 J S T Mfg CNL Terminal No Name 1 CN1 ac 2 3 3 n 25 4 n 20 as 5 i 6 a 70 a i 7 8 uo bo 9 vo CN2 10 CN2 Terminal No Name QOo00 0000090 mm o o NI U1 BY WW NM m e Wiring Schematic COM terminals are connected together internally e Terminal numbers are marked on the female connector on the cable e For wiring precautions see page 3 5 Sink Input Wiring CN1 Source Input Wiring CN1 1 T t 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 t 5 6 6 7 7 8 t 8 9 9 t 10 10 CN2 CN2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 e 8 c 8 9 9 10 10 2 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS FC3A N32B4 32 point DC Input Module Nylon Connector Type Applicable Connector H18 SHF AA J S T Mfg SHF 001T 0 8BS J S T
547. r control circuit will give priority to I1 I3 and I5 in that order When input is off the first MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through I6 are forced off When input is on the first MCS is not executed so that the following program is executed according to the actual input statuses of I2 through I6 When is on and 13 is off the second MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I4 through I6 are forced off When both and 13 are on the first and second MCSs are not executed so that the following program is executed accord ing to the actual input statuses of I4 through I6 Counter and Shift Register in Master Control Circuit Ladder Diagram When input I1 is on the MCS is not executed so that the counter and shift regis Rung 1 Mcs ter are executed according to actual statuses of subsequent inputs I2 through 14 When input I1 is off the MCS is executed so that subsequent inputs I2 through Rung 2 I4 are forced off When input I1 is turned on while input I2 is on the counter and shift register pulse inputs are turned on as shown below Rung 3 Timing Chart Input 11 Input 12 Counter Pulse Input be Rung 4 Shift Register Pulse Input 7 26 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com J 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS MP Jump and JEND Jump End d The JMP jump instruction is usually used in combination
548. r occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the communication voltage supply of the remote bus devices Add Error Info 2420 INTERBUS device number Segment Position of the INTERBUS device OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info 2clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM OBFAhex BUS FAIL Meaning Multiple errors at the specified device during startup or permanent diagnostics The error occurs due to Cause installation errors a defective INTERBUS device Error location The specified device the preceding complete bus as well as all devices connected to OUT2 of the specified device Remedy Check your system for missing or incorrect shielding of the bus cables connectors missing or incorrect grounding equipotential bonding poor connections in the connector loose contact dry joint cable breaks in remote and local bus cabling voltage dips on the commu
549. r terminal and FG Between I O terminal and FG 500V AC 1 minute 1 500V AC 1 minute Maximum Input Current 1 5A at 24V DC Power Consumption 8 4W 24 CPU module 48 I Os 32 DC input module 16 elay output module 18W 24V module 128 I Os 32 DC input module x 2 16 DC input mod ule 16 relay output module x 3 11 8W 24V CPU module remote 1 master module 48 1 Os 32 DC input mod ule 16 relay output module 21 4W 24V CPU module remote I O master module 128 1 05 32 DC input module x 2 16 DC input module 16 relay output module x 3 Allowable Momentary Power Interruption 10 msec 24V DC Level PS 2 EN61131 Insulation Resistance Between power terminal and FG Between I O terminal and FG 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger 10 MQ minimum 500V DC megger Inrush Current 40A maximum 24V DC Ground Grounding resistance 100 maximum Grounding Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Power Supply Wire UL1015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 Effect of Improper Power Supply Connection 24 Phone 800 894 0412 Reverse polarity Improper voltage or frequency Improper lead connection No operation no damage Permanent damage may be caused Permanent damage may be caused OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Function Specifications CPU Module Specifications Program Capa
550. r the valid operand number range see page 6 2 Since the ROOT instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long X When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type is used Examples ROOT Before Execution After Execution Hef gh ND pm s 020 141 J2 1 41 173 J3 1 73 ROOTEN LT NEU a JDTI gt D21 11 JHE 022 200 JA 2 00 EE RSS Room uo ae Diis qb JD gt D22 D12 zza LUE 25 JDB gt D23 pi3 55 741 55 274161 Er emm 06 ROTM EP m Di D14 gt D24 D14 p24 9998 9997 99 98 H BODTON DIS ST 4015 gt D25 015 9998 025 9998 9998 99 98 Ae ew EE 11 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 11 BINARY ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS SUM Sum fe H SUM W S1 52 The SUM instruction be selected for ADD operation ADDI XOR es ADD S1 through S2 added gt D1 D1 1 SI through S2 XORed gt DI When input is on with ADD selected all data of ope
551. ram gt Program List Cz Gg Prom Adis ois The CC and CC2 instructions can be used repeatedly for different preset values e The comparison instructions only compare the current value The status of the counter does not affect this function The comparison instructions also serve as an implicit LOD instruction and must be programmed at the beginning of a ladder line e The comparison instructions can be used with internal relays which are ANDed or at a separate program address e Like LOD instruction the comparison instructions can be followed by the AND and OR instructions Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram Ladder Diagram 10 10 90 10 MO Program List Program List Prgm Adrs i Prgm Adrs 0 1 2 AND 3 OUT To compare three values use the ICMP interval compare greater than or equal to See page 10 4 7 14 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Examples CC and gt Counter Comparison Ladder Diagram 1 Program List Reset C Timing Chart ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output Q0 can Reset Input 10 Pulse Input 11 C2 Output 01 Ladder Diagram 2 Program List Reset Rung 1 Prgm Adrs Instruction 11 Pulse 12 Rung2 C30 Ladder Diagram 3 Program List Rung 1 ae Prgm Adrs
552. ram execution error results are not set to any destination 124 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 12 BOOLEAN COMPUTATION INSTRUCTIONS NEG Negate pe er a NEGE 0 S D gt S D When input is two s complement of operand designated by S D is produced and the new value is stored to the same operand Valid Operands Operand Function QM R T D L Constant Repeat S D Source Destination Operand to negate data XX For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 Since the NEG instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a word operand such as D data register or L link register is designated as the source destination 1 point integer data type or 2 points long data type are used In the integer data type valid values 32768 to 32767 If the designated operand is currently 32768 8000h the value will become 32768 8000h after it is negated In the long data type valid values 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 If the designated operand is currently 2 147 483 648 80000000h the value will become 2 147 483 648 80000000h after it is negated Example NEG Data Type Integer Be
553. rands designated by S1 through S2 are added and the result is stored to the destination operand designated by D1 and the next operand D1 1 When input is on with XOR selected all data of operands designated by S1 through S2 are XORed and the result is stored to the destination operand designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function QM R C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number for SUM X X X X 52 Source 2 Last operand number for SUM X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store results X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 or S2 the timer counter current value is read out Since the SUM instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types X When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used Example SUM ADD SOTU SUM W 51 2 D1 When input is on all data of D10 through D12 are added and ADD D10 D12 D20 the result is stored to D20 and D21 D10 100 D11 200 D12 300 gt D20 D21 600 XOR SOTU SUM W 51 S2 D1 When input is on all data of D10 through D12 are
554. range specified in the XYFS instruction Although the integer value can be 0 through 32767 any value out of the range specified in the XYFS results in a user program execution error turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED D1 Destination to store results The conversion results of the Y value is stored to the destination The integer value of the conversion results can be 32768 through 32767 Valid Data Types W word 1 integer D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as S2 or D1 16 points integer data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as S2 or D1 1 point integer data type is used Data Conversion Error The data conversion error is 0 5 19 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS CVYTX Convert Y to X CWTXI SI S7 DI When input is on the Y value designated by operand S2 is converted H 0 xod pK into corresponding X value according to the linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction Operand S1 selects a format from a maximum of 30 XY conversion formats The conversion result is set to the oper and designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function I QM R T C D L Constant
555. re Used to connect the RS232C RS485 converter to an IBM PC with HD9Z C52 1 5m 4 92 ft long D sub 9 pin female connector to connect to computer DIN Rail 1m 3 28 ft long 35 mm wide DIN rail to mount OpenNet Controller modules BAA1000 Mounting Clip Used on DIN rail to fasten OpenNet Controller modules BNL6 Phoenix Ferrule Ferrule for connecting 1 or 2 wires to screw terminal See page 3 10 Phoenix Ferrule Tool Used for crimping ferrules See page 3 10 Screwdriver Used for tightening screw terminals See page 3 10 Terminal Block Removal Tool Used for removing terminal blocks from I O modules FC9Z FTP20 Miniature Memory Card 2MB memory card to store a user program FC9Z7 MC02 WindLDR Programming and monitoring software for Windows PC CD FC9Y LP2CDW AC Adapter When using the computer link cable 6C to connect a computer to the RS485 terminals on the OpenNet Controller CPU module an AC adapter is required to power the RS232C RS485 converter on the computer link cable 6C AC adapter out put capacity 5 to 6 5V DC 4W The RS232C RS485 converter FC2A MD1 for 1 N computer link communication is powered by 24V DC source or an AC adapter with 9V DC 350mA output capacity The output plug of the AC adapter applicable to both the com puter link cable 6C and the RS232C RS485 converter is shown on the right 9 5 92 1 Hg Dimensions in mm g5 5 OPENNET
556. relays are assigned to control and monitor the high speed counter operation The high speed counter current value is stored in data register D8045 and is updated every scan The value stored in D8046 is used as a reset value and the value in D8047 is used as a preset value to compare with the current value When a high speed counter reset input described later is turned on the current value in D8045 is reset to the value stored in D8046 and the high speed counter counts subsequent input pulses starting at the reset value When comparison output reset special internal relay M8010 is turned on the comparison output is turned off While the high speed counter is counting up up down status special internal relay M8130 remains on While counting down M8130 remains off When the current value exceeds the preset value comparison ON status special internal relay M8131 turns on in the next scan When the current value is reset cleared to zero current value zero clear special internal relay M8132 turns on in the next scan When a current value overflow or underflow occurs while counting up or down special internal relay M8133 or M8134 turns on in the next scan respectively While the comparison output is on comparison output sta tus special internal relay M8135 remains on While the comparison output is off M8135 remains off See page 5 12 In addition two inputs can be designated as a high speed counter gate input and reset input to control the high sp
557. reliable or auto reliable mode me T Error correction function is used to improve the communication reliability amp W amp WO Write active profile The current configuration profile is saved to a non volatile memory of the modem OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 239 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE Preparation for Using Modem Before using a modem read the user s manual for your modem Determine commands for the initialization string The required initialization string depends on the model and make of the modem The OpenNet Controller contains 18 pre determined initialization strings When D8200 8300 RS232C port communication mode selection value is changed to 1 or D8201 D8301 modem initialization string selection value is changed one of the predetermined modem initialization strings is stored to D8245 D8269 RS232C port 1 or D8345 D8369 RS232C port 2 depending on the value stored in D8201 or D8301 respectively Modem Initialization String Selection D8201 D8301 Value Applicable Modem Confirmed Operation on 0 AIWA 33 6 Kbps or less AIWA PV BW3360 1 OMRON 2 AIWA 56 Kbps 3 OMRON 56 Kbps OMRON ME5614 4 Sun Corporation Sun Corporation MS56KEF Micro Research Micro Research MR 560XL 5 Seiko Instruments Seiko Instruments MC 6630 In making this user s manual the correct operation has been confirmed on five modems li
558. result to data register D200 in every 500 scans AVRG W 51 52 53 D1 D2 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay M8125 D100 110 500 D200 M100 When the sampling end input does not turn on While sampling end input 110 is off the average maximum and minimum values are calculated in every 500 scans and stored to data registers D200 D201 and D202 respectively Sampling completion output M100 is set every 500 scans Istscan 2nd scan 500th scan 15 5 2ndscan Sampling Data 0100 512 497 je 521 A a ON In operation Special IR M8125 or ON Sampling End Input 110 or Sampling Completion Output M100 x Average Value D200 500 Maximum Value D201 530 Minimum Value D202 480 Values are set every 500 scans When the sampling end input turns When sampling end input I10 turns on the average maximum and minimum values at this point are stored to data regis ters D200 D201 and D202 respectively Sampling completion output M100 is also set When sampling end input 110 turns off sampling resumes starting at the first scan 1 151stscan 152nd scan 153rd scan 421stscan 15 ON In operation Special IR M8125 or ON Sampling End Input 110 Mr Sampling Completion Output M100 hee Average Value D200 502 Maximum Value D201 513 Minimum Value D202 485 Values set when 110 is turned on ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fa
559. rogram It is recommended that you confirm the transmission time on the actual network system Processing transmit and receive data to and from the LONWORKS network is described below Processing Transmit Data The data in link registers are updated each time the CPU module scans the user program The LONWORKS interface mod ule reads data from the link registers allocated to transmit data in the OpenNet Controller CPU module When any changes are found in the comparison between the new and old read data the interface module updates the transmit network vari ables of which the data has been changed and the new data is transmitted to the network The refresh cycle of reading from the link register to the interface module is approximately 15 msec When the data in the link register is changed within 15 msec the preceding data is not transmitted to the interface module Data communication between the CPU module and the interface module through link registers is not in synchronism with the user program scanning When the CPU is powered up the transmit data in the link registers are cleared to 0 Consequently 0 cannot be transmitted in the first cycle immediately after the CPU is powered up because the transmit network variables are not updated Processing Receive Data When the interface module receives data from the network corresponding receive network variables are updated and the updated data is stored to the receive data area of link regi
560. roller CPU module makes up a node on a LONWORKS network The node can communicate I O data with other nodes in a dis tributed network LONWoRKS Interface Module Features The LONWORKS interface module conforms to the specifications of LONWORKS that is recognized worldwide as a de facto industry standard open network so the OpenNet Controller can be linked to the LONWORKS networks consisting of LON WORKS compliant products manufactured by many different vendors such as I O terminals sensors drives operator inter faces and barcode readers The flexible configurable and interoperable features of the LONWORKS network make it possible to build expand or modify production lines with reduced cost The transmit receive data quantity can be selected from 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits in 1 byte increments LONWORKS interface module enables the OpenNet Controller CPU module to transmit 64 bits and receive 64 bits at the maximum to and from the LONWORKS network The network can be configured either in bus or free topology The total transmission distance can be 1 400m in bus topol ogy and 500m in free topology The free topology makes it possible to configure a flexible network About LON The LON Local Operating Network technology is a network control system developed by Echelon USA The LON technology is an intelligent distributed network for communication with various sensors and actuators at a maximum of 32 385 nodes LONWORKS is
561. roller is used with input signals containing noises Normal inputs require a pulse width of the filter value plus one scan time to receive input signals Input filter values have effect on the performance of the catch inputs key matrix inputs and digital read instruction Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Filter Catch tab OpenNet Function Area Setting Data Link c Module Number Selection gt Module Selection Input Filter Time Selection Input Filter Time Selection Module 1 to 15 Module 02 IN FLTO 4 ms EZ of 8 inputs IN_FLT1 0 0 5 1 2 4 8 16 32 msec IN_FLT2 4 ms Default 4 msec IN_FLT3 4 ms M Catch Input Rising Falling Edge Selection 4 Catch Input Rising Falling IN CTHO Edge Selection IN CTH1 Normal Input IN CTH2 Normal Input IN CTH3 Normal Input No effect on the input filter EN ER Module Number Selection Select the module number from 1 through 15 to designate input filter or catch input function Module number 1 is the input module mounted next to the CPU module Module number 2 is the second from the CPU module and so on Input Filter T
562. rough 26 22 Network Variables The LonTalk protocol allocates communication data to network variables NV specifically designed to simplify the proce dures for packet transmission The variables are available in input network variables and output network variables The values of output network variables are transmitted to input network variables of the target node on the network Details are described on pages 26 9 and 26 23 Network Management When setting up a LONWORKS network system the user has to install network configuration information shown below Addressing Determines each node address Binding Determines target nodes to communicate with Configuration Determines the type of message service retry cycles timeout period etc Use a network management tool from other manufacturers such as LonMaker for Windows Integration Tool to install network configuration information An external interface file XIF extension unique to each product series is needed to install the network configuration information The external interface file for the LONWORKS interface module is available from IDEC The user must keep a backup file of the information used for network management 26 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWoRKS Network System Setup Various LONWORKS compliant devices such as the LONWORKS interface modul
563. rror Code See page 24 16 D8183 h INTERBUS Master Error Location See page 24 16 24 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL idee Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 24 REMOTE 1 SYSTEM Special Internal Relays for INTERBUS Master Information Three special internal relays are assigned for the INTERBUS master station control and status information Allocation rr CPU Power No Description R W Stopped OFF M8030 INTERBUS Master Initialize When M8030 is turned on the INTER R W Maintained Cleared BUS master is initialized When the INTERBUS master detects a EP M8036 INTERBUS Master Bus NG BUS NG M8036 is turned on R Maintained Cleared When the INTERBUS master detects a peripheral fault M8037 is turned on M8037 INTERBUS Master Peripheral Fault R Maintained Cleared When critical error is found in the INTER M804 INTERBUS Master E R 8040 Me Master Error BUS master hardware software and the master is initialized M8040 or M8041 is turned on depending on error contents Cleared Cleared M8041 INTERBUS Master Error R Cleared Cleared Caution When the remote I O network is subjected to large noises the remote I O communication is affected When such a trouble occurs it is possible to initialize the remote I O master module to restore normal operation Include special data register D8178 INTERBUS master system error information i
564. rsion 0 0 to 4000 24001 designates 4000 When S144 1 Linear conversion min x High alarm lt Linear conversion max FOR atem elle When 51 14 146 linear conversion min S146 becomes high alarm RAW When 51 14 gt 51 5 linear conversion max S1 5 becomes high alarm When S1 4 linear conversion 0 0 to 4000 24001 designates 4000 S1415 Low When S144 1 Linear conversion min lt Low alarm lt Linear conversion max R W When 1415 lt 51 6 linear conversion min 5146 becomes low alarm When 1415 gt 51 5 linear conversion max 51 5 becomes low alarm s1416 Output manipulated variable 9 to 100 10001 to 10099 other values designate 100 R W upper limit s1417 Output manipulated variable o to 100 101 designates 100 R W lower limit agi Man al mode output 0 to 100 2101 designates 100 R W manipulated variable 1 to 10000 0 01 sec to 100 00 sec PEF 0 designates 0 01 sec gt 10001 designates 100 00 sec id 1 to 500 0 1 sec to 50 0 sec Eee AT CONTO ponog 0 designates 0 1 sec gt 501 designates 50 0 sec iui When S1 4 linear conversion 0 0 to 4000 24001 designates 4000 DE RISSEDAIRE When S144 1 Linear conversion min lt AT set point lt Linear conversion max R W S1 22 AT output manipulated variable 0 to 100 2101 designates 100 R W 1423 1424 1425 51426 Reserved for processing the PID instruction
565. rt control spe cial internal relay using WindLDR ES Is M8000 on Turn on M8000 using WindLDR Is the RUN LED on Note To monitor M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Monitor Enter M8000 in the Direct Monitor Dialog Note To turn on M8000 from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor and Online gt Direct Set Reset Enter M8000 in the Direct Set Reset Dialog Press Set and OK Is stop or reset input designated using Function Area Settings Turn off the stop and reset inputs Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Is the RUN LED on Call IDEC for assistance OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 9 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 3 27 10 The ERROR LED is on Is the power voltage NO 24V DC Supply the rated voltage DC power 24V DC YES NO Is the ERROR LED turned off Clear error codes using WindLDR See Note below Is the ERROR LED YES turned off See page 27 3 END Identify the error code and correct the error Note Temporary errors can be cleared to restore normal operation by clearing error codes from WindLDR See page 27 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723
566. ruction While the CPU is running the WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF compare the S1 and S2 preset data with the current day and time When the current day and time reach the presets an output designated by operand D1 is turned on and off 8125 is the in operation output special internal relay 51 62 specifies Monday through Friday The WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 8 15 on Monday through Friday The WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 17 15 on Monday through Friday WKCMP S1 92 53 D1 ON 62 815 0 00 8125 WKCMP OFF 51 62 52 1715 53 0 D1 90 With Additional Days the Week Table 53 1 When the current time reaches the hour minute preset time on the special days programmed in the WKTBL the designated output is turned on WKCMP ON or turned off WKCMP OFF In addition the designated output is turned on and off every week as designated by operand 81 of WKCMP In normal execution when the current day and time coincide with the preset day S1 and time S2 the designated output is turned on or off Execution on the special days has precedence over execution on normal days This example demonstrates operation on special days in addition to regular weekends The output is turned on from 10 18 a m to 11 03 p m on every Saturday and Sunday Without regard to the day of week the output is also turned on Decem ber 31 through January 3 and May 3 through May 5
567. s WKTBL S1 S5 S2 5S3 S4 S6 57 P 1231 101 102 103 503 504 d WKCMP SI S2 S3 Dl 62 845 2 00 22306 WKCMP Sl S2 S3 Dl 6 2 00 OFF 2 2232 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Interval Comparison in WKCMP ON OFF Instructions The WKCMP ON OFF instructions compare the current day and time with the preset values designated by operands S1 and S2 When the current day and time reach the presets the WKCMP turns on or off the output or internal relay desig nated by destination operand D1 When the WKCMP ON OFF instructions are programmed as described below interval comparison among the current day time and presets is performed to reflect the comparison result on the comparison out put With the WKCMP ON OFF instructions programmed for interval comparison the comparison output status is ensured when the CPU restarts operation after interruption the output is turned on or off as appropriate Caution The program shown below does not make an interval comparison because the WKCMP ON and WKCMP OFF instruction have separate input contacts WKCMP S1 52 53 D1 We strongly recommend the use of ON 62 830 0 00 the interval comparison to ensure WKCMP 51 52 53 D1 outputs as programmed when the OFF 62 1715 0 00 CPU is restarted Conditions for Interval Comparison with ON OFF Times on the Same Day Whe
568. s the master station requires the fol lowing time to refresh data for communication with one slave station Trf 2 3 125 msec When N words of transmit receive data have been changed during communication at 19200 bps Trf 24 167 msec x 2 N Total Simultaneous Refresh Time at Master Station for Communication with All Slave Stations Trfn When the baud rate is set at 19200 bps the master station requires the following time to refresh the transmit and receive data for communication with all slave stations that is the total of refresh times Trfn Y Trf 4 167 msec x 2 Example Refresh Time in Simultaneous Refresh Mode When data link communication is performed with such parameters as transmit words 10 receive words 10 slave stations 8 average scan time 20 msec and baud rate 19200 bps then the total refresh time Trf8 for communication with all eight slave stations in the simultaneous refresh mode will be as follows When no transmit receive data has been changed Trf8 3 125 msec x 8 225 msec When one word of transmit data has been changed at all eight slave stations Trf8 4 167 msec x 2 1 x 8 2100 0 msec When 10 words of all transmit data have been changed at all eight slave stations Trf8 4 167 msec x 2 10 8 2 400 0 msec When the baud rate is 38400 bps Trf8 for all slave stations is 400 0 2 200 0 msec 21 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com E
569. s turned on and off according to the AT control period S1 20 and AT output manipulated variable S1 22 During PID action in auto mode with the auto manual mode control relay S2 1 set to off the control output S246 is turned on and off according to the control period S1 13 and the output manipulated variable S1 1 calculated by the PID action In manual mode with the auto manual mode control relay S241 set to on the control output S2 6 is turned on and off according to the control period 5 1 13 and the manual mode output manipulated variable S 1 18 247 AT Complete Output The AT complete output control relay S27 goes on when auto tuning is complete or failed and remains on until reset Operating status codes are stored to the operating status control register S1 2 See page 20 3 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 20 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Source Operand S3 Set Point The PID action is executed to adjust the process variable 5 1 0 to the set point S3 When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required set point value of 0 through 4000 to the operand des ignated by S3 Valid operands are data register and constant When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 designate a data register as operand S3 and set a required set point value of 32768 through 32767 to the data register designate
570. s 2 13 and 2 14 Input Impedance 4 7 KQ Turn ON Time 24V DC 20 usec filter preset Turn OFF Time 24V DC 120 usec filter preset Input Filter 0 msec 0 5 msec 1 msec 2 msec 4 msec 8 msec 16 msec 32 msec Between input terminals Not isolated Internal circuit Photocoupler isolated External Load for I Interconnection Not needed Signal Determination Method Static Effect of Improper Input Connection Both sinking and sourcing input signals can be connected If any input exceeding the rated value is applied permanent damage may be caused Cable Length 3m 9 84 ft in compliance with electromagnetic immunity Nylon Connector Fujitsu Connector Connector on Mother Board BS18P SHF 1AA x 2 FCN 365P040 AU J S T Mfg Fujitsu Connector Insertion Removal Durability 50 times minimum 500 times minimum Internal Current Draw All inputs ON 50 mA 24V DC All inputs OFF 10 mA 24V DC Allowable Simultaneous ON Inputs 7096 maximum Weight approx Input Operating Range 230g 240g The input operating range of the Type 1 EN61131 input module is shown below MOD Bo Input Voltage V DC m ex Input Internal Circuit ON Area j Transition j AC Area L OFF Area 1 4 4 5 4 Input Current mA F COM O ths Input
571. s TML TIM TMH and TMS do not have power failure protection A timer with this protection can be devised using a counter instruction and special internal relay M8121 1 sec clock M8122 100 msec clock or M8123 10 msec clock Ladder Diagram Program List Timing Chart 10 sec Timer Reset 0 LODN LOD 1 2 CNT 3 Note Designate counter C2 used in this program as a keep type counter See page 5 3 7 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com CNT CUD Counter Three types of counters are available adding up counter CNT dual pulse reversible counter CDP and up down selection reversible counter CUD A total of 256 counters can be programmed in a user program Each counter must be allocated to a unique number CO through C255 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Preset Value Constant 0 to 65535 Data registers DO to D7999 Counter Allocation Number CNT adding counter CO to C255 CDP dual pulse reversible counter CO to C255 CUD up down selection reversible counter CO to C255 CNT Adding Counter When counter instructions are programmed two addresses are required The circuit for an adding UP counter must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input the CNT instruction and a counter number CO through C255 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be desig
572. scription Updated See Page D8172 INTERBUS Node 30 ID Code When initialized 244 D8173 INTERBUS Node 30 Device Level When initialized 244 D8174 INTERBUS Node 31 Logical Device No When initialized 244 D8175 INTERBUS Node 31 Length Code When initialized 244 D8176 INTERBUS Node 31 ID Code When initialized 246 D8177 INTERBUS Node 31 Device Level When initialized 24 6 D8178 INTERBUS Master System Error Information When initialized 24 10 D8179 INTERBUS Master Status Transition Number When accessed 24 10 D8180 INTERBUS Master Acknowledge Code When accessed 24 10 D8181 INTERBUS Master Additional Error Information When accessed 24 10 D8182 INTERBUS Master Error Code When accessed 24 10 D8183 INTERBUS Master Error Location When accessed 24 10 D8184 D8199 Reserved Special Data Registers for Modem Mode ES Description Updated See Page D8200 Port 1 RS232C Port Communication Mode Selection Every scan 233 D8201 Port 1 Modem Initialization String Selection Every scan 233 D8202 Reserved D8203 Port 1 Onine Mode Protocol Selection When sending receiving data 233 D8204 Port 1 Control Signal Status Every scan 17 27 D8205 Port 1 DSR Input Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 28 D8206 Port 1 DTR Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8207 Port 1 RTS Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8208 Reserved D8209 Port 1 Retry Cycles At retry 233 D8210 Por
573. se input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Examples HTOA Quantity of Digits 4 sotu H HTOA W 51 S2 DI Heen pio Quantity of Digits 3 HTONW S1 S2 DI 11 D10 020 010 Quantity of Digits 2 SOTU HTOA W S1 52 D1 H som D10 2 D20 D10 Quantity of Digits 1 sotu LJ HTOA W 51 S2 Dl pio 144 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Binary 4660 1234h Binary 4660 1234h Binary 4660 1234h Binary 4660 1234h D20 D21 D22 D23 D20 D21 D22 020 D21 D20 ASCII 49 0031h 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII 50 0032h 51 0033h 52 0034h ASCII
574. sec 80 msec 80 msec a PID PID PID PID PID PID Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed 20 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 5 5 20 PID INSTRUCTION Example Sampling period 80 msec Scan time 60 msec Sampling period gt Scan time 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec 60 msec PID PID Not PID PID PID PID Not PID PID Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed Executed 60 msec 120 msec 100 msec 80 msec 60 msec 120 msec 100 msec 40 msec 20 msec 0 msec 40 msec 20 msec 1413 Control Period The control period determines the duration of the ON OFF cycle of the control output S2 6 that is turned on and off according to the output manipulated variable S 14 1 calculated by the PID action or derived from the manual mode output manipulated variable S1 18 Set a required value of 1 through 500 to specify a control period of 0 1 sec through 50 0 sec to the data register designated by 51 13 When S1 13 stores 0 the control period is set to 0 1 sec When S113 is set to a value larger than 500 the control period is set to 50 0 sec The ON pulse duration of the control output S2 6 is determined by the product of the control period S1 13 and the output manipulated variable S1 1 Example Control period 5 sec S1413 is set to 50 Output Manipulated Variabl
575. sing until incom a Receiving data ing data is received 48 compl t From receiving incoming data until received data is converted and stored in data registers according to the receive format All data receive operation is completed and the next data receive is 64 Receive instruction complete made possible User communication receive RXD instructions are cancelled by special internal relay M8022 or 128 instruction cancel flag active M8023 If the receive status code is other than shown above an error of receive instruction is suspected See User Communication Error Code on page 17 25 Receive Data Byte Count The data register next to the operand designated for receive status stores the byte count of data received by the RXD instruction When a start delimiter end delimiter and BCC are included in the received data the byte counts for these codes are also included in the receive data byte count Example Data register D200 is designated as an operand for receive status D200 Receive status D201 lt x Receive data byte count User Communication Receive Instruction Cancel Flag Special internal relays M8022 and M8023 are used to cancel all RXD1 and RXD2 instructions respectively While the OpenNet Controller has completed receive format and is ready for receiving incoming data turning on M8022 or M8023 cancels all receive instructions for RS232C port 1
576. slave stations each station com prising an OpenNet Controller CPU module and I O modules When the data link communication is enabled the master station has 20 data registers assigned for each slave station and each slave station has 20 data registers for communication with the master station Using these data registers the master station can send and receive data of 10 data registers to and from each slave station Any particular program is not required for sending or receiving data in the data link communica tion system When data of inputs outputs internal relays timers counters or shift registers are moved to data registers using the move instructions in the user program these data can also be exchanged between the master and slave stations The MICRO MICRO3C FA 3S series PLCs and HG2A series operator interfaces can also be connected to the data link communication system Master Station Communication Selector DIP Switch Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 Slave Station 31 HG Series Operator Interface Data Link Specifications Electric Specifications Compliance with EIA RS485 Baud Ra
577. splay ii H When input is on data designated by source operand S1 is set to outputs or internal relays designated by operand Q This instruction is used to output 7 segment data to display units DISP 51 Q LAT DAT L BCD4 L Quantity of digits 1 to 5 decimal 1 to 4 hex Data phase Low or High Eight DISP instructions can be used in a user program Latch phase Display data can be 0 through 65535 FFFFh Low or High Conversion BCD or BIN Note The DISP instruction can be used on transistor out put modules only Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Data to display X X X Q Output First output number to display data X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as Q Special internal relays cannot be designated as Q When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out Conversion BCD connect BCD decimal display units BIN connect BIN hexadecimal display units Latch Phase and Data Phase Select the latch and data phases to match the phases of the display units in consideration of sink or source output of the OpenNet Controller output module Output Points The quantity of required output points is 4 plus the quantity of digits to display
578. ssive TXD instructions that cannot be executed If the input for TXD instruction is turned on while another TXD instruction is executed the subsequent TXD instruc tion is executed 2 scan times after the preceding TXD instruction is completed e Since TXD instructions are executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required User Communication Transmit Instruction Dialog Box in WindLDR Transmit x Type 51 D1 D2 C RXD Port Port 1 f Port 2 Insert Delete Edit 17 4 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Selections and Operands in Transmit Instruction Dialog Box TXD Transmit instruction RXD Receive instruction Port Port 1 Transmit user communication through RS232C port 1 TXD1 Port 2 Transmit user communication through RS232C port 2 TXD2 Enter the data to transmit in this area 51 Source 1 Transmit data can be constant values character or hexadecimal data registers or BCC D1 Destination 1 Transmit completion output can be an output or internal relay Transmit status register can be data register DO through D7998 The next data register stores the byte count of transmitted data D2 Destination 2 Transmit Data Transmit data is designated by source operand S1 using consta
579. st If a slave station is powered up later than the master station the master station does not recognize the slave sta tion To make the master station recognize the slave station in this case turn on special internal relay M8007 data link communication initialize flag at the master station see page 21 6 or in WindLDR select Online gt Monitor followed by Online gt PLC Status and click the Reset COM x button Monitor the data registers used for data link at the master and slave stations OpenNet PLC Status Run Stop Status me mme em Calendar Running Scan Time 1 Scan Time Max 46 TIM CNT Change Status PLC Type FC3A CP2K Unchanged I 54 PLC Version 33 Error Status Device Number 255 Reset COM x Initializes data link Reset PLC communication mz Protect Status m Do When the CPU is powered up the CPU checks the settings of the communication selector DIP switch and enables the selected communication mode and device number automatically After changing the settings of the communication selec tor DIP switch while the CPU is powered up press the communication enable button for more than 4 seconds until the ERROR LED blinks once then the new communication mode takes effect You have to press the communication enable button only when you change the communication mode while the CPU is powered up Do not power up the CPU while
580. sted in the table above When using other modems set a proper initialization string by referring to page 23 4 and confirm operation When using the modem in the PBX environment enter a value listed in the table above plus 10 to D8201 D8301 Try this value to establish modem connection If it does not work enter a value listed above plus 20 to D8201 D8301 Determine the type of the telephone line Consult your local telephone company whether your telephone line is for touch tone phones or pulse dial phones Deter mine the dial command according to the type of the telephone line ATDT Touch tone phones ATDP Pulse dial phones Setting Communication Parameters The default communication parameters shown below are recommended RS232C Port Communication Parameter Default Baud rate 9600 bps Start bit 1 Data bits 7 Parity Even Stop bit 1 Total 10 bits Only when the DTE connected on the communication line uses different communication parameters than the default val ues of the OpenNet Controller set the matching communication parameters in WindLDR menu bar Configure Func tion Area Settings Comm Port Click the check box for Port 1 or Port 2 and click the Comm Param button Since the total of modem communication parameters is 10 bits set the value to a total of 10 bits Baud Rate CX Data Bits 7 rl Stop Bits 1 rl Terminator Code Receive Timeout 500 ms rl 23 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER
581. ster Station Receive Data from Master Station D7000 D7009 D7010 D7019 Data Link Communication Error D8400 Note Slave station data registers D7020 through D7619 and D8401 through D8430 can be used as ordinary data regis ters OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 5 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Special Internal Relay Allocation Numbers Special internal relays M8000 through M8117 are read write internal relays used for controlling the CPU operation and communication Special internal relays M8120 through M8237 are read only internal relays primarily used for indicating the CPU statuses All special internal relays cannot be used as destinations of advanced instructions Special Internal Relays Read Write Allocation 66 Number Description CPU Stopped Power OFF M8000 Start Control Maintained Maintained M8001 1 sec Clock Reset Cleared Cleared M8002 All Outputs OFF Cleared Cleared M8003 Carry Cy or Borrow Bw Cleared Cleared M8004 User Program Execution Error Cleared Cleared M8005 Data Link Communication Error Maintained Cleared M8006 Data Link Communication Prohibit Flag Master Station Maintained Maintained M8007 Data Link Communication Stop Flag Slave Station Cleared Cleared M8010 High speed Counter Comparison
582. sters in the CPU module The refresh cycle of reading from the interface module to the link register is also approximately 15 msec and is not in syn chronism with the user program scanning When the interface module receives subsequent data within 15 msec the incom ing data is stored in the buffer and is transmitted to link registers every 15 msec The data in the link register is read each time the CPU module scans the user program dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE Function Area Setting for LonWorks Node The quantity of transmit receive data for LONWORKS network communication is specified using the Function Area Setting in WindLDR The OpenNet Controller CPU module recognizes all functional modules such as LONWORKS interface DeviceNet slave and analog I O modules automatically at power up and exchanges data with LONWORKS nodes through the link registers allocated to each node Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller CPU module after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Open Bus tab Configure Communication Master Module Check Box Check this box only when OpenNet Function
583. t Ma bk eke Xia SEFER The number of XY coordinates defining the linear relationship between X and Y can be 2 to 32 points 0 lt n lt 31 Valid Operands Operand Function I QM R T C D L Constant Repeat S1 Source 1 Format number 0 to 29 X0 through Xn X value X X X X X X X X 0 to 32767 YO through Yn Y value X X X X X X 32768 to 32767 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 When T timer or C counter is used as through Xn or YO through Yn the timer counter current value is read out S1 Format number Select a format number 0 through 29 A maximum of 30 formats for XY conversion can be set Xn X value Enter a value for the X coordinate The integer value can be 0 through 32767 If the X value becomes negative user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Yn Y value Enter a value for the Y coordinate The integer value can be 32768 through 32767 Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X When bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as Xn or Yn 16 points integer data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as Xn or Yn 1 point integer data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 19 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888
584. t Preset be ON Pulse gg Valid Invalid Valid More than one scan p time is required OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 7 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CC and gt Counter Comparison The CCz instruction is an equivalent comparison instruction for counter current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the counter value equals the given value the desired output will be initiated The CC2 instruction is an equal to or greater than comparison instruction for counter current values This instruction will constantly compare current values to the value that has been programmed in When the counter value is equal to or greater than the given value the desired output will be initiated When counter comparison instruction is programmed two addresses are required The circuit for a counter comparison instruction must be programmed in the following order the CC or CC2 instruction a counter number CO through C255 followed by a preset value to compare from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register DO through D7999 When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value Ladder Diagram CC Program List Counter to compare with Pam Adrs Preset value to compare Ladder Diag
585. t 1 Retry Interval Every scan during retry 233 D8211 Port 1 Modem Mode Status At status transition 233 D8212 D8214 Reserved D8215 D8229 Port 1 AT Command Result Code When returning result code 23 3 D8230 D8244 Port 1 AT Command String When sending AT command 23 3 08245 08269 Port 1 Initialization String When sending init string 233 D8270 D8299 Port 1 Telephone Number When dialing 233 D8300 Port 2 RS232C Port Communication Mode Selection Every scan 233 D8301 Port 2 Modem Initialization String Selection Every scan 233 D8302 Reserved D8303 Port 2 Onine Mode Protocol Selection When sending receiving data 233 D8304 Port 2 Control Signal Status Every scan 17 27 D8305 Port 2 DSR Input Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 28 D8306 Port 2 DTR Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 D8307 Port 2 RTS Output Control Signal Option When sending receiving data 17 29 08308 Reserved D8309 Port 2 Retry Cycles At retry 23 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Allocation 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Number Description Updated See Page D8310 Port 2 Retry Interval Every scan during retry 23 3 D8311 Port 2 Modem Mode Status At status transition 23 3 D8312 D8314 Reserved D8315 D8329 Port
586. t Controller can transmit and receive data DSR signal Transmit receive Impossible Possible Impossible D8205 D8305 3 When DSR is on the OpenNet Controller can transmit data This function is usually called Busy Control and is used for controlling transmission to a remote terminal with a slow processing speed such as a printer When the remote terminal is busy data input to the remote terminal is restricted ON DSR signal Possible D8205 D8305 4 When DSR is off the OpenNet Controller can transmit data ON DSR signal OFF Possible Same as D8205 D8305 0 DSR is not used for data flow control Trans mit receive Impossible Impossible Transmit Impossible Impossible Transmit Impossible Impossible D8205 D8305 5 or more 17 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Output Control Signal Option D8206 08306 Special data registers D8206 and D8306 are used to control the DTR data terminal ready signal to indicate the OpenNet Controller operating status or transmitting receiving status The control signal option can be used only for the user communication through the RS232C port 1 or port 2 D8206 D8306 0 system default While the OpenNet Controller is running is on whether the OpenNet Controller is transmitting or receivin
587. t Q mE Output COM pid 1 Varistor Protection circuit C can be used for DC load power circuits Use a diode with the following ratings Reverse withstand voltage Power voltage of the load circuit x 10 More than the load current Forward current OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL COMO Protection circuit D can be used for both DC load power circuits 2 17 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 2 MODULE SPECIFICATIONS 16 point Transistor Sink Output Module Specifications Type No FC3A T16K1 FC3A T16K3 Terminal Arrangement See Terminal Arrangement charts on pages 2 24 and 2 25 Rated Load Voltage 24V DC Operating Load Voltage Range 19 to 30V DC Rated Load Current 0 5A per output point 0 625A per output point at 30V DC Maximum Load Current 5A per common line at 30V DC Voltage Drop ON Voltage 1V maximum voltage between COM and output terminals when output is on Inrush Current 5A maximum Leakage Current 0 1 mA maximum Clamping Voltage 39V 1V Maximum Lamp Load 10W Inductive Load L R 10 msec 30V DC 0 5 Hz External Current Draw 100 mA maximum 24V DC power voltage at the V terminal Between output terminal and internal circuit Photocoupler isolated Between output terminals Not isolated Screw Terminal Block Nylon Connector Connector on Mother Board M
588. t and stop operation Note If M8000 is off the OpenNet Controller does not start operation when power is turned on To start operation turn power on and turn M8000 on by clicking the Start button in WindLDR The response time of the OpenNet Controller at powerup depends on such factors as the contents of the user program data link usage and system setup The table below shows an approximate time delay before starting operation after powerup Response time when no data link and remote 1 modules are used Program Size After powerup the CPU starts operation in 1K words Approx 1 second 4K words Approx 2 seconds 8K words Approx 3 seconds 16K words Approx 5 seconds Order of Powerup and Powerdown To ensure I O data transfer power up the I O mod ules first followed by the CPU module or power up the CPU and I O modules at the same time When shutting down the system power down the CPU first 1 EC followed by I O modules or power down the CPU gt gt r and I O modules at the same time 0 0 sec or more I O Module Power ON CPU Module Power or Start Stop Operation Using Stop Input and Reset Input Any input IO through 1597 can be designated as a stop or reset input using Function Area Settings The procedure for selecting stop and reset inputs is described on page 5 1 Note When using a stop and or reset input to start and stop operation make sure that start control special intern
589. t manipulated variable S 1 1 is reduced to zero When PID action is selected with operation mode S1 3 set to 1 AT PID the PID action follows immediately When the linear conversion is disabled S1 4 set to 0 set a required AT set point of 0 through 4000 to the data register designated by S121 When S1 21 stores a value larger than 4000 the AT set point is set to 4000 When the linear conversion is enabled S1 4 set to 1 set a required AT set point of 232768 through 32767 to the data reg ister designated by 51 21 The AT set point must be larger than or equal to the linear conversion minimum value 5 1 6 and must be smaller than or equal to the linear conversion maximum value 5 1 5 In the direct control action see page 20 10 set the AT set point S1 21 to a value sufficiently smaller than the process variable S4 at the start of the auto tuning In the reverse control action set the AT set point S1 21 to a value sufficiently larger than the process variable S4 at the start of the auto tuning 1422 AT Output Manipulated Variable The AT output manipulated variable specifies the amount of the output manipulated variable 0 through 100 during auto tuning When using auto tuning set a required AT output manipulated variable of 0 through 100 to the data register desig nated by S122 When S1 22 stores a value larger than 100 the AT output manipulated variable is set to 100 While auto tuning is executed the specified value o
590. t startup It is also possible to designate all or a block of consecutive internal relays or shift register bits as keep types Counter current values and data register values are usually maintained at powerup It is also possible to designate all or a block of consecutive counters and data registers as clear types When the CPU is stopped these statuses and values are maintained When the CPU is reset by turning on a designated reset input these statues and values are cleared despite the settings in the Keep dialog box shown below The keep clear settings in this dialog box have effect when restarting the CPU Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Keep tab The Keep page appears OpenNet Function Area Setting xi Module ID Filter Catch Data Link C gt Run Stop m Internal Relay Keep Designation All Clear All Keep Keep Range Shift Register Keep Designation All Clear All Keep Keep Range Counter Clear Designation All Keep C All Clear C Clear Range Data Register Clear Designation All Keep C All Clear Clear Range OPENNET CONTROLLER USE
591. t two points has priority in these cases The line between points X0 YO and Y 1 that is the line between 0 100 and 100 0 has priority in defining the relationship for Y to X conversion X Y 100 Therefore if the value in data register D95 is 40 the value assigned to D30 is 60 not 180 Exactly the same two line segments might also be defined by the XYFS instruction except that the point 300 100 could be assigned first as YO and the point 100 0 could be defined next as Y1 In this case this linear relationship would have priority In this case if the value in data register D95 is 40 the value assigned to D30 is 180 not 60 dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 195 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS AVRG Average ss When input is on sampling data designated by oper and S1 is processed according to sampling conditions designated by operands S2 and 53 HF AVRG 51 52 53 1 2 KKKKK KKKKK When sampling is complete average maximum and minimum values are stored to 3 consecutive operands starting with operand designated by D1 then sam pling completion output designated by operand D2 is turned on This instruction is effective for data processing of analog input values A maximum of 10 AVRG instructions can be programmed in a user program Valid Op
592. ta register No D10 D11 60221 Transmit digits 2 D12 0038h Conversion type BCD to ASCII Data of data registers starting with D10 is converted in BCD to ASCII and is transmitted according to the designated repeat cycles 1 Repeat cycles 2 ASCII data ER pam Ee a 31h 32h 33h 34h Repeat 1 D10 000Ch L 00012 Repeat 2 D11 0022h Decimal value 00034 BCD to ASCII conversion 2 Repeat cycles 3 ASCII data rs 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h m R t1 D10 Joooch 2 100012 t2 11 0022h 2 00034 Repeat 3 D12 0038h Decimal value 100056 BCD to ASCII conversion dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS BCC Block Check Character Block check characters can be appended to the transmit data The start position for the BCC calculation can be selected from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC calculated in either or ADD can be 1 or 2 digits Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th ica 77 a BCC calculation start position can be selected from this range i BCC i 2 digits N A BCC calculation range
593. ta registers to the modem turn M8055 M8085 on then the ATZ command is issued subsequently Default Initialization String ATEOQOV1 amp D2 amp C I VOXAQ3 VO A0 amp MS N2S0 2 amp WI CR LF As described in the Originate Mode the initialization string can be modified to match your modem For details of modify ing the initialization string see page 23 4 When the initialization string has been sent successfully internal relay M8065 M8095 is turned on If the initialization string fails internal relay M8075 M8105 is turned on When the subsequent ATZ command is also completed successfully M8066 M8096 will also be turned on ATZ Resetting the Modem in Answer Mode The default initialization string specifies to be stored in the non volatile memory of the modem using the amp W command The initialization string is restored when the modem is powered up or when the ATZ command is issued The OpenNet Controller sends the ATZ command to the modem following the initialization string when M8055 M8085 is turned on The ATZ command can also be issued separately by turning M8056 M8086 on ATZ Command ATZ CR LF When the ATZ command has been completed successfully internal relay M8066 M8096 is turned on If the ATZ com mand fails internal relay M8076 M8106 is turned on If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem M8055 M8085 may be skipped Start with M8056 M8086 t
594. tation 14 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8414 Slave Station 15 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8415 Slave Station 16 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8416 Slave Station 17 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8417 Slave Station 18 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8418 Slave Station 19 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8419 Slave Station 20 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8420 Slave Station 21 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8421 Slave Station 22 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8422 Slave Station 23 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8423 Slave Station 24 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8424 Slave Station 25 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8425 Slave Station 26 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8426 Slave Station 27 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8427 Slave Station 28 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8428 Slave Station 29 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8429 Slave Station 30 Communication Error at Master Station When error occurred 214 D8430 Slave Stati
595. tatus of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the LSB Bits to rotate 1 MSB D10 LSB Before rotation 010 40966 0k 1 o 1 o o o 0 0 o o oo o 1 1 o M8003 MSB D10 LSB After first rotation 010 16396 1 lt 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 MSB D10 LSB After second rotation D10 32793 0 110100 110 0 101011010 101111101011 M8003 Data Type Double Word Each time input I1 is turned on 32 bit data of data registers D10 and P 50TU ARTEEN 51 E R D11 is rotated to the left by 1 bit as designated by operand bits The status of the MSB is set to a carry special internal relay M8003 and the carry status is set to the LSB Bits to rotate 1 Before rotation 010 011 2 684 788 742 CY MSB 010 011 15 0 j lt 1 o 1 oj o o o o o o o o o 1 1 o 1 o 1 oj o o o o o o o o o 1 1 0 lt M8003 Rotate to the left After rotation D10 D11 1 074 610 188 CY MSB 010 011 15 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 M8003 13 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info
596. tch Data Reading Time 2 scan times x Quantity of digits 2 Adjusting Scan Time The DGRD instruction requires a scan time longer than the filter time plus 4 msec Minimum Required Scan Time Scan time gt Filter time 4 msec When the actual scan time is too short to execute the DGRD instruction use the constant scan function The default value of the input filter is 4 msec When the input filter time is set to default set a value of 8 or more in msec to special data register D8022 constant scan time preset value See page 5 20 When the input filter time is changed set a proper value to D8022 to make sure of the minimum required scan time shown above dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 16 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 16 INTERFACE INSTRUCTIONS Example DGRD The following example demonstrates a program to read data from four digital switches IDEC s DF 031D K to a data register in the OpenNet Controller CPU module E DGRD Q D1 BCD4 10 Q0 D10 Wiring Diagram 16 DC Input Module FC3A N16B1 o COM COM 10 11 12 13 l4 15 16 17 COM COM 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 16 1 16 Transistor Sink Output Module Digital Switches OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 10 10
597. te 19 200 or 38 400 bps Synchronization Start stop synchronization Start bit 1 Data bits 7 Parity Even Stop bit 1 Communication Cable Shielded twisted pair cable core wire diameter 0 9 mm 0 035 minimum Maximum Cable Length 200m 656 feet total M aximum Slave Stations 31 slave stations Refresh Mode Separate or simultaneous refresh Transmit Receive Data 0 through 10 words each for transmission and receiving per slave station Special Internal Relay M8005 M8007 communication control and error M8140 M8176 communication completion for each slave station M8177 communication completion for all slave stations Data Register D7000 D7619 for transmit receive data Special Data Register D8400 D8430 for communication error code OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 214 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Data Link System Setup To set up a data link system connect the RS485 terminals A B and G on every OpenNet Controller CPU module using a shielded twisted pair cable as shown below The total length of the cable for the data link system can be extended up to 200 meters 656 feet Master Station Set communication selector DIP switch 1 to ON at all master and slave stations to select the data link mode for the RS485 port
598. tect User Program Protect Mode Protect Code Code Confirm 3 Click the Enable Key Matrix Input check box and enter required data in the areas shown below First Input No Enter the first input number used for the key matrix Inputs Enter the quantity of input points used for the key matrix First Output No Enter the first output number used for the key matrix Outputs Enter the quantity of output points used for the key matrix First IR for Storing Information Enter the first internal relay number used for storing key matrix input information Key Matrix Dialog Box The screen display shown above is an example to configure a key matrix of 6 input points and 5 output points starting with input IO and output QO The key matrix information is stored to 30 internal relays starting with M100 5 16 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Key Matrix Circuit The key matrix structure includes sequentially numbered input points along the top and sequentially numbered output points along the side The I O connecting blocks include a diode and a switch as shown below Transistor Sink Output Module 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS DC Input Module ET 05 Internal Relay Allocation The example of a key matrix configuration shown on page 5 16 stores input information to 30 internal rela
599. tents and the master module is initialized See page 24 11 Tu gt 1 scan time M8120 Initialize Pulse M8120 When the CPU starts operation M8120 turns on for a period of one scan Start M8121 1 sec Clock 500 msec 500 msec While M8001 is off M8121 generates clock pulses in 1 sec incre ments with a duty ratio of 1 1 500 msec on and 500 msec off M8121 1 sec 6 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com M8122 100 msec Clock 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100 msec increments Senge whether M8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 50 msec on 8122 and 50 msec off M8123 10 msec Clock H 100 msec 5 msec 5 msec M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10 msec increments whether M8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 5 msec on M8123 and 5 msec off M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed 4 10 msec gt When timer or counter preset values are changed in the CPU module RAM M8124 turns on When a user program is transferred to the CPU from WindLDR or when the changed timer counter preset value is cleared M8124 turns off M8125 In operation Output M8125 remains on while the CPU is running dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Special Data Re
600. ter three attempts then the error code is set to the data registers for data link communication error Since the error code is not communicated between the master and slave stations error codes must be cleared individually Master Station Data Link Communication Error Data Data Link Communication Error Data D8400 Slave station 1 communication error D8416 Slave station 17 communication error D8401 Slave station 2 communication error D8417 Slave station 18 communication error D8402 Slave station 3 communication error D8418 Slave station 19 communication error D8403 Slave station 4 communication error D8419 Slave station 20 communication error D8404 Slave station 5 communication error D8420 Slave station 21 communication error D8405 Slave station 6 communication error D8421 Slave station 22 communication error D8406 Slave station 7 communication error D8422 Slave station 23 communication error D8407 Slave station 8 communication error D8423 Slave station 24 communication error D8408 Slave station 9 communication error D8424 Slave station 25 communication error D8409 Slave station 10 communication error D8425 Slave station 26 communication error D8410 Slave station 11 communication error D8426 Slave station 27 communication error D8411 Slave station 12 communication error D8427 Slave station 28 communication error D8412 Slave station 13 communication error D8428 Slave station 29 communication
601. ternal relay M8000 is turned on 5 Click the PLC Stop button to stop operation then the start control special internal relay M8000 is turned off The PLC operation can also be started and stopped while WindLDR is in the monitor mode To access the Start or Stop button select Online Monitor and select Online PLC Status Run Stop Status Note Special internal relay M8000 is a keep type internal relay and stores the status when power is turned off M8000 retains its previous status when power is turned on again However when the backup battery is dead M8000 loses the stored status and can be turned on or off as programmed when the OpenNet Controller is powered up The selection is made in Configure Function Area Settings Run Stop Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error See page 52 The backup duration is approximately 30 days typical at 25 C after the backup battery is fully charged 4 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 4 OPERATION BASICS Start Stop Operation Using the Power Supply The OpenNet Controller can be started and stopped by turning power on and off 1 Power up the OpenNet Controller to start operation See page 4 1 2 If the OpenNet Controller does not start check that start control special internal relay M8000 is on using WindLDR If M8000 is off turn it on See page 4 2 3 Turn power on and off to star
602. the CPU module operating status Input RUM 0 CPU stopped 1 CPU in operation 5 unused Error signal to the CPU 0 The Neuron Chip cannot write data to registers When modifying the appli 6 Output Failure cation program make sure to turn this pin to 0 when an unrecoverable critical error occurs 1 Normal operation 7 10 unus ed Registers The OpenNet Controller CPU module exchanges communication data through the registers in the LONWORKS interface module The register addresses are listed in the table below Data Flow Direction Address Name CPU Interface Module Module Data register C000h C007h 2 Allocate network variables to these 8 bytes addresses to exchange data between the coosh coorh Data register ssi CPU and interface modules 8 bytes C010h C011h reserved Do not write data into this area C012h Error data Use this address to read error data from the lt interface module Use this address to store the byte counts of C013h 1 counts transmit receive data selected in WindLDR Function Area Settings CO14h CO017h reserved Do not write data into this area Use this address to write the user applica C018h Software version es tion software version number use any num ber other than 00h Use this address to write the user program i Sonn EApanetonamaduedo module ID use a number 40h through 7Fh CO1Ah CFFFh reserved Do
603. the OpenNet Controller and the printer may not work correctly and may be damaged Description of Operation The data of counter C2 and data register D30 are printed every minute A printout example is shown on the right Programming Special Data Register Special data register D8305 is used to monitor the BUSY signal and to control the transmission of print data Special DR Description User communication mode not modem mode While DSR is on not busy the CPU sends data While DSR is off busy the CPU stops data transmission If the off duration exceeds a limit approx 5 sec a trans mission busy timeout error will occur and the remaining data is not sent The transmit status data register stores an error code See pages 17 9 and 17 25 Printout Ex ample PRINT TEST 11H 00M CNT2 0050 D030 3854 PRINT TEST 11H 01M CNT2 0110 D030 2124 The OpenNet Controller monitors the DSR signal to prevent the receive buffer of the printer from overflowing For the DSR signal see page 17 28 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 31 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Setting Communication Selector DIP Switch Since this example uses the RS232C port 2 turn on communication selector DIP switch 3 to select the user communica tion mode See page 17 2 Setting Communi
604. the memory card is checked 0200h Protect Output Overload Error This error is issued when a protect transistor output is overloaded during operation then only the overloaded output is forced off When this error occurs remove the cause of the overload then the output restores normal operation automati cally Clear the error code using WindLDR on a computer 0400h Calendar Clock Error This error indicates that the real time calendar clock in the OpenNet Controller CPU module has an error caused by invalid clock data due to voltage drop or by erroneous quartz oscillator operation Clear the error code and set the calendar clock data using WindLDR on a computer If the error continues the OpenNet Control ler CPU module has to be replaced See Troubleshooting Diagram on page 27 21 0800h I Bus Error This error indicates that an I O module has a trouble If this error occurs frequently or normal I O function is not restored automatically the I O module has to be replaced This error also occurs when the I O module mounting position is changed with Module ID Operation Selection is enabled in the Function Area Settings Restore the original I O module mounting positions or disable the Module ID Operation Selection and download the user program See page 5 5 1000h INTERBUS Master Access Error This error indicates that a remote I O module has a trouble If this error occurs frequently or normal remote I O function is not restored automatical
605. the open control standard for buildings factories houses and transportation systems Now LONWORKS networks are widely used in major building automation BA process automation PA and many other industries in the world Communication between application programs installed in LonWorks compliant nodes is performed using the LonTalk protocol based on the reference model of the Open System Interconnection OST issued by the International Standard Organization ISO LON LoNWoRks LonBuilder Echelon Neuron LonTalk and 3150 are registered trademarks of Echelon Corporation regis tered in the United States and other countries LonMaker is a trademark of Echelon Corporation dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 26 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 26 LONWORKS INTERFACE MODULE LoNWoRKS Network Components Physical Layer Transceiver The LONWORKS interface module incorporates an FTT 10A Free Topology Twisted Pair Transceiver for the physical layer The FTT 10A transceiver is a transformer isolated type and has the following specifications Name Communication Transmission Transmission Distance Topolo Media Rate 500m maximum total wire length Free FTT 10A Transceiver Twisted pair cable 400m maximum node to node distance 1 150m Bus Note The transmission distance is the value when Level 4 AWG22 cables and proper terminators are used LonTa
606. through Q17 Q20 through Q27 Q30 through Q37 3 Functional M odule L100 through L127 4 Output Module 2 Q40 through Q47 Q50 through Q57 5 Output Module 3 120 through 127 130 through 137 6 Input Module 2 140 through 147 150 through 157 160 through 167 170 through 177 Input and output modules may be grouped together for easy identification of I O numbers The I O numbers are allocated automatically starting with IO and QO at the module nearest to the CPU module When the I O modules are relocated the I O numbers are renumbered automatically The location of functional modules does not affect the I O operand numbers Functional M odule Operands Functional modules are analog input analog output DeviceNet slave and LONWORKS interface modules A maximum of 7 functional modules can be mounted with one CPU module in a system setup of 15 modules at the maximum Operand numbers are automatically allocated to each functional module in the order of increasing distance from the CPU module starting with L100 L200 L300 through L700 The location of digital I O modules between CPU and functional modules does not affect the operand numbers for the functional modules Functional Module Operand Numbers Allocation Number Description L 00 through L 07 Data area Data used in each functional module such as analog data L 10 through L 17 Status area Status of each functional module L 20 through L 27 Reserved area Reserved for system
607. timer error 27 4 week compare OFF 15 1 compare ON 15 1 programmer instructions 15 1 table 15 2 WindLDR 4 4 clearing error codes 27 2 programming high speed counter 5 11 RXD instruction 17 22 transmit receive data 25 9 26 11 TXD instruction 17 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL setting calendar clock 15 7 communication parameters 17 3 wiring 3 1 analog input output 3 8 data link 3 7 DeviceNet slave module 25 5 high speed counter 5 13 input 3 5 LonWorks interface module 26 6 output 3 6 power supply 3 9 WKCMP OFF 15 1 WKCMP ON 15 1 WKTBL 15 2 write communication command execution M8014 6 10 writing receive data 26 21 XCHG 9 13 XIF 26 2 26 12 No 26 12 XORW 12 1 XY format set 19 1 XYFS 19 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com
608. ting Operating Reset Reset input ON OFF OFF Reset to zero OFF Reset to zero Reset to zero Reset to zero Stop Stop input ON OFF Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Restart Unchanged Unchanged OFF Reset to zero Reset to preset Unchanged Note Link registers used as outputs are turned off like outputs Communication Function Communication Port RS232C Port 1 RS232C Port 2 RS485 Port Standards EIA RS232C EIA RS232C EIA RS485 Computer link 19 200 bps Baud Rate 19 200 bps 19 200 bps Data link 38 400 bps Maintenance Communication Possible Possible Possible User Communication Possible Possible Impossible Data Link Communication Impossible Impossible Possible Quantity of Slave Stations 31 Maximum Cable Length Special cable Special cable 200m Isolation between Power Supply and Not isolated Not isolated Not isolated Communication Port Recommended cable for data link Twisted pair shielded cable with a minimum core wire diameter of 0 9 mm Conductor resistance 85 Q km maximum shield resistance 20 Q km maximum Communication Selector DIP Switch Settings DIP Switch No Function Setting 1 RS485 port communication mode ON Data link mode OFF Maintenance mode 2 RS232C port 1 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 3 RS232C port 2 communication mode ON User communication mode OFF Maintenance mode 4to8 Device number selection Device numbers 0 through 31 for the CPU
609. tion Between output terminal and internal circuit Photocoupler isolated Between output terminals Not isolated Connector on Mother Board Screw Terminal Block MSTBA2 5 20 G5 08 Phoenix Contact Connector Insertion Removal Durability 100 times minimum Internal Current Draw All outputs ON All outputs OFF 70 mA 24V DC 40 mA 24V DC Output Delay Turn ON time 500 usec maximum Turn OFF time 500 usec maximum Protecting Operation Protection is activated by element heating when a short circuit occurs Only the overloaded output is forced off Not in compliance with IEC1131 Protected outputs and Short circuit proof outputs Restarting M ethod Remove the cause of overload then the output protection is reset automatically Reset time 10 msec maximum Short circuit Current 2 5A maximum at power voltage 24V DC load resistance 10 maximum Allowable Short circuit Current 60 sec at power voltage 24V DC load resistance 10 mQ maximum M aximum M odules 7 transistor protect source output modules can be mounted at the maximum CPU Module Operation Special data register D8030 to D8036 assigned to 1st through 7th module stores 1 to indicate the slot where an overload occurred The ERROR LED also turns on Weight approx Output Internal Circuit E COM Y 220g COM terminals are connected together internally
610. tion 29 M8155 Slave Station 14 M8175 Slave Station 30 M8156 Slave Station 15 M8176 Slave Station 31 M8157 Slave Station 16 M8177 All Slave Station Communication Completion Relay When data link communication with all slave stations is complete in either separate or simultaneous refresh mode special internal relay M8177 at the master station is turned on for one scan time M8177 at slave stations does not go on 21 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 21 DATA LINK COMMUNICATION Programming WindLDR The Data Link page in the Function Area Settings must be programmed for the data link master station Only when baud rate of 38400 bps is used the baud rate must also be selected for slave stations on the Data Link page of WindLDR Any other settings are not needed for slave stations Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Click the Comm Port tab and make sure that the check box to the left of Enable Communication Format Selection for the Data Link Port RS485 is unchecked If the check box is on click the check box to delete the check mark so that you can proceed with the following procedures
611. tion Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes gt Module Transmit Receive Quantity of Nodes Connected When using the remote I O mas ter module specify the quantity of nodes from 1 through 32 Transmit Receive Bytes 0 to 8 default 8 bytes This value determines the data quantity 0 through 8 bytes 64 bits to communicate with the DeviceNet master module For the example on the next page select 8 transmit bytes and 4 receive bytes for Module 1 3 Select transmit and receive data bytes for module position 1 through 7 where the DeviceNet slave module is mounted 4 Click the OK button and download the user program to the OpenNet Controller 25 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 25 DEVICENET SLAVE MODULE Programming Transmit Receive Data Using WindLDR E The OpenNet interface module such as DeviceNet slave or LONWORKS interface module exchanges data between the open network and the link registers in the CPU module allocated to the OpenNet interface module depending on the slot where the OpenNet interface module is mounted To create a communication program for an OpenNet interface module first determine the slot number where the OpenNet interface module is mounted and make a program to write data to link registers allocated to transm
612. tion areas overlap each other then the source data in the overlapped area is also changed Source D10 through D13 Repeat 4 H SOTU H MOV W uo s as Destination D12 through D15 Repeat 4 Before Execution 15 Execution 2nd Execution 10 1 10 1 10 1 11 2 11 2 11 2 012 3 D12 1 D12 1 D13 4 D13 2 D13 2 D14 D14 3 D14 1 D15 D15 4 D15 2 94 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL ider Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 9 MOVE INSTRUCTIONS MOVN Move Not E Sek cse When input is on 16 or 32 bit data from operand designated by S1 is H MOVN 51 8 D1 R REP inverted bit by bit moved to operand designated by D1 Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 First operand number to move X X X X X X X X X 1 99 D1 Destination 1 First operand number to move to X A X X X X X 1 99 For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value w
613. tion data from the master station for 10 seconds or more in the data link system M8007 turns on When a slave station does not receive data in 10 seconds after initializing the data link system M8007 also turns on at the slave station When the slave station receives correct communication data M8007 turns off M8140 M8176 Slave Station Communication Completion Relay for Separate Refresh Mode Special internal relays M8140 through M8176 are used to indicate the completion of data refresh when the data link com munication is performed in the separate refresh mode When data link communication with a slave station is complete a special internal relay assigned for the slave station is turned on for one scan time at both the master and slave station Special Internal Relay Slave Station Number Special Internal Relay Slave Station Number M8140 Slave Station 1 M8160 Slave Station 17 M8141 Slave Station 2 M8161 Slave Station 18 M8142 Slave Station 3 M8162 Slave Station 19 M8143 Slave Station 4 M8163 Slave Station 20 M8144 Slave Station 5 M8164 Slave Station 21 M8145 Slave Station 6 M8165 Slave Station 22 M8146 Slave Station 7 M8166 Slave Station 23 M8147 Slave Station 8 M8167 Slave Station 24 M8150 Slave Station 9 M8170 Slave Station 25 M8151 Slave Station 10 M8171 Slave Station 26 M8152 Slave Station 11 M8172 Slave Station 27 M8153 Slave Station 12 M8173 Slave Station 28 M8154 Slave Station 13 M8174 Slave Sta
614. tion mode Diagram 12 The catch input function cannot receive short pulses Diagram 13 The calendar clock does not operate correctly Diagram 14 Remote 1 communication is impossible and the FAIL LED is on Diagram 15 Remote 1 communication has stopped Bus NG Diagram 16 The RDY RUN LED flashes and the FAIL LED is on The PF peripheral fault LED on the remote 1 0 master module is on Diagram 17 ipe OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 27 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Diagram 1 The POWER LED does not go on Is power supplied Supply power 15 the POWER LED on Is the power voltage 24V DC Supply the rated voltage DC power type 24V DC 15 the POWER LED on Call IDEC for assistance END 27 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com Troubleshooting Diagram 2 The RUN LED does not go on Is the ERROR LED on Click the Start PLC button in WindLDR on a computer con nected to the OpenNet Controller Is the RUN indicator on 27 TROUBLESHOOTING See Troubleshooting Diagram 3 The ERROR LED is on Note To access the Start Button from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Download Program Monitor M8000 sta
615. tion mode while the telephone line is connected insert internal relay M8077 M8107 line connection as an input condition for TXD or instruction After the telephone line is connected make sure of an approximately 1 second interval before executing the TXD or RXD instruction until the telephone line connection stabilizes Note When the OpenNet Controller is stopped while the telephone line is connected the RS232C port protocol changes to the maintenance protocol even if D8203 D8303 is set to 1 user protocol in the on line mode then the telephone line remains connected When the OpenNet Controller is restarted the user protocol is enabled again Disconnect M ode The disconnect mode includes only one command to disconnect the telephone line To disconnect the telephone line turn on internal relay M8053 M8083 The telephone line is disconnected by turning off DTR signal since the initialization string includes the amp D2 command While a modem command is executed another command cannot be executed If two or more start internal relays are turned on simultaneously an error will result and error code 61 is stored in modem mode status data register D8211 D8311 see page 23 8 When the disconnect command has been completed successfully internal relay M8063 M8093 is turned on If the discon nect command fails internal relay M8073 M8103 is turned on The disconnect command is determined successful when the DCD signal is
616. tion results S2 7 AT complete output Goes on when AT is complete or failed and remains on until reset S2 0 Control Action When auto tuning is executed with the operation mode S1 3 set to 1 AT PID or 2 AT the control action is deter mined automatically When auto tuning results in a direct control action the control action control relay designated by S2 0 is turned on When auto tuning results in a reverse control action the control action control relay designated by 52 0 is turned off The PID action is executed according to the derived control action which remains in effect during the PID action Process Variable 51 0 When auto tuning is not executed with the operation mode A S143 set to 0 PID turn on or off the control action control relay S2 0 to select a direct or reverse control action respec tively before executing the PID instruction Direct Control Action In the direct control action the manipulated variable D1 is increased while the process variable S1 0 is larger than the Set Point S3 set point S3 Temperature control for cooling is executed in the direct control action Time x Process Variable 51 0 In the reverse control action the manipulated variable D1 is increased while the process variable 5 1 0 is smaller than the set point S3 Temperature control for heating is executed in the reverse control action Set 5 3 In either the direct r
617. to 60 characters can be stored as many as the modem capacity allows Use the MACRO instruction on WindLDR to set the telephone number and execute the MACRO instruction before turning on start internal relays M8050 M8052 or M8080 M8082 Example of Dial Command ATDT123 CR LF and LF are appended at the beginning and end of the dial command automatically by the system program and need not be stored in data registers To program the telephone number of the example above store character T for touch tone phone or P for pulse or rotary phone followed by the telephone number and ASCII value ODh for to data registers start ing with D8270 D8270 5431h 54h zu 31h 1 D8271 3233h 32h 2 3 08272 O0DOOh ODh characters subsequent to are ignored As described above when start internal relay M8050 M8080 is turned on the initialization string is sent followed by the ATZ command and the dial command When start internal relay 805 1 8081 is turned on ATZ command is sent followed by the dial command The dial command can also be sent separately by turning on start internal relay M8052 M8082 If retry cycles are set to data register D8209 D8309 the dial command is repeated at retry intervals specified by D8210 D8310 default 90 seconds as many as the specified retry cycles default 3 cycl
618. to convert data format among binary BCD and ASCII Data divide and data combine instructions are used for conversion between byte data and word data HTOB Hex to BCD S1 gt DI HTOB a over S1 D1 a When input is 16 or 32 bit data designated by 51 is converted into BCD and stored to the destination designated by operand D1 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 for the double word data type Valid Operands Operand Function QM T C D L Constant Repeat 1 Source 1 Binary data to convert X X X X X X X X X D1 Destination 1 Destination to store conversion results X A X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S1 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for the source operand are 0 through 9999 270Fh for the word data type and 0 through 9999 9999 5 5 EOFFh for the double word data type Make sure that the source designated by S1 is within the valid value range If the source data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED
619. to move from X X 2 Source 2 Offset for S1 X X A X X X X X 1 Destination 1 Base address to move to X A X 2 Destination 2 Offset for D1 X X X X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as 52 or D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as S2 or D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 or D2 the timer counter current value is read out Make sure that the last source data determined by S1 S2 and the last destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execu tion error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and ERROR LED Unlike the IMOV and IMOVN instructions offset operands S2 and D2 must always be designated Valid Data Types W word I integer D double word L long X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points are used When a word operand such as timer counter D data register or L link register is designated as the S2 or D2 1 point is used xample IBMV SOTU IBMV W 51 S2 D1 D2 M10 D10 930 MIO D10 gt Q30 C5 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand S2 and
620. tore conversion results X X X X X For the valid operand number range see page 6 2 A Internal relays MO through M2557 can be designated as D1 Special internal relays cannot be designated as D1 When T timer or C counter is used as S2 the timer counter current value is read out When T timer or C counter is used as D1 the data is written in as a preset value which can be 0 through 65535 Valid values for source S1 data to convert are 30h through 39h Make sure that the values for each source designated by S1 and the quantity of digits designated by S2 are within the valid range If the S1 or S2 data is out of the valid range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED Since the ATOB instruction is executed in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU or SOTD instruction should be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X E When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type are used When a word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination point word data type is used dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 14 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 14 DATA C
621. tores 0 the AT sampling period is set to 0 01 sec When S1 19 stores a value larger than 10000 the AT sampling period is set to 100 00 sec 20 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Set the AT sampling period to a long value to make sure that the current process variable is smaller than or equal to the pre vious process variable during direct control action S2 0 is on or that the current process variable is larger than or equal to the previous process variable during reverse control action S2 0 is off 51 20 AT Control Period The AT control period determines the duration of the ON OFF cycle of the control output S2 6 during auto tuning For operation of the control output see Control Period on page 20 7 When using auto tuning set a required value of 1 through 500 to specify an AT control period of 0 1 sec through 50 0 sec to the data register designated by 51 20 When S1 20 stores 0 the AT control period is set to 0 1 sec When 5 1 20 stores a value larger than 500 the AT control period is set to 50 0 sec 51 21 AT Set Point While auto tuning is executed the AT output manipulated variable S1 22 is outputted to the output manipulated variable S1 1 until the process variable S1 0 reaches the AT set point S1 21 When the process variable S1 0 reaches the AT set point S1 21 auto tuning is complete and the outpu
622. toring the OpenNet Controller operation CHAPTER 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Stop reset inputs run stop selection at memory backup error keep designation for internal relays shift registers counters and data registers Also included are module ID selection and run stop operation upon disparity input filter catch input high speed counter key matrix input and user program read write protection CHAPTER 6 ALLOCATION NUMBERS Allocation numbers available for the OpenNet Controller CPU module to program basic and advanced instructions Spe cial internal relays and special data registers are also described CHAPTER 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Programming of the basic instructions available operands and sample programs CHAPTER 8 ADVANCED INSTRUCTIONS General rules of using advanced instructions terms data types and formats used for advanced instructions CHAPTER 9 THROUGH CHAPTER 20 Detailed descriptions on advanced instructions grouped into 12 chapters CHAPTER 21 THROUGH CHAPTER 26 Various communication functions such as data link computer link modem mode remote I O system Devicenet slave module and LONWORKS interface module CHAPTER 27 TROUBLESHOOTING Procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble occurs while operating the OpenNet Controller APPENDIX Additional information about execution times for instructions I O delay time and OpenNet Controller type list INDEX Alphabetical listin
623. troller starts a retry Consequently if the retry interval is set to a too small value the telephone line can not be connected correctly D8211 D8311 Modem Mode Modem mode status is stored see page 23 8 When not in Status the modem mode D8211 D8311 stores 0 AT Command AT command result codes returned from modem are stored D8215 D8229 D8315 D8329 When the result code exceeds 30 bytes first 30 bytes are Result Code stored AT command string for the AT general command mode is AT Command stored Enter an AT command string to these data registers to D8230 D8244 D8330 D8344 String send by turning on M8054 M8084 AT command start internal relay and LF 0 are appended automatically D8245 D8269 D8345 D8369 Initialization String Initialization string for the originate and answer modes is stored depending on the D8201 D8301 value To change the initialization string enter a new value without changing the value of D8201 D8301 The new value is sent by turning on M8050 M8080 or M8055 M8085 AT and LF 0 are appended automatically D8270 D8299 D8370 D8399 Telephone Number Telephone number for dialing in the originate mode is stored ATD and LF 0 are appended automatically Note To change the D8209 D8309 or D8210 D8310 value enter a new value in the next scan after entering 1 to D8200 D8300 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888
624. turday dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 15 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Example Setting Calendar Clock Data This example demonstrates how to set calendar clock data using a ladder program After storing new calendar clock data into data registers D8015 through D8021 special internal relay M8020 calendar clock data write flag must be turned on to set the new calendar clock data to the CPU NSET W 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 D1 M8120 99 4 1 4 10 30 0 DO M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay When the CPU starts the NSET moves calendar clock data to data registers DO through D6 MOVW SIR DIR REP 08015 4 O MO When input 10 turns on new calendar data year month day and day of week are moved to data registers D8015 through D8018 and internal relay MO is turned on for 1 scan time MOV W SIR DIR REP When input I1 turns on new clock data hour minute and sec 1 D8019 3 ond are moved to data registers D8019 through D8021 and internal relay M1 is turned on for 1 scan time M1 When either MO or M1 is turned on calendar clock data write MO M8020 flag special internal relay M8020 is turned on to set the new cal endar clock data to the CPU M1 M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay MOVW SIR DIR REP M8125 D8008 D10 7 While the CPU is running the MOV W m
625. turned off After the telephone line is disconnected the RS232C port restores the state as before the telephone line is connected whether D8203 D8303 is set to O or 1 so that the RS232C port can be controlled by turning on a start internal relay 8050 8056 or M8080 M8086 AT General Command Mode When the modem mode is enabled data registers D8230 D8244 or D8330 D8344 are allocated to the AT command string Before turning on start internal relay M8054 M8084 for the AT general command mode store an AT command string in data registers starting with D8230 D8330 One data register stores two characters the first character at the upper byte and the second character at the lower byte in the data register Use the MACRO instruction on WindLDR to set the AT command string and execute the MACRO instruction before turning M8054 M8084 on Example of AT Command ATEOQOV1 AT and are appended at the beginning and end of the AT general command string automatically by the system program and need not be stored in data registers To program the AT command string of the example above store the command characters and ASCII value ODh for to data registers starting with 08230 23 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 23 MODEM MODE 08230 08231 08232 08233 4530 45h 0 5130 51h Q 30 0 5631h
626. u can change the year month and date Enter or select new values To change hours and minutes click in the Time box and type a new value or use the up down keys When new values are entered click the OK button to transfer the new values to the CPU Setting Calendar Clock Using a User Program Another way of setting the calendar clock data is to move the values to special data registers dedicated to the calendar and clock and to turn on special internal relay M8020 by executing a user program Data registers D8015 through D8021 do not hold the current values of the calendar clock data but hold unknown values before executing a user program Calendar Clock Special Data Registers Data Register No Data Value Read Write Updated D8008 Year current data 0 to 99 D8009 Month current data 1to 12 D8010 Day current data 1to31 D8011 Day of week current data 0 to 6 Note Read only nd pats D8012 Hour current data 0 to 23 D8013 Minute current data 0 to 59 D8014 Second current data 0 to 59 D8015 Year new data 0 to 99 D8016 Month new data 1 to 12 D8017 Day new data 1to31 D8018 Day of week new data 0 to 6 Note Write only Not updated D8019 Hour new data 0 to 23 D8020 Minute new data 0 to 59 D8021 Second new data 0 to 59 Note The day of week value is assigned for both current and new data as follows 0 Sunday Sa
627. uble word L long X X X X When bit operand such as I input output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word or integer data type or 32 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word or integer data type or 2 points double word or long data type are used When repeat is desig nated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Using Carry or Borrow Signals When the D1 destination data is out of the valid data range as a result of addition a carry occurs and special internal relay M8003 is turned on When the D1 destination data is out of the valid data range as a result of subtraction a borrow occurs and special internal relay M8003 is turned on Data Type Carry occurs when D1 is Borrow occurs when D1 is W word over 65 535 below 0 integer below 32 768 or over 32 767 below 32 768 or over 32 767 D double word over 4 294 967 295 below 0 L long below 2 147 483 648 or over 2 147 483 647 below 2 147 483 648 or over 2 147 483 647 There are three ways to program the carrying process see examples below If a carry never goes on the
628. uble word data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source S1 or destination D1 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments For source operand 52 and destination operand D2 16 points bit operand or 1 point word operand is always used with out regard to the data type Source operand S2 and destination operand D2 do not have to be designated If S2 or D2 is not designated the source or destination operand is determined by S1 or D1 without offset Make sure that the source data determined by S1 S2 and the destination data determined by D1 D2 are within the valid operand range If the derived source or destination operand is out of the valid operand range a user program execution error will result turning on special internal relay M8004 and the ERROR LED on the CPU module Example IM OVN IMOVN W SL 52 Dl D2 REP 0 C10 D10 030 020 10 4 C10 D10 NOT gt D30 D20 021 Source operand S1 and destination operand D1 determine the type of operand Source operand 52 D19 and destination operand D2 are the offset values to determin
629. ubtraction operands internal relay M8003 is used to carry or to borrow ADD Addition Data type W orl S1 S2 D1 CY HF SEDE a ied Datatype DorL 51 51 1 52 52 1 1 1 1 CY When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source ands S1 and S2 are added The result is set to destination oper and D1 and carry M8003 SUB Subtraction Data type Worl 81 82 DI BW H Sree pl a Datatype DorL S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 gt D1 D1 1 BW When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper and S2 is subtracted from 16 or 32 bit data designated by source operand S1 The result is set to destination operand D1 and borrow M8003 MUL Multiplication Data type Worl 51 52 1 0 1 1 H Muu 3 an LM Pd Datatype S1 S1 1 x 52 52 1 D1 D1 1 When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper and S1 is multiplied by 16 or 32 bit data designated by source operand 52 The result is set to 32 bit data designated by desti nation operand D1 When the result exceeds the valid range for data types D or L the ERROR LED and special internal relay M8004 user pro gram execution error are turned on DIV Division Data type W or I BINE SIR oak DAR Rre S1 S2 DI quotient D1 1 remainder Data type D or L S1 S1 1 S2 S2 1 gt D1 D1 1 quotient D1 2 D1 3 remainder When input is on 16 or 32 bit data designated by source oper and S1 is
630. uctions for transmitting and receiv ing communication to and from external devices User Communication Overview The user communication mode is used for linking the OpenNet Controller to an RS232C communication device such as a computer modem printer or barcode reader All OpenNet Controller CPU modules feature two RS232C ports to communicate with two external devices simulta neously User communication transmit and receive instructions can be programmed to match the communication protocol of the equipment to communicate with Possibility of communication using the user communication mode can be determined referring to the user communication mode specifications described below User Communication Mode Specifications Standards EIA RS232C Control Signal DSR DTR RTS Baud Rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data Bits 7 or 8 bits Parity Odd Even None Stop Bits 1 or 2 bits 10 to 2540 msec 10 msec increments or none Receive Timeout Receive timeout is disabled when 2550 msec is selected The receive timeout has an effect when using RXD1 RXD2 instructions Communication Method Start stop synchronization system half duplex Maximum Transmit Data 200 bytes Maximum Receive Data 200 bytes Connecting RS232C Equipment through RS232C Port 1 or 2 To connect equipment with an RS232C communication port to the RS232C port 1 or 2 on the OpenNet Controller use the user communication cable 2
631. ue timed value reaches 0 The current value returns to the preset value when the timer input is off Timer preset and current values can be changed using WindLDR without transferring the entire program to the CPU again From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor then select Online gt Point Write To change a timer pre set value specify the timer number with a capital T and a new preset value If the timer preset value is changed during timedown the timer remains unchanged for that cycle The change will be reflected in the next time cycle To change a timer current value specify the timer number with a small t and a new current value while the timer is in operation The change takes effect immediately e If the timer preset value is changed to 0 then the timer stops operation and the timer output is turned on immediately f the current value is changed during timedown the change becomes effective immediately imer Accuracy Timer accuracy due to software configuration depends on three factors timer input error timer counting error and timeout output error These errors are not constant but vary with the user program and other causes Timer Input Error The input status is read at the END processing and stored to the input RAM So an error occurs depending on the timing when the timer input turns on in a scan cycle The same error occurs on the normal input and the catch input The timer input error shown below does
632. ulated by the following equation Output manipulated variable S141 Manipulated variable D1 N 10000 where N is the value stored in the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 10001 through 10099 If the manipulated variable D1 is greater than or equal to 100 100 multiplied by N 10000 is outputted to the output manipulated variable S1 1 If D1 is less than or equal to 0 0 is outputted to S1 1 To enable the manipulated variable upper limit turn on the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 When 8222 is turned off the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 has no effect When S1 16 is set to a value 10001 through 10099 the output manipulated variable lower limit S1 17 is disabled 1417 Output Manipulated Variable Lower Limit The value contained in the data register designated by 1 17 specifies the lower limit of the output manipulated variable S141 Set a required value of 0 through 100 for the output manipulated variable lower limit to the data register desig nated by S1 17 When S1 17 stores a value larger than 100 the output manipulated variable lower limit is set to 100 The output manipulated variable lower limit 814 17 must be smaller than the output manipulated variable upper limit S1 16 To enable the output manipulated variable lower limit turn on the output manipulated variable limit enable control relay S242 and set the output manipulated variable upper
633. uld be used as required Valid Data Types W word integer D double word L long X X When a bit operand such as I input Q output M internal relay or R shift register is designated as the source or des tination 16 points word data type or 32 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a bit operand the quantity of operand bits increases in 16 or 32 point increments When word operand such as T timer C counter D data register or L link register is designated as the source or destination 1 point word data type or 2 points double word data type are used When repeat is designated for a word operand the quantity of operand words increases in 1 or 2 point increments Example XORW To convert optional output status among a series of 10 output points use the XORW instruction in combination with 10 internal relay points Q17 Q10 Q7 Q0 This program will invert the status of the shaded outputs at the left from on to off and those not shaded from off to on M17 M10 M7 MO Sixteen outputs QO through Q17 are assigned to 16 M8120 internal relays MO through M17 Five internal relays MO M2 M4 M6 and M10 are set by initialize pulse special internal relay M8120 When input I1 is turned on the XORW instruction is XORW W S1 S2 1 REP executed to invert the status of outputs QO Q2 Q4
634. ule Cause Action POW MNS 10 Power is not supplied to Supply 24V DC to the OpenNet Controller CPU module OFF OFF OFF the OpenNet Controller CPU module Plug in the expansion connector correctly Plug the communication connector correctly Green Red Green ft pa Aaah Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire ON ON ON DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Make sure that the network is not affected by noise Make sure that the master is operating Green Plug in the communication connector correctly Green Red ON or Data from the master ON ON Red does not arrive Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire Flash DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Make sure that the network is not affected by noise Make sure that the settings for the master are correct Make sure that the slave is not stopped by power down or EL other causes if automatic recovery is enabled at the master Green Green Green Communication with communication resumes when power is restored at the slave the master is not 7 oan ON Flash ON established Plug in the communication connector correctly Make sure that network wiring is correct in the entire DeviceNet network without short circuit or disconnection Supply 11 25V DC to the DeviceNet power line OpenNet Controller link registers cannot receive data from the network correctly Status LEDs on
635. unication mode for the RS232C ports 1 and 2 This button is useful when you want to change the communication mode without turning power off IMPORTANT Do not power up while the communication enable button is depressed and do not press the button unless it is necessary to do so 17 2 OPENNET CONTROLLER UsER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Setting Communication Parameters Using WindLDR When using the user communication function to communicate with an external RS232C device set the communication parameters for the OpenNet Controller to match those of the external device Note Since communication parameters in the Function Area Settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings 1 Select Configure from the WindLDR menu bar then select Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Click the Comm Port tab OpenNet Function Area Setting x Module ID Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bu lt gt Data Link Port RS485 Enable Communication Format Selection Input Number Comm Param Port 1 Communication Mode Setting RS232C Iv Enable Communication Format Selection Input Number 7 d Port 2 Communication Mode Setting RS232C Enable Communication Format Selection
636. urn on 805 1 8081 to start with the ATZ command followed by the dial command When answering an incoming call turn on M8055 M8085 to send the initialization string and ATZ command If the initialization string has been stored in the non volatile memory of the modem turn on M8056 M8086 to send the ATZ command only 5 Transmit or receive communication through the modem 6 Turn on start internal relay M8053 M8083 to disconnect the telephone line Sample Program for Modem Originate Mode This program demonstrates a user program for the modem originate mode to move values to data registers assigned to the modem mode at RS232C port 1 initialize the modem dial the telephone number and disconnect the telephone line While the telephone line is connected user communication instruction TXD1 sends a character string Connect M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay instructions store values to data registers for the modem mode at RS232C port 1 1 gt 08200 to enable the modem mode for port 1 D8201 to select a predetermined initialization string 1 08203 to enable user protocol after telephone line is connected MACRO sets a dial command ATDT123 CR 1L MACRO S1 D1 D2 M8120 5 08270 08272 1 5431h gt 08270 to designate touch tone and tele phone number 23 3233h 08271 to designate telephone number ODO0h D8272 to enter CR at the end of the telephone
637. ursday ON 32 0 0 M2 S1 32 specifies Friday WKCMP 1 2 D1 uus 3 3906 2 M2 WKCMP ON turns on M2 at 0 00 a m on Friday WKCMP OFF turns off M2 at 19 00 on Friday MO While MO M1 or M2 is on output QO is turned on M1 M2 15 6 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 15 WEEK PROGRAMMER INSTRUCTIONS Setting Calendar Clock Using WindLDR Before using the week programmer instructions for the first time the internal calendar clock must be set using WindLDR or executing a user program to transfer correct calendar clock data to special data registers allocated to the calendar clock Once the calendar clock data is stored the data is held by the backup battery while the CPU power is turned off 1 2 Select Online from the WindLDR menu bar then select Monitor The screen display changes to the monitor window From the Online menu select PLC Status The OpenNet PLC Status dialog box is displayed The current calendar clock data is read out from the OpenNet Controller CPU and displayed in the Calendar box Click the Change button in the Calendar box The Set Calendar and Time dialog box comes up with the date and time values read from the computer internal clock Set Calendar and Time x Calendar EEE v OK Time 10 24 AM Click the Down Arrow button on the right of Calendar then the calendar is displayed where yo
638. ut is off When the preset or current value is changed during counter operation the change becomes effective immediately Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS CUD Up Down Selection Reversible Counter The up down selection reversible counter CUD has a selection input to switch the up down gate so that three inputs are required The circuit for an up down selection reversible counter must be programmed in the following order preset input pulse input up down selection input the CUD instruction and a counter number CO through C255 followed by a counter preset value from 0 to 65535 The preset value can be designated using a decimal constant or a data register When a data register is used the data of the data register becomes the preset value e The same counter number cannot be programmed more than once Ladder Diagram Preset Input Program List Instruction The preset input must be turned on ini tially so that the current value returns to the preset value The preset input must be turned off before counting may begin The up mode is selected when the up down selection input is on The down mode is selected when the up down selection input is off When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be programmed immediately above and below the CUD instruction To program other instructions start a new rung
639. value assigned to D21 is 5000 194 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS Example Overlapping Coordinates In this example the XYFS instruction sets up three coordinate points which define two different linear relationships between X and Y The three points are X0 YO 0 100 X1 Y1 100 0 and X2 Y2 300 100 The two line segments define overlapping coordinates for X That is for each value of Y within the designated range there would be two X values assigned 51 X0 YO X1 Y1 X2 Y2 M8120 is the initialize pulse special 0 0 100 100 0 300 100 internal relay At startup XYFS specifies three points CVXTY converts the value in C10 and S1 S2 S1 stores the result in D90 0 D35 pee CVYTX converts the value in D95 and stores the result in D30 X0 YO X2 Y2 0 100 300 100 D30 100 C10 300 X 60 250 The first line segment defines the following relationship for X to Y conversion Y X 100 The second line segment defines another relationship for X to Y conversion 1 5 5X 50 For X to Y conversion each value of X has only one corresponding value for Y If the current value of counter C10 is 250 the value assigned to D90 is 75 For Y to X conversion the XYFS instruction assigns two possible values of X for each value of Y The relationship defined by the firs
640. ve Station 10 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8152 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 11 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8153 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 12 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8154 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 13 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8155 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 14 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8156 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 15 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8157 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 16 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8160 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 17 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8161 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 18 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8162 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 19 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8163 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 20 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8164 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 21 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8165 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 22 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8166 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 23 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8167 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 24 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8170 Data Link Separate Refresh Slave Station 25 Comm Completion Relay Operating Cleared M8171 Data Link Separate Refresh
641. ve of the module on the DIN rail Press the modules towards the DIN rail and push in the clamps as shown on the right Groove 3 Use BNL6 mounting clips on both sides of the OpenNet Controller modules to prevent moving sideways 35 mm wide DIN Rail Clamp Removing from DIN Rail 1 Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot in the clamp 2 Pull out the clamps from the modules 35 mm wide DIN Rail 3 Turn the OpenNet Controller modules bottom out dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 3 3 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING Installation in Control Panel The OpenNet Controller modules are designed for installation in equipment Do not install the OpenNet Controller mod ules outside equipment The environment for using the OpenNet Controller is Pollution degree 2 Use the OpenNet Controller in environments of pollution degree 2 according to IEC 60664 1 When installing the OpenNet Controller modules in a control panel take the convenience of operation and maintenance and resistance against environments into consideration Front Panel 20 mm minimum 80 mm minimum goo0o0000000000000000000 UL a a n o o o o a a a a a a a a n o o D
642. ve station mode Slave station number 1 Slave station number 2 Master Station Slave Station 1 Slave Station 2 35 12 13 PF3S SIF4 PF3S SIF4 21 12 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 22 COMPUTER LINK COMMUNICATION Introduction When the OpenNet Controller is connected to a computer operating status and I O status can be monitored on the com puter data in the CPU can be monitored or updated and user programs can be downloaded and uploaded The OpenNet Controller can also be started or stopped from the computer A maximum of 32 OpenNet Controller CPUs can be con nected to one computer in the 1 N computer link system This chapter describes the 1 N computer link system For the 1 1 computer link system see page 4 1 Computer Link System Setup 1 N Computer Link System To set up a 1 N communication computer link system connect the RS232C RS485 converter to the RS485 terminals A B and G on every OpenNet Controller CPU module using a shielded twisted pair cable as shown below The total length of the cable for the computer link system can be extended up to 200 meters 656 feet Connect the RS232C port on the computer to the RS232C RS485 converter using the RS232C cable HD9Z C52 The RS232C cable has a D sub 9 pin female connector for connection with a compute
643. ver are made by and are available from Phoenix Contact Type numbers of Phoenix Contact ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are listed below When ordering these products from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and quantity listed below DeviceNet slave modules are connected to the network using special DeviceNet thick or thin cables each cable consisting of three different sizes of wires listed below Ferrule Order No Applicable Wire Size For 1 wire connection For 2 wire connection Pcs Pkt mm AWG Phoenix Type Order No Phoenix Type Order No 0 25 24 Al 0 25 8 YE 32 00 852 100 0 5 20 Al 0 5 8 WH 3200014 AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH 3200933 100 0 75 18 Al 0 75 8 3200519 AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 32 00 807 100 1 0 18 Al 1 8 RD 32 00 03 0 AI TWIN 2 x1 8 RD 32 00 810 100 1 5 16 Al 1 5 8 BK 32 00 04 3 AI TWIN 2 x 1 5 8 BK 3200823 100 2 5 14 Al 2 5 8 BU 32 00 52 2 100 For 1 wire Connection E Dimension For 2 wire connection Dimension Al 0 25 8 YE 4 5mm AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH Al 0 5 8 WH AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 7 0 mm i Al 0 75 8 GY AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD Mon UT AISR 60mm 2 1 58 8 0 mm _ Al 1 5 8 BK B 8 0 mm Al 2 5 8 BU Crimping Tool and Screwdriver Order No Tool Name Phoenix Type Pcs Pkt Crimping Tool CRIMPFOX UD 6 1204436 1 Screwdriver SZS 0 6 x2 5 1205040 10 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412
644. vice Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level Logical Device No High byte stores 0 Bus Segment No Position Length Code High byte stores 0 Note ID Code High byte stores 0 Device Level OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL High byte stores 0 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email
645. when starting with the 1st byte of the data BCC Calculation Start Position The start position for the BCC calculation can be specified from the first byte through the 15th byte The BCC is calculated for the range starting at the designated position up to the byte immediately before the BCC of the transmit data Example Transmit data consists of 17 bytes plus 2 BCC digits 1 Calculation start position 1 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits 2 Calculation start position 2 Ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 15th 16th 17th 18th 19th BCC calculation range BCC 2 digits BCC Calculation Formula BCC calculation formula can be selected from XOR exclusive OR or ADD addition operation Example Conversion results of transmit data consist of 41h 42h 43h 44h and 45h ASCII data A B C D E 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 1 BCC calculation formula 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 41h 2 BCC calculation formula ADD 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 14Fh 4Fh Only the last 1 or 2 digits are used as BCC 17 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Conversion Type The BCC calculation result can be converted or not according to the designated conversion type as described below Example
646. work system setup 26 3 LRET 18 3 M MAC ID 25 6 maintain outputs while CPU stopped M8011 6 9 maintaining catch input 5 8 maintenance mode 2 2 17 2 manipulated variable 20 13 mapping 24 5 master and slave station numbers 21 2 control instruction 7 25 MCS and MCR instructions 7 25 media access control identifier 25 6 memory backup error run stop selection 5 2 card 2 6 5 19 connector 2 2 eject button 2 2 map 26 14 message service 26 13 modem cable 1C 23 1 initialization string selection 23 3 mode 23 1 status 23 3 data register 23 8 modifying application program 26 13 module ID selection 5 5 specifications 2 1 monitor operation 4 7 monitoring PLC status 22 2 mounting direction 3 4 on DIN rail 3 3 MOV 9 1 move 9 1 move not 9 5 MOVN 9 5 MUL 11 1 multiple usage of MCS instructions 7 26 INDEX multiplication 11 1 N data repeat set 9 10 set 9 9 NEG 12 5 negate 12 5 network configuration information 26 2 management 26 2 26 12 variables 26 2 26 9 26 23 Neuron chip 26 2 pins 26 13 26 15 no operation 8 6 node address 24 4 25 6 information remote I O 24 6 number 24 4 NOP 8 6 normal operating conditions 2 4 NRS 9 10 NSET 9 9 NV 26 2 on line mode protocol selection 23 3 opcode 8 3 open bus tab 24 13 network communication system 1 3 system interconnection OSI 26 2 opennet interface module A 4 operand allocation numbers 6 2 for data link master station 6 5 for data link slave station 6 5 for functi
647. ws of the network interface connector to a recommended torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m To prevent electrical shocks or communication error due to noises connect the FG terminal to a proper ground using a grounding wire of 011015 AWG22 UL1007 AWG18 grounding resistance 1000 maximum Do not connect the grounding wire in common with the grounding wire of motor equipment Ferrules Crimping Tool and Screwdriver for Phoenix Terminal Blocks The screw terminal block of the network interface connector can be wired with or without using ferrules on the end of the cable Applicable ferrules for the terminal block and crimping tool for the ferrules are listed below Use a screwdriver to tighten the screw terminals on the LONWORKS interface module Ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are made by and available from Phoenix Contact Type numbers of Phoenix Contact ferrules crimping tool and screwdriver are listed below When ordering these products from Phoenix Contact specify the Order No and quantity listed below Ferrule Order No Applicable Wire Size For 1 wire connection For 2 wire connection Pcs Pkt Cs mm AWG Phoenix Type Order No Phoenix Type Order No 0 25 24 Al 0 25 8 YE 3200852 100 0 5 20 Al 0 5 8 WH 3200014 AI TWIN 2 x 0 5 8 WH 32 00 93 3 100 0 75 18 Al 0 75 8 GY 3200519 AI TWIN 2 x 0 75 8 GY 3200807 100 1 0 18 Al 1 8 RD 3200030 AI TWIN 2 x 1 8 RD 32
648. x 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 19 COORDINATE CONVERSION INSTRUCTIONS 19 8 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 20 PID INSTRUCTION Introduction P The PID instruction implements a PID proportional integral and derivative algorithm with built in auto tuning to deter mine PID parameters such as proportional gain integral time derivative time and control action automatically The PID instruction is primarily designed for use with an analog I O module to read analog input data and turns on and off a desig nated output to perform PID control in applications such as temperature control described in the application example on page 20 14 In addition when the output manipulated variable is converted the PID instruction can also generate an ana log output using an analog I O module UN Warning e Special technical knowledge about the PID control is required to use the PID function of the OpenNet Controller Use of the PID function without understanding the PID control may cause the OpenNet Controller to perform unexpected operation resulting in disorder of the control sys tem damage or accidents e When using the PID instruction for feedback control emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the OpenNet Controller If such a circuit is configured inside the OpenNet Controller failure
649. x appears Rung 01 1 3 Enter I0 in the Tag Name field and click OK Normally Open x Type Tag Name E po pen Allocation C Normally Closed Number Comment gc NO contact of input 10 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line Next program the ANDN instruction by inserting a NC contact of input 4 Click the Normally Closed contact icon Wf The mouse pointer is indicated with the name of the icon Normally Closed 5 Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact and click the left mouse button The Normally Closed dialog box appears 6 Enter Il in the Tag Name field and click OK A NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the second column of the first ladder line At the end of the first ladder line program the OUT instruction by inserting a NO coil of output QO 7 Click the Output coil icon The mouse pointer is indicated with the name of the icon Output 8 Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil and click the left mouse button The Output dialog box appears 9 Enter Q0 in the Tag Name field and click OK A NO output coil of output QO is programmed in the third column of the first ladder line This completes programming for rung 1 Is O43 cosa E81 254 Rung 01
650. xchanges I O data through the link registers allocated to each slave station node You can also configure the remote I O system setup in the master module When the quantity of nodes is specified the CPU communicates with slave stations as many as specified in the Function Area Settings If the configuration in the Func tion Area Settings differs from the actual remote I O system setup the CPU does not start the remote I O communication For example when any of the slave stations are removed or added or the INTERBUS cable is disconnected the remote I O communication is halted To configure the remote I O master module make settings in the Function Area Settings for the user program Since these settings relate to the user program the user program must be downloaded to the OpenNet Controller after changing any of these settings Programming WindLDR 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configure gt Function Area Settings The Function Area Setting dialog box appears 2 Select the Open Bus tab Filter Catch Data Link Comm Port Open Bus Others gt Configure Communication Master Module Check Box Quantity of Nodes Connected 1 x lt Quantity of Nodes Connected 1 through 32 Slave Station Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes Slave Station Module Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Data Quantity Bytes The remote system does not require this setting When us
651. xecuted in each scan while input is on a pulse input from a SOTU SOTD instruction should be used as required Once the input to the RXD instruction is turned on the RXD is activated and ready for receiving incoming communica tion even after the input is turned off When the RXD completes data receiving the RXD is deactivated if the input to the RXD is off Or if the input is on the RXD is made ready for receiving another communication M8022 M8023 deacti vate all RXD instructions waiting for incoming communication User Communication Receive Instruction Dialog Box in WindLDR Type 51 D1 D2 C TXD Port 1 s c Insert Delete Edit dee OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 17 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 17 USER COMMUNICATION INSTRUCTIONS Selections and Operands in Receive Instruction Dialog Box Type TXD Transmit instruction RXD Receive instruction Port Port 1 Receive user communication through RS232C port 1 RXD1 Port 2 Receive user communication through RS232C port 2 RXD2 Enter the receive format in this area S1 Source 1 The receive format can include a start delimiter data register to store incoming data end delimiter BCC and skip D1 Destination 1 Receive completion output can be an output or internal relay D2 Destination 2 Receive status register can be data register DO through D7998 The next d
652. y any input condition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 7 BASIC INSTRUCTIONS Reverse Shift Register SFRN For reverse shifting use the SFRN instruction When SFRN instructions are programmed two addresses are always required The SFRN instructions are entered followed by a shift register number selected from appropriate operand num bers The shift register number corresponds to the lowest bit number in a string The number of bits is the second required address after the SFRN instructions The SFRN instruction requires three inputs The reverse shift register circuit must be programmed in the following order reset input pulse input data input and the SFRN instruction followed by the last bit and the number of bits Ladder Diagram Last Bit Program List Reset Rung 1 SFRN R20 Prgm Adrs Instruction 10 7 Last Bit RO to R255 of Bits of Bits 1 to 256 2 11 3 4 5 12 E 7 Rung 2 8 R21 Q1 9 10 11 R23 Q2 R25 Q3 The last bit status output can be programmed directly after the SFRN instruction In this exam UN Caution ple the status of bit R20 is read to output QO When using WindLDR Ver 3 any instruction cannot be Each bit can be loaded using the LOD R instruc programmed immediately above and below the SFRN tions instruction To program other instructions start a new rung If an instruction is entered above or below the For detai
653. y cause damage to the modules When using analog input or output modules first set the rotary switch on the side of the module to the desired input output mode before assembling the module The rotary switch cannot be changed after the module has been assembled For the operation modes of analog input and out put modules see pages 2 28 and 2 31 The following example demonstrates the procedure for assembling a CPU module and an I O module together 1 When assembling an analog input or output module set the rotary switch to select the desired operation mode Use a small flat screwdriver to turn the rotary switch 2 Place the CPU module and I O module side by side Put the expansion connectors together for easy alignment 3 With the expansion connectors aligned correctly press the CPU module and I O module together until the latches click to attach the modules together firmly 4 Press the end plate to each side of the module assembly A pair of end plates are supplied with each CPU module 580888858 nonna 89999909 99999999 559900099 80009999 580005990 999990 f 79 32 OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 3 INSTALLATION AND WIRING
654. ys 3 The output is turned on at 11 00 a m on Friday through Sunday and is turned off at 2 00 a m on the following day 2 00 11 00 2 00 11 00 2 00 11 00 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat WKCMP 51 S2 S3 DI 8125 is the in operation output special internal relay N 0 99 1100 0 00 S1 99 specifies Friday through Monday WKCMP 51 52 53 D1 WKCMP ON turns on output QO at 11 00 a m on Friday OFF 99 200 0 90 through Sunday S1 Same constant value to designate consecutive days WKCMP OFF turns off output QO at 2 00 a m on the next day S2 Constant values ON time gt OFF time 53 Same constant value 0 D1 Same operand Example Interval comparison with ON OFF times extending over three days To keep the output on for more than two days use the ICMP 2 interval compare greater than or equal to instruction in combination with the WKCMP ON OFF instructions This example turns on the output at 8 00 a m on Monday and turn it off at 7 00 p m on Friday 8 00 19 00 Output 00 WKCMP 51 52 53 DI M8125 is the in operation output special internal relay m8125 ON 6 800 0 MO S1 6 specifies Monday and Tuesday WKCMP S1 52 53 D1 WKCMP ON turns on at 8 00 a m on Monday OFF 6 0 0 MO WKCMP OFF turns off MO at 0 00 a m on Tuesday ICM Pee 2 D E 1 e a D8011 contains the current day of week data S1 4 specifies Thursday S3 2 specifies Tuesday See page 15 7 remains WKCMP 51 52 53 01 on from Tuesday through Th
655. ys starting with internal relay M100 The switches are assigned to internal relays as shown below 13 4 15 swo3 4 swo4 4 SW05 4 Output x Output Qo Q0 4 514 A swis 4 01 26 SW24 SW25 i ZA 02 92 i SW34 A 5W35 4 z t A a sw4s A 04 ii Note For the circuit above a transistor sink output module must be used When using a transistor protect source output module reverse the direction of diodes Diode rating is Average rectified current gt 100 mA Reverse voltage gt 100V DC Use switches with superior contact reliability Inputs Outputs 10 11 12 13 14 15 00 M100 M101 M102 M103 M104 M105 51 00 510 01 SW02 SW03 SW04 SW05 01 106 107 M110 M111 M112 M113 SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 Q2 M114 M115 M116 M117 M120 M121 SW20 SW21 SW22 SW23 SW24 SW25 Q3 M122 M123 M124 M125 M126 M127 SW30 SW31 SW32 SW33 SW34 SW35 Q4 M130 M131 M132 M133 M134 M135 SW40 SW41 SW42 SW43 SW44 SW45 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax OPENNET CONTROLLER USER S MANUAL 888 723 4773 Web www clrwtr com Email info clrwtr com 5 SPECIAL FUNCTIONS User Program Protection The user program in the OpenNet Controller CPU module can be protected from reading writing or both using the Func tion Area Settings in WindLDR Warning When proceeding with the following steps

IDEC ONC Series OpenNet Controller User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents